diff options
Diffstat (limited to '21358.txt')
| -rw-r--r-- | 21358.txt | 17707 |
1 files changed, 17707 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/21358.txt b/21358.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..79f9775 --- /dev/null +++ b/21358.txt @@ -0,0 +1,17707 @@ +The Project Gutenberg EBook of The Ocean Cat's Paw, by George Manville Fenn + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: The Ocean Cat's Paw + The Story of a Strange Cruise + +Author: George Manville Fenn + +Illustrator: W.S. Stacey + +Release Date: May 8, 2007 [EBook #21358] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ASCII + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE OCEAN CAT'S PAW *** + + + + +Produced by Nick Hodson of London, England + + + + +The Ocean Cat's Paw, the Story of a Strange Cruise, By George Manville +Fenn. + +________________________________________________________________________ + +Here we have a full-length book by an excellent author at the very top +of his powers. The time is set at the end of the Napoleonic War, and +continues into the ensuing peace. + +The young hero is first found fishing in a Dartmoor stream, when he is +interrupted by the arrival of a young Frenchman, who, it turns out, has +just escaped from Dartmoor, where the prisoners-of-war were being kept. +Rodd helps him to hide from pursuit. + +Rodd is living with his uncle, who is a doctor, but who also is a +researcher in Natural History. He receives a Government grant to buy a +ship and travel about in it collecting specimens. On the first trip the +weather turns nasty and they have to take shelter in a French port. + +Later in the voyage they meet up with a strange brig, which they realise +they had seen while in France. But she is in difficulty, having been +holed below the waterline in an engagement. At this point they discover +that her officers include the boy we met in Chapter One, and his father, +the Count. The hole is repaired by the skill of the British seamen. + +There's lots more to the story, and we won't spoil it for you, but we do +full-heartedly recommend it to you. The problem in transcribing the +book was tearing oneself away from it, for meals, rest, and other +duties. + +________________________________________________________________________ + +THE OCEAN CAT'S PAW, THE STORY OF A STRANGE CRUISE, BY GEORGE MANVILLE +FENN. + + + +CHAPTER ONE. + +RODD THE PICKLE. + +"Here's another, uncle." + +This was shouted cheerily, and the reply thereto was a low muttering, +ending with a grunt. + +It was a glorious day on Dartmoor, high up in the wildest part amongst +the rugged tors, where a bright little river came flashing and sparkling +along, and sending the bright beams of the sun in every direction from +the disturbed water, as an eager-looking boy busily played the trout he +had hooked, one which darted here and there in its wild rush for +freedom, but all in vain, for after its little mad career it was safely +brought to bank, and landed. There was no need to use the light net +which hung diagonally and unnecessarily across its owner's back, for the +glittering little speckled trout was only about the size of a small +dace, though it fought and kicked as hardily as if it had weighed a +pound, and indulged in a series of active leaps as it was slipped +through the hole in the lid of a creel, to drop into companionship with +half-a-score of its fellows, which welcomed the new prisoner with a +number of leaps almost as wild as its own. + +The utterer of the grunt, a stoutly-built man who might have been of any +age, though he could not have been very young, judging from his bristly +greyish whiskers, was also busily occupied, but in a calmer, more +deliberate way. + +He had no creel slung from his shoulder, but a coarse clean wallet that +was rather bulgy, its appearance suggesting that it was carried because +it contained something to eat, while its owner held in one hand, slung +by a stoutish lanyard, a big, wide-mouthed glass bottle half full of +water, and in the other hand a little yellow canvas net attached to a +brass ring at the end of a stick, the sort of implement that little boys +use when bound upon the chase and capture of the mighty "tittlebat." +And as his younger companion shouted and landed his little mountain +trout, the net was being carefully passed under water, drawn out and +emptied upon the fine lawn-like grass, and what looked like a little +scrap of opalescent jelly was popped into the wide-mouthed bottle. + +"You got one too, uncle?" shouted the boy, who was higher up the stream. + +"Yes; some very nice specimens down here. Are you getting plenty of +sport, Rodd?" + +"Yes, uncle," replied the boy, who was carefully examining his tiny +artificial gnat before beginning to whip the stream again. "They are +rising famously; but they are awfully small. I shall get a dish, +though, for supper." + +"Uncle," as he was called, grunted again, and went on searching amongst +the water-weeds with his net, his tendency being with the stream, while +the boy, who did not scruple about stepping into the shallows from time +to time, went on whipping away upward towards where one of the tors rose +in a chaotic mass of broken, lichen-covered, fragmentary granite, +apparently hiding in the distance the source of the little bubbling and +sparkling stream. + +Sometimes, as the boy struck in unison with the rise, he missed his +fish, at others he hooked and held it till it broke away, and then again +he transferred another to his creel, as intent upon his sport as his +uncle was upon his pursuit, but still adding and adding to the contents +of the creel for quite an hour. Then, in an interval when the fish had +ceased to rise, the boy began to look downward, finding to his surprise +that he was quite alone and close up to the towering mass of time-worn +granite, many of whose blocks sparkled in the summer sun with crystals +of quartz, and specks of hornblende, and were rendered creamy by the +abundant felspar which held the grains together in a mass. + +"I wonder what's become of Uncle Paul," muttered the boy. "Have I lost +him, or has he lost me? What stuff! One's only got to go down the +stream, and he's sure to be there somewhere, dipping for his +what-do-you-call-'ems--hydras and germs and buds, and the rest of them. +But oh, what a jolly morning it is, and what a jolly place Dartmoor is +now the sun shines! Not very jolly yesterday, though, when the wind was +sweeping the rain across in clouds and you couldn't see the tops of the +tors for the mist. Oh, but it is beautiful to-day. I do feel jolly!" + +The boy let his light tapering rod fall into the hollow of his arm, +swung round his creel to the front, and, raising the lid, peered down at +his speckled prizes lying upon a bed of newly-picked bracken fronds. + +"Why, there must be fifty," he cried. "There, I won't stop to count. +I'll catch a few more, and guess at fifty. That'll be enough for a nice +lot for tea and some more for to-morrow morning's breakfast. Uncle Paul +does enjoy a dish of trout. Humph! So do I. I suppose it's this +beautiful fresh air up among the tors, and the tramping. It was a good +long way up here from the cottage. I suppose it's that makes me feel so +jolly hungry. Oh, look at that now! Uncle would carry the wallet, and +he's got all the sandwiches. Never mind; I'll catch a few more of the +little beauties, and then toddle back to meet him." + +But the boy did not begin to fish directly, but stood gazing round at +the glorious prospect of hill and dale and miniature mountain, here grey +and sparkling, there flushed as if with the golden sheen of blossoming +furze, while the lower slopes were of the magnificent purple of the +abundant heath. + +"Beautiful!" cried the boy ecstatically. "I am glad that we came up +here to stay. So is dear old uncle. He's revelling in the specimens he +gets, and we shall have another jolly night with the microscope. He'll +give me a lecture upon all the little Latin beggars he pops into his +bottle, and another for being so stupid in not recollecting all their +cranky names. Never mind; it is jolly. Pity it isn't later, for then +there'd be plenty of blackberries and whorts. I dare say there'd be +lots of the little tiny button mushrooms, too, in the lower parts among +the soft grass. But what's the use of grumbling? Uncle says that I am +never satisfied, and that I am always restless, and I suppose it's +because I am a boy. Well, I can't help being a boy," he mused +thoughtfully. "I might have been a girl. Well, girls are restless too. +I say, what's that?" + +He shaded his eyes again and gazed at a speck of something that looked +bright scarlet in the distance, and then not very far away he made out +another, and again another speck or blotch of bright red. "Now, I +wonder what's growing there," muttered the boy. "I don't remember +anything scarlet growing and blowing. Poppies? No, I don't think they +are poppies. They are at the edges of the cornfields, and there are no +cornfields up here." + +He fixed his eyes more intently upon the scarlet specks, and then burst +out laughing. + +"Well, they are not poppies," he said aloud. "Poppies don't move, and +those are moving, sure enough. There, one of them has gone behind that +block of stone. Pooh, how stupid! Why, of course!" + +He jerked himself round to look in another direction, so sharply that +his creel swung out for a moment from the strap, and came back against +his hip with a bang, as he stood with his back to the sun, gazing at a +distant grey, gloomy-looking pile of stone building, and then nodded his +head with satisfaction. + +"Poppies, indeed! My grandmother! That's what they are. Soldiers from +over yonder. Part of the guard from the great prison, I suppose. Oh, +poor beggars! How miserable, when you come to think of it--shut up +yonder in that great gloomy place, for I don't suppose they let them +come out much without soldiers to watch them--and all for doing nothing. +Doing nothing! Mustn't say that, though, before Uncle Paul, or he'll +go into a rage and begin preaching about Bony and the war, and going on +about the French. Hullo!" + +The boy started, for there was a dull thud, apparently from the prison, +miles away, followed by a loud echo which seemed to come from close at +hand, making him turn again as if to look for the spot from which it +came, and seeing it too, for the report of the gun had as it were struck +against the face of the tor above him, and then glanced off to strike +elsewhere. + +"How queer echoes are!" he muttered. "Yes, and how queer I feel--all +hollow. That's made me think about it. I suppose that means twelve or +one o'clock dinner-time. Oh, how stupid to go right away from uncle +like this! I wish he'd come. But I won't go till I have made my fifty +trout." + +Turning his attention now to the stream, he began whipping away again, +and finding that the little trout were rising as well as ever, with the +result that Rodney Harding once more forgot everything else in his +pursuit and went on up-stream nearer and nearer to the great tor, till +at last he found himself in a little hollow amongst the rocks where the +river had widened into a pool, hollowed out as it were at the base of a +great cliff. + +"Why, this is the end of it," he said, pausing to look round and upward +at the towering pile of rocks. "No, it isn't. It must be the +beginning--the source, I suppose they call it. Yes, the stream begins +here, comes right from under that cliff. Why, it's like a little cave +out of which the water streams." + +He stopped short and threw his fly once or twice without effect, and +then, moved by curiosity, waded into the shallow rippling water, which +rose a little way above his boots, but as it began to invade his +trousers he rolled them up to his knees, before wading onward till he +was stopped by the piled-up cliff face where the water came gliding out +and rippled about his legs. + +"Why, it ought to be quite cold," he muttered, "instead of which it is +warm." + +Then, standing up his rod so that the top rested among the stones, he +stooped down, bending nearly double before he could pass in beneath a +rough stony natural arch and slowly force his way along a narrow passage +for a few feet, before stopping short where the water nearly reached his +knees. + +"Oh, I say! I am not going to break my back short off at the hips by +squeezing in here," he grumbled. "Besides, it's all dark; and what's +the good? Here, I know! This isn't the source. This tor is only a +piled-up heap of stones, and I dare say if I go round I shall find the +little river coming in on the other side, and this is where it comes +out. Well, let it. Here, I want my lunch." + +He made his way back into the sunshine where all was bright and clear +again, and, taking his rod, stepped out to the edge of the pool, where +the dry sand felt pleasant and comfortable to his feet, and there he +went on fishing again with more or less success, till he passed out of +the little amphitheatre to where the rocks fell away on either side, +half hidden by the heath and furze. + +"Must have got fifty by this time," muttered the boy. "Now just one +more to make sure, and then I'll be off, and--Ugh! Who are you? How +you made me jump!" + +The Ocean Cat's Paw--by George Manville Fenn + + + +CHAPTER TWO. + +AFTER FRENCH PRISONERS. + +There was some reason in Rodney Harding's words, for as he turned from +the little river he had come suddenly face to face with a thin +gaunt-looking lad of about his own age, very shabbily dressed and almost +ragged, who was gazing at him fiercely, and stood with one hand as if +about to strike. Recovering himself on the instant, Rodney, obeying his +first impulse, began to loosen the bottom joint of his rod ready to use +it as a weapon--a defence against the expected attack--but in an instant +the strange new-comer dropped his hand to his side, turned quickly away +to look outward across the moor, and then cried wildly, his voice +sounding strange of accent, and husky as if from exhaustion-- + +"No, no, don't hit! I am so weak and so helpless. Help me. Tell me, +which way can I go? They are close after me, and I can run no farther. +Help!" + +The poor wild-looking creature ended by sinking upon his knees amongst +the heath, and raising his hands with a piteous gesture, while his +imploring looks were quite sufficient to move the young fisherman's +heart. + +"Why, who are you?" he cried. "You are not a beggar." + +"No, no! I confess. Oh, _mon ami_--I beg your pardon--sir! I forgot. +I confess everything. It was for liberty; we were escaping, but the +guard--the soldiers! They have been hunting us down like dogs." + +"A French prisoner?" cried the boy. + +"Ah, _oui_--yes, monsieur. It is my misfortune. But the soldiers. We +have been separated." + +"Who's `we'?" said Rodney sharply. + +"My father and I. I don't know which way he has gone. They have taken +him perhaps, and now it is no use; I may as well give up, for I can go +no farther." + +He sank sideways amongst the heath and fern. + +Rodd looked at him in horror, for the poor fellow seemed as if he was +about to faint with weakness and misery, while he kept giving utterance +to hysterical gasps as he was plainly enough struggling hard to avoid +bursting into a passion of weak girlish tears. + +"Here, I say, don't do that!" cried Rodd, stooping and catching him by +the arm to shake him violently. "You don't know that the soldiers have +caught your father." + +"No, but I feel sure that they must have done so," cried the poor +fellow, rising a little and gazing wildly in the speaker's eyes, while +Rodd's energy seemed to galvanise him into action. + +"Well, suppose they have? They'd only take him back into the prison +again, would they?" + +"I--I don't know," faltered the lad. "I heard firing, and they may have +shot him down and taken him." + +"Yes--may, may, may!" cried Rodd angrily. "But I don't believe our +soldiers would be such brutes. It's only Frenchmen that do such things +as that." + +"What!" cried the lad, struggling to his feet. "How dare you speak so +of our brave fellows! I appealed to you for help, and you insult me. +Do you think if you were in France and flying for your life with your +father--" + +"Haven't got one," said Rodd shortly. "Died before I was born." + +"Do you think then that if you alone had appealed to me for help I would +have treated a poor escaping prisoner like this?" + +"Oh, come, I say, don't go on like that. Any one would think you were a +great girl. How can I help you? I daren't. What would my uncle say if +he knew I'd helped a French prisoner to escape from his guards? You +shouldn't, you know. It isn't right nor fair. Just because you have +got into trouble, that's no reason why you should drag another fellow +down too. Look here, what are you running away for?" + +"Why?" cried the lad bitterly. "Because I am a prisoner, and I wanted +to see my poor father free." + +"Well, look here," said Rodd huskily; "I am very sorry, you know, and +I'd help you if I could, but it's against the law, and--I say! Quick! +Don't speak aloud. I can hear some one coming. Yes, it's the soldiers, +I think." + +"Oh!" cried the French lad wildly, and he gazed about him with every +nerve quivering, his whole aspect being that of some hunted beast with +the dogs close upon his track. + +"Don't get up," cried Rodd. "I tell you, I mustn't help you; it's +against the law; but if I were in your fix I know what I should do. Not +afraid of the water, are you?" + +"What, swim for my life? Nonsense! In a stream like this!" + +"No, no. Wade into that hole opposite yonder, and hide there till the +soldiers are gone." + +"But they'd be sure to look there." + +"Not they! They'd be afraid of spoiling their breeches and gaiters and +washing out the pipe-clay." + +"Ready for you to betray me to them," whispered the lad bitterly. "No; +I'll surrender like a man." + +"Oh!" growled Rodd, between his teeth. "If you weren't such a poor, +weak, helpless-looking chap I'd hit you on the nose. How dare you speak +to me like that?" + +He raised his hand as if to strike, but there was a ring in his words +which had thrilled the fugitive, who to Rodd's astonishment caught the +hand in his, and quick as thought pressed it to his lips, and then +dashed into the water and splashed his way to the mouth of the hole. +The next moment the disturbed stream was the only trace left, for the +fugitive had disappeared. + +The young fisher stood gazing blankly at the low dark mouth of the hole, +listening with every nerve on the strain for some sound from the +hiding-place to strike his ear; but there was none. From behind, +though, there came a loud voice, shouting-- + +"Here, this way; up by the stream!" + +In an instant Rodd was full of action. Turning his back to the hole +across the pool, he began to whip the surface with such effect that at +the third cast there was a quick rise and he was fast in by far the +biggest trout he had caught that day, though small enough all the same; +and with knit brows he was playing it carefully just as a redcoat, +followed by three or four more, came up at the double to the exit end of +the pool and halted to stare at him wonderingly. + +"Hi, young fellow!" shouted the leader, whose stripes betokened the +sergeant. "What are you doing here?" + +Rodd, whose heart was thumping against his ribs from excitement, did not +so much as raise his eyes from the surface of the pool, but with teeth +set, lips pursed up, and brows heavily knit, kept on playing his fish, +paying not the slightest heed to the speaker and his companions. + +"Fishing, eh?" said the sergeant, who, in spite of his important errand, +could not take his eyes from the darting trout. "I say, we are after an +escaped prisoner, and he came somewhere up here. Which way has he +gone?" + +Rodd did not take his eyes from the frantic darting of the fish, but +gave line in silence as it flashed through the water to the far side of +the pool, while the soldiers grounded arms and looked on with the +deepest interest. + +"Prisoners escaped," said the sergeant loudly, as he, too, still gazed +at the rushings of the trout--"Frenchman--came up this way--Yes, a big +'un, youngster--Mind! You'll lose him!--One was quite a lad, and--Well +done! You have got him yet!--We saw him run up this way, and--Well +done!--You have handled a fly-rod before--Did you see anything of him?" + +"Eh? What?" said another voice sharply, and a fresh comer suddenly +appeared upon the scene in the shape of Uncle Paul, who stared in +astonishment at the group as he stepped into the little amphitheatre +from behind the rocks. + +His appearance acted like magic upon the soldiers, who brought their +muskets to the carry, while the sergeant sprang to attention and +saluted. + +"After escaped prisoners, sir. Asking the young gentleman if he had got +one of them up here." + +"Pooh! Nonsense! Absurd!" cried the gentleman addressed, just as Rodd +brought his fish to land and went down on one knee to grip it in his +left hand. "Prisoners, no!" literally barked the fresh comer, setting +down his bottle and net, and taking off his straw hat to wipe his +streaming face with a big yellow and red bandanna handkerchief. "Here, +Rodd, boy," he cried, with a chuckle, "empty your pockets and then open +your creel and show the sergeant how many prisoners you have caught. +Hot up here, my lad!" he continued, and the sergeant and men grinned. +"Thirsty?" + +"Yes, sir," said the sergeant, grinning; "pretty tidy. We have had a +precious good run." + +"Well, there's plenty of beautiful water. Shall I lend you my +drinking-cup?" + +"Thankye, sir," said the sergeant. + +"Thankye, indeed!" said the bluff speaker, with a chuckle, and he thrust +his hand into his pocket. "There you are; there's a shilling for you to +get some cider. I dare say you know where better than I can tell you. +No, we have seen no prisoners." + +"Thank you, sir! You are a gentleman," said the sergeant. "Didn't want +to interfere with the young gent's sport, but we had got our duty to do. +Left face, my lads! Forward!" And the next minute the military party +were on the tramp, to pass through the entrance to the little +amphitheatre and disappear, just as Uncle Paul was lowering himself +gently down upon a huge boulder stone and dragging round the wallet +which hung from his right shoulder. + +"Phew!" he gasped. "Pretty job I have had to find you, Pickle! I took +a short cut, as I thought, and it proved a long one. I have had a +round. Aren't you hungry, boy?" + +"Starving, uncle," replied the lad, as he dropped the fish into the +creel, hooked his fly on to one of the rings, and tightened the line. +"But let's come out here on to the heath. It will be more soft and +comfortable to sit down." + +"Bah!" barked Uncle Paul. "I am not going to stir again till I have had +something to eat and a rest. There, lay your rod down. Bother the +soldiers! There was another party of them out yonder, shouted at me to +stop, and because I didn't, made as if they were going to fire. Yes, +they had better! But I had to stop; and then they began questioning me +about their escaped French prisoners, and wanted to know who I was and +where I was going, and I thought that they were going to make me a +prisoner and march me off yonder, only I showed them my card and asked +them if I sounded like a French prisoner. They were civil then, and I +gave them a shilling. That's two shillings I have fooled away out here +on this moor, where I should have said it wasn't possible for a man to +spend a farthing. Come on; help yourself," and he held out the wallet +for his companion to take one of the big sandwiches it contained. + +"I think we had better go on outside, uncle," said the boy. "There's +more breeze out there, and the rocks don't reflect the heat." + +"Do you?" said Uncle Paul, with his mouth full. "There's quite wind +enough in here to keep me alive, and I am so hot I don't want to go out +to be blown on and catch cold.--My word, the old lady didn't forget the +mustard! Come, eat away, Pickle. Let's start fair, or you will soon be +a sandwich behind. My word, what an appetite this air does give one!" + +"Yes, uncle," said the boy, who, in spite of an effort to control +himself, could not help darting an anxious glance from time to time at +the opening between the rocks. + +"Capital sandwiches, Pickle," continued the uncle, eating away with the +most intense enjoyment. "One doesn't want any other pickle with these. +What does the old proverb say--Hunger's sweet sauce. Hullo! what are +you getting up for?" + +"Oh, I am going on eating, uncle," replied the boy. "I was only going +to walk to the end and see how far the soldiers had gone." + +"Hang the soldiers, sir!" cried the elder irascibly. "I wish they'd +keep in their barracks instead of coming hunting their prisoners all +over this beautiful countryside. Sit down and go on eating." + +The boy resumed his place, and began making half-moons in the edge of +his sandwich and trying to munch hard; but somehow his appetite was +gone, and before he was half through the second sandwich he watched his +opportunity, slipped it into his pocket, and as his uncle turned round +to look at him he leaned forward and helped himself to a third from the +wallet. + +"Ah, that's better! Eat away, boy. We have got a long walk back, and +you will have plenty of appetite for a good high tea. Hang the +prisoners as well as the soldiers. If I had known that this great cage +full of Bony's French frogs was up here I don't believe I should have +come--that is, unless I thought that Nap himself was a prisoner here +too, when I might have been tempted to come and have a grin at the wild +beast in his cage. Eh, what? What did you do that for?" + +He looked curiously at his nephew, who, after a glance across the pool, +had involuntarily stretched out one hand to grip his elder's arm. + +"Do you hear me, sir?" he cried sharply. "Why did you pinch my arm like +that?" + +The boy, whose face had looked rather white the moment before, flushed +scarlet, and stammered out something confused and strange. + +"Why, hullo, boy!" cried his uncle sharply, and he leaned forward in +turn and caught the lad by the wrist. "Why, what's the matter with you? +Haven't been overdoing it in the sun, have you? Here, take my cup and +have a glass of water." + +"No, no, uncle; I am quite right. There's nothing the matter with me. +It's--it's--it's--" + +"It's what?" said Uncle Paul sharply, as he gazed full in the boy's eyes +and held tightly by his wrist. "Well, it's what?" + +"Perhaps I am a bit tired, uncle. I have been working very hard, and I +turned faint and hungry a little while ago." + +"Humph!" grunted Uncle Paul. "Then do as I tell you. Drink a cup of +that clear cold water." + +"That's better," he continued, a few minutes later. "Now eat another +sandwich. No nonsense, sir! Do as I tell you!" + +The boy sighed and helped himself to another of the double slices and +their contents, and for the next few minutes no word was spoken, the +pair sitting opposite to one another and munching or ruminating steadily +away, the younger feeling as if every mouthful of which he partook would +choke him. + +"Hah!" said Uncle Paul, at last; "it is a drawback to this beautiful +place. The colours of the heath are glorious, and the views from up +here are grand. I got some good specimens too, ready for our +microscopic work to-night; and that was a nice trout you caught. How +many did you get, boy?" + +"Only one, uncle," said the boy vacantly. + +"What!" + +"I didn't see the other, uncle." + +Uncle Paul drew a deep breath and fixed the boy with his eyes, as he +said quietly-- + +"I asked you how many trout you got, Pickle." + +"Oh, about fifty, uncle. Creel's half full." + +"Ah! Then we will have some for high tea to-night, and some for +breakfast in the morning, and give our landlady the rest. Nice woman +that; full of stories about the prisoners, and Bony and his wretched +scum. Ugh! The very name of the rascal raises my bile, and--There, I +think I had better take you home and give you a dose." + +"Yes, let's go on back now, uncle," said the boy eagerly, "but indeed, +indeed I don't want a dose." + +"Humph! Then pray why did you grip hold of my arm again like that, and +stare across yonder over my shoulder as if you could see a raven hiding +in one of the holes?" + +"Oh no, uncle," cried the boy, with a forced laugh. "I couldn't see +anything." + +"Ha, ha!" ejaculated Uncle Paul. "Now, look here, Pickle; you and I +have always had a sort of tacit agreement that we'd play fair together, +and that there should be a mutual confidence." + +"Yes, uncle, of course," cried the boy, whose face was burning. + +"Very well, then, you are breaking truce. You are not playing the game, +sir." + +"Uncle!" + +"Pickle! Now then, sir, out with it. You have seen those French +prisoners." + +"Uncle!" + +"Yes, sir. Why did you pinch my arm--twice? Now then, honour!" + +"I--I--You were talking about Bonaparte." + +"Well, what of that?" + +"I was afraid he'd hear you, uncle." + +"What!" cried the other, and his mouth opened wide. "Bony! Here?" + +"No, uncle, of course not, but one of the young prisoners. He was +escaping." + +"And you--you have turned traitor to your King, and been hiding a +prisoner of war from his guard! Why, you young scoundrel! You lied to +that sergeant, and said you hadn't seen them." + +"I didn't, uncle!" cried the boy hotly. "It was you." + +"Eh? What?" roared the elder. "You dare to! Eh?--Ah--so I did! But +then I didn't know." + +"No, uncle, and if you had seen and heard the poor lad as I did, I am +sure you wouldn't have betrayed him." + +"Betray! It isn't betraying, sir, to give up a prisoner of war." + +"I felt as if it would be, uncle, under such circumstances," said Rodd, +who began noting that his uncle had lowered his voice, and that his +angriest words had been uttered in a whisper. + +"Look here, my boy," he said now quite softly, "I knew that there was +something up, or you would have been wolfing more than your share of +those sandwiches. I saw you keep squinting at that hole over yonder. +So you have hid him away there?" + +"No, uncle," said Rodd; "I did nothing, but just as the soldiers were +coming up, and he'd been begging and praying me to save him, I just said +that that would be a good place to hide." + +"Humph!" grunted Uncle Paul. "It was very wrong, my boy--very wrong; +but look here, Pickle, is the poor fellow badly wounded?" + +"No, uncle; only exhausted. He looked just like that hunted deer we saw +the other day." + +"Hah!" said Uncle Paul, nodding his head. "Humph! Well, you know, my +boy, it isn't the thing, and we should be getting into no end of trouble +if it were known. It's against the law, you know, and if you had caught +him and held him you would have got a big reward." + +Rodd got up and laid his hands upon his elder's shoulders as he looked +him fixedly in the eyes. + +"I say, uncle," he said, "you have been questioning me. It's my turn +now." + +"Yes, Pickle; I'll play fair. It's your turn," said Uncle Paul. "What +is it you want to say?" + +"Only this, uncle. Would you have liked me to earn that reward?" + +"Hah! I say, Pickle, my lad, would you like any more sandwiches?" + +"No, uncle." + +"Then isn't it about time we began to make for home?" + +Uncle Paul rose and led the way down-stream, gazing straight before him, +and though he must have seen, he took no notice of the fact that Rodd +did not throw the strap of his creel of fish over his shoulder, but left +it by the side of the stone, along with the wallet, through whose gaping +mouth a second packet of big sandwiches could still be seen. + + + +CHAPTER THREE. + +MRS. CHAMPERNOWNE'S PAN. + +Mr Robson, when he came up from Plymouth for a natural history +expedition into Dartmoor, did not select a hotel for his quarters, for +the simple reason that such a house of accommodation did not exist, but +took what he could get--a couple of tiny bedrooms in the cottage of a +widow whose husband had been a mining captain on the moor; and there +after a long tramp they returned on the evening after the adventure, to +find their landlady awaiting them at the pretty rose-covered porch, +eager and expectant and ready to throw up her hands in dismay. + +"Why, where are the fish?" she cried--"the trout?" + +"Eh?" said Uncle Paul. + +"The fish, sir--the fish. I've got a beautiful fire, and the lard ready +in the pan. I want to go on cooking while you both have a good wash. +You told me that you would be sure to bring home a lot of trout for your +supper, and I haven't prepared anything else." + +"Bless my heart! So I did," said Uncle Paul. "Here, Pickle, where are +those trout?" + +Rodd gave his uncle a comical look, and stood rubbing one ear. + +"Ah, uncle," he cried, "where are those trout?" + +Uncle Paul screwed up one eye, and he too in unconscious imitation began +to rub one ear. + +"Ah, well; ah, well," said the landlady, "I suppose you couldn't help +it. I have had gentlemen staying here to fish before now, and it's been +a basketful one day and a basket empty the next. Fish are what the +Scotch call very kittle cattle. Never mind, my dear," she continued to +Rodd. "Better luck next time. Fortunately I have got plenty of eggs, +and there's the ham waiting for me to cut off some more rashers." + +As she spoke the woman hurried into her kitchen, from which sharp +crackling sounds announced that he was thrusting pieces of wood under +the kettle, and as she busied herself she went on talking aloud so that +they could hear-- + +"Did you hear the gun fire, sir, somewhere about one o'clock?" + +"Yes," grunted Uncle Paul. "Dinner-time, and we ate your sandwiches, +Mrs Champernowne. They were delicious." + +"I am very glad, sir. But, oh dear no, that wasn't the dinner-bell. +That meant that some of the prisoners had escaped. Poor fellows! I +always feel sorry for them." + +"Mrs Champernowne!" cried Uncle Paul, and Rodd, who was in his room +with his face under water, raised it up, grinning, for he knew his +uncle's peculiar ways by heart, and he went on listening to what was +said. + +"Oh, yes, sir," cried the landlady, with her voice half-drowned by a +sudden flap and a sizzling noise which indicated, without the appetising +odour which soon began to rise to Rodd's nostrils, that their landlady +had vigorously slapped a thick rasher of pink-and-white ham into the hot +frying-pan; "I know what you think, sir, and what you told me only last +night about being a loyal subject of King George, and these being our +natural enemies, whom we ought to hate." + +_Ciss_! went the ham, and Rodd felt as if he should like to shout "Hear, +hear!" + +"But I can't help remembering what I hear at church about forgiving our +enemies; and I am sure you would, sir, if you knew what I do about those +poor fellows, torn away from their own people and shut up behind prison +bars, and all for doing nothing." + +Just then there was a little spluttering noise as if the pan were +chuckling. + +"For doing nothing!" shouted Uncle Paul, and a sound from his room +suggested that he had set down the washhand jug with a bang. "The +scoundrels who invaded our shores?" + +_Ciss_! said the pan. + +"That they didn't, sir!" cried the landlady. "They didn't even try; and +even if they had there were all our brave fellows round the coasts who +would soon have stopped them." + +"Hear, hear!" cried Rodd, very softly, for he was speaking into his +sweet-scented towel, whose scent was that of fresh air and wild thyme. + +"Well, well, that's right," shouted Uncle Paul; "but they wanted to." + +_Whish-ish_, went the pan, and there was a good deal more spluttering, +and in his mind's eye Rodd saw the great rasher turned right over, to +begin sizzling again. + +"And I don't believe that, Dr Robson," cried the landlady sturdily. +"Don't you know that the poor fellows over yonder never get good honest +shillings given to them and are enlisted of their own free will like our +lads at home, but they are dragged away and are obliged to fight; and it +was all owing to the angry jealousy and covetousness of that dreadful +man, Bony, who has been the cause of all the trouble." + +"Hah!" roared Uncle Paul, in a voice that almost shook the diamond-paned +casement. "Say no more, Mrs Champernowne. You are quite right, and I +admire your sympathies. Madam, you are a lady!" + +"Oh, really, Dr Robson--" + +"I repeat it, madam, you are a lady, and I applaud everything you have +said. But what about that gun?" + +"Oh, dear me, yes, sir; I was just going to tell you, but you put it all +out of my head. It was the alarm gun to tell everybody that prisoners +had escaped, so that all the people on the moor could join the soldiers +in scouring the place as they called it, and hunting the poor Frenchmen +down for the sake of the reward. Yes, I'd reward them if I had my way! +Hunting their poor fellow-creatures, who are only trying for their +liberty!" + +"H'm! Ha!" grunted Uncle Paul, and there was a huckabacky sound about +his words. + +There was another furious hissing from the pan, followed by a fresh +slap, for a second great rasher had been thrust in _vice_ number one +nicely cooked and just placed in the hot dish that had been intended for +trout. + +"Did they catch them, Mrs Champernowne?" shouted Uncle Paul. + +"I haven't heard, sir," was the reply; "but dear, dear, they are pretty +well sure to, for there's not much chance for the poor fellows. Oh, it +makes my heart bleed when I hear sometimes that one of them has been +shot down by the soldiers." + +Rodd went on tip-toe across the creaking floor to open his door a little +farther, listening with strained ear, for his bright young imagination +pictured the thin pale youth, wild-eyed and breathless, out of his +hiding-place and running for liberty across the open moor, and hearing +again the distant reports of the muskets. + +"But that doesn't often happen, sir, for between you and me and the +post, seeing that the prisoners are only soldiers, after all, I don't +believe that though they have their orders, our men ever try to hit +them; and very glad I am." + +"Ah, ah, ah, Mrs Champernowne, that isn't loyal, you know, that isn't +loyal to his Majesty the King and your country." + +"I can't help that, Dr Robson, and I am not speaking, sir, as a +subject, but as a woman and a mother who has a brave stout boy in our +good King's Guards. Now suppose, sir, that you were a mother." Uncle +Paul grunted audibly. + +"And had a boy the same as I have, and Bony Napolyparty had taken him +prisoner. How would you like him to be shot down?" + +Rodd literally jumped in his alarm, for there was a tremendously wild +cissing from the pan and a horrible suggestion therewith that Mrs +Champernowne had been turning the rasher with so much energy that she +had thrown the cooking slice on to the fire itself instead of into its +native pan, while a sudden gush as of hot burning fat came up the little +stairs. + +But the pleasant sizzling sounds began again directly, and Rodd, who was +ravenously hungry, consequent upon the bad part he had played over the +sandwiches beneath the tor, sighed in relief as he realised that the +widow's energetic treatment had only splashed a little of the fat over +the side of the pan. + +As Rodd listened for a continuation of the political discussion, in +which it seemed to him that Uncle Paul had got the worst of it, for +neither the widow nor he spoke for the next three or four minutes, and +the pan had it all its own way, there was some creaking of the boards as +the naturalist stumped about, and when he did speak it was evident that +he thought it wise to change the subject. And it was the inner man who +now spoke-- + +"Our tea-supper nearly ready, Mrs Champernowne?" + +"Oh yes, sir. The second rasher's about done. How many eggs shall I +cook?" + +"Oh, one, or perhaps two, for me," shouted Uncle Paul. + +"Oh, I say!" muttered Rodd. + +"Better cook eight or ten for my nephew," cried the doctor dryly. +"He'll eat like a young wolf." + +"What a shame!" muttered Rodd. "I'll serve him out for this." + +"Fried, of course, sir?" came from the kitchen. + +"Murder, woman, no!" roared Uncle Paul. "Fry! That is wild +west-country ignorance, madam! Are you not aware, madam, that the +action of boiling fat upon albumen is to produce a coagulate leathery +mass of tough indigestible matter inimical to the tender sensitive +lining of the most important organ of the human frame, lying as it does +without assimilation or absorption upon the epigastric region, and +producing an irritation that may require medical treatment to allay?" + +"Dear, dear, dear, dear me, no, sir! Really, you quite fluster me with +all those long words. Who ever heard that fried ham and eggs were bad +for anybody?" + +"Then I tell you now, madam," shouted the doctor, "that--" + +"Don't you take any notice, Mrs Champernowne," shouted Rodd. "It's +only uncle's fun." + +"Wuff!" went Uncle Paul, with a snap like that of an angry dog. "Wuff!" + +"Fried, please, Mrs Champernowne; four for uncle and three for me." + +"Umph!" grunted the doctor, and a few minutes later he and his nephew, +hunger-sharpened and weary-legged, were seated facing one another in the +widow's pleasant little parlour, hard at work, and risking all the +direful symptoms upon which the elder had discoursed, and thoroughly +enjoying hearty draughts of Mrs Champernowne's fragrant tea. + +There was silence in the kitchen, following the final hissings and +odours emitted by the hard-worked pan, but a great deal of business went +on in the little parlour, the first words that were spoken being by +Uncle Paul, who growled out-- + +"Here, I suppose you had better tell the old lady to put on another +rasher of ham to fry." + +"For you, uncle?" said Rodd archly. + +"No, sir, for you. You traitorous young dog, leaving all those +beautiful trout up on the moor to be devoured by the enemies of your +country!" + +"Well, they can't eat them raw, uncle." + +"Why not, sir? They are only so many ravening savages, ready to breathe +out battle and slaughter if they got free." + +"That poor boy didn't seem much of a savage, uncle," said Rodd quietly; +and after a sidelong glance to see whether he dared say it, the boy +continued tentatively, "I wish the poor fellow had been here to have +this ham." + +"What!" roared his uncle fiercely. "Bah! You wouldn't have left him a +mouthful. Wolf--raven!" + +"Yes, I would, uncle. I'd have left him all." + +"Umph!" grunted Uncle Paul, taking up a very thin, old, much-worn silver +table-spoon and looking at it with the eye of a connoisseur. "H'm! Ha! +Queen Anne." + +"She's dead, uncle," said the boy. + +"Well, I know that, don't I?" growled Uncle Paul, as he tilted the empty +dish, and carefully scraped all the golden brown fat and gravy to one +side, getting together sufficient to nearly fill the spoon, and then +making as if to put it upon his own plate, but with a quick gesture +dabbing it down upon Rodd's. + +"Fair play, uncle!" shouted the boy. + +"Bah!" grunted the doctor. "Cut me a thin slice of bread, all crumb, +Pickle. Thunder and lightning! I have got the best share, after all;" +and then, with his face puckered up into a pleasant smile, he inserted a +fork into the newly-cut slice of home-made bread, and began passing it +round and round the dish until it had imbibed the remains of the liquid +ham and the golden new-laid eggs, when he deposited it upon his own +plate with a triumphant smile which seemed to Rodd to make him look +five-and-twenty years younger. + +"Shall I fill another cup of tea for you, uncle?" cried Rodd; and by the +way, they were breakfast cups. + +"No, no, Pickle; I--I--er--well, say half." + +At that moment the door was opened, and, looking hot and out of breath, +their landlady entered. + +"I hope you haven't been waiting for anything, gentlemen," she cried, +giving the table a comprehensive glance. "I am so sorry. I will cook +another rasher or two directly." + +"Madam, no," said Uncle Paul didactically. "What does the great classic +author say?" + +"Really I don't know, sir," cried Mrs Champernowne, with a perplexed +look wrinkling up her pleasant face. "But it won't take many minutes." + +"Enough, madam, is as good as a feast. This has been a banquet, eh, +Pickle? I never enjoyed anything half so much before in my life. The +ham was tenderness itself, the eggs new-laid--the bread--the butter--the +tea--eh, Pickle?" + +"Delicious, uncle." + +"The fat of the land, Mrs Champernowne," continued the doctor; "the +riches of these smiling pastures. Now if your friend Napoleon Bonaparte +had come with his locusts to devastate the land, his hordes such as we +have seen safely imprisoned yonder--" + +"Yes, sir," interrupted Mrs Champernowne eagerly; "that's what I came +to tell you. I thought I might just run over to my neighbour's, whose +master has come back from the hunt, and I thought that you would like to +hear. Those two French prisoners have got right away." + +"Hooray!" shouted Rodd, springing from the chair, and to Mrs +Champernowne's astonishment catching her round the waist and waltzing +her about the room. "Three cheers for the poor prisoners! Hurrah! +Hurrah! Hurrah!" + +And Uncle Paul pushed back his chair, puckered up his forehead, stared +hard at his nephew, and grunted out-- + +"Humph!" + +"Oh, my dear, don't! Pray don't!" panted Mrs Champernowne, whom Nature +had made middle-aged, round and plump. "You are taking away all my +breath. But my neighbour's master says that he thinks they have made +for Salcombe, where they will perhaps get aboard one of the orange boats +and be put back in their own country." + +"Hah!" said Uncle Paul, leaning back in his chair to take hold of his +bunch of seals and haul up by the broad watered silk ribbon the big +double-cased gold watch that ticked away from where it reclined warm and +comfortable at the bottom of his fob. + + "Confound their politics, + Frustrate their knavish tricks!" + +"That was a very fine tea, Mrs Champernowne. Now, Pickle, my boy, I +think it would be very nice to go and sit for half-an-hour in the arbour +under the roses, while I kill the green fly--the aphides, Mrs +Champernowne--which increase and multiply at a rate which is absolutely +marvellous. Pickle, my boy, I hope you will never grow up as weak and +self-indulgent as your uncle. Fill me my long clay pipe." + + + +CHAPTER FOUR. + +OH, SUMMER NIGHT! + +Mrs Champernowne's arbour was a very homely affair, consisting of four +fir poles to form as many corners, and a few more nailed and pegged +together to form gables. Nature built all the rest with roses and +honeysuckle and some vigorous ivy at the back, the roses spiring up, the +honeysuckle creeping in and out among the long strands and holding them +together, while the ivy ran rapidly up the back till it could grow no +higher, and then began to droop down till it had formed itself into a +thick curtain which kept out the wind. + +There was a very rustic table in the middle, formed by nailing two +pieces of plank on to a tree stump, and a couple of seats, one on each +side, pierced with holes that had once upon a time been made by ship +carpenters' augers, when the wood was built up over the ribs of some +stout ship which long years after was bumped to pieces by the waves upon +the rocks and then cast up upon the southern shore, to be bought up and +carted all through the county. + +Yes, it was a very rustic place, but it suited its surroundings, and +Uncle Paul looked supremely happy as he sat there slowly smoking his +pipe and gazing dreamily before him at the beautiful landscape +stretching far, and the garden of the one cottage within reach only a +short distance away from the plot of ground where by the help of the +neighbour sufficient potatoes were grown for the widow's use. "What a +silent, peaceful evening, Pickle," said Uncle Paul. "Look yonder in the +east; the moon will be up soon, and then it will be night, and we have +done no work. How do you feel, my boy?" + +"Tired and stupid, uncle. My legs ache right down to the ankles." + +"No wonder, hopping about amongst those granite boulders. My back's a +bit stiff too. There, let's go into the parlour, light up, and then you +shall fetch down the microscope." + +"Oh, not yet, uncle!--I say, have another pipe." + +"A vaunt, you young tempter! Trying to lead me astray into idleness! +No, let's get in. We have been playing all day; now let's go and get a +bit of work done before we lie down to sleep." + +"But I say, uncle, do you think that Napoleon will ever start another +war in France?" + +"Who knows, boy? His goings-on have brought nearly everything to a +standstill, and there has been war enough to last for a hundred years." + +"Yes, uncle; but do you think that Napoleon and the war put a stop to +your expedition that you were to make in a vessel of your own?" + +"Of course I do, Pickle," said Uncle Paul, smoking very slowly now, with +his eyes shut, so as to make the little incandescent mass at the bottom +of his bowl last for a few minutes longer. "Government promised me and +my friends to make a grant for the fitting out of a small vessel, and +for the payment of a captain and crew, and it was voted that we should +have it; but do what we might, my friends and I could never get the +cash, and it has always been put off, put off, on account of the +expenses of the war." + +"But, uncle--" began Rodd. + +"No, you don't, sir," said Uncle Paul, with a soft chuckle. "None of +your artfulness! You are trying to lead me on to prattle about Bony, so +as to avoid my lecture upon the fresh-water polypes I have taken to-day. +Get out, you transparent young scrub! In with you, and fetch down the +case, and light the two candles on the parlour table. Nice innocent way +of doing it. Think I couldn't see through you, sir? Be off!" + +A few minutes later Uncle Paul's pipe was cooling on the parlour +chimney-piece, kept almost upright by the waxy end leaning against a +glass tube which had been formed into a sort of ornamental rolling-pin +to be suspended over the fire, and to be much treasured by its owner. + +It was not a very aesthetic piece of art or ornamentation, being only +composed of coloured flowers carefully cut out of a piece of chintz, +before being gummed upon the inside of the glass tube. This was then +filled up with salt, and the ornament was complete. + +The candles were burning brightly after each application of the +snuffers; the polished mahogany microscope case stood on a side-table, +and the brass tube that had been taken out was ready to receive one of +the many slips of glass, some of which had little cup-like hollows +ground out of one side ready for receiving a tiny drop of water and one +or other of the specimens, the result of the past day's search. + +Uncle Paul was on one side of the table with his big glass bottle; Rodd +sat on the other, with his chin resting in his hands, trying to listen +to his uncle's discourse, and with his eyelids drooping down now and +again. + +"Bother the flies and moths!" said Uncle Paul testily. "Who's to work +with them circling round and round the candles, trying to singe +themselves to death? What's that white one, boy?" + +"Ghost moth, uncle," replied Rodd sharply, his uncle's question seeming +to rouse him up to attention. + +"Good boy! Well named. Trying hard to make a ghost of itself too. +Why, there's a great Daddy Longlegs now! Here, you'll have to shut the +window." + +"Oh, don't, uncle! It will make the room so hot." + +"Umph! So it will. Very tiresome, though, when one's trying to work. +Now then, let me see; let me see. I want to examine this hydra, but I +must put on a lower power, and--Oh, dear, dear, dear! Gnats! Moths! +Tipulae and--Really, really, Pickle, that lamp gives no light at all;" +and Uncle Paul leaned forward, took a pin out of the edge of his +waistcoat, and began to prick at and try to raise the wick of the +reflecting microscope lamp. + +Then there was a little catastrophe, for after a most vigorous +application of the pin the wick seemed to resent it as if it were some +kind of sea worm, and drew back out of reach into its little brass cell. + +"There, now I've done it!" said Uncle Paul. "Did you ever see anything +so tiresome in your life, Pickle?" + +"Yahah!" sighed the boy slowly. + +"Why, what are you doing? Yawning!" cried Uncle Paul. "You are about +the sleepiest chap I ever knew. There, I am afraid I shall have to wait +for to-morrow morning's sunshine. Clear away, or help me. Let's put +everything on a side-table, and I'll tell Mrs Champernowne that she +isn't to touch what she sees there." + +"Yes, uncle," said the boy, with something like alacrity, as the table +was cleared and the candles re-snuffed, the effect of opening and +shutting the snuffers seeming to act upon Rodd and making him yawn +widely, while quite involuntarily Uncle Paul did the same. "Now then," +said Uncle Paul. + +"Aren't we going to bed, uncle?" said Rodd eagerly. "Bed? Nonsense! +Because we are in a country place where people like going to bed almost +in the middle of the day and getting up in the middle of the night, do +you think we need follow their example? Absurd! I want to talk to you +about some of the wonderful things I captured to-day. The waters on the +moor swarm with the most beautiful limpid specimens." + +Rodd sighed softly, and put his hand before his mouth to stop a yawn. + +"Oh, by the way," said Uncle Paul, "did you change your trousers when +you went up to wash?" + +"No, uncle; they didn't want it." + +"Weren't they damp?" + +"No, uncle; I only got my shoes wet, and they were pretty well dry when +I got home. Besides, you had got my other trousers in the big +portmanteau in your room." + +"Well, you could have come and fetched them. Always be careful to +change damp things.--Come in!" + +There had been a soft tap at the door, and Mrs Champernowne appeared. + +"I beg pardon, sir, but what would you like for breakfast in the +morning?" + +"Breakfast, Mrs Champernowne? Nothing." + +"Oh, I say, uncle!" said Rodd sharply. "We seem to have eaten enough +this evening to last us for twenty-four hours." + +"Oh no, sir," said the landlady. "Excuse me, but our moorland air will +make you think very differently to-morrow morning." + +"Humph!" grunted Uncle Paul. + +"You see, sir, I did think that you'd bring home enough trout this +evening to do for your breakfast too, and I am afraid there's nothing +but ham and eggs. Would you mind them?" + +"I'll tell you to-morrow morning, madam," said Uncle Paul. + +"Then if you wouldn't mind, sir--I don't want to hurry you and the young +gentleman--but it's my time, and if you will excuse me I'll say +good-night." + +"Good-night, Mrs Champernowne; good-night, and pleasant rest to you," +said Uncle Paul heartily, "and--Yes? You were going to say something?" + +"If you wouldn't mind, sir, being sure that the candles are well out." + +"Oh, of course; of course." + +"And it's a very hot night, sir." + +"Yes, madam; we have found that out." + +"So if you'll be kind enough to shut and slip the bolt of the front door +I'll leave it for you to do so when you go up to bed." + +"Certainly, Mrs Champernowne, certainly. Once more, good-night." + +Their landlady smiled benevolently on both, and the next minute they +heard the little old staircase creaking beneath her tread, this being +followed by the cracking of the boards in the little room over the +kitchen, the visitors both listening till all was silent again. + +Somehow as Rodd sat opposite to his uncle, his head seemed to be +unusually heavy, and he rested more and more upon his two thumbs, which +he had placed for support beneath his chin. + +There was a faint pinging sound, the trumpeting of a gnat flitting about +the room, and then the deep boom of a beetle somewhere outside the open +window. There was a hot delicious odour, too, floating in over the +flowers in the garden, a portion of whose scent the warm air seemed to +be taking up to mingle with that which it had swept off the moor. + +And then as Rodd listened and gazed across the table between the two +candles, whose tops were growing tiny brown mushrooms as they silently +asked to be snuffed, it seemed to the boy that his uncle's face looked +dim and misty, and then that it swelled and swelled and began to float +up like a faintly seen balloon, till it died right away. And all was +still but the _um-um-um_ of the great beetle or chafer which had passed +in through the window, and began circling round just below the +whitewashed ceiling, against which its wings brushed from time to time +with a faint fizz, till all at once Rodd started up, for his uncle +exclaimed-- + +"Why, Pickle, what are you about?" + +"I--I--nothing, uncle," said the boy hastily. "Why, I believe, sir, you +were going to sleep!" + +"Oh, I am quite wide awake, uncle," cried the boy. + +"Humph, yes--now. You see, my boy, these hydras are most extraordinary +things, and to-morrow morning in the bright sunshine we will get the +microscope to work, and I'll show you how they--" + +_Burr_--_burr_--_burr_--_hum_--_hum_--_hum_--_um_--_um_. + +Was that Uncle Paul talking in a low tone with his voice getting farther +and farther away, or was it that big chafer spinning round and round the +room? Now it nearly died out, and then it grew louder again and seemed +to double into a duet, just as if the great stag beetle had whisked in +at the casement and had joined in the nocturnal valse, the duet seeming +to be intended to lull the naturalist and his nephew to sleep in the +soft musky sweetness of that delightful summer's night. + +How long it lasted, who could say, but all at once there was a sudden +start, and Uncle Paul's hand came down with a thump upon the tablecloth +after he had knocked over one of the candlesticks, making so much noise +that, wide awake now, Rodd made a dash and stood the candlestick up +again, before snatching the candle from where it lay singeing the +lavender and red-check cotton table-cover and beginning to deposit a big +spot of grease. + +"Bless my heart, Pickle!" cried Uncle Paul. "I believe I was going to +drop asleep." + +"I am afraid I was asleep, uncle," replied the boy. "You were saying +that hydras--that hydras--er--er--er--something about hydras." + +"Yes, yes, yes, but never mind. Perhaps we had better go to bed, and +I'll finish what I was saying in the morning. There, light the two flat +candlesticks, and we will have a good long snooze. That's right; put +out the others. No, no; use the extinguisher! Don't blow them out, or +there will be such a smell." + +Then-- + +"Shall I shut the window, uncle?" + +"Oh, no, I don't think you need. The place is like an oven. Heigho-- +ha--hum! Yes, I am sleepy. Come along. Good-night, my boy. I am +going to sleep with my chamber window wide open, and you'd better do the +same." + +"But I say, uncle, we shall hardly want our candles. Look at the moon. +It is almost as light as day." + +All the same they took the candles up with them, the stairs creaking +again beneath their tread as if uttering a protest against them for +their forgetfulness in not attending to their hostess's request to close +and bolt the door; but they were too sleepy to do anything more than +slip off their things on reaching their rooms, while almost directly +after, the moon was shining in right across Rodd's snowy white bed, the +pillow being in the darkness, which also formed a black bar across the +foot, so that only the boy's hands and breast lay in the light. + +One moment after laying his head down in that black velvety darkness +Rodd Harding was wide awake and thinking that all outside the window was +silver, a broad streak of which came straight over him to die away in +the wall on his left; the next, he was far away in the land of dreams, +wandering over the moor, his confused visions taking the form of +escaping prisoners flying before soldiers in scarlet coats. + +And then after a blank pause which seemed to have lasted only a few +minutes, Rodd opened his eyes upon the bright silvery light once more, +to find that it struck across from the window in the opposite direction, +for he was wide awake, listening to a soft tap, tap, tap, evidently +administered by a knuckle upon his door. + + + +CHAPTER FIVE. + +THE MILK IN THE COCOA-NUT. + +"Yes, all right, Mrs Champernowne; get up directly. I say, what's +o'clock?" + +"Oh, I don't know, my dear," came in agitated tones, "but would you come +to the door and speak to me a minute?" + +There was a bump on the floor as Rodd sprang out of bed, and then-- + +"What is it?" whispered the boy, who was moved by his caller's evident +distress. "Don't say uncle's ill!" + +"No, no, my dear, but I am in great trouble. You--you didn't shut the +front door." + +"Oh!" ejaculated Rodd. + +"And--and, my dear, there have been thieves and robbers in the night. +They have stripped my little larder, and I don't know what they haven't +taken besides. Do, pray, make haste and dress, and come down and help +me! I am in such trouble, I don't know what I shall do." + +"All right; I'll make haste and come down," cried Rodd, feeling guilty +all over, and then trying to excuse himself by shuffling the blame on to +the right shoulders. "It was uncle she asked," he muttered, as he ran +round to the other side of the bed for the chair upon which he had hang +his clothes when he undressed. "Why, hallo!" + +He stood staring at the chair for a moment or two, and then ran round +the foot of the bed, opened the door two or three inches, and called in +a subdued tone so as not to awaken his uncle, though if he had been +asked why, he could not have told, beyond saying that he felt then that +it was the right thing to do-- + +"Mrs Champernowne! Mrs Champernowne!" + +"Yes, my dear," came from the foot of the stairs. "Oh, you have been +quick!" + +"No, no, I haven't," cried Rodd pettishly. "Here, I say, have you taken +away my trousers?" + +"Gracious me, no, my dear! What should I want with your trousers?" + +"Take them down to brush perhaps," muttered the boy to himself, as he +ran back to the other side of the bed and raised the counterpane. +"Haven't slipped off and gone under," he muttered, and then as a fresh +thought struck him he clapped his hands to his forehead and stood +staring before him. "The thieves!" he exclaimed. "They haven't been in +here and taken all my clothes?" + +He was silent for a few minutes, as he stared vacantly about the room. + +"They have, though!" he cried. "Here, Mrs Champernowne!--Boots and +all. Oh, I can't tell her. Here, I must get my other suit out of the +portmanteau. I won't wake uncle, because it's so early. Why, it can be +only just sunrise; and he'd sit up and laugh at me. Oh, bother!" + +Rodd ran round to the door again, opened it about an inch, and listened. + +"She's in the kitchen," he muttered to himself, and slipping out on to +the little landing he raised the latch of his uncle's door, glided in, +and made for the big portmanteau that lay unstrapped beneath the window. + +Raising the one half quickly, he twisted the whole round so that the two +halves might lie open upon the whitely-scrubbed boards as silently as he +could; but one corner caught against the leg of the dressing-table, +jarring it so violently that a hair-brush fell on to the floor with a +bang, and Uncle Paul sprang up in bed. + +"Hullo, you sir! What are you doing there?" he cried. + +"Getting out my other suit, uncle," said the boy quickly. + +"What for? Don't do that! We are going over the moor again to-day." + +"But I must, uncle," cried Rodd. + +"Mush!" + +"Yes. Oh, I shall be obliged to tell you. It was all your fault, +uncle; you didn't fasten the door as Mrs Champernowne told you, and +there have been thieves in the night." + +"Been grandmothers in the night!" cried Uncle Paul contemptuously. + +"It's true, uncle, and they came up into my room while I was asleep and +took away all my clothes--boots and all." + +"You don't mean that, Pickle! Here, I say, where are mine?" + +Rodd sprang to his feet from where he was kneeling by the portmanteau, +and ran round to the side of the bed, just as his uncle turned and faced +him. + +"Every blessed thing gone, boy. Why, Rodney, my lad, we have fallen +into a den of thieves--robbed, and we may thank our stars we haven't +been murdered!" + +"Why, it's horrid, uncle! Didn't you hear them, then?" + +"Hear them, no! I heard nothing till you knocked something off on to +the floor. Here, stop a moment, boy! My purse! It was in my trousers +pocket." + +"Then it's gone, uncle," cried Rodd. + +"Ah! Horror! My gold watch and seals!" + +"Well, they weren't in your trousers, uncle." + +"No, boy; I remember winding it up and laying it on the chimney-piece." + +"It isn't there, uncle." + +"My gold presentation watch, that I wouldn't have lost for five hundred +pounds! Call up that wretched woman." + +"Uncle, I can't!" + +"Do as I tell you, sir! She's in league with the thieves." + +"But, uncle!" + +"Oh yes, I forgot. There, don't stand staring there like a bull calf +that has lost its mother. Turn that portmanteau upside down. Put on +some things yourself, and throw me some more. You can dress quicker +than I can, for you haven't got to shave. Look sharp, and then run for +the village constable." + +"Why, there isn't one, uncle," grumbled Rodd, as he began to scramble +into his other clothes. + +"No, of course there isn't, sir. A miserable one-eyed place with only +two cottages in it, and I dare say that old woman's in the other, +sharing the plunder? What a fool I was to come!" + +"No, you weren't, uncle, and Mrs Champernowne isn't sharing the +plunder, for she came and woke me up to say that the thieves had been +and carried off everything there was down-stairs. I say, uncle, it was +all your fault." + +"Don't you dare to say that to me again, sir!" roared Uncle Paul. "It +is insolent and disrespectful. Oh, hang the woman's door! Why didn't +she bolt it herself? Why, I'd got twenty guineas in that purse, besides +a lot of silver. There, there's somebody knocking at the door! Who's +there?" + +"Please, sir, it's me. They've taken the bread and the butter, and a +piece of freshly-boiled ham that I meant for you to have cold." + +"And pray who's _they_, madam?" shouted Uncle Paul, who was in +difficulties with buttons. + +"Well, sir, I was thinking it must be the smugglers. They've been here +several times before, when they have been crossing the moor with cargo; +but it couldn't be them, for they always leave a little box of tea or a +bit of silk, to pay for what they take. It must have been thieves, +sir--thieves." + +"Yes, madam; and they have taken my purse and gold watch too, besides +two suits of clothes. There, go on down. We'll join you soon. I want +to think what's to be done." + +The stairs creaked as Mrs Champernowne descended, and just then +something caught Rodd's eye--something bright and shiny, against the +leaves of a big old gazetteer lying upon the side-table. + +Rodd uttered an ejaculation. + +"Oh!" he exclaimed. + +"Something more gone?" cried the Doctor. + +"No, uncle; there's your watch. And here's your gold pencil-case too," +continued the boy, as he raised the corner of the book. "Why, they have +been turning the watch-ribbon into a marker, and somebody has been +writing here on the fly-leaf." + +"Thank goodness!" grunted Uncle Paul. "That's something saved out of +the fire. Never mind the writing. But they have taken our clothes." + +"It's in French, I think, uncle, but I can't quite make it out." + +"French!" cried Uncle Paul fiercely. "Why, of course! How stupid! I +might have known. We have been attacked in the night by a gang of old +Napoleon's scum. That man's bound to be the curse of my life. Don't +stand staring there, boy. Can't you see?" + +"No, uncle," said the boy sturdily. "What nonsense! Napoleon couldn't +have invaded England in the night to come and steal our clothes." + +"Bah! Idiot! Can't you see it's some of those scoundrelly French +prisoners who escaped yesterday? That vagabond of a boy perhaps that +you pampered off and were feeding with our good English provisions. Now +you see the consequences. The ungrateful rapparee--Oh no, but that's +Irish, and he'd be French." + +"Yes, uncle," said the boy thoughtfully, for his uncle's fulminations +fell blankly upon his ears as he stood trying to puzzle out some of the +pencilled words upon the fly-leaf of the book. + +"Here's _pardon_, uncle, and something else I can't make out, and +_changer_. Why, that means exchange! Yes, and lower down here's _sous_ +something, only it's written over `John Champernowne' and `his book'; +but that's in ink. What does _oreiller_ mean, uncle?" + +"Bolster," said Uncle Paul. "No: pillow," and he turned involuntarily +towards the bed, where, unperceived before, a scrap of something red +peered from beneath the clean white pillow-case. "Under the pillow," +said Uncle Paul, and stepping to the side of the bed he snatched up the +soft down cushion deeply marked by the pressure of his head. + +Catching up what lay beneath, he uttered a loud ejaculation and tapped +it sharply against the bed-post. + +"What have you got there, uncle?" + +"Pickle, my boy, it's my twenty guineas that we thought they'd stolen. +What in the name of forceps and lancets did they tie them up in this old +silk rag for? It's a bit of a pocket-handkerchief." + +"Why, uncle," cried Rodd, laughing, "it isn't going to be so bad, after +all. Somebody's been having a game with us." + +"Game, eh? Queer sort of a game, Pickle," cried Uncle Paul; and with +very little effort he tore open the silk envelope and poured out a +little heap of bright gold coins upon the bed. "Napoleons, by all +that's wonderful!" he cried. "Exchange! I begin to see now, boy. He's +taken my good gold money, whoever he is, and left this French trash. +Here, give me that book. Mind--don't drop my watch." + +"I have got it safe, uncle," replied the boy, handing the big book to +his uncle. + +"Humph!" grunted Uncle Paul. "Not quite such a scoundrel as he might +have been, whoever it is that wrote it. Exchange, eh? But there's been +no exchange about our clothes. Humph! All in French, of course. If he +had been a gentleman, and he couldn't understand plain English, he would +have written it in Latin. Bah! How I do hate that pernicketty French! +Let's see--let's see. Oh yes, here it all is. Ask pardon for two poor +prisoners trying to escape--um, um, um--years of misery. Generous +Englishman--some day--_remerciments_. Ah, it's all scribbled horribly-- +in the dark, I suppose. Oh, he's signed it, though, Pickle. `Des Saix, +Comte.' Oh, there are two of them, then. The other's signed his name +too--quite a different hand. `Morny des Saix, Vicomte.' H'm! Well, I +suppose they are gentlemen." + +"Noblemen, uncle." + +"Bah! Noblemen wouldn't do a thing like that!" + +"What are those other words, uncle, under the last name?" + +"Um--um--um! `May God bless you for what you did to-day. Your friend +till death.' Why, Pickle, you ought to have been able to read that +yourself." + +"I did, uncle, but I wanted to be sure that I was right. Why, that must +have been the boy I helped to escape." + +"Yes, and he dodged us home, and as good as robbed us." + +"Oh, uncle! Shame!" + +"How dare you, sir! What do you mean by it, Rodney? Do you forget who +I am, sir?" + +"No." + +"And pray who am I then, sir?" + +"Dear old Uncle Paul, who has got out of bed the wrong way this +morning!" + +"H'm--ha! Well, I suppose you are right, Pickle. I did feel in an +awful temper; but I don't feel quite so bad now that I have found my +watch." + +"And pencil-case, uncle." + +"Ah, yes, my boy. That was the gift of a very grateful old patient." + +"And then there are all those gold napoleons, uncle." + +"Bah! Trash! Base counters, good for nothing, like the ugly head +that's upon them," cried Uncle Paul irascibly. + +"But I say, uncle; it might have been worse." + +"But the clothes, my boy! The scoundrels! They'll go masquerading +about in our things, and escaping, I'll be bound. But stop a minute. +What did he say about exchange?" + +"Oh, that meant about the money." + +"Hullo! There's that wicked old woman again!--Well, Mrs Champernowne, +what is it now?" + +"The wood-shed, sir." + +"Well, I don't want the wood-shed. Light the fire yourself." + +"You don't understand me, sir. I went round there to get some kindling, +and there's quite a heap of old clothes there that these wicked people +have left behind." + +Uncle Paul chuckled, for he was beginning to beam again. + +"I say, Pickle, that accounts for the milk in the cocoa-nut. They must +have taken our things down into the old lady's wood-shed, and turned it +into a dressing-room." + +"Yes," cried Rodd; "and that young Viscount is quite welcome to mine." + +"Most generous, I am sure, sir," cried Uncle Paul sarcastically, "but +would you be kind enough to tell me who pays the bills for your +clothes?" + +"Why, you do, uncle, of course. But I say, uncle, I do hope they'll +escape; don't you?" + +"Wha-a-at!" + +"You do, uncle, only you pretend that you don't." + +"Pretend!" + +"Yes. Poor fellows! How horrible! To have to stoop to such a scheme +as that to get away! But after all, uncle, it's glorious and brave. +What an escape! Oh, how I should like to meet that poor fellow again!" + +"What, to give him up to the soldiers?" said Uncle Paul sarcastically. + +"Give him up to the soldiers!" cried the boy indignantly. "Why, I'd +sooner put on his old clothes, and tell them a lie!" + +"What!" cried Uncle Paul. + +"Well, I'd pretend to be him so as to cheat them, and make them take me +instead." + + + +CHAPTER SIX. + +WHAT DOES THAT SERGEANT WANT? + +"Humph!" grunted Uncle Paul, as they descended at last, to hear the fire +crackling in the kitchen, and the bright old copper kettle singing its +morning song. + +It was a lovely morning, with the sweet scents of the garden and moor +floating in at the little parlour window, and as Uncle Paul took what +his irreverent nephew called a good long sniff, he slowly and +ostentatiously, moved thereto by the sight of the clean white cloth and +the breakfast things, hauled up his great gold watch and examined its +face. + +"Twenty-five minutes, thirty-seven seconds, past six, Pickle. Rather +early for breakfast. Well, I suppose we must take things as they are; +but I am very, very sorry that they took away my old coat; it was a +great favourite. And those things of yours, sir, are much too good to +go climbing about tors and wading in streams. I wish that Count had +knocked at my door like a gentleman and asked me, as he should. He +should have had this suit instead. I'd a deal rather he had it than my +old shooting jacket." + +"Ha, ha!" + +"What are you laughing at, sir?" + +"Uncle Paul eating his words." + +"What, sir?" + +"You mean, uncle, that if Count de Saix had come and knocked at the door +and asked you to help him, you'd have called me up and sent me to the +prison for the soldiers." + +"Now look here, Rodney, that's impudence, sir, and--Ah! There's the +microscope, and the slides and the glasses. Have they been disturbed?" + +"No, uncle. Just as we left them. I almost wonder they didn't carry +off all those hydras." + +"_Hydrae_. Be careful about your Latin plurals. But look here, do you +want me to box your ears?" + +"No, uncle." + +"Then don't give me any more of your impertinent allusions. Hum--hum-- +hum! Half-past six. Very early for breakfast. But I begin to feel a +little _appetitlich_, as the Germans call it; don't you?" + +"Oh no, uncle," said Rodd, very mildly. "You said last night that we +had eaten enough to last twenty-four hours." + +"Now, look here, Rodney, you had the impudence to tell me a short time +ago that I'd got out of bed the wrong way. I am afraid it's you, sir, +that have done that, and if you don't take care we shall be having a +very serious quarrel.--There! Run, quick! That kettle's boiling over." + +But Rodd was half-way to the kitchen, and had snatched the kettle off +before his uncle had finished speaking, warned of what was happening as +he had been by the first angry hiss. + +"It's all right, uncle," he cried. "No harm done!" + +"But what's become of that old woman? She ought to be here now, seeing +about our breakfast." + +"Here she comes, uncle," and through the window they could see their +hostess hurrying back with a big basket from the direction of the +neighbour's cottage, and the next minute they heard her setting her load +upon her white kitchen-table. + +"Oh, I didn't know you were down, gentlemen," she cried, as she hurried +into the parlour. "I have been over to my neighbour's to see if she +could help me now that I am in such a fix." + +"Well, could she?" said Uncle Paul. + +"Oh yes, sir. As luck had it, she was baking yesterday, and she had +plenty of butter and eggs, besides a small ham which had just been +smoked." + +"Oh, come," said Uncle Paul, "we shall be able to keep you alive for a +few days longer, Pickle; and I suppose you will soon be able to let us +have breakfast, Mrs Champernowne?" + +"Oh yes, sir, very quickly. I shall only want time to fry the ham." + +Uncle Paul gave an involuntary sniff, as if the aroma of the fragrant +brown had floated to his nostrils. + +"But you can't tell, sir, how sorry I am that such a thing should have +happened to gentlemen staying in my house;" and the poor woman looked +appealingly to uncle and nephew, and back. + +"Don't you say another word about it, madam," replied Uncle Paul. "You +make us a nice clear cup of coffee to take away the taste of the night's +adventures." + +"I will indeed, sir, and I won't say another word, only thank you for +taking it so patiently and, if I might make the observation, in such a +lamb-like way." + +Rodd turned round very quickly, walked to the window, and began to +whistle softly. + +"I went over this morning to my neighbour's, sir, as you may see by the +basket." + +"Yes, madam," said Uncle Paul, who was staring hard at his nephew's back +and scratching one ear vigorously. + +"I told her all about it, of course, sir, and her master was there +having his breakfast before he went out peat-cutting, and if you'll +believe me, sir, he did nothing but laugh, and said he knew it was the +prisoners, sure enough, and he had the impudence to say that it was a +great blessing that they came to my cottage instead of to his, and lucky +for the prisoners too, for they'd got a better fit." + +"Ah, yes, Mrs Champernowne," said Uncle Paul, pulling out his watch and +frowning very hard in its face; "but do you think your neighbour's ham +will be as good as yours?" + +"Oh yes, sir--better, I expect, for it was a lovely little pig when it +was fatted up and killed last Christmas; one of those little fat, +short-legged, dunkey ones with turn-up snouts. My husband used to say +they were the Chinese breed, and that was why the ham and bacon always +went so well with China tea. You may depend upon that ham, sir, being +beautiful." + +"Very singular fact, Mrs Champernowne," said Uncle Paul blandly. "Then +perhaps you wouldn't mind cutting the rashers a little thicker. I am +rather ashamed of my nephew's appetite; but then you see he's only a +hungry, growing boy." + +Uncle Paul took out his watch again, and this time their landlady took +the hint, and hurried into the kitchen, from which delicious odours soon +began to escape, and in the midst of the examination upon the +window-sill, where the bright sun lit up the lenses of the microscope, +the magnified hydrae, with their buds and wondrous developments, were +set aside, to be superseded by the morning meal. + +"Ah, yes," said Uncle Paul, thoroughly mollified now by Mrs +Champernowne's preparations, "there are worse disasters at sea, Pickle, +and I'd worn that old coat off and on for a good many years." + +"You couldn't have worn it off and on, uncle," said Rodd dryly. + +"Look here, sir; if your mother, my dear sister, had had the slightest +idea that you would have grown up into such an impertinent, +two-edged-tongued young scrub, I don't believe she'd have died and left +you in my charge. I suppose you meant that to be very witty, sir. +Please understand that I was only speaking figuratively. Now we will +just spend about an hour over those specimens, and then, as it is so +beautiful and fine, we will be off on to the moor again. You will take +your fishing-rod, of course?" + +"Oh yes, uncle." + +"Then turn up the bottoms of those trousers before we start." + +"No, uncle; I shall put my leggings on over these," said Rodd coolly, +"and I should advise you to do the same." Both Uncle Paul's ears seemed +to twitch, and he scratched one as if it itched; but he said nothing, +for just then Mrs Champernowne tapped at the door, to enter smiling, +with a packet of letters. + +"Postman, sir," she said, placing the letters upon the table. "You +won't mind me speaking another word, sir?" she said. + +"Oh no, Mrs Champernowne," said her visitor, rather gruffly. "What is +it?" + +"I think you told me, sir, that the prisoners did not take any of your +valuables, your money, or anything of that sort?" + +"No, Mrs Champernowne," cried Rodd eagerly. "They took uncle's money, +but they left a lot of French napoleons instead." + +Uncle Paul made a snatch at a very big blue letter, and darted a furious +look at his nephew. + +"I am very, _very, very_ glad, sir," cried Mrs Champernowne, "and, poor +things, they are to be pitied, after all." + +She backed smilingly out of the room, and Uncle Paul held the big blue +letter, which was doubly sealed with red wax, edgewise at his nephew, as +if he were going to make a sword-cut at him. + +"Now, look here, Rodney," he said; "it has been dawning upon me for a +long time past that I have indulged and spoiled you, with the result +that you are growing into a most impertinent young rascal. Have the +goodness for the future, sir, to allow me to speak for myself. When I +require your conversational assistance, I will ask you for it." + +"Yes, uncle, and--" + +"Well, sir, what?" + +"Aren't you going to open that big letter, uncle? I want to know what's +the news." + +"What is it to you, sir?" cried Uncle Paul, who had been opening a very +keen-looking, peculiarly-shaped, ivory-handled knife. "Have the +goodness to let my business be my business. I have a very great mind to +put this letter,"--and as he spoke he carefully cut round the +seals--"and the other missives away in my writing-case until I am +alone--" Here Uncle Paul unfolded a letter upon the top of which was +stamped the Royal Arms, and smoothed it out upon the tablecloth--"and +read it in peace, without being pestered by an impertinent boy. Bless +my heart! Why, Pickle, my boy! Hark here! It's a letter from the +Government. Jump up and shout, you young dog! Hang Bony and all his +works! It's all right at last." + +"Why, what is it?" cried the boy excitedly, as his uncle went on eagerly +reading the bold round hand that formed the formal contents. + +"Hark here! `His Majesty's advisers see their way to recommend that the +long-deferred grant for the sea-going natural history expedition to the +West Coast of Africa to be carried out by Dr Robson at his earliest +convenience be made, and that the grant to the full amount will be paid +in to Dr Robson's bank as soon as formal application has been +received.' There, sir, what do you think of that? At last! At last! +Pickle, my boy, they say that everything comes at last to the man who +waits, and here it is." + +"Oh, Uncle Paul!" cried the boy, with sparkling eyes. "I am so glad--so +glad!" And as he spoke he dashed at the reader, to catch him tightly by +the two sides of the collar of his coat. + +"Mind my clean cravat, Pickle." + +"Bother your clean cravat, uncle!" shouted the boy. "Look here, sir; +you always promised me that if ever that money came and you went on that +expedition, you'd play fair." + +"What do you mean, sir, by your playing fair?" + +"You said, uncle," cried the boy, sawing the collar he held to and fro, +"that I should be very useful to you, and could help you no end over the +netting and dredging and bottling specimens, and that you'd take me with +you." + +"Ah," cried Uncle Paul, "that was when you were a nice, good, obedient +boy, and hadn't learnt to say sharp impertinent things, and didn't go +about setting free escaped prisoners and getting your uncle robbed." + +"Gammon, uncle! I see through you, and--I say, what does that sergeant +want?" For there was the tramp of heavy feet, and the non-commissioned +officer who had been at the head of the squad of men they had met, +marched past the cottage window. + + + +CHAPTER SEVEN. + +HE SAYS. + +"Eh? What?" exclaimed Uncle Paul excitedly. + +"You don't mean that he is coming here?" + +"He is, uncle," replied the boy nervously, and his colour began to go +and come. + +"Tut, tut, tut, tut!" ejaculated Uncle Paul. "This looks serious, my +boy. Well, I don't know. Perhaps he's only heard of the visit that has +been paid here." + +"I beg pardon, sir; here is Mr Windell, one of the sergeants of the +prison guard. Could he see you for a few minutes?" + +"Well, I'm rather--Yes, yes, show him in, Mrs Champernowne. Rodney, my +boy, you sit still and hold your tongue. I don't know what this man +wants; but you leave it to me." + +Rodd nodded his head, and fancied that he felt relieved, but he did not, +for his heart was beating faster than usual, and he was suffering from a +strange kind of emotion. + +"Good-morning, gentlemen," said the sergeant, saluting stiffly as he was +shown in. + +"Good-morning," said Uncle Paul stiffly. "Do you wish to see me?" + +"Yes, sir; only about a little matter upon the moor yesterday. After we +left you I did not feel satisfied about those prisoners." + +"Indeed?" said Uncle Paul coldly. + +"No, sir. The governor yonder likes to have things thoroughly done, so +about three hours afterwards I went over the ground again." + +"Yes," said Uncle Paul, without taking his eyes from the sergeant's +face. + +"And there I found out something else." + +Uncle Paul was silent, and Rodd's heart went on now in a steady +_thump_--_thump_--_thump_--_thump_. + +"Thought I'd come on, sir," said the sergeant, turning back to the door, +going outside, and returning with Rodd's creel, which he slowly opened +and took from within, neatly folded up, the canvas wallet. "Belong to +you gentlemen, don't they?" + +"Yes," said Uncle Paul slowly; "those are ours. Well?" + +Rodd's heart now seemed to stand quite still till the sergeant replied +to his uncle's query. + +"That's all, sir; that's all," said the sergeant, and Rodd's heart went +on again. "You had left them behind, and I thought I'd bring them on." + +"Thank you," said Uncle Paul quietly. "Very good of you, and I am much +obliged." + +"Don't name it, sir. Going to have another fine day, and hope the young +gentleman here will have plenty more sport. There's a lot of trout up +there, only they are terrible small. Good-morning, gentlemen." + +"Good-morning, sergeant," said Uncle Paul quietly, and Rodd's mouth +opened a little and then shut, but no sound came. "Wait a moment, +sergeant," continued Uncle Paul, thrusting his hand into his pocket and +feeling about amongst some five-and-twenty or thirty coins, all of which +felt too small, for he wanted a larger one; but feeling that, he took +hold of three together, when something made him stop short with his hand +half out of his pocket, and he thrust it back again. "Dear me," he +said, quickly now, "I really have no change." + +"Oh, there's no need for that, sir," said the sergeant. + +"Yes, yes," said Uncle Paul. "Rodd, my boy, have you half-a-crown in +your pocket?" + +"I think so, uncle," said the boy quickly; and then his face looked +blank. "No, uncle; I haven't anything at all," he cried in dismay. + +"Oh, pray don't mind, sir," said the sergeant, moving to the door. +"Good-morning, sir; good-morning. I don't want paying for a little +thing like that." + +"Stop, please," said Uncle Paul hurriedly. "Rodd, my boy, go and ask +Mrs Champernowne if she'll be kind enough to lend me half-a-crown." + +Rodd hurried out, feeling exceedingly hot, and with a peculiar moisture +in the palms of his hands, returning directly afterwards with the +required coin, though the unexpected demand had made their landlady open +her eyes rather widely. + +"There, that's right, sergeant," said Uncle Paul, "and I am sure my +nephew is much obliged. He wouldn't have liked to lose that creel." + +"Thank you, sir. Very glad I found it. Good-morning once more." + +The man saluted both, giving Rodd a very peculiar look which seemed to +go through him, and then turning upon his heels, he marched out of the +room and shut the door, while Uncle Paul sank back in his chair, took +out a clean red and yellow silk handkerchief, and wiped his forehead. + +"Rodney, my boy," he said, "I felt as if we had been doing something +underhanded, and nearly brought out three of those napoleons to pay that +man." + +"Oh, uncle," said the boy huskily; "it would have been like telling him +that the poor fellows had been here." + +"Yes, my boy, and that you had been helping them to escape." + +"Oh!" ejaculated Rodd, and he darted to the window. "No," he gasped, +with a sigh of relief. "He's gone." + +"Well, we knew he'd gone, boy." + +"Yes, uncle, but I was afraid that he'd stop talking to Mrs +Champernowne, and she would tell him about their coming here. But he +didn't stop, and he has gone right away." + +"Hah!" ejaculated Uncle Paul. "Well, you see how near we have been to +getting into trouble with the authorities; for of course they are very +strict over such things as these. There, now I must write an important +letter to send off in acknowledgment of that despatch; so you be off now +for about half-an-hour, and go and play like a good boy." + +"Yes, uncle," said Rodd, rather grumpily; and he went slowly out, with +the intention of getting somewhere on to the high ground where he could +watch the sergeant's red coat till he was out of sight. "I wish Uncle +Paul wouldn't talk to me like that," he muttered, as he went out of the +garden gate. "Go out and play like a good boy! It does make me feel so +wild! He'll be saying good little boy next, and I am past sixteen; and +he wasn't doing it to tease me either, for he was quite serious, what +with the prisoners, and the sergeant coming like that. Bother him! He +looked at me as he went away just as if he suspected that I'd left the +sandwiches and the fish where that poor fellow could get them. Here, I +mustn't let him see that I am following him. I'll go round by that +other track and get up behind those stones. Then I can see the whole +way to the prison. Oh, he didn't know anything, or else he'd have +spoken out. But that's the worst of doing what you oughtn't to. You +always feel as if everybody suspects you. Well, I didn't want to do any +harm, and Uncle Paul didn't think it was very wrong, in spite of his +grumbling about the French. If he had he wouldn't have called me +Pickle. It would have been Rodney, and his voice would have sounded +very severe, for he can be when he likes. Spoiled and indulged me! +That he hasn't!" + +The ascent was so steep by the track he had chosen that the boy was soon +high above the cottages, hurrying along by a ridge of stones which led +up to what looked like a young tor, so situated that it sheltered the +two cottage gardens, and the enclosed field or two where the neighbour's +cow was pastured, from the north and east wind, and also acted as a lew +for Mrs Champernowne's bees, which could reach their straw hive homes +comfortably without being blown out by the wanton breezes which +travelled across the moors. + +Rodd was pretty well out of breath when he reached the little tor, and +so he drew in a fresh supply as he dropped upon his knees and crawled +round the last stone to his proposed look-out, feeling certain he would +be able to see the sergeant's bright scarlet coat with its white belts, +as he marched straight away for the prison. + +He did see him, but not so far off as he had anticipated, and the sight +took his breath completely away again, for as he crept round he became +conscious of a peculiar scent that was not wild thyme but tobacco, and +before he realised what it was, he came plump face to face with their +late visitor, who was seated upon the soft close turf with his back +against a stone, basking in the sunshine, and evidently enjoying a rest. + +"Here we are again, then, sir!" he cried, in his sharp military way. "I +thought I'd just sit down here for a bit on the chance that you might +come up and like to have a word or two to say to me." + +He looked very hard at Rodd as he spoke, and the boy felt his face burn, +while the next moment there was a sensation as if the cool wind were +fanning his hot cheeks. + +"Come out to speak to me, didn't you, sir?" said the sergeant. + +Rodd was silent for a few moments, for his throat felt dry, while he +passed his tongue over his lips to moisten them. + +"No," he said, at last, with an effort. "I came up here to see if you +had gone, and watch you back to the prison." + +The sergeant laughed softly, and thrust one finger into the bowl of his +pipe, before sending out a fresh cloud of smoke. + +"Ah," he said, "I am not surprised. Well, here we are. Do you want to +say anything to me?" + +Rodd opened and shut his lips again, but no words came till he made an +effort, and then said, with his utterance sounding very dry-- + +"You want to speak to me?" + +"Right, sir. Yes, I do. You remember when I came upon you up yonder by +that pool?" + +Rodd nodded and frowned. + +"Well, I suppose you noticed that there was a hole at the bottom of +those rocks across there, where the little stream came out?" + +"Yes," said Rodd, with his brow puckering up. + +"Well, yesterday evening, as I said to your uncle, I went over the +ground again to see if I could find any track of those escaped +prisoners." + +Rodd nodded shortly. + +"Well, I took off my gaiters and shoes and stockings and waded across +the pool, and nearly doubled myself up to get into that hole; and after +I had gone a little way I found that there was quite a dry cave there +with streaks of light coming down from above between the piled-up +stones." + +Rodd nodded again. + +"Just in the highest part where the water did not reach, some one had +lit a fire with bits of ling and dry peat. It was still warm--at least, +the ashes were, and somebody had been busy cooking trout there, grilling +them, thriddled on a stick of hazel; and very curious it was too, for +somehow or other, the water, instead of running down, had been running +up backwards like, and carried with it that there fishing-basket of +yours, and the wallet, and laid them upon that nice dry sandy place +close up to the fire along by which there were ever so many heads of +those little fish, and their backbones. Rum, wasn't it? Do you think +an otter could have done that?" + +"No," said Rodd, after a few moments' pause; and he spoke sharply and +angrily. "No, I don't think that." + +"More don't I," said the sergeant dryly, and he half closed his eyes and +sent a faint little curl of smoke into the air. "Now, young gentleman, +what do you think would happen if I was to go yonder to the governor at +the prison, and say that I believed you had helped the King's enemies to +escape? You didn't, of course, eh?" + +Rodd moistened his lips again, and his frank young face looked very much +puckered and wrinkled as he pulled himself together and looked almost +defiantly at his questioner, who exclaimed-- + +"Well, you heard what I said." + +The boy nodded. + +"Well, speak out. You didn't, of course?" + +Rodd drew a deep breath, moistened his lips again, and then out the +words came. "Yes," he said, "I did!" + +"Hah!" said the sergeant, as he fixed the boy with his keen grey eyes +and spoke to him as if he were one of his recruits. "Well, I like that. +Spoken like a man. My old mother used to say, `Speak the truth, Tom, +and then you needn't be afraid of any man.' Look here, youngster, I am +only a soldier, and you are a young gentleman, or else you wouldn't be +visiting and making holiday here; but do you mind shaking hands?" + +"Yes," said Rodd hotly, "I know: I suppose I have done wrong, and you +have got your duty to do; so go and do it." + +"Here," cried the sergeant, "grip, boy, grip! I like you for all this +more and more. I had my duty to do, and I did it as far as I could; but +I was too late. The prisoners had escaped, and we have heard this +morning, the news being brought by a miserable-looking sneak of a fellow +who had come to the governor to ask for the reward for not taking them, +that they got down to Salcombe very late last night and boarded one of +the orange boats in the little harbour, where I expect they had friends +waiting for them, for the schooner sailed at once, and I dare say they +are within sight of a French port before now. Yes, I had my duty to do, +me and my lads, but the prisoners escaped, same as I would if I had been +in a French prison, shut up for doing nothing, and because our two +countries were at war. There, I am not going to blame you now it's all +over, as you own to it like a man. They both came to you, I suppose, +for a bit of help, and you gave it to them. But when I was on duty I +should have nailed you if I had caught you in the act. There, that'll +do. Thought I should like to tell you about it, and hold you like at +the point of the bayonet, and see what you'd say. I know it's precious +hard to tell the truth sometimes, and it must have been very hard here. +But you did it like a man. But I say: you never thought that basket and +wallet would tell tales when you left those poor beggars a mouthful to +eat; and I hope if there's any more war to come and I'm took, and make a +good try to slip away--I hope, I say, that I shall come upon some brave +young French lad who will do as good a turn to me as you did to those +poor fellows, who were making a run for freedom, and to get out of the +reach of our bayonets and guns." + +Rodd thrust his hand into his pocket, and flushed up now more than ever, +for the sergeant caught him by the wrist. + +"No, no, my lad," he cried; "none of that! I didn't come here to get +money out of you. I was a boy once myself. Only a common one, but +pretty straightforward and honest, or else I don't suppose I should have +won these three gold chevrons which I have got here upon my arm. Well, +I wouldn't have taken pay then for doing a dirty action, fond as I was +of coppers with the King's head on; and I wouldn't do it now. So don't +you make me set up my hackles by trying to offer me anything for this. +Besides, I've got a whole half-crown your uncle gave me, and I am not +even going to ask you whether he had a finger in this pie." + +"No, he hadn't--he hadn't indeed," cried Rodd warmly. "On my honour, +sergeant, I did it all." + +"All right, my lad, I'll take your word; but just you take my advice. +The law's law, and they're pretty sharp about here, so if you hear the +gun fire and the soldiers are out after any poor fellows who have +escaped, don't you get meddling with 'em again. Time I was off back." +And without another word the sergeant sprang up and strode away, leaving +Rodd watching him for a time and admiring the man's upright carriage and +bold elastic step, till happening to cast his eyes in another direction, +he found himself looking down upon Mrs Champernowne's cottage, and, +with letter in hand and straw hat on head, Uncle Paul, looking in all +directions as if in search of his missing boy. + + + +CHAPTER EIGHT. + +THE SALCOMBE BOATS. + +"I am very, very sorry, sir," said Mrs Champernowne. "Of course I am +only a poor widow, and I let my apartments to gentlemen who come down +fishing or to take walks for their health over the moor. But your stay +down here has been something more than that. It has been a real +pleasure to me ever since you and the young gentleman have been here. +And not only am I very sorry that you are going away, but it has quite +upset me to hear that you are going sailing away over the stormy seas, +searching for all kinds of strange things in foreign abroad." + +"Oh, come, come, Mrs Champernowne," cried Uncle Paul, as he saw the +poor woman lift up her apron and put one corner to her eye. "There +oughtn't to be anything in a naturalist's expedition to upset you." + +"Ah, you don't know, sir," said Mrs Champernowne, speaking to Uncle +Paul, but shaking her head sadly at Rodd all the while. "I have had +those who were near and dear to me go sailing away quite happy and +joyful like, just the same as you and Mr Rodney might, and never come +back again, for the sea is a very dangerous place." + +"Oh, perhaps so, and of course there are exceptions," said Uncle Paul; +"but as a rule people do come back safe." + +"I don't know, sir," said the old lady, shaking her head sadly. "The +sea is very unruly sometimes. Hadn't you better take my advice, sir, +and stop here? The moor's very big, and surely if you and the young +gentleman look well you'll be able to find plenty of things to fill your +bottles, without going abroad." + +"Can't be done, Mrs Champernowne," said Uncle Paul smiling. "Dartmoor +isn't the West Coast of Africa, nor yet the Cape of Good Hope, so, much +as we have enjoyed being here, we shall have to say good-bye, and live +in hopes of coming to see you again some day, for I haven't half worked +out the moor, nor yet a hundredth part." + +"I am very, very, very sorry," said the old lady again, "but no doubt, +sir, you know best. When do you think of going, sir?" + +"To-morrow morning, Mrs Champernowne. We can't let the grass grow +under our feet, can we, Rodd?" + +"No, uncle," was the reply; and the next morning the portmanteau was +packed, the fishing-rod and naturalist's nets tied up in a neat bundle, +a light spring cart was drawn up at the door, and uncle and nephew were +soon on their way to the cross roads to take their chance of finding +room upon the Plymouth coach, which came within a few miles of the +widow's cottage. + +They were fortunate, as it happened, and that evening they were safely +back at Uncle Paul's home, a pleasant little country house on the high +grounds overlooking the glorious harbour dotted with vessels, which +included several of the King's men-of-war, and within easy reach of the +docks. + +"Ah," cried Uncle Paul that evening, as he strolled out into his garden, +in company with Rodd, who was carrying a telescope that looked like a +small cannon; "that was a fine air up on the moor, my boy, but nothing +like this. Take a good long deep breath. Can't you smell the salt and +the seaweed? Doesn't it set you longing to be off?" + +"Well--yes, uncle," replied the boy, smiling and screwing up his face +till it was all wrinkled about the eyes; "but I begin to be a bit +afraid." + +"Afraid, sir? What of?" + +"That I shan't turn out such a good sailor as I should like to be." + +"Why, what do you mean? Now, look here, Rodd; don't you tell me that +you want to back out of going upon this trip." + +"Oh no, uncle," cried the boy eagerly. "I want to go, of course!" + +"But what are you afraid of?" + +"Well, you see, uncle, coasting about with you in a fisherman's lugger +for a few days, and always keeping within sight of land, is one thing; +going right away across the ocean is quite another." + +"Well, sir, who said it wasn't?" cried Uncle Paul. "What then?" + +"Suppose I turn ill, uncle?" + +"Well, sir, suppose you do. Am I not doctor enough to put you right +again?" + +"Oh, I don't mean really ill, uncle. I mean sea-sick; and it would seem +so stupid." + +"Horribly; yes. You'd better be! Pooh! Rubbish! Nonsense! You talk +like a great Molly. Now, no nonsense, Rodney. Speak out frankly and +candidly. You mean that now it has come to the point you think it too +serious, and you want to shirk?" + +"I don't, uncle; I don't, indeed, and I do wish you wouldn't call me +Rodney!" cried the boy earnestly. + +"I shall, sir, _as long as I live, if you play me false now_." + +"Oh, uncle, what a shame!" cried the boy passionately. "Play you false! +Who wants to play you false? I only wanted to tell you frankly that I +felt a bit afraid of not being quite equal to the sea. I want to go, +and I mean to go, and you oughtn't to jump upon me like this, and call +me Rodney." + +The boy stood before the doctor, flushed and excited, as he continued-- + +"You talk to me, uncle, as if you thought that I was a regular coward +and afraid of the sea." + +"Then you shouldn't make me, sir. Who was it said afraid? Why, you +have been out with me for days together, knocking about, in pretty good +rough weather too." + +"Yes, uncle, but that was all within sight of land." + +"What's that got to do with it? It's often much rougher close in shore, +especially on a rocky coast, than it is out on the main." + +"I wish I hadn't spoken," cried Rodd passionately. + +"So do I, sir." + +"I couldn't help thinking I might turn very sick for days, and get +laughed at by the crew and called a swab." + +"Oh," said Uncle Paul, laughing, "you talked as if you were afraid of +the sea, and all the time, you conceited young puppy, you mean that you +are afraid of the men." + +"Well, yes, uncle, I suppose that that really is it." + +"Humph! Then why didn't you say so, and not talk as if you, the first +of my crew that I reckoned upon, were going to mutiny and give it all +up?" + +"Give it up, uncle?" cried the boy. "Why, you know that I am longing to +go." + +"Ah, well, that sounds more like it, Pickle," said Uncle Paul, looking +sideways at the boy through his half-closed eyes. "Then I suppose it is +all a false alarm." + +"Of course it is, uncle," cried Rodd. + +"Well, we may as well make sure, you know, because once we are started +it won't be long before we are out of sight of land, and there'll be no +turning back." + +"Well, I don't want to turn back, uncle." + +"Then you shouldn't have talked as if you thought you might. Are you +afraid now?" + +"Not a bit, uncle. I am ready to start to-morrow morning." + +"Ah, well, you won't, my boy, for there's everything to do first." + +"Everything to do?" + +"Of course. It's not like taking a few bottles and pill-boxes and a net +or two to go up on the moor. Why, there's our ship to find first, and +then to get her fitted with our nets and sounding-lines and dredges and +all sorts of odds and ends, with reserves and provisions for all that we +lose. Then there's to collect a crew." + +"Oh, there'll be plenty of fellows down by the Barbican or hanging about +down there who will jump at going." + +"Don't you be so precious sanguine, my fine fellow. This will be all so +fresh that the men won't be so ready as you expect. The first thing a +seaman will ask will be, `Where are we bound? What port?'" + +"Well, uncle; tell them." + +"Tell them what I don't know myself unless I say Port Nowhere on the +High Seas! It will be all a matter of chance, Pickle, where we go and +what we do, and I may as well say it now, if any one gets asking you +what we are going to do, your answer is included in just these few +words--We are going to explore." + +Rodd nodded in a short business-like way. + +"All right, uncle; I'll remember," he cried promptly. "Then you are +going to hire a ship and engage a crew?" + +"Well," said Uncle Paul thoughtfully, "we are landsmen--I mean landsman +and a boy--but we may as well begin to be nautical at once and call +things by the sea-going terms. No, my boy, I am not going to engage a +ship--too big." + +"Why, you won't go all that way in a lugger, uncle?" + +"Bah! Rubbish!" cried Uncle Paul shortly. "Here, give me hold of that +glass." + +He took the telescope, drew out the slide to a mark upon the tube which +indicated the focus which suited his eye, and then as he began slowly +sweeping the portions of the harbour which were within reach he went on +talking. + +"Isn't there anything between a lugger and a ship, sir? You know well +enough if you talk to a sailor about a ship he'd suppose you meant a +full-rigged three-masted vessel." + +"Yes, of course, uncle. And a barque is a three-master with a mizzen +fore-and-aft rigged." + +"That's better, my lad. But what do you mean by fore-and-aft rigged?" + +"Well, like a schooner, uncle." + +"Good boy! Go up one, as you used to say at school. Well, what do you +think of a large schooner for a good handy vessel that can be well +managed by a moderate crew?" + +"Oh, I should think it would be splendid, uncle; and she'd sail very +fast." + +"That depends on her build and the way she is sailed, my boy. But +that's what I am thinking of having, Pickle." + +"But with a good crew, uncle." + +"Yes; I want the best schooner and the best crew that are to be had, my +boy." + +"But it will cost a lot of money, uncle." + +"Yes, Pickle; but I am proud to say that the Government has not been +mean in that respect, and if what they have granted me is not enough, I +shall put as many hundreds as are required out of my own pocket to make +up the deficiency, so that in all probability I shan't have a penny to +leave you, Pickle, when I die." + +"When you die!" cried the boy scornfully. "Who wants you to die? And +who wants you to leave me any money? I say, Uncle Paul, who's talking +nonsense now?" + +"How dare you, sir!" + +"Then you shouldn't say such things, uncle. Talking about dying! There +will be plenty of time to talk about that in a hundred years." + +"Well, that's a very generous allowance, Pickle, and if we get such a +schooner as I want, with a clever crew, and you work hard with me, why, +we ought to make a good many discoveries by that time. A hundred years +hence," continued Uncle Paul thoughtfully, as he apparently brought his +telescope to bear upon a sloop of war whose white sails began to be +tinged with orange as the sun sank low; but all the time he was peering +out through the corners of his eyes to note the effect of his words upon +his nephew. "But let me see--a hundred years' time. Why, how much +older will you be then, Pickle?" + +"Why, just the same as you would, uncle; a hundred years older than I am +now. Pooh! You are making fun of me. But I say, uncle, be serious. +How are you going to manage to get your schooner?" + +"Set to work, and lose no time, my boy. But I am rather puzzled at the +present moment, and I am afraid--" + +Uncle Paul lowered the glass as he spoke, and turned his eyes +thoughtfully upon his nephew, who had uttered a low peculiar sound. + +"Of being sea-sick, uncle?" Uncle Paul smiled. + +"I suppose that's what you call retaliation, young gentleman. Well, no, +sir, I'm not afraid of that--at least, not much. I remember the first +time I crossed the Channel that I was very ill, and every time I have +been at sea since I have always felt that it would be unwise to boast; +but I think both you and I can make our voyage without being troubled in +that way. But we won't boast, Pickle, for, as they say, we will not +holloa till we are out of the wood. Let me see; isn't there an old +proverb something about a man not boasting till he taketh off his +armour?" + +"I think so, uncle, but I cannot recollect the words." + +"Well, I don't want any armour, my boy, but I do want a well-found +schooner--a new one if I can get it; if not, one that will stand a +thorough examination; and I don't know that such a boat's to be got just +now it's wanted. There are plenty of ramshackle old things lying about +here, but I want everything spick-and-span ready for the extra fitting +out I shall give her. Copper-fastened, quick-sailing, roomy, and with +good cabin accommodation so that we can have a big workshop for the men +who help us, and a sort of study and museum for ourselves. Now, Pickle, +where shall we have to go to find such a craft? Portsmouth--London? +What about Southampton?" + +"Southampton. Yes. Some fine yacht, uncle." + +"No, boy. She'd be all mast and sails. Do well for a coaster, but I +want an ocean-going craft, one that will bear some knocking about. A +cargo boat whose hold one could partition off for stores. Now then?" + +There was silence for about a minute, and then Uncle Paul spoke again. + +"There, out with it, boy, at once. Don't waste time. Say you don't +know." + +"But I think I do know, uncle," cried the boy. + +"Eh? What? Where? Tchah! Not you!" + +"But what about one of those boats the French prisoners escaped in?" +cried Rodd eagerly. + +"Eh? What? One of those trim orange boats that go on the Mediterranean +Trade, that they build at Salcombe?" + +"Yes, uncle. Don't you remember that one we were looking at a few +months ago, that came in here after the storm, to get a new jibboom?" + +"Why, of course I do, Pickle!" cried Uncle Paul eagerly. "Think of +that, now! Why, I might have been fumbling about with a hammer for +months and not found what I wanted, and here are you, you impudent young +rascal, proving that you are not quite so stupid as I thought, for you +hit the right nail on the head at once." + + + +CHAPTER NINE. + +CAPTAIN CHUBB. + +The next day was spent in Plymouth, and letting the idea of a visit to +Salcombe rest in abeyance for a time, Uncle Paul called on different +shipping agents, made inquiries in the docks, looked over two or three +small vessels that he was assured would be exactly the thing he wanted, +and which could be handed over to him at once if decided on; and at +last, utterly wearied out, he returned home with Rodd very much +impressed by the feeling that it was much easier to say what he +required, than to get his wants supplied. + +He was a little better after they had had a good hearty tea meal, but +there was a great deal of truth in Rodd's mental remark that Uncle Paul +was as cross as two sticks. Rodd quite started, feeling as he did that +he must have spoken aloud, and Uncle Paul have heard his words, for the +doctor turned upon him sharply, stared him full in the face, and +exclaimed-- + +"Now, look here, sir; didn't I explain to each of those agents exactly +the sort of vessel I wanted before they gave me their orders to go and +view the craft where they lay in dock or on the mud?" + +"Yes, uncle, you told them exactly," replied Rodd. + +"Do I look like an idiot, Rodd?" + +"No, uncle. What a question!" + +"Then how dare the scoundrels deal with me as if I didn't know what I +was about! I said a schooner as plain as I could speak." + +"You did, uncle." + +"And one sent me to see that ramshackle old brig that looked as if it +might have been a tender out of the Armada, and the two others sent me +to see a barque that would want twice as big a crew as I should take, +and the other to look over that abominable old billy-boy that you +couldn't tell bow from stern, which so sure as she bumps upon a sandbank +would melt away like butter. Thinking of nothing else but making a bit +of commission, ready to sell one anything; but I am not going to be +tricked like that.--Yes, what do you want? What is it?" + +For the neat handmaid who attended on the doctor's wants had tapped at +the door, and receiving no answer from her master, whose voice she could +hear declaiming loudly, opened the door and walked in, with-- + +"Somebody wants to see you, sir, if you please." + +"Then tell somebody I don't please," said the doctor shortly. + +"Yes, sir," said the maid, going. + +"No, stop! I don't want to be rude, even if people have put me out. +What does Mrs Somebody want?" + +"Please, sir, it isn't a Mrs, it's a Mister," said the girl. + +"Go and see him, Rodd," said the doctor shortly. "I expect it's +somebody wants subscriptions, and I haven't got any." + +"Please, sir," interposed the maid, "the--er--gent--person--said he'd +heard say that you wanted a captain." + +Uncle Paul grunted, frowned, and then in a surly tone exclaimed-- + +"Well, there, show him in." + +The next minute the maid re-opened the door, showing in a heavy, +sun-tanned, middle-aged man, who thrust the cap he carried into the +yawning pocket of a dark blue pea-jacket, stared hard at the doctor, +glanced at Rodd, and then turning sharply on his heels he stood with his +back to the latter, stiff, squared, and sturdy, looking as the boy +thought like a hop-sack set on end, and stared at the maid where she +stopped, literally fixing her with his eyes for a few moments, before, +quite startled at the fierceness of his gaze, she darted out, closing +the door loudly. + +"Business. Private!" literally growled the visitor. + +"Well, what is it?" said the doctor shortly. + +"'Eard you wanted a skipper, and come up." + +"Well," said Uncle Paul, looking very hard at his unprepossessing +visitor, while Rodd felt as if he wanted to laugh, but held the desire +in check, "I may want one by and by, and a crew too; but I must have a +ship first." + +"What sort?" + +"Well, you are pretty blunt," said the doctor. + +"Yes," said the visitor, with a nod; and he waited, but turned his eyes +from the doctor and looked very hard at the nearest chair. + +"Ah, yes," said the doctor. "Sit down, Captain--Captain--" + +The doctor waited for an answer, but the only answer made was by a +movement, his visitor taking two steps towards the chair, and plumping +down so heavily that the brass casters creaked. + +The doctor glanced at his nephew, and then at the stranger, who seemed +to be frowning at him with all his might. + +"Er--what did you say your name was, captain?" + +"Didn't say," said the visitor huskily. "Wanter know?" + +"Well--yes," said the doctor. "I don't see how we are to transact +business without." + +"Chubb, Jonathan." + +"Well, Captain Chubb?" + +"Plymouth." + +"Oh, I see; Captain Chubb, of Plymouth," continued the doctor. + +"Right. Go on." + +"Well, I gave you to understand that I wanted a ship before I engaged a +captain." + +"Skipper; not R.N." + +"I see; but I wished to be polite," said the doctor. + +"Skipper," grunted the man. + +"Where have you sailed?" asked the doctor. + +"Everywhere." + +"Ah! Then you have had plenty of experience." + +The visitor nodded, and the doctor was going to speak again, but the +visitor interposed with a sidewise nod in the direction of Rodd, and +said-- + +"Your boy?" + +"Well, yes, in a way," replied the doctor. + +The captain grunted. + +"Boys always are," he said, and Rodd turned upon him angrily. + +"I said in _a_ way, not in _the_ way," muttered the doctor. + +"'Most the same," growled the captain. "A boy, the boy, means boy. +What sort of a ship? First, where do you want to go?" + +"I don't quite know myself," replied the doctor, "so we will say as you +did, everywhere." + +"Right," said the captain. "What for?" + +"Why do you ask?" replied the doctor, rather tartly. + +"Had four offers. Wouldn't take them." + +"Why?" asked the doctor. + +"Smuggling contraband." + +"Oh, I see," said the doctor quickly. "Well, it's nothing of that +sort." + +"When do you sail?" + +"As soon as I can get a ship." + +"Plenty lying about waiting for cargo. Take your choice." + +"That seems to be easier said than done, captain, for I am hard to +please." + +"So'm I," said the visitor, staring hard at Rodd, beginning with the +crown of his head and then looking him slowly down where he sat till he +reached the carpet by Rodd's right foot, and then making his eyes cross +over, he began at the toe of the boy's left foot and slowly looked him +up to where he had started at the top of the boy's forehead, where a +tickling sensation had commenced, consequent upon the starting out of a +faint dew of perspiration. + +"I'm glad to hear it," said the doctor, "for I want a well-found craft, +new or nearly so, built of the best materials." + +"Good; ought to be. What sort?" + +"Well, I should like a large schooner, fast and with plenty of room +below." + +"Cargo?" grunted the captain. + +"No. Provisions, etcetera," said the doctor, who was beginning to feel +annoyed. + +"Ho!" came in a grunt, and then after a keen look at Rodd's uncle, he +uttered the one word, "Weepens?" + +"Weepens?" said the doctor. + +"Yes. Long Tom and small-arms." + +"Oh, arms. Yes, I should certainly have one of those big swivel guns +amidships, and a couple of smaller ones, as well as muskets, cutlasses +and boarding pikes." + +So far the captain's features seemed as if they had been carved out of +solid mahogany, but now they began to relax; his lips parted, and he +showed a small even set of beautifully white teeth, while his eyes +looked brighter to Rodd and seemed to twinkle; but he remained silent. + +"Well," said the doctor, "what are you laughing at?" + +He checked the word which had nearly escaped his lips, because he +thought it would be rude, and he did not say grinning. + +"Cat," said the man solemnly, and to Rodd's great discomposure he turned +to him and winked. + +"Cat?" said the doctor sharply. + +"Ay, ay! Out of the bag." + +"I don't understand you," said the doctor warmly. + +"Won't do for me, master. Not in my way." + +"Well," said the doctor, "I am afraid I must say you are not in my way." + +"Poor beggars!" + +"Well, really, my good man," began the doctor, "I am a bit of a student, +and take a good deal of interest in natural history. Cats may be poor +beggars, but that is no business of mine." + +"Yes, if you are going to sail. Think of your crew." + +"I am thinking of my crew, and I want to engage one," said the doctor. + +"Men hate black cats. Unlucky." + +"I have heard of that superstition before, Captain Chubb," said the +doctor, "but that seems to be quite outside our business now. As a +captain--or skipper--I should have thought you would have been above +such childish notions." + +"Am," said the man. "T'other won't do for me. I've seen it all. Won't +get a skipper from this port." + +"Why?" said the doctor indignantly. "I am ready to give an experienced +captain good payment." + +"Want commission." + +"Oh, nonsense! I couldn't pay on commission." + +"Nowt to me. That's what a skipper would want. Ought to be ashamed of +yourself." + +"Well, of all--" began the doctor; but the skipper did not let him +finish. + +"Too bad," he said, growling; "and to take a boy like that!" + +"My good fellow," said the doctor, "if I choose to take my nephew with +me upon a natural history expedition--" + +"Natural history expedition! Catching blackbirds! Oh, I say!" + +He shook his head slowly at the doctor, whose face grew so red with +wrath as he turned towards Rodd, and looked so comical, that the boy +could not contain himself, but bent his face down into his hands and +burst into a roar of laughter. + +"You are a nice 'un," grunted the captain, shaking his head now at Rodd. +"You'll grow into a beauty!" + +It was the boy's turn to look angry now, and he glanced from the captain +to his uncle and back. + +"Look here, youngster," cried the captain; "Guinea Coast, eh?" + +"Possibly," said the doctor. + +"Bight of Benin?" + +"Maybe," said the doctor, the short speech seeming contagious. + +"Ketch the fever?" + +"Probably," said the doctor. + +"Both on yer." + +"Well, sir, I shall risk that," continued the doctor. + +"Both on yer off your heads, seeing niggers. Rattling their chains." + +"Are you mad, man?" cried the doctor. "Yes." + +"I thought so." + +"Makes me. Call yourself a Christian! Give it up, and do something +honest." + +"Well, of all--" cried the doctor again. + +"Good five guineas better than five hundred got by buying and selling +your fellow-creatures," continued the captain, who was growing quite +fluent. "Go to Bristol with you! Won't do for me." + +"Mr--I mean, Captain Chubb," began the doctor, "allow me to tell you +that you have done nothing but insult me ever since you have been here." + +"Honesty," grunted the captain. + +"Honesty is no excuse for rudeness, sir. Now have the goodness to go." + +"Going," said the captain, rising. "But you are a bad man. To take +that boy with you too! Shame!" + +"Will you have the goodness to tell me what you mean, sir?" + +"No good to bully, sir. I know. Off on the slave trade." + +"What!" cried the doctor. + +"But look out. King's cruiser will nab you. Sarve you right." + +He moved stiffly, and took two steps towards the door, but stopped and +turned sharply upon Rodd, clapped his big hairy hand on the boy's +shoulder, and gripped it fast. "He's a bad 'un, boy. Don't go." Rodd +glanced at his uncle, who was staring with bewilderment, while he, who +during the last few minutes had seen clearly what their visitor meant, +burst into another roar of laughter and gripped the skipper by the +jacket, as he turned to the doctor. + +"No, no," he stuttered. "No, no; don't go, captain! Uncle Paul, can't +you see? He thinks you are going to the West Coast to buy slaves!" + +"Well!" cried Uncle Paul, his voice sounding like ten ejaculations +squeezed into one--"Well!" + + + +CHAPTER TEN. + +AT CROSS PURPOSES. + +Captain Chubb stood looking back at Uncle Paul, then at Rodd, then back +at Uncle Paul. + +After that he gave a slow, puzzled scratch at his shaggy head as if hard +at work trying to make out a mystery, before turning once more to Rodd. + +"I say, youngster," he cried, "you don't mean that, do you?--Warn't I +right?" + +"Right? No!" cried Rodd, laughing more heartily than ever. "The idea +of Uncle Paul going out with a slaver!" + +"Did you mean that, Captain Chubb?" said Uncle Paul, beginning +indignantly, and then softening down as he caught sight of his nephew's +mirthful face. + +"Allus says what I mean," grunted the captain. "Then I was all wrong?" + +"Wrong, yes," said Uncle Paul. "We were all at cross purposes." + +"Ho!" ejaculated the captain, and he took off his cap that he had put on +with a fierce cock, turned it over two or three times in his hands, and +then looking into it read over the maker's name to himself, as if fully +expecting that that would help him out of his difficulty. + +"Say, squire," he said; "I didn't mean to be so rude." + +"No, no, of course not," cried Uncle Paul. "There, there; sit down +again. It was all a mistake. Perhaps we shall understand one another +better now." + +"Well, I don't know," grunted the skipper. "Better go perhaps." + +"No, no, man; I'm not offended. You thought I was a blackguardly +ruffian who wanted to trap you into commanding a slaving craft for me, +so that I could engage in that horrible trade of baying and selling my +fellow-creatures; and you spoke out like a man. Here, shake hands, +Captain Chubb. I honour you for your outspoken manly honesty." + +"Mean it?" grunted the skipper, hesitating. + +"Mean it, yes," said Uncle Paul, "and I hope this will be the beginning +of our becoming great friends." + +"Humph!" grunted the captain, and extending his heavy hand he gave Uncle +Paul a shake with no nonsense about it, for though Rodd's uncle did not +wince, he told the boy afterwards that it was the most solid shake he +had ever had in his life. + +Rodd fully endorsed it, as he knew directly after exactly what the +skipper's salute meant, for Captain Chubb, after releasing the uncle's +hand, extended what Rodd afterwards said was a paw, to the lad himself. + +"Well, now then, Captain Chubb." + +"Very sorry, sir, I'm sure. Thought I saw broken water and a shoal. +Hadn't I better go?" + +"No, no, captain," cried Uncle Paul. "I am beginning to think you are +just the man I want." + +"Ho!" said the skipper. "Mebbe. Let's see." + +"Well," continued Uncle Paul, "I want a vessel, a schooner. Do you know +of a likely one that could be purchased and made ready at once for a +trip down the West Coast?" + +Captain Chubb looked hard at the speaker, then at Rodd, with the effect +of making the boy feel as if he must laugh, for there was something so +thoroughly comical in the stolid face, that nothing but the dread of +hurting the visitor's feelings kept him from bursting into a roar, +especially as, after fixing him with his eyes, the skipper seemed to be +taking careful observations, looking up at the ceiling as if in search +of clouds, at the carpet for sunken rocks, and then, so to speak, +sweeping the offing by slowly gazing at the four walls in turn. + +"Schooner," he said at last gruffly. + +"Yes," said Uncle Paul; "a smart, fast-sailing schooner." + +"Well-found," grunted the skipper. + +"Of course, and with a good crew." + +"_And_ a good crew," growled the skipper. + +"Yes. Can you show me where I can get such an one?" + +"No. Look-out." + +He picked up and put on his cap again, took it off, and looked in the +lining, and then gave his right leg a smart slap. + +"Dunno as I don't," he roared. "What do you say to a horange boat?" + +"Orange boat?" cried Rodd. "Why, uncle's been thinking of one of +those!" + +"Well, why not?" said the captain; "a Saltcomber?" + +"Yes," cried Rodd. + +"Well-built, fast, plenty of room below for cargo or what not, plenty of +provisions and water, but no guns." + +"That's just the sort of vessel I want," cried Uncle Paul. "Do you +think one's to be had over there?" + +"Sure on it. See one last week as they was just getting up her standing +rigging." + +"What, a new one?" cried Rodd. + +"Ay. Fresh launched, and being made ready for sea." + +"Capital!" cried Uncle Pad. "Who does she belong to?" + +"Ship-builder as yet." + +"And what would be her price?" + +"Dunno. All depends," grunted the captain. "Most likely as much as the +builder could get; but if a man went with the money in his pocket, or +say in the bank, ready to pay down on the nail, he could get a smart +craft that would do him justice at a fair working price. What do you +say to coming over and having a look at her?" + +"Yes. How are we to get there? By coach?" + +"Tchah!" ejaculated the skipper. "Who's going in a coach when he can be +run over in one of our luggers? You say the word, and I have got a +friend with a little fore-and-after as only wants him and a hand and +mebbe me to give a pull at a sheet. He'd run you over in no time." + +"By all means, then, let's go," said Uncle Paul, to Rodd's great +satisfaction. + +"Well, yes," growled the skipper. "But who's a-going with you?" + +"My nephew," said Uncle Paul. + +"Ah, yes; and I suppose he's a good judge of such a craft, and could +vally her from keel to truck. Don't seem a bad sort of boy, but he +won't do. Nay, squire, you want somebody as you can trust. A'n't you +got an old friend, ship-owner or ship's husband--man who's got his head +screwed on the right way, one you knows as honest and won't take a +hundred pounds from t'other side to sell the ship for them?" + +"Well, no; I'm afraid I don't know such a man," said Uncle Paul. + +"Have to find one," grunted the skipper. "Won't do to buy a ship with +your eyes shut. Got yourself to think of as well as your money. You +don't want to engage a skipper and a crew of good men and true, and +drownd them all at sea." + +"Well, no," said Uncle Paul dryly; "our ambitions don't lie in that +direction, do they, Rodd?" + +"No, uncle, but no man would be such a wretch as to sell you a ship that +wasn't safe." + +"Not unless he got the chanst," said the skipper, frowning. "I know +some on them, and what they have done, and I don't want to command a +craft like that. Been at sea too long." + +"Well, then," said Uncle Paul, "you must have had great experience, and +could judge whether a schooner's good or not." + +"Dessay I could," said the skipper, "but I aren't perfect." + +"But you ought to be a good judge," said Uncle Paul. + +"Mebbe, but I wouldn't go by my own opinion if it was my trade instead +of yourn." + +"But look here," cried Uncle Paul, "I should like you to see the vessel +and act for me." + +"Tchah! Not likely, squire. What do you know about me?" + +"Well, not much, certainly," said Uncle Paul, "and I should want a +character with you as to your being a good seaman." + +"Of course; and if you didn't like me, and I warn't up to my work, why, +you could get rid of me. But that's a very different thing to buying a +ship." + +"Yes," said Uncle Paul, "but what about the ship-builder? Is he an +honest man?" + +"Oh yes, I think so." + +"Couldn't he give good references?" + +"Well, yes. Old established; built a lot of craft. Dessay he'd find a +few to say a word for him." + +"And I suppose I could have the opinion of some well-known ship valuer?" + +"Yes," grunted the skipper, "but he's only in trade. You want to know +what some old sailor says." + +"Such as you," cried Rodd. + +The skipper looked at the boy and smiled. + +"Well, mebbe," he said, "but I don't want the job." + +"Well, we'll talk about that another time," said Uncle Paul. "What I +want is for you to help me by going over with us to have a look at the +schooner." + +"Ah!" said the skipper. + +"And you may as well give me a reference or two to somebody who knows +your abilities--somebody well-known in Plymouth, a ship-owner, somebody +for whom you have sailed. Will you do this?" + +"Ay," said the skipper. + +"Well, whose name will you give me? To whom shall I apply?" + +"Anybody. Everybody in Plymouth." + +"That's rather wide," said Uncle Paul. + +"Wider the better," said the skipper. "You ask the lot what they thinks +of Captain Chubb." + +As he spoke the skipper rose and put on his cap, but took it off again +quickly. + +"Time to-morrow will you be ready to start?" he said. + +"At your time," said Uncle Paul promptly. + +"Say nine?" asked the captain. + +"Certainly; nine o'clock to-morrow morning," replied Uncle Paul. + +"Good. I will be off the landing-place at the Barbican with a boat. +Night, sir. Night, youngster. Natural history expedition, eh? And I +thought you was going blackbirding! Haw, haw, haw!" + +This last was intended for a derisive laugh at himself, but it sounded +like three grunts, each louder than the last. + +The next minute the skipper was outside, and his steps were heard +growing distant upon the gravel path. + +"Well, what do you think of our captain, eh, Rodd?" + +"I think he's a rum 'un, uncle; but he isn't our captain yet." + +"No, my boy, but if I have my way he will be, and if I hear that he's a +skilful navigator, for I want no further recommendation. The way in +which he, an old experienced hand, one who would be able to see at a +glance how thoroughly I should be at his mercy if he were a trickster +whose aim was to make as much money out of the transaction as he could, +proved that he was as honest as the day and ready to lay himself open to +every examination, that alone without his display of honest indignation +when he suspected me of being about to engage in that abominable +traffic--there, I want no more. As these sea-going people say, Pickle, +Captain Chubb is going to hoist his flag on board my schooner, for as +far as I can judge at present he seems to be the man in whom we shall be +able to trust." + + + +CHAPTER ELEVEN. + +THROUGH THE STORM. + +"It's enough to make a man say he'll throw up the whole affair," cried +Uncle Paul, running his fingers in amongst his grizzly hair and giving +it a savage tug. + +"Uncle! Why, what's the matter now?" + +"Yes, you may well say what's the matter now! Everything's the matter. +The worry's almost maddening." + +"What, is there anything fresh, uncle?" + +"There, don't you take any notice, boy. I get regularly out of heart. +There's always something wrong. It's as if we were never to be off. +All these weary, weary months gone slowly dragging on." + +"Why, uncle, they seem to me to go like lightning," cried Rodd. + +"Oh, yes, of course. You are a boy, with plenty of time before you. I +am getting an old man, and with little time to spare to do all the work +I want to. I seem to get not a bit farther." + +"Why, you do, uncle. It's astonishing what a lot we have done. Let's +see; it's just fifteen months since you bought the schooner." + +"Fifteen, boy? You mean fifty." + +"Fifteen, uncle; and she was nothing like finished then." + +"No, and as soon as the men knew that she was sold, I believe they made +up their minds to spin the job out as long as they could." + +"Oh, but, uncle, they did it all very beautifully; and see what a lot of +alterations you had made." + +"Had made, indeed! Wasn't I led on into having them done by that old +scoundrel Chubb?" + +"No, uncle. He always consulted with you first, and advised this and +that so as to make the vessel better." + +"Humph!" grunted Uncle Paul. + +"Then see what a lot you had done, fitting up the work-room, and the +bottles and tanks, and getting in the dredging apparatus. It does seem +a long time to you, but see what a lot there was to do. You know you +were never satisfied." + +"I was, sir! Don't you get accusing me of such things, Rodney. You +grow more impertinent every day. Now put a regular check upon yourself, +sir. If you are like this as a boy I don't know what you are going to +be when you grow to be a man." + +"Well, uncle, I won't say another word about it." + +"Ah! No sulking, sir! I command you to go on speaking at once." + +"Very well, uncle; but you did say that you would have everything of the +best, and that nothing should be left undone, to hinder the expedition +from being successful." + +"Did I say so, Rodd?" + +"Why, yes, uncle, over and over again." + +"Well, well, I did mean it. But I am getting quite out of heart. Every +day it seems as if there is something fresh to throw us back. Now it's +stores; now it's something else wants painting; now one of the crew +wants a holiday, just at a time too when things are so nearly ready that +I might want to start at any moment." + +"Well, I shall be glad when we do get off now, uncle," said the boy +thoughtfully. + +"Then you had better give up thinking about it, boy. It looks to me +like another six months before we can be ready." + +"Oh no, uncle! Captain Chubb said to me yesterday that if I wanted to +get anything else to take with me I must get it at once." + +"Then don't you believe him, Rodd. He's a dilatory old impostor. I +don't believe he means for me to go at all. By the way, did you have +the men up and give them that big medicine chest?" + +"Yes, uncle; the day before yesterday." + +"Oh, and were those little casks of spirits got into the store-room?" + +"Yes, uncle. I saw the men get them on board myself." + +"That's right. But look here, Pickle; were you with them all the time?" + +"Yes, uncle. You told me to be, before you went up to London." + +"That's right, Rodd. But--er--did you--did you hear the men make any +remark about them?" + +"No, uncle; but I saw them smell the bung-holes and look at one another +and laugh." + +"Humph!" said the doctor, smiling. "By the way, I think I'll go on +board now and have a look round. There are several things I want to see +to, those casks and kegs among the rest." + +"They were all put just as you gave orders, uncle." + +"Yes; but I want to test the spirits all the same. Here, we may as well +go on board at once." + +"Very well," cried the boy eagerly. "Is there any little thing we can +take with us?" + +"No, my boy. As far as I am concerned, I think I can say everything is +ready." + +It was not long before the doctor and his nephew were down at the +landing-place and being rowed across the harbour to where a beautifully +trim full-sized schooner lay moored to one of the great buoys; and on +coming alongside they were hailed by Captain Chubb, whose face seemed to +shine with animation as he helped his chief on board. + +"Morning, sir!" he cried. "I was just wishing that you would come on +board." + +"Bah!" exclaimed Uncle Paul. "What wants doing now?" + +"Nothing. Not as I know of." + +"Oh, are you sure?" said Uncle Paul sarcastically, "Sartin, unless you +have got some more bottles or cranky tackle to be stowed away, sir." + +"Oh, indeed," said Uncle Paul shortly. "You don't mean to say you have +done at last?" + +"Me, sir? Why, I was ready six months ago, only you had always got some +new scheme you wanted fitted in." + +"Ah, well, never mind about that now," cried Uncle Paul. "Then we may +set sail any day?" + +"'Cept Friday, sir. The men wouldn't like that. To-night if you like." + +"Ah, well, we won't go to-night," said the doctor. + +"Only give your orders, sir," said the captain shortly. "Like to take a +look round now? Fresh provisions are all on board." + +"Oh no," said Uncle Paul, "I know it all by heart." + +"Looks a beauty now, don't she, sir?" + +"Oh yes, she looks very well. Here, Rodd, come down with me into the +work-room." + +The doctor strode off aft at once, the captain following slowly with the +boy; and as their chief descended the cabin stairs Captain Chubb cocked +his eye at his young companion. + +"Bit rusty this morning," he whispered. + +"Yes; uncle's getting out of patience," whispered back Rodd. + +"No wonder," said the captain. "Well, 'tarn't my fault. I never see +such a doctor's shop and museum as he's made of the craft." + +"Now, Rodney!" came from below sharply. + +"Coming, uncle!" cried the boy, snatching at the brass rail, which, like +every bit of metal about the beautiful vessel, shone as brightly as if +it were part of a yacht. + +The doctor was standing at the foot of the stairs with his hand upon a +door, which he had just unlocked, and he led the way into a well-lit +portion of the vessel which had originally been intended for the stowage +of cargo, but which was now fitted up with an endless number of +arrangements such as had been deemed necessary for the carrying out of +the expedition. + +One portion was like a chemical laboratory. Upon dresser-like tables +fitted against the bulkhead were rows of railed-in bottles and jars, and +beneath them new bright microscopes and other apparatus such as would +gladden the heart of a naturalist. But the doctor gave merely a cursory +glance at these various objects, with whose arrangement he had long been +familiar, and made his way to where, set up on end upon a stout bench, +were about a dozen specially made spirit casks, each fitted with its tap +and a little receptacle hung beneath to catch any drops that might leak +away. + +"Here, I want to test these," said the doctor; "and, by the way, ask +Captain Chubb to step down." + +There was no need, for almost at the same moment the captain's heavy +step was heard upon the metal-covered cabin stairs. + +"Anything I can do, sir?" he asked, in his gruff way. + +"Yes, look here, captain," said the doctor, and he took a bright glass +measure from where it hung by its foot in a little rack, safe from +falling by the rolling of the vessel; "I was just going to test these +spirits, and I thought I should like you to be here." + +"Hah!" said the captain. "I've thought a deal about all them little +barrels put so handy there, ready on tap, and it's the only thing I +don't like, Dr Robson." + +"Why?" said Uncle Paul shortly. + +"Why, it's just like this, sir. I have picked you out as sober a crew +as ever went on a voyage, but sailors are sailors, sir, and I don't +think it's right to be throwing temptation in their way." + +"But this, my workshop, where I bottle my specimens, will always be kept +under lock and key." + +"Nay!" snorted the captain. + +"But I tell you it will," cried Uncle Paul. "Nobody will have any +business here but my nephew and me." + +"That's what you mean," said the captain, "but how about times when you +are busy, or forget and leave it open? Can't warrant always to keep it +shut." + +"Well," said Uncle Paul, with a curious smile, "I have thought of that," +and going to one of the little casks he turned the tap and let about a +couple of tablespoonfuls of liquid that looked like filtered water flow +into the little glass measure, covering the bottom to about an inch in +depth. "There," said the doctor, holding up the glass to the light; +"just taste that, captain." + +"Nay. I don't mind a drop of good rum at the proper season, but I don't +care about spirits like that." + +"I only want you to taste it," said the doctor. "It's too strong to +drink." + +"I know," said the captain. "Burns like fire." + +"Just taste, but don't swallow it." + +"Nay--Well, I'll do that. But it looks like physic." + +The speaker just dipped his fore-finger into the liquid, and touched his +lips, to cry angrily-- + +"Why, it's pison!" + +"No," said the doctor; "proof alcohol for preserving my specimens. If +by accident any of the men taste that they won't want any more, will +they?" + +"Don't know," said the captain. "Maybe they'd water it down." + +"Fill that measure with water, Rodd," said the doctor. + +The boy took the glass to a big stone filter covered with basketwork, +and filled the measure to the brim. + +"Now try it, captain," said the doctor. + +This time with a scowl of dislike, the captain raised the glass to his +lips, but set it down again quickly and hurried to a little leaden sink +in one corner of the laboratory. + +"Worse than ever, doctor." + +"Well, do you think the men will water that down?" + +"Not they! One taste will be quite enough." + +"You don't think I need label those casks `Temptation,' do you?" + +"Nay, sir. If you want to be honest to the lads, I should put `Pison' +upon them in big letters." + +"I would," said the doctor dryly, "but, as you say, sailors are sailors, +and I don't think they'd believe it if I did." + +"What have you put in it, sir?" + +"Ah! that's my secret, Captain Chubb." + +"Well, I hope none of the lads will touch it; but it's sperrits, you +know. Won't answer for it that if one of them was helping you to bottle +up some of them things as we shall fish up when we gets into the +Tropics, he wouldn't be trying a sip." + +"I shouldn't be surprised either," said the doctor, "but if he did he +wouldn't do it again." + +The skipper looked at him sharply. + +"Don't mean that, do you, sir?" he cried. + +"Indeed, but I do," replied the doctor. + +"Going too far," growled the skipper. "Look here, doctor; I've fell +into all your ways like a man, and have helped to drill the chaps into +handling your tackle, which is outside an able seaman's dooties; but I +don't like this 'ere a bit." + +"I can't help that," said the doctor, bristling up. "I shall of course +tell them that they must not touch this stuff, of which no doubt I shall +use a great deal, and it will be in direct opposition to my orders if +they give way to the temptation." + +"Right enough," said the skipper, "but seamen's weak--like babies in +some things--and a good skipper has to be like a father to them, to keep +them out of mischief. Don't know no better, doctor. You do, and it's +too strong, sir; it's too strong." + +"Then let them leave it alone," said the doctor hotly. + +"That's right, sir, but maybe they won't. Don't mean to say that I am +stupid over them, but when I get a good crew I like to take care of +them. Here, I'm getting out of breath. Can't make long speeches. Cut +it short." + +"Then say no more about it," said the doctor. + +"Nay, it won't do. Taking out a good crew of smart lads. Want to bring +them all back, not leave none of them sewed up in their hammocks and +sunk in the sea with a shot at their heels. Look here, sir; how many of +them there kegs have you doctored?" + +"All of them. Why, my good fellow, you don't think I have put poison +in, do you?" + +"Said you had." + +"Pooh! Nonsense! My boy Rodd and I tried experiments to see how nasty +we could make the spirits without being dangerous. There's nothing +there that would hurt a man; only you mustn't tell them so." + +"Oh-h-h! That's another pair of shoes, as the Frenchies say;" and the +skipper went up on deck. + +"Thick-head!" growled the doctor. "Did he fancy I was going to kill a +man for meddling? Bah!" + +"He did, uncle. He doesn't know you yet." + +"Well, I suppose not, my boy, but I am beginning to think that we are +getting to know the crew pretty well by heart. Well, all we want now is +a favourable wind, then we will hoist our sailing flag; and then--off." + +"For how long, uncle?" + +"Ah, that's more than I can say, Rodd, my boy. We'll see what luck we +have, and how the stores last out. We'll get started, and leave the +rest." + +Two days later the start had been made, with everything as ready as the +combined efforts of the doctor's and Captain Chubb's experience could +contrive, and with his face all smiles Dr Robson stood beside Rodd, +watching the receding shore as they, to use the skipper's words, bowled +down Channel. + +"Good luck to us, Pickle, my boy!" cried the doctor. "It's been a long +weary time of preparation, but it has been worth it. We have got a +splendid captain--a man in whom I can thoroughly trust, and a crew of as +smart, handy, useful fellows as I could have wished for." + +"Yes, uncle; and haven't they taken to all the arrangements about the +tackle!" + +"Yes, Pickle. They have all proved themselves not only eager and +active, but as much interested as so many boys. Splendid fellows; and +old Chubb knows how to handle them too. Fetch my glass up, Pickle. +Let's have a look at the old country as long as we can." + +Rodd darted off to the cabin hatch, but he staggered once or twice, for +the schooner as she rose and fell kept on careening a little over to +leeward, and in passing one of the sailors--a fine bluff-looking young +fellow--the man smiled. + +"Here, what are you grinning at, Joe Cross?" cried Rodd, who, after many +months of intercourse with the crew, was fully acquainted with all, and +knew a good many of their peculiarities. + +"Oh, not at you, Mr Harding, sir. It was a little bit of a snigger at +your boots." + +"What!" cried Rodd. + +"Just a little guffaw, sir. You see, the deck's as white as a holystone +will make it, and your boots is black, and black and white never did +agree. It's beginning to get a bit fresh, sir, and if I was you I'd +striddle a bit, so as to take a bit better hold of the deck with your +footsies. I shouldn't like to see you come down hard." + +"Oh, I shan't come down," said Rodd confidently; but as he was speaking +the schooner gave a sudden pitch which sent the boy into the sailor's +arms. + +"Avast there!" cried the man. "Steady, sir!--Steady it is! There, let +me stand you up again on your pins. You mustn't do that, or you'll have +the lads thinking you're a himmidge, or a statty, a-tumbling off your +shelf." + +"Thank you. I am all right now," said Rodd. "My boots are quite new, +and the soles are slippery." + +"I see, sir, but it wasn't all that. You see, our Sally's been tied up +by the nose for so many months in harbour yonder, that now she's running +free she can't hold herself in. Ketch hold of the rail, sir. That's +your sort! There she goes again, larking like a young kitten." + +"I didn't know she'd dance about like this on a fine day," said Rodd +rather breathlessly. + +"Bless your heart, sir, this arn't nothing to what she can do. See how +she's skipping along now. Aren't it lovely?" + +"Well, yes, I suppose so," said Rodd; "but if it's like this in fine +weather, what's it going to be in a storm?" + +"Why, ever so much livelier, sir. She'll dance over the waves like a +cork. She's a beauty, that's what she is. Mustn't mind her being a bit +saucy. There's nothing that floats like a Salcombe schooner, and I +never heard of one as sank yet." + +"Yes, uncle; back directly!" cried the boy; and he made his way onward +to the cabin stairs without mishap, and re-appeared directly afterwards +with the doctor's big telescope under his arm, to make his way as well +as he could to where Uncle Paul was standing forward at the side with +his left arm round one of the stays. + +"Walk straight, boy--walk straight!" cried the doctor, laughing. "What +made you zigzag about like that?" + +"Didn't want to come down on the deck and break the glass, uncle," said +Rodd rather sulkily. "The schooner oughtn't to dance about like this, +ought she?" + +"Oh, yes. It's no more than the lugger used to do when we have been out +fishing." + +"Oh, yes, uncle; and she's so much bigger too. Besides, we were sitting +down then, and here one has to stand." + +"You can sit down if you like," said Uncle Paul. + +"What, and have the sailors laugh at me? That I won't! I want to get +used to it as soon as I can." + +"Then go and get used to it," said Uncle Paul. "You can't do better. I +should like to do the same, but a man can't hop about at fifty, or more, +like a boy at fifteen." + +"Why, uncle, I am nearly eighteen." + +"Then go and behave like it, boy. Look at the sailors. They keep their +feet well enough, without seeming as if they are going to rush +overboard." + +"Oh, I shall soon get used to it, uncle," cried Rodd. + +But instead of improving that day his progress about the deck was +decidedly retrograde, for as the time went on and the Channel opened +out, the wind from the north-west grew fresher and fresher, and the +captain from time to time kept the men busy taking in a reef here and a +reef there. + +Topgallant sails came down; flying jib was hauled in; and towards +evening, as she span along as fast or faster than ever, not above half +the amount of canvas was spread that she had skimmed under earlier in +the day. + +Every now and then too there was a loud smack against the bows, and a +shower of spray made the deck glisten for a few minutes; but it rapidly +dried up again, and as the schooner careened over and dashed along, Rodd +stood aft, looking back through the foam to see how the waves came +curling along after them, as if in full chase of the beautiful little +vessel and seeking to leap aboard. + +The sun had gone down in a bronzy red bank of clouds, and after being +below to the cabin tea Rodd had eagerly hurried on deck again, to find +that the sea around was beginning to look wild and strange. + +Whether he made for Josiah Cross, or Joe, as he was generally called, +came up to him, Rodd did not know, but as he stood with one arm over the +rail he soon found himself in conversation. + +"Are we going to have a storm?" he said. + +"Well, I dunno, sir, about storm. More wind coming." + +"How do you know?" + +"How do I know, sir?" cried the man. "Why, if you come to that, I don't +know. Seem to feel it like. I don't say as it will. Wind's nor'-west +now, and has been all day, but I shouldn't wonder if it chopped right +round, and then--" + +"There'll be a storm," said Rodd eagerly. + +"Well, I don't say that, sir; but like enough there will be more wind +than we want to use, and we might have to put back." + +"What, now that we have started at last?" cried Rodd. + +The man nodded. + +"Oh, that would be vexatious," cried Rodd, "to find ourselves back in +Plymouth again!" + +"There, you wouldn't do that, my lad," said the man. "If we did have to +put back, I should say the skipper would run for Penzance. But there, +the wind hasn't chopped round yet, and it's just as likely to fall as it +gets dark and we will get our orders to hoist more sail." + +But the sailor's first ideas proved to be right, and not only did the +wind veer round, but it increased in force and became so contrary and +shifty that during the night it began to blow a perfect hurricane, and +gave Captain Chubb a good opportunity of proving that he was no +fine-weather sailor. + +It proved to be a bright night, being nearly full moon, with great +flocculent silvery and black clouds scudding at a tremendous rate across +the planet, while one minute the schooner's rigging was shadowed in +black upon the white, wet deck, at another all was gloom, with the wind +shrieking through the rigging, and the _Maid of Salcombe_ proving the +truth of the sailor's words, as she was literally dancing about; like a +cork. + +"Hadn't you better come below, Rodd?" said the doctor. + +"No, uncle; don't ask me. I couldn't sleep, and I want to look at the +storm. It's so grand." + +"Grand? Well, yes," said the doctor; "but we could have dispensed with +its grandeur, and it seems very unlucky that after all these weeks of +glorious weather it should have turned like this. Ah, here's Captain +Chubb. Well, captain," he continued, "where are we making for? Mount's +Bay?" + +"No. Give it up. Nasty rocky bit about there, so I laid her head for +Plymouth; but we shan't get in there to-night." + +"Where then?" asked the doctor. "Wouldn't it be better to run for the +open sea?" + +"No," said the skipper shortly. "This wind's come to stay, and we must +get into port for a bit. We don't want to get into the Bay of Biscay O +with weather like this. It's going to be a regular sou'-wester." + +"What port shall we make for, then?" asked the doctor, while Rodd caught +all he could of the conversation, as the wind kept coming in gusts and +seemed to snatch the words and carry them overboard in an instant. +"Havre," grunted the captain laconically. There was silence for some +time, for it became too hard work to talk, but in one of the intervals +between two gusts, a few words were spoken, the doctor asking the +skipper if he was satisfied with the behaviour of the schooner. + +"Oh yes," He grunted; "she's right enough." + +"You are not disappointed, then?" + +"No. Bit too lively. Wants some more cargo or ballast to give her +steadiness; but she'll be all right." All the same this was an +experience very different from anything that Rodd had had before, and it +was not without a severe buffeting that in the early dawn of the morning +Captain Chubb had succeeded in laying the little vessel's head off +Havre, so that, taking advantage of a temporary sinking of the wind, he +was able to run her safely into the French port, and this at a time when +it was a friendly harbour, the British arms having triumphed everywhere, +the French king being once more upon the throne, and he who had been +spoken of for so long as the Ogre of Elba now lying duly watched and +guarded far away to the south, within the rockbound coast of Saint +Helena. + + + +CHAPTER TWELVE. + +PRIVATE EARS. + +The schooner was run safely into port, but just before she cleared the +harbour mouth, down came a tremendous squall of wind as if from round +the corner of some impossible solid cloud behind which an ambush of the +storm had been lying in wait for the brave little vessel. + +Down it came all at once, just when least expected, and in a few seconds +as it struck the little vessel, rushing, in spite of the small amount of +canvas spread, rapidly for the shelter, every one on deck snatched at +the nearest object to which he could cling. The schooner bravely +resisted for a while, careening over and then rising again, and then +down she went with her masts almost flat upon the foam, and then lying +over more and more as Rodd clung hard with one hand and involuntarily +stretched out the other to his uncle as if to say good-bye. For he felt +certain as the water came surging over the leeward rail that the next +minute their voyage would be ended, and the _Maid of Salcombe_ be going +down. + +It was one horror of breathlessness in the shrieking wind, while the +storm-driven spray cut and lashed and flogged at the crew. + +"It's all over," gasped the boy, in his excitement, though somehow even +then there was no feeling of fear. + +Another minute as she still dashed on, plunging through the waves, the +vessel began to right again, the masts rising more and more towards the +perpendicular, and the water that seemed to have been scooped up in the +hollows of the well-reefed sails came streaming back in showers upon the +deck. + +Another minute and Rodd began to get his breath again, panting hard and +feeling as if some great hand had been grasping him by the throat and +had at last released its hold, while as the schooner now skimmed on, +every furlong taking her more into shelter, the squall had passed over +them and went sweeping along far away over the town ahead, and the boy +felt a strong grip upon his arm. + +Rodd turned sharply, to face Cross the sailor, who held on to him with +his left while he used his right hand to clear his eyes from the spray. + +"All right," he said, with his lips close to the boy's ear, so as to +make himself heard, while Rodd winced, for as the man leaned towards him +he poured something less than a pint of salt water from off his +tightly-tied-on oilskin sou'-wester right into his eyes. + +Rodd nodded without attempting to speak, and the sailor laughed. + +There was something so genial and content in the man's looks, that it +sent a thrill of satisfaction through the boy's breast, telling as it +did that they were out of danger, while, as they rapidly glided on, the +shrieking of the wind through the rigging grew less and less and the +motion of the schooner more and more steady as the harbour was gained. + +"Say, my lad," said Cross, "I thought we was going to make our first +dive after specimens, and the _Saucy Sally_ seemed to be holding her +breath as she stuck her nose down into it and then jibbed and threw +herself over sideways as if she knowed there wasn't depth enough of +water for the job." + +"Hah!" gasped Rodd hoarsely, for he had been taking in spray as well as +wind, and he had now nearly recovered the power of breathing easily and +well. "Why, Joe, I thought we were sinking." + +"Nay, my lad; not us! The _Sally_ was too well battened down, and +couldn't have sunk; but I was getting a bit anxious when it looked as if +we was going to miss the harbour mouth and go floating in ashore lying +down as if we had all gone to sleep." + +"Yes, it was horrible," said Rodd, with a sigh of relief. "But what +would have happened if we had missed the mouth and gone ashore?" + +"Why, what does happen, my lad, when a ship does that? Bumps, and a +sale arterwards of new-wrecked timber on the beach. But here we are all +right, and instead of being ashamed of ourselves we can look the +mounseers full in the face and tell 'em that if they can manage a better +bit of seamanship than the skipper, they had better go and show us how." + +Joe Cross said no more, for Captain Chubb was roaring orders through a +speaking trumpet, the last bit of canvas was lowered down, and before +long the schooner was safely moored in the outer harbour as far away as +she could safely get from the vessels that had taken refuge before them, +some of them grinding together and damaging their paint and wood, in +spite of their busy crews hard at work with fenders and striving to get +into safer quarters, notwithstanding the efforts of the heavy gusts +which came bearing down from time to time. + +The nearest vessel was a handsome-looking brig which they had passed as +they glided in, noting that she was moored head to wind to a heavy buoy. +As they passed her to run nearer into shelter Rodd had noticed the name +upon her stern, the _Jeanne d'Arc_, which suggested immediately the +patriotic Maid of Orleans. + +He had forgotten it the next moment, the name being merged with the +thought that while the schooner had had so narrow an escape of ending +her voyage, the brig had been lying snugly moored to the buoy. But now +as they glided on it became evident that the brig had broken adrift, for +all at once, as she lay rolling and jerking at her mooring cable, the +distance between her bows and the huge ringed cask seemed to have grown +greater, and from where Rodd stood he could see the glistening +tarpaulins of her crew as they hurried forward in a cluster, and Captain +Chubb bellowed an order from where he stood astern, to his men. + +"Aren't coming aboard of us, are they?" thought Rodd, as, heard above +the wind during a comparative lull, Captain Chubb was roaring out fresh +orders to his crew; for he had fully grasped the danger, and the men +were ready to slip their cable moorings and glide farther in under bare +poles. + +But fortunately this fresh disaster did not come to pass, for as the +brig bore down upon them there was a rush and splash from her bows, an +anchor went down, checking her progress a little, then a little more, as +she still came on nearer as if to come crash into the schooner's bows, +and Captain Chubb raised his speaking trumpet to his lips to bid his men +let go, prior to ordering them to stand by ready to lower their own +anchor in turn when at a safe distance, when the brig's progress +received a sudden check, her anchor held, and she was brought up short +not many yards away. + +"Smart," said Captain Chubb, "for a mounseer;" and he looked at Rodd as +he spoke, before tucking his speaking trumpet under his arm and then +giving himself a shake like a huge yellow Newfoundland dog to get rid of +the superabundant moisture. "Well, squire," he continued, as he came +close up, "what should you do next?" + +Rodd looked at him as if puzzled by the question. Then putting his +hands to his mouth he shouted back-- + +"I should get farther into the harbour, in case that brig broke away +again." + +"Of course you would," said the captain, with a grim smile. "Now, don't +you pretend again that you aren't a sailor, because that was spoken like +a good first mate. But we will wait for a lull before we let go, for I +don't want to lose no tackle. But the gale aren't over yet." + +"But we are safe, captain?" said the boy. + +"Yes," grunted the captain. "Better off than them yonder," and he +pointed to a good-sized vessel which had been running for the harbour, +but in vain, for she had been carried on too far and was swept away, to +take the shore a mile distant. + +The lull foretold by Captain Chubb enabled him to slip from his moorings +and get the schooner into a sheltered position which he deemed +sufficiently snug and far enough away from the brig, whose captain did +not manifest any intention of coming farther in. + +As they were parting company Rodd was standing right forward close to +Cross, who stood spelling out the name of the brig they were leaving +behind. + +"_Jenny de Arc_" he grunted to Rodd. "That's a rum name for a smart +brig like that. Wonder what she is. I never see'd Jenny spelt like +that afore. That's the French way of doing it, I suppose." + +Rodd took upon himself to explain whose name the brig bore, and the +sailor gave vent to a musical growl. + +"Shouldn't have knowed it," he said; "but as I was a-saying, I wonder +what she is. Looks to me like what they calls a private ear." + +"Why, that's a man-of-war, isn't it, Joe?" + +"Well, a kind of a sort of one, you know, sir. One of them as goes off +in war times to hark in private for any bit of news about well-laden +merchantmen, and then goes off to capture them." + +"But what makes you think that, Joe?" asked Rodd. "Why, look at her +rig, sir. See what a heap of sail she could carry. I don't hold with a +brig for fast-sailing, but look at the length of them two masts, and see +how she's pierced for guns. She has shut up shop snug enough on account +of the storm, but I'll wager she could run out some bulldogs--I mean, +French poodles--as could bark if she liked. Then there's a big long gun +amidships." + +"I didn't see it," said Rodd. "Maybe not, my lad, but I did." + +"Well, but a merchantman might carry guns to defend herself, Joe." + +"Ay, she might, sir; but she wouldn't, unless she was going on a job +like ours and wanted to scare off savages; and that aren't likely, for I +should say we are the only vessel afloat as is going on such a fishing +expedition as ours. And then look at her crew." + +"What about her crew?" said Rodd. "It seemed to be a very good one so +far as I could see." + +"A deal too good, sir. Who ever saw a merchantman with such a crew as +that? Didn't you see how smart they were in obeying orders and getting +down that anchor?" + +"Why, no smarter than our crew," said Rodd rather indignantly. + +"Smarter than our crew, Mr Rodd, sir! I should think not!" cried the +sailor. "Why, they are French! Still it was very tidy for them. I +should like to know, though, what they are. I do believe I'm right, and +that she is a private ear. Not been watching us, has she? Seems rather +queer." + +"Why should she be watching us?" + +"Why should a private ear be watching any smart schooner, except to make +a prize of her?" + +"Oh, but that's in time of war," cried Rodd. "Ay, sir, but your private +ears aren't very particular about that. This is near enough to war time +still, and if I was our skipper I should keep a good sharp eye on that +craft. But he knows pretty well what he's about. His head is screwed +on the right way. But I say, Mr Rodd, how should you like a bit of the +real thing, same as we used to have when I was in a King's ship?" + +"What, a naval action?" + +"Oh, you may call it that, sir, if you like. I mean a bit of real +French and English, and see which is best man." + +"Oh, nonsense! That's all over now, Joe." + +"I don't know so much about that, sir." + +"But we are in a friendly port, Joe, and no French ship would dare +attack one of ours." + +"No, sir, I know they daren't do it," said the man stubbornly; "but if +they could catch us asleep they might have a try. But there, don't you +be uncomfortable. There's too much of the weasel about our skipper, and +he'll be too wide awake to let any Frenchman catch him asleep." + +"Ah, you are thinking a lot of nonsense, Joe," said Rodd. "The war is +all at an end, and Napoleon Bonaparte shut up in prison at Saint Helena. +There'll be no more fighting now." + +"Well, sir, I suppose you are right," said the man, with something like +a sigh; "but you see, like some of my mates, I have seen a bit of +sarvice in a King's ship, and we have got our guns on board, and we have +just now been lying alongside--I should say bow and stern--of a +Frenchman so as we could slew round and rake her; and it sets a man +thinking. But there, I suppose you are right, and there will be no +fighting for us this voyage." + +"Of course there won't be. We are friends now with France." + +"Yes, sir, and the French pretends to be friends with us; but all the +same if I was the skipper I should double my night watch and be well on +the look-out for squalls.--Ay, ay, sir!" + +Joe Cross answered a hail from the skipper, and was directly after busy +at work helping his mates to make all snug aloft, for the wind had sunk +now into a pleasant soft gale which seemed to suggest fine weather; but +Captain Chubb shook his head and frowned very severely as he looked out +to windward. + +"Nay, my lad," he said, "we have made our start and got as far as here, +but it don't seem to me like getting away just yet, for there's a lot of +weather hanging about somewhere, and as we are in no hurry and are snug +in port, I am not going to run the risk of losing any of my tackle while +the wind is shifting about like this. If I was you I should go in for a +general dry up, and maybe you and your uncle, if the rain holds off, +would like to go and have a look round the town." + +The skipper moved away, and Rodd went to the side to have another look +at the French brig, and then, not satisfied, he went below to fetch the +small spy-glass, finding his uncle busy re-arranging some of his +apparatus in the laboratory, and as he did not seem to be required, the +boy took the small telescope from where it hung and made his way back +again on deck, where he focussed the glass and began to scan the brig, +scrutinising her rig and everything that he could command, from trucks +to deck, making out the long gun covered by a great tarpaulin, and then +bringing the glass to bear upon such of the crew as came within his +scope. + +And as he watched the well-built, smartly-rigged vessel with such +knowledge as he had acquired during his life at the great English port, +he made out, though fairly distant now, that there seemed to be +something in Joe Cross's remarks, so that when he closed his glass to go +down below, he began to dwell on the possibility of the smart brig being +indeed a privateer, and this set him thinking of how horrible it would +be if she did turn inimical and make an attempt at what would have been +quite an act of piracy if she had followed the _Maid of Salcombe_ out to +sea and seized her as a prize. + +"Why, it would break uncle's heart, after all his preparations for the +expedition," mused the boy; "and besides it would be so treacherous. +But Captain Chubb would not give up, I am sure. I never thought of it +before, but he must have thought a good deal more about an accident such +as this happening when he was taking such pains to drill and train the +men. What did he say--that as we were going along a coast where the +people were very savage and spent most of their time in war and +fighting, we ought to be prepared for danger, in case we were attacked. +Was he thinking of the French as well as the savages when he said this? +Perhaps so. If one of his men thought so, why shouldn't he? Well, I +will ask him first time I get him alone. Hullo! What are they doing +there? Somebody going ashore from the brig." + +Rodd could see with the naked eye the lowering down of a ship's boat +over the brig's side, and that made him quickly focus his glass again, +and while he was busy scanning the boat as it kissed the water and the +oars fell over the side, Joe Cross came up behind him and made him +start. + +"Well, sir," he said, "what do you make of her now?" + +"Nothing, Joe," said the boy, "only that it seems a very nice brig." + +"Very, sir, and well-manned. Look at that." + +"What?" asked the boy. + +"That there boat they've lowered down, and how she's manned. She's no +merchantman. Look at the way they are rowing. Why, they're like +men-of-war's men, every one. I don't like the looks of she, and if the +old skipper don't get overhauling her with them there eyes of his I'm a +Dutchman; and that's what I ain't." + +"Ah, you make mountains of molehills, Joe," said Rodd. + +"Maybe, sir; maybe. But I suppose it's all a matter of eddication and +training to keep watch. There, you see, it's always have your eyes +open, night or day. For a man as goes to sea on board a man-of-war, +meaning a King's ship, has to see enemies wherever they are and wherever +they aren't, for even if there bean't none, a chap has to feel that +there might be, and if he's let anything slip without seeing on it, why, +woe betide him! There y'are, sir! Look at that there boat. You have +hung about Plymouth town and seen things enough there to know as that +there aren't a merchant brig." + +"Well, she doesn't look like a merchant's shore boat, certainly," said +Rodd, with his eyes still glued to the end of the telescope. + +"Right, sir," cried Joe Cross. "Well, then, sir, as she aren't a +merchant brig's boat, and the brig herself aren't a man-of-war, perhaps +you will tell me what she is? You can't, sir?" + +"No, Joe." + +"No more can I, sir; but if we keeps our eyes open I dare say we shall +see." + + + +CHAPTER THIRTEEN. + +IN THE FRENCH PORT. + +In spite of the knocking about by the storm, the schooner was none the +worse, and in the course of the day as the weather rapidly settled down +and the western gale seemed to have blown itself out, while the sailors +had been busy swabbing the rapidly drying planks, and, the wind having +fallen, shaking out the saturated sails to dry, Uncle Paul strolled with +his nephew up and down the deck, waiting till the skipper seemed to be +less busy before going up to him. + +"Well," said Uncle Paul; "are we damaged at all?" + +"Not a bit," was the gruff reply. "It's done her good--stretched her +ropes and got the canvas well in shape." + +"But how do you feel about the schooner?" + +"As if she was just what we wanted, sir. Given me a lot of confidence +in her." + +"Then as the weather is settling down you will sail again to-night?" + +"No; I want to get a little more ballast aboard, and this is all a +little bit of show. We shall have more weather before long. I shan't +sail yet." + +The work being pretty well done--that is, as far as work ever is done in +a small vessel--Rodd noticed that some of the men had been smartening +themselves up, and after hanging about a bit watching the captain till +he went below, Rodd saw them gather in a knot together by the forecastle +hatch, talking among themselves, till one of the party, a heavy, +dull-looking fellow, very round and smooth-faced and plump, with quite a +colour in his cheeks, came aft to where Rodd and his uncle were standing +watching the busy scene about the wharves of the inner harbour, and +discussing as to whether they should go ashore for a few hours to look +round the town. + +"I am thinking, Pickle, that after such a bad night as we had, we might +just as well stay aboard and rest, and besides, as far as I can see +everything's muddy and wretched, and I fancy we should be better +aboard." + +"Oh, I don't know, uncle. We needn't be long, and it will be a change. +But here's the Bun coming up to speak to you." + +"The what!" cried Uncle Paul. + +"That man--Rumsey." + +"But why do you call him the Bun?" + +"Oh, it's the men's name for him," said Rodd, laughing. "They nicknamed +him because he was such a round-faced fellow." + +"Beg pardon, sir," said the man, making a tug at his forelock. + +"Yes, my man; you want to speak to me?" + +"Yes, sir; the lads asked me to say, sir, that as it's been a very rough +night--" + +"Very, my man--very," said Uncle Paul, staring. + +"They'd take it kindly, sir, if you'd give about half of us leave to go +ashore for a few hours." + +"Oh, well, my man, I have no objection whatever," said Uncle Paul. "As +far as I am concerned, by all means yes." + +"Thankye, sir; much obliged, sir," said the man eagerly, and pulling his +forelock again he hurried forward to join the group which had sent him +as their spokesman to ask for leave. + +Rodd turned to speak to his uncle, and caught Joe Cross's eye instead, +wondering at the man's comical look at him as he closed an eye and +jerked one thumb over his shoulder in the direction of the group forward +as they began whispering together, and then, thrust forward towards the +side by his companions, the Bun began to signal towards the Frenchmen +hanging about the nearest landing-place, where several boats were made +fast to the side of the dock. + +Just at that moment the skipper came up from below, saw what was going +on at a glance, strode towards the group, which began to dissolve at +once, the Bun being the only man whose attention was taken up by a +boatman who was answering his signal. Just while the signaller was +making his most energetic gestures he leaped round in the most startled +way, for the skipper had closed up and given him a very smart slap on +the shoulder. + +"Now, Rumsey, what's this?" he cried. + +"Boat, sir. Going ashore, sir." + +"Who is?" said the skipper, frowning. + +"Us six, sir." + +"Us six! Why, you're only one." + +"Yes, sir. These 'ere others too, sir." + +"What others?" cried the captain, and Rumsey, looking anxiously around, +found for the first time that he was alone. + +"The lads as was here just now, sir--six on us." + +"Oh, indeed!" said the skipper sarcastically, and raising his cap he +gave his rough hair a rub. "Let me see; when did I give you leave to go +ashore?" + +"No, sir; not you, sir. Dr Robson, sir." + +"Oh, I see," said the skipper. + +This was all said loud enough for Rodd and Uncle Paul to hear, and Rodd +began to grin as he looked at his uncle, whose face assumed a perplexed +aspect, one which increased to uneasiness as the captain came up to them +at once. + +"Just a word, sir," he said. "Did you order these men to go ashore?" + +"Oh no," cried Uncle Paul. "One of them came up to me, asking if I had +any objections to their going ashore, and I said, not the least. I +supposed, of course, that they had got leave from you." + +"Of course, sir. Bless 'em for a set of artful babies! They aren't +learned discipline yet. You, Rumsey, go and tell your messmates that if +they try that game again with me they'll stand a fine chance of not +going ashore for the rest of the voyage." + +"Yes, sir, I'll tell them, sir," cried the man hurriedly; and he +shuffled off as hard as he could to find those who had left him in the +lurch. + +"Here, you, Joe Cross," continued the captain, "you signal to that +Frenchy boatman that he is not wanted." + +"Ay, ay, sir!" cried Cross, hurrying to the side, where he began +gesticulating angrily, in spite of which the boatman persisted in coming +alongside and in voluble French declaring that he was ordered to come +and would not go back until he was paid. + +Meanwhile a little explanation was going on between the skipper and +Uncle Paul. + +"Don't want to be bumptious, sir," said the former, "but there's only +room on board a craft for one captain. Those fellows jump at any chance +to get ashore, and when they are there, there's no knowing when you'll +get them on board again, besides which, they wouldn't be careful, and +French and English don't get on very well together after all that's gone +by. Here, Cross, tell that jabbering Frenchman if he isn't off, he'll +have to go back with a hole through the bottom of his boat. No, stop. +Go and find Mr Craig. Tell him to set those six men something to do." + +"Ay, ay, sir!" cried the sailor, hurrying off. + +"There, it was all my fault, captain," said Uncle Paul, smiling. "I +won't offend again. Here, Rodd, my boy, give that poor fellow a +shilling for his trouble." + +Rodd hurried to the side, hailed the man, and held out the coin, telling +him in very bad French what it was for; but the fellow shook his head, +held up four fingers, and began shouting "_Quatre_!" so loudly that the +skipper heard. + +"Cat, indeed!" he shouted. "Just what I should like to give him. Here, +come away, Mr Rodd; he shan't have anything now." + +But Rodd did not obey at once. + +"One or nothing," he cried to the man, in French. + +"_Quatre! Quatre_!" shouted the man. + +Rodd shook his head and was turning away, but the boatman swarmed up the +side, and reaching over the rail, shouted "_Quatre_!" again, till the +skipper made so fierce a rush at him that he lowered his feet quickly +down into his boat, catching the shilling that Rodd pitched to him, and +then hurriedly pushing off for the landing-place. + +"Oh, it's all right, Dr Robson," said the skipper, "only you must leave +all this shore-going to me. I know my lads; you don't." + +Just then Craig, the mate, came up on deck, looking very sour at having +been awakened from a comfortable sleep, and did not scruple about +setting the delinquents to work upon some very unnecessary task, to the +great delight of their messmates, who, headed by Joe Cross, gave them +pretty freely to understand what their opinion was of the scheme to get +a run ashore. + +It was towards evening that, after a hasty meal, partaken of in peace in +the still waters of the harbour, tempted by a few gleams of sunshine, +and for Rodd's gratification, Uncle Paul and Rodd were rowed ashore in +the same boat as the skipper, who had business with the English Consul +about his papers, the understanding being that the boat was to go back +and meet them at nine o'clock. + +"That's as long as we shall want to stay, Rodd," said Uncle Paul. + +"Yes, sir," said the skipper; "and if I were you I'd turn in early for a +good night's rest, for I'm thinking we shall have dirty weather again +to-morrow, and there's no knowing how long it will last." + +"But it looks so bright to-night," cried Rodd. + +"Just here, sir," cried the skipper, "and it may be fine enough to tempt +me off in the morning; but I don't feel at all sartain, and to-morrow +night we may be having another knocking about." + +They separated at the landing-place, and for the next two hours Rodd was +making himself acquainted with the principal streets of the old seaport, +time going very rapidly and the night coming on. + +It was growing pretty dark, and after making two mistakes as to their +direction, Rodd declared that he knew the way, and his uncle yielding to +his opinion, the boy led on, till, turning a corner sharply, they almost +came in contact with a couple of French officers walking in the opposite +direction, the one a tall, stern, elderly-looking man, talking in a low +excited tone to his young companion, whose attention was so much taken +up as he deferentially listened to his elder, that he started back to +avoid striking against Rodd, who also gave way. + +It was now almost dark, and the next moment the French officers had +passed on, as Uncle Paul exclaimed-- + +"Yes, I believe you are right, Pickle. You are. Those are ships' +lights hoisted up to the stays. Well, don't you see?" + +"Yes, uncle, but--" + +The boy said no more, and Uncle Paul laid his hand upon his shoulder. + +"What's the matter?" he cried. "Why don't you speak? Those are the +lights in the harbour." + +"Yes--yes. Yes, uncle, I see," said the boy hastily; "but--er--but-- +er--" + +"Why, what's the matter with you? Don't feel done up?" + +"No, uncle," replied Rodd hurriedly. "I was only puzzled; it seemed so +strange." + +"You mean you seem so strange," said the doctor, laughing. + +"Yes, uncle, I feel so." + +"Well, come along, and let's make haste aboard. I don't want to keep +the captain waiting. We have lost so much time by missing our way. +It's past nine, I'm sure." + +"Yes, uncle," said the boy, speaking more like himself; "it must be. +But I felt so startled in coming suddenly upon those two officers." + +"Why, there was nothing to startle you, my boy." + +"No, uncle, I suppose not; but somehow I felt that I had been close to +that one who nearly ran up against me before, and when he said +`_Pardon_'--" + +"I didn't hear him say `_Pardon_,'" said Uncle Paul. + +"But he did, uncle, just in a low tone so that I could hardly hear him, +and then I felt sure we had met before." + +"Nonsense!" cried Uncle Paul. "Look here, my boy, how much sleep did +you have last night?" + +"Sleep, uncle!" cried the boy, in a voice full of surprise. + +"Why, none at all. Who could sleep through that storm?" + +"I'll answer for myself," said the doctor; "I could not. Well, you were +completely tired out, and are half dreaming now. Come along; let's find +the boat and get on board for a light supper and a good night's rest." + +"Yes, uncle," said Rodd quietly; "but take care; we are on the wharf. I +can make out the shipping plainly now;" and as he spoke a familiar hail +came out of the darkness, while as they answered the captain strode +towards them. + +"Thought you were lost, gentlemen. Been waiting half-an-hour. Take +care; the boat's down here;" and striding along the top of the harbour +wall the skipper led the way to the descending steps, where the boat was +waiting, and they were rowed aboard. + +An hour later Rodd was plunged in the deepest of deep sleeps, but +dreaming all the same of the storm and of getting into difficulties with +some one who was constantly running against him and whispering softly, +"Pardon!" + + + +CHAPTER FOURTEEN. + +THE SUSPICIOUS CRAFT. + +"Oh, I say, Uncle Paul, isn't it horrible?" cried Rodd the next morning. + +Breakfast was just over, and Captain Chubb had gone on deck, while the +wind was howling furiously as if in a rage to find its playthings, some +two or three hundred vessels of different tonnage, safely moored in the +shelter of the harbour, and out of its power to toss here and there and +pitch so many helpless ruins to be beaten to pieces upon the shore. + +Down it kept coming right in amongst them, making them check at their +mooring cables and chains, but in vain, for their crews had been too +busy, and the only satisfaction that the tempest could obtain, was to +hearken to the miserable dreary groans that were here and there emitted +as some of the least fortunate and worst secured ground against each +other. + +"Isn't it horrible, uncle?" shouted Rodd, for the rain just then was +mingled with good-sized hailstones, and was rattling down upon the deck +and skylight in a way that half-drowned the lad's voice. + +"Miserable weather, Pickle; but never mind. We must settle down to a +good morning's work in the laboratory." + +"Oh no, not yet, uncle; we don't seem to have started. It will only be +a makeshift." + +"But we might put things a little more straight, boy." + +"Oh no, uncle; they are too straight now, and I want to go on deck." + +"Bah! It isn't fit. Wait till the weather holds up." + +"Oh, I shall dress up accordingly, uncle. But I say, where does all the +rain come from? It must be falling in millions of tons everywhere." + +"Ah, you might as well ask me where the wind comes from. Study up some +book on meteorology." + +"Oh yes, I will, uncle; but not yet." + +"Very well; be off." + +Rodd hurried out of the cabin, and five minutes later came back rattling +and crackling, to present himself before his uncle, who thrust up his +spectacles upon his forehead and stared. + +"There," cried Rodd; "don't think I shall get wet. I wish I'd had it +the other night. It's splendid, uncle, and so stiff that if I like to +stoop down a little and spread my arms, I can almost rest in it. I say, +don't I look like a dried haddock?" + +"Humph! Well, yes, you do look about the same colour," grumbled the +doctor, for the boy was buttoned up in a glistening oilskin coat of a +buff yellow tint; the turned-up collar just revealed the tips of his +ears, and he was crowned by a sou'-wester securely tied beneath his +chin. + +"I say, this will do, won't it?" + +"Yes, you look a beauty!" grunted the doctor; "but there, be off; I want +to write a letter or two." + +Rodd went crackling up the cabin stairs, clump, clump, clump, for he was +wearing a heavy pair of fisherman's boots that had been made waterproof +by many applications of oil--a pair specially prepared for fishing +purposes and future wading amongst the wonders of coral reef and strand. + +The deck was almost deserted, the only two personages of the schooner's +crew being the captain and Joe Cross, both costumed so as to match +exactly with the boy, who now joined them, to begin streaming with water +to the same extent as they. + +They both looked at him in turn, Cross grinning and just showing a glint +of his white teeth where the collar of his oilskin joined, while his +companion scowled, or seemed to, and emitted a low grumbling sound that +might have meant welcome or the finding of fault, which of the two Rodd +did not grasp, for the skipper turned his back and rolled slowly away as +if he were bobbing like a vessel through the flood which covered the +deck and was streaming away from the scuppers. + +As the skipper went right forward and stood by the bowsprit, looking +straight ahead through the haze formed by the streaming rain, Rodd was +thrown back upon Joe Cross, with whom, almost from the day when the man +had joined, he had begun to grow intimate; and as he went close up to +him, the sailor gave his head a toss to distribute some of the rain that +was splashing down upon his sou'-wester, and grinning visibly now, he +cried-- + +"Why, Mr Rodd, sir, you've forgot your umbrella." + +"Get out!" cried Rodd good-humouredly. "But I say, Joe, how long is +this rain going to last?" + +"Looks as if it means to go on for months, sir, but may leave off +to-night. I say, though, that's a splendid fit, sir. You do look fine! +Are you comfortable in there?" + +Rodd did not answer, for he was trying to pierce the streaming haze and +make out whether the brig was visible. + +For a few moments he could not make it out, but there it was, looking +faint and strange, about a hundred yards away. + +"That's the brig, isn't it, yonder?" he said at last. + +"Yes, sir, that's she, and they seem to have got her fast now; but she +wouldn't hurt us if she broke from her moorings, for the wind's veered a +point or two, and it would take her clear away." + +Rodd remained silent as he stood thinking, he did not know why, unless +it was that the vessel with the tall, dimly-seen tapering spars bore a +French name, and somehow--again he could not tell why, only that it +seemed to him very ridiculous--the shadowy vessel associated itself with +the two French officers he had encountered in the darkness of the +previous night, when he heard one of them after brushing against him +murmur the word "Pardon!" And he found himself thinking that if the +vessel had been swept up against the schooner when her anchor was +dragging, it would have been no use for her crew to cry "Pardon!" as +that would not have cured the damage. + +"Well, sir, what do you make of her?" cried the sailor, putting an end +to the lad's musings. + +"Can't see much," said Rodd, "for the rain, but she seems beautifully +rigged." + +"Yes, sir, and she can sail well too--for a brig--but I should set her +down as being too heavily sparred, and likely to be top-heavy. If she +was going along full sail, and was caught in such a squall as we had +yesterday, and laid flat like the schooner, I don't believe she'd lift +again. Anyhow, I shouldn't like to be aboard." + +"No, it wouldn't be pleasant," said Rodd; "but I say, I can't see +anything of that long gun you talked about." + +"No wonder, sir. You want that there long water-glass, as you called +it--that there one you showed me as you was unpacking it. Don't you +remember? Like a big pipe with panes of glass in it as you said you +could stick down into the sea and make out what was on the bottom. You +want that now." + +The man passed his hand along the brow edge of his sou'-wester to sweep +away the drops, and then took a long look at the deck of the brig. + +"No, sir; can't make it out now; but I see it plainly enough this +morning, covered with a lashed down tarpaulin as if to hide it, and I +knew at once. I can almost tell a big gun by the smell--I mean feel it +like, if it's there." + +"But do you still think she's a privateer?" + +"Well, I don't say she is, sir, for that's a thing you can't tell for +sartain unless you see a ship's papers; but she is something of that +kind, I should say, and--Ay, ay, sir!--There's the skipper hailed me, +sir. I say, Mr Rodd, sir, do mind you don't get wet!" + +This was as the man rolled away sailor fashion, and emitting a crackling +whishing sound as he made for the vessel's bows, where he received some +order from his captain which sent him to the covered-in hatchway of the +forecastle, where he slowly disappeared into a kind of haze, half water, +half smoke, for several of the water-bound crew had given up the chewing +of their tobacco to indulge in pipes. + +But Rodd was in a talkative humour, and made his way to the skipper, +saluting him with-- + +"I say, Captain Chubb, how do you manage to do it?" + +"Do what, my lad?" + +"Why, say for certain what the weather's going to be." + +There was a low chuckling sound such as might have been emitted by a +good-humoured porpoise which had just ended one of its underwater +curves, and thrust its head above the surface to take a good deep breath +before it turned itself over and dived down again. + +"Second natur', youngster, and that's use. Takes a long time to learn, +and when you have larnt your lesson perfect as you think, you find that +you don't know it a bit." + +"But you did know it," said Rodd. "You said that the storm would come +on again, when it was beautiful and fine yesterday evening; and here it +is." + +"Well, yes, my lad, if you goes on for years trying to hit something you +must get a lucky shot sometimes." + +"Oh yes, but there's something more than that," said Rodd. "When I have +been amongst the fishermen in Plymouth, and over in Saltash, I have +wondered to find how exact they were about the weather, and how whenever +they wouldn't take us out fishing they were always right. They seemed +to know that bad weather was coming on." + +"Oh, of course," said the skipper. "Why, my lad, if you got your living +by going out in your boat, don't you think the first thing you would try +to learn would be to make it your living?" + +"Why, of course," cried Rodd. + +"Ah, you don't mean the same as I do. I mean, make it your living and +not your dying." + +"Oh, I see." + +"You wouldn't want," continued the skipper, "to go out at times that +might mean having them as you left at home standing on the shore looking +out to sea for a boat as would never come back." + +"No," said the boy, with something like a sigh. "I know what you mean. +Ah, it has been very horrible sometimes, and all those little +churchyards at the different villages about the coast with that regular +`Drowned at sea' over and over and over again." + +"Right, my lad. Things go wrong sometimes; but that's what makes +sailors and fishermen get to learn what the moon says and the sun and +the clouds, and the bit of haze that gathers sometimes off the coast +means. Why, if you'd looked out yesterday afternoon when the wind went +down and the glint of sunshine come out, there was a nasty dirty look in +the sky. You wait a bit and keep your eyes open, and put that and that +together, and as you grow up you'll find that it isn't so hard as you'd +think to say what the weather is going to be to-morrow. You'll often be +wrong, same as I am." + +"Ah! then I shall begin at once," cried Rodd eagerly, as he looked +sharply round. "Well, it can't go on pelting down like this with hail +coming now and then in showers. Showers come and go." + +"Right!" said the skipper, clapping him on the shoulder. + +"Oh!" cried Rodd sharply. + +"Hullo! Why, you don't mean to say that hurt?" + +"Hurt! No," cried Rodd, shaking his head violently. "You shot a lot of +cold water right up into my ear." + +"Oh, that will soon dry up. Well, what do you say the weather's going +to be?" + +"The storm soon over, and a fine day to-morrow." + +"Done?" asked the skipper. + +"Oh yes; but mind, that's only a try." + +"Then it's my turn now, youngster, so here goes. I say we shall have +worse weather to-morrow than we have got to-day." + +"Oh, it can't be!" cried Rodd. + +"Well," cried the skipper, chuckling, "we shall see who's right." + +"Oh, but I don't want for us to have to stop here in this French port." + +"More don't I, my lad, so we think the same there. You going to stop on +deck?" + +"Yes, till dinner-time," cried Rodd, and just then the haze of rain out +seaward opened a little, revealing the brig with its tall spars and web +of rigging. + +This somehow set the boy thinking about the escape from accident when +they came into port, and then of the encounter ashore, and he began +talking. + +"It's no use to go down below. It's so stuffy, and I want to chat. I +say, captain, what do you think of that brig?" + +"Very smartly built craft indeed, my lad--one as I should like to sail +if I could do as I liked." + +"Do as you liked?" asked Rodd. + +"Yes; alter her rig--make a schooner of her. But as she is she's as +pretty a vessel as I ever see--for a brig. Frenchmen don't often turn +out a boat like that." + +"What should you think she is?" asked Rodd. "A merchantman?" + +"No, my lad; I should say she was something of a dispatch boat, though +she aren't a man-of-war. I don't quite make her out. She's got a very +smart crew, and I saw two of her officers go aboard in some sort of +uniform, though it was too dark to quite make it out." + +"But if she's a man-of-war she would carry guns, wouldn't she?" asked +Rodd. + +"Well, I don't think she's a man-of-war, my lad," replied the skipper; +"but she do carry guns, and one of them's a big swivel I just saw +amidships. But men-of-war, merchantmen, and coasters, we're all alike +in a storm, and glad to get into shelter." + +"Yes, it is a fine-looking brig. Is she likely to be a privateer?" + +"Eh? What do you know about privateers?" + +"Oh, not much," said Rodd. "But going about at Plymouth and talking to +the sailors, of course I used to hear something about them." + +"Well, yes, of course," said the skipper thoughtfully, as he too swept +the drops from the front of his sou'-wester, and tried to pierce the +falling rain. "She might be a French privateer out of work, as you may +say, for their game's at an end now that the war's over. Yes, a very +smart craft." + +"But do you think she's here for any particular purpose?" + +"Yes, my lad; a very particular purpose." + +"Ah!" cried the boy rather excitedly. "What?" + +"To take care of herself and keep in harbour till the weather turns +right. Why? What were you thinking?" + +"I was wondering why she came in so close after us, and then anchored +where she is." + +"Oh, I can tell you that," said the skipper, chuckling. "It was because +she couldn't help herself." + +"Then you don't think she was watching us?" + +"No-o! What should she want to watch us for?" + +"Why, to take us as a prize, seeing what a beautiful little schooner it +is." + +"Bah! She'd better not try," said the skipper grimly. "Why, what stuff +have you got in your head, boy? We are not at war with France." + +"No-o," said Rodd thoughtfully; "but her captain might have taken a +fancy to the _Maid of Salcombe_, and I've read that privateers are not +very particular when they get a chance. And the war's only just over." + +"No. But then, you see, my lad, even if you were right, that brig +wouldn't have a chance." + +"Why, suppose she waited till we had sailed, and followed till she +thought it was a good opportunity, and then her captain led his men +aboard and took her?" + +"Oh, I see," said the skipper dryly. "Well, my lad, as I say, she +wouldn't have a chance. First, because she couldn't catch us, for give +me sea room I could sail right round her." + +"Ah, but suppose it was a calm, and she sent her boats full of men on +board to take us?" + +"Well, what then?" + +"What then? Why, wouldn't that be very awkward?" asked Rodd. + +"Very, for them," said the skipper grimly. "What would my boys be +about?" + +"Why, they'd be taken prisoners." + +"I should just like to see her try," said the skipper. "If the boats' +crews of that brig were to get a lodgment aboard my craft, how long do +you think it would take our lads to clear them off?" + +"Oh, I am sure our crew would be very brave, but I should say that +brig's got twice as many men as we have." + +"What of that?" said the skipper contemptuously. + +"Well, then," said Rodd argumentatively, "she's got her guns, and might +sink us." + +"And we've got our guns, and might sink her," growled the skipper. +"Look here, my lad; why did I give my lads gun drill and cutlass and +pike drill, while you and the doctor were taking in your tackle and bags +of tricks?" + +"Why, to defend the schooner against any savages who might attack us +when we are off the West Coast or among the islands." + +"Right, my lad. Well, as Pat would say, by the same token couldn't they +just as well fight a pack of Frenchies as a tribe of niggers? Bah! +You're all wrong. It's quite like enough that yon brig may have been +fitted out for a privateer, though I rather think she wouldn't be fast +enough. But that game's all over, and we are all going to be at peace +now we have put Bony away like a wild beast in a cage and he can't do +anybody any hurt. There, you needn't fidget yourself about that. All +the same, I don't quite understand why a craft that isn't a man-of-war, +but carries a long gun amidships and has officers in uniform aboard, +should be taking refuge in this port. I dunno. She looks too smart and +clean, but it might mean that she's going to the West Coast, +blackbirding." + +"Ha, ha, ha!" laughed Rodd. "Why, that's what you thought about us, +Captain Chubb." + +"So I did; so I did, my lad," said the skipper good-humouredly. "You +see, I am like other men--think I am very wise, but I do stupid things +sometimes. Well, I'll be safe this time, and say I don't know what she +is, and I don't much care. But I am pretty sure that she aren't after +us, and I dare say, if the truth's known, she don't think we are after +her. There, squint out yonder to windward. That don't look like fine +weather, does it?" + +"No; worse than ever!" cried Rodd. + +"That's so, my lad, and you may take this for certain; we shan't sail +to-day, and you won't see another vessel put out to sea. Take my word +for it." + +"That I will, Captain Chubb!" cried the boy earnestly, and the skipper +nodded his head so quickly that the water flew off in a shower. + +But, as some wag once said, the wisest way is to wait till after +something has happened before you begin to prophesy about it. + +Captain Chubb had probably never heard about the wisdom of this +proceeding in foretelling events, for it so happened that in spite of +the storm increasing in violence for many hours, his words proved to be +entirely wrong. + + + +CHAPTER FIFTEEN. + +AN EXCITING TIME. + +About mid-day there was a sudden lull. The wind blew nearly as hard as +ever, but the clouds were broken up, allowing a few gleams of sunshine +to pass through, and soon after the sky seemed to be completely swept; +the streaming wharves and streets began to show patches of dry paving, +and nearly every vessel near was hung with the men's oilskins, Rodd +being one of the first to shed his awkward garments and come out looking +more like himself. + +There was such a transformation scene, and all looked so bright in the +sunshine, that the boy took the first opportunity to ask the skipper +what he thought of it now. + +"Just the same as I did before, my lad," he replied bluntly. "Here, +it's only mid-day, and mid-day aren't to-night, and to-night aren't +to-morrow morning. Just you wait." + +"Oh, I'll wait," said Rodd, "but I think we ought to start off as soon +as we can, and get right away to sea." + +"Do you?" said the captain gruffly. "Well, I don't." + +After dinner Uncle Paul had a few words with the skipper, and then shook +his head at his nephew, who was watching them inquiringly. + +"No, my lad," he said, "it won't do; the captain says there's more bad +weather coming; but we'll go and have a look round the town if you +like." + +Rodd did like as a matter of course, and with the sun now shining +brightly as if there were no prospect of more rain for a month, they +were rowed ashore, Rodd noticing as they went that the crew of the brig +seemed to be very busy, a couple of boats going to and fro fetching +stores of some kind from the nearest wharf, but what he could not make +out. + +Then came a good ramble through the busy place, where everybody seemed +to be taking advantage of the cessation of the storm, and Rodd noted +everything to as great an extent as a hurried visit would allow. + +There was plenty to see, the forts, one each side of the harbour, and a +couple more on the higher ground, displaying their grinning embrasures +and guns commanding the harbour and the town, while soldiery in their +rather shabby-looking uniforms could be seen here and there, and +sentries turned the visitors back upon each occasion when they went +near. + +"Rather an ugly place to tackle, Rodd, from the sea, but I suppose our +fellows wouldn't scruple about making an attack if there were any need. +But here, I think we had better get back on board." + +"Oh, not yet, uncle. I haven't half seen enough." + +"But I am getting sick of this tiresome wind," said Uncle Paul. "One +can't keep on one's hat, and it is just as if these gusts were genuine +French, and kept on making a rush at us from round the corners of the +streets as if they wanted to blow us into the harbour." + +"Yes, it is rather tiresome," replied Rodd. "But I should have liked to +have had a look inside one of those batteries." + +"Pooh! What do you want to see them for?" + +"Why, just because they are French, uncle." + +"Nonsense! You have seen all ours on the heights of Plymouth, and they +are a deal better-looking than these. We have a good way to walk, so +let's go down at once. There, look yonder." + +"What at, uncle?" + +"What at? Why, at the clouds gathering there in the wind's eye. You +see Captain Chubb's right, and we shall have the rain pouring down again +before long." + +Rodd laughed as if he did not believe it, but making no farther +opposition, they began to descend towards the harbour; but before they +were half-way there the wind had increased to a furious pitch, the sea +became a sheet of foam, and with wonderful rapidity the clouds had +gathered overhead, till a black curtain was sweeping right over, and a +few heavy drops of rain began to fall. Then down came a drenching +shower, and they were glad to run for refuge to the nearest shelter, +which presented itself in the shape of a great barrack-like building +that seemed to be built about a square, and at whose arched entrance a +couple of sentries with shouldered muskets were pacing up and down. + +As Uncle Paul and Rodd approached at a trot, with the intention of +getting under the archway, both sentries stopped short, and one of them +held his weapon across breast high, scowling fiercely, and barred their +way. + +"Here, it's all right," cried Rodd. "We only want to shelter out of the +rain for a few minutes;" and he pressed forward. "Come on, uncle. +Never mind him!" + +"_Halte la_!" cried the sentry. + +But Uncle Paul's hand went to his pocket, and drawing out half-a-crown +he pointed quickly at the falling rain and the archway under which they +now stood, taking out his handkerchief the while, and beginning to brush +off the drops which bedewed his coat. + +The man glanced at the coin, then at his brother sentry, and both looked +inward at the square behind them. The exchange of glances was very +quick, and then the first sentry opened one hand, but kept it very close +to his side, again looking inward to see that he was not observed, +before grumbling out-- + +"_Eh bien! Restez_!" And then as if perfectly unconscious of the bribe +he had received, he resumed his slow pace up and down under the shelter +of the great archway. + +It was all a matter of minutes, but long enough for the wind and rain to +have gathered force, and while the former raved and shrieked, down came +the latter in a sheet, or rather in a succession of sheets which made +the roadways seem as if full of dancing chess pawns, and the gullies +turn at once into so many furious little torrents tearing down the +slopes towards the harbour. + +"Nice, isn't it, uncle?" said Rodd merrily. + +"Nice!" grumbled Uncle Paul. "I don't know what I was thinking about to +give way to you in such treacherous weather. Why, it's worse than ever. +How are we going to get back to the schooner?" + +"Oh, it will soon be over, uncle, and if it isn't we must get to know +where the nearest place is from that sentry, and make a rush for it to +get some tea, and wait there till the shower is over." + +"Shower!" said Uncle Paul. "It looks to me like a night of storm coming +on, and as if we shan't get back to the schooner to-night." + +"Well, it doesn't matter, uncle," cried the boy coolly. "There's sure +to be a good hotel, and Captain Chubb will know why we haven't come +back. As soon as there's a bit of a lull we will make a run for it, and +we shall be able to get a lesson in French." + +"Bah!" said Uncle Paul impatiently. "How the wind comes whistling +through this archway! We shall be getting wet even here." + +The two men on guard were evidently of the same opinion, for they turned +to their sentry boxes and began to put on their overcoats, after +standing their muskets inside. + +But before this was half done, each snatched up his piece again and +faced the entrance, for all at once there was the clattering of hoofs in +the cobbled paved street, and a cavalry officer, followed at a short +distance by a couple of men, dashed up to the front and turned in under +the archway, drenched with rain, the officer saying something sharply to +one of the sentries. + +The man replied by pointing to a doorway at the back of the great +entrance, while the officer swung himself from his horse, threw the rein +to one of his men, and then lifting his sabre-tache by the strap he gave +it a swing or two to throw off the water from its dripping sides, and +then opened the great pocket to peer inside as if to see that its +contents were safe. + +The next moment, as if satisfied, he let it fall to the full length of +its slings, gave a stamp or two to shake off the water that dripped from +him, and then raised his hands to give a twist to the points of his wet +moustache. He scowled fiercely at Rodd the while, and then marched +towards the doorway with the steel scabbard of his sabre clinking and +clanking over the stones. + +"Pretty good opinion of himself, Pickle," said Uncle Paul quietly. + +"Yes, uncle; but what a pair of trousers--no, I mean long boots--no, I +don't; I mean trousers.--Which are they, uncle?" added the boy, who was +rather tickled by the size and the way in which they were finished off +at the bottoms with leather as if they were jack-boots. + +"Wait till he comes out, Pickle, and ask him," said the doctor dryly. + +"No, thank you, uncle; my French is so bad," said the boy, with his eyes +sparkling. "But, my word, they must have been galloping hard to escape +the rain! Look at those poor horses. They are breathed." + +Rodd had hardly spoken when they became fully aware that they had taken +refuge in the entrance to the town barracks, for the notes of a bugle +rang out, echoing round the inner square of the building, and seeming to +be thrown back in a half-smothered way from wall to wall, while the wind +and rain raged down more fiercely than ever. + +"Something must be the matter," said Rodd, with his lips close to his +uncle's ear. + +"Seems like it, boy. That officer must have brought a dispatch." + +The object of the bugle was shown directly, for in spite of the rain the +interior of the barracks began to assume the aspect of some huge wasps' +nest that had suddenly been disturbed. + +Soldiers came hurrying out into the rain, hurriedly putting on their +overcoats; the great arched gateway filled up at once with men seeking +its shelter, and the sentry who had received his half-crown came to +roughly order the English intruders to go elsewhere; but it was only +outside militarism, for he said in a low hurried tone in French-- + +"Run outside to the end of the barracks. Grand cafe." + +"Come along, uncle. Never mind the rain," cried Rodd, catching at his +uncle's wrist, as he fully grasped the sentry's meaning; and stepping +outside the archway they ran together, or rather, were half carried by +the shrieking wind, for some thirty or forty yards, almost into the +doorway of a large lit-up building, for already it seemed to be almost +night. + +"Never mind the rain, indeed!" grumbled Uncle Paul. "Why, I'm nearly +soaked. Oh, come, we have got into civilised regions, at all events;" +for a couple of waiters, seeing their plight, literally pounced upon +them and hurried them through the building into a great kitchen where a +huge fire was burning and the smell of cookery saluted their nostrils. + +The attentions of the waiters of what was evidently one of the principal +hotels of the town were very welcome, and a glance teaching them that +their visitors were people of some standing, they made use of their +napkins to remove as much of the superabundant moisture as was possible, +and then furnished themselves with a fresh relay to operate upon their +backs. + +"Queer, isn't it, uncle? I am quite dry in front. My word, how the +rain did come down!" + +"Messieurs will dine here?" said one of the waiters smilingly. + +"_Oh, oui, pour certain_" replied Uncle Paul. "If you don't mind, +Pickle." + +"Mind, uncle? Oh, yes, of course. I am horribly hungry." + +"You always are, my boy. Well, we must make the best of a bad +business," continued the doctor, as, nodding to the waiter, he moved a +little closer to the fire and turned his back, an example followed by +Rodd. + +"It makes a dreadful time, monsieur," said the smiling waiter. "Will he +choose, or trust his servant to prepare a dinner upon the field of which +the English milor' will be proud?" + +"You speak capital English," said the doctor, rather sarcastically. + +"I have been many times in public in London." + +"Ah, that's right. Then give us a snug little dinner while we dry +ourselves. But what's the meaning of all that upset at the barracks +next door?" + +"It is not quite that I know, sir," said the man eagerly; "but two +officers came in upon the instant to put their cloaks where they should +not water themselves so much, and I hear them say, a dispatch come +quickly for monsieur the Governor to seize upon a ship. Oh, faith of a +man! Hark at that!" + +For there was a sudden crash and an echoing roar, while some of the +utensils in the great kitchen clattered together, and a piece of +earthenware fell from a shelf upon the stone floor, to be shivered to +atoms. + +"_Tonnerre, eh_?" said the doctor. + +"_Non, non, monsieur_" cried the man, relapsing into his native tongue +for a moment. "It is what you English gentlemen call a great gun from +the fort; and look, look! The poor _cuisiniere_ much alarm, as you call +it." + +For just then, as if catching the contagion from the shrieking of the +storm, one of the cook-maids threw herself back into a chair and began +to scream. + +It was a busy scene for a few minutes while the frightened hysterical +woman was hurried out, while with the storm seeming to increase in +violence, and amid the trampling of armed men outside, who were hurrying +from the barracks, the two English visitors gradually picked up scraps +of information which explained the excitement that in spite of the storm +was going on outside. + +"Messieurs would like to see," said the friendly waiter. "They will +come up-stairs to the long _salle_ whose windows give upon the harbour." + +"But what's the matter?" cried Rodd. "Is there a wreck?" + +"A wreck, sare?" said the waiter, shaking his head. "No, I know not +wreck." + +"Has a ship come ashore and is breaking up?" + +"Ha, ha! No, no, no, no, no, no, no! You would say _naufrage. Non, +non, non_! It is a sheep in the harbour; a foreign spy. They say it +has come to set fire to the town." + +"Then they have chosen a very bad night for it," said Uncle Paul, +laughing. + +"Monsieur is right. Nosing would burn. But the enemies of la France, +my great country, not stop to think of zat." + +"Oh, but that must be a rumour, Rodd," said Uncle Paul uneasily. "Why, +surely they are not going to fancy that our English schooner is a spy +and an enemy!" + +The waiter's ears were sharp, and he cried at once-- + +"English! Oh non, monsieur. You are from the little two-mast. It is +not you. It is some enemy of the King whose sheep is in the harbour, +and great dispatches have come to the Governor that she is to be seized. +Ah, there again, monsieur! Anozzer gun from the fort." + +It was plain enough to hear, for the windows of the big badly-lit room +into which the man had conducted them clattered in their frames, while +the dull, heavy report was preceded by a vivid flash as of lightning. + +"Ha, ha! You see. The sheep will not get away, for at the forts they +are alert and will sink her if she try." + +"Oh, but no vessel could try to put out in a storm like this, Rodd," +said Uncle Paul. + +"No, sare," continued the waiter excitedly; "the boats will go out with +the soldiers and take the sheep." + +"She is a man-of-war, I suppose?" + +"Yes, sare. Not very big, but an enemy; but if she fight they will +shoot from all the forts and sink her." + +"But how do you know all this?" said Rodd. + +"Many soldiers, horsemen, came galloping up to bring dispatches to the +Governor. There, sare; you will look from the window," continued the +man, using a clean serviette that he took from under his arm to rub the +steamy window-panes, for the cold blast of the storm had caused the warm +air inside to blur the glass with a thick deposit of vapour. "There, +sare," continued the man; "zat is ze sheep." + +"Oh, it's too thick to see for the rain." + +"Yes, sare; but you see out zare in ze arbour ze two lights." + +"Nonsense man!" cried Uncle Paul, half angrily. "That is the English +schooner--ours." + +"Oh, non, non, non, monsieur! Away to ze _gauche_--ze left hand. Ze +sheep with two high, tall mast, that we all see here when she come in ze +storm yesterday. We all here with ze officer of ze regiment see you +come in through ze storm, and ze enemy sheep, a stranger, come after, +and ze officer say she will run you down and sink you in ze harbour!" + +"Oh, that one!" cried Rodd excitedly. + +"Ah, I see, monsieur knows. You see her lights swing in the wind--two;" +and the man held up a couple of fingers. + +"Yes, I see where you mean," cried Rodd; "but she has only one light." + +"Ah, ha! Monsieur is right. Zare is only one. Ze vind storm has blow +out ze uzzer. Look, now zare is no light at all. Ze sheep put im out." + +The violence of the rain was now abating, but the wind beat against and +shook the window-panes and shrieked as it rushed by. It was evening, +and a few minutes before it had been dark as night, but with the +cessation of the rain the heavy forms and light rigging of the many +vessels gradually became more and more visible, while fresh lights began +to come into view, but in every case not moving and swinging about like +those in the rigging of the safely moored ships, but gliding about from +various directions as if they were in the sterns of boats that had put +off from the harbour side. + +"Messieurs see?" said the waiter excitedly. "Two boats come now from +the fort on ze uzzer side. Look, look! Ze lights shine on ze soldiers' +bayonet. They go to take ze sheep." + +As the man was speaking the brig that had previously taken up so much of +Rodd's attention stood out more clearly. Her riding lights were indeed +gone, but there was a peculiar misty look forward, and it was now Rodd's +turn to speak excitedly about what he saw. + +"Why, uncle," he cried, "she's moving! They've slipped their cable and +hoisted the jib!" + +"Nonsense, boy! Not in a storm like this." + +"I don't care, uncle; she has. Look; you can see her gliding along." + +"Impossible!" + +"It isn't, uncle. Look, you can see them plainly now; two boats full of +men, and they are rowing hard, but getting no nearer to the brig. Here, +I want to see; let's get right down to the harbour." + +"What, to get wet again?" cried Uncle Paul. + +"It doesn't rain now a drop. There's nothing but wind; and look, look; +the people are running down now in crowds, and there goes a company of +soldiers at the double. Oh, there's going to be something very +exciting, uncle, and we must see." + +"But the dinner, boy, the dinner! What is this to us?" + +"Dinner, uncle!" cried the lad indignantly. "Who's going to stop for +dinner when there are boats out yonder full of men going to board and +take a ship?" + +"Humph! Well," grunted Uncle Paul, "I suppose it would be rather +exciting, and we shall be able to see; but I don't know, though. +There'll be firing, and who knows which way the bullets will fly?" + +"Oh, they; won't hit us, uncle. Come on." + +Uncle Paul was rapidly growing as excited as his nephew, while the +waiter, if it were possible, was as full of eagerness as both together, +and forgetting all his duties and the dinner that he had ordered to be +prepared, he cried-- + +"Ze rain is ovare; you come vith me. I take you out ze back way and +down ze little rue which take us to the quay." + +That was enough for Rodd, and the next minute they were following the +waiter down the big staircase through the great kitchen once more, which +was now quite deserted, and out into a walled yard to a back gateway, +beyond which, mingling with the roaring of the wind, they could hear the +trampling of many feet. + +"Zis way; zis way!" the bare-headed waiter kept crying, as he put his +serviette to quite a new use, battling with the wind as he folded it +diagonally and then turned it into a cover for his head by tying the +corners under his chin. + +"Here, I say," cried Rodd, as the man kept on at a trot; "I want to get +to the harbour." + +"_Oui_, _oui_; zis way!" panted their guide, who nearly put the visitors +out of patience by turning off two or three times at right angles and +apparently taking them quite away from where they wished to go. "Zis +way! Zis way!" he kept on crying, till at last the trio were alone, +others who had been hurrying onward having taken different directions. + +Bang went another gun from the fort, a report which seemed to be sent +back instantly from the harbour walls, apparently close at hand. + +"Yes, zis way; zis way!" shouted the man. "I show you before zey sink +ze sheep." + +And now he suddenly turned into a narrow alley formed by two towering +warehouses so close together that there was not room for two people to +walk comfortably abreast; but "Zis way, zis way," shouted the guide, +"and you shall be zere upon ze field--_sur le champ, sur le champ_. Ah +ha!" he cried directly after, as he suddenly issued from out of the +darkness of the alley into the comparative light of a narrow wharf +encumbered with casks, just beyond which was the dripping stone edge of +the great harbour, and below them boats, barges, and lighters swinging +from the great rusty iron rings and mooring posts of the quay. + +"Vat you say to dat?" cried the waiter, turning round to face his +companions, beginning loudly and ending in a choking whisper, for he had +met a gust of wind face to face which stopped him for the moment from +taking his breath and forced him to turn his back and make a snatch at +the corner of one of the warehouses. "Faith of a good man!" he panted. +"The vind blow me inside out! Aha! What did I say?" + +"Capital!" panted Rodd, almost as breathlessly as the waiter, at whom +upon any other occasion he would have burst out into a roar of laughter, +so grotesque was his appearance with the white napkin tied under his +chin. "Oh, this is a splendid place!" + +"Here, you look out, Pickle," cried Uncle Paul. "Lay hold of something, +or we shall be blown right off." + +"All right, uncle. Why, if one of those gusts sent us into the harbour +we should be drowned." + +"Come a little farther this way, then, and if the wind is too much for +us, why we shall only go down into this barge." + +At that moment, as they looked across and downward towards the mouth of +the harbour, there were the flashes of bright light to illumine the +gloom of the evening, and the reports of a ragged volley of musketry +coming from one of the two boats which they could now make out being +rowed hard after the brig, as it glided rapidly along in the direction +where the watchers now stood. + +Then for a short space it passed out of sight behind a group of four +vessels which were safely moored. Then it was out again, and as the +lookers-on excitedly watched, they made out dimly that the vessel +answered her helm readily and was gliding round in a tack for the other +side of the harbour, while the two boats in pursuit altered their +direction, the men rowing with all their might, as if to cut the brig +off during her next tack. + +There was another ragged volley, this time from the second boat; but if +they were firing to bring down the steersman, it was in vain, for the +brig sailed swiftly on, gaining a little way, as she made for the mouth +of the harbour. + +This was far distant yet, and her chances of reaching it even in the +shelter of the harbour, with such a gale blowing, were almost nil. + +"She'll do it, though, uncle," shouted Rodd, with his lips close to +Uncle Paul's ear. + +"Yes, my boy, I expect she will," was the reply; "but they've got some +daring people on board, and I shouldn't like to be the man at the +wheel." + +"Ah, why don't they shoot? Why don't they shoot?" cried the waiter. +"She is an enemy, and--" + +The rest of his speech was unheard, for another flash cut the darkness, +followed by the thud of a big gun, the shot coming as it were instantly +upon the waiter's question; but it had no effect upon the brig, which +came nearer and nearer to the pier-like wharves of the harbour, glided +round again with the two stay-sails rilling upon the other tack, and +then went off once more. + +"She'll get away, uncle," cried Rodd excitedly, "and I don't know what +they are, but one can't help admiring such a brave deed." + +There was another report, this time from quite another direction. + +"That must be from the fort up behind the town, Rodd," cried Uncle Paul. +"It's too thick to see any splash, but they must be in earnest now, and +will not be firing blank charges. It looks as if they mean to sink her +if she doesn't stop." + +"They've got to hit her first, uncle," cried Rodd excitedly. "Oh, I +can't help it, uncle," he continued, with his lips close to his uncle's +ear so that the waiter should not catch his words, "but I do hope they +won't." + +"Well, my boy, I can't help feeling the same, though she's neither enemy +nor friend of ours, and we don't know what it all means; for I don't +suppose," he said, with a half-laugh, "that she has got Napoleon +Bonaparte on board." + +Uncle Paul had not taken his nephew's precaution, and as a heavy gust +was just dying out, the excited waiter caught a part of his speech. + +"Ha, ha!" he cried. "You sink so? You say le Petit Caporal is on +board?" + +"No, no," cried Uncle Paul; "I didn't say so." + +"No, sare; you think so, and zat is it. He has escape himself from ze +place where you English shot him up safe, and he come in zat sheep to +burn down ze town. But ah-h-h, again they will sink him. Faith of a +man, no!" he cried angrily, for there was a shot from another battery, +this time nearer the harbour mouth. "They cannot shoot straight." + +For onward glided the brig, making tack after tack, and zigzagging her +way through the narrow entrance of the harbour, at times partly +sheltered by the great pier to windward, then as she glided farther out +careening over in spite of the small amount of reefed sail she carried, +but all the while so well under control that she kept on gaining and +leaving the two boats farther and farther behind. + +"Oh, if it were only lighter!" cried Rodd, stamping his foot with +vexation. "Why, she'll soon be out of sight." + +"Before she gets much farther," said Uncle Paul gravely, "she'll be +getting within the light cast by one or other of the harbour lights, and +that will be one of her critical times." + +"Why critical, uncle?" cried the boy earnestly. "Because the men in the +fort will have a better chance of hitting her, I should say." + +"Oh, I hope they won't," said Rodd beneath his breath. "Why, it would +be horrible, uncle," he half whispered, with his lips close to his +uncle's face. "She must have a brave captain to dare all this." + +"A very brave captain," said Uncle Paul earnestly. "But you think +she'll get away, uncle?" + +"No, Rodney," said the doctor, laying his hand with a firm grip upon his +nephew's shoulder. "She may pass through the harbour mouth without +being hit by the gunners, for it would require a clever marksman to hit +so swiftly moving an object, rising and falling as the brig does now +that she is getting into the disturbed water near the mouth." + +"But suppose she passes through untouched, uncle? What then?" + +"What then, boy? She will be out of the shelter given by the end of the +jetty. It's too dim now to see, but once or twice I had just a glimpse +of the waves washing over the harbour light, and there must be a +terrific sea out there. Why, you can hear it plainly even here." + +"No, uncle; that's the wind." + +"And waves, my boy. Why, trying to sail out there in the teeth of such +a gale as this, it will be almost impossible for her to escape. It +seems to me to be an act of madness to attempt such an escapade, and +cleverly as the brig is handled I think it is doubtful whether she will +ever clear the mouth. But if she does she will catch the full force of +the storm and--" + +"And what, uncle?" + +"Be carried away yonder to the east somewhere and cast ashore." + +"Oh-h!" sighed Rodd; and it was almost a groan. + + + +CHAPTER SIXTEEN. + +ESCAPE. + +Three more shots were fired at intervals, as the brig kept making short +tack after tack, and with each report the flash appeared to be brighter, +indicative of the increasing darkness, while now a pale lambent light +seemed to be dawning at times and making the shape of the brig stand out +more clearly at intervals, but only to fade away again quickly, while +there were moments when the vessel quite disappeared. + +"Why is that, uncle?" asked Rodd quickly, as he looked vainly now in +search of the flying craft. "Ah, there she is again! I began to think +she had gone down. Why is she seen so dimly sometimes?" + +"Hidden by the flying spray, I think," said Uncle Paul. + +"Oh yes, of course," cried the boy. "Ah, there she is, quite clear now, +and still going on nearer and nearer to the harbour mouth. No--now it's +getting darker than ever.--There, now she's coming into sight again +quite clearly." + +"Yes, she's getting out where the harbour lights are full upon her," +said Uncle Paul. + +As he spoke there were two more reports, almost simultaneous, and Rodd +felt a peculiar sense of pain attacking him, for at one moment when the +two guns flashed, the brig could be plainly seen; the next, as the boy +strained his eyes, all was black darkness, and he caught at his uncle's +arm with his hands trembling and an intense longing upon him to speak; +but no words would come. + +It seemed like some minutes before a word was uttered, and then it was +the doctor who spoke. + +"I haven't caught sight of the boats lately," he said. "It is evident +that they have given up the chase." + +"Oh, uncle, uncle," cried Rodd, "I was not thinking about them, but of +those poor fellows in the brig. One of those last shots must have hit, +and they have gone down." + +"Oh no," cried Uncle Paul; "I saw her once again. Just now.--Yes, there +she is, tossing wildly in the waves. She must be beyond the mouth of +the harbour, and--" + +"Yes, I see her! I see her!" cried Rodd wildly. "No, she's gone again; +but she was pitching and tossing horribly." + +"Yes," said Uncle Paul. "It's going to be hard work for them now, for +the waves out there must be tremendous. Well, my boy, it was a daring +attempt, and whoever they are let's hope they may escape, but--" + +Uncle Paul was silent, and once more the boy uttered a low groan. + +Then no one spoke, but all stood straining their eyes to try and catch +sight again of the vessel, which had seemed to be pitching wildly in the +darkness; but they looked in vain, for all now seemed to be rapidly +growing black. + +The boy tried to speak, but no words would come, and even the waiter was +silent, as he stood trying to catch sight of the vessel once more; but +the darkness now was rapidly increasing, and though from time to time +they could make out the faint outline of the lights, all seemed to +become more dense and obscure, and the boy started violently as their +guide suddenly exclaimed-- + +"It is no use now, sare. I sink she must have gone down." + +Silence; but as Uncle Paul pressed his nephew's arm Rodd followed him +slowly without a word, while the waiter shook his head and suggested +that they should return to the _cafe_. + +The boy gave one glance before stirring, and then uttered a sigh. + +"Come, my boy," said his uncle; "perhaps there is no occasion to +despair. It is quite evident that the captain of the brig knows what he +is about, and may escape." + +Rodd followed his uncle without a word, the waiter going on before them +to show the devious ways along by the harbour and the old town. + +As they drew near the yard Rodd felt a sense of hesitation. "I think I +would rather get back on board the schooner, uncle," he said. + +"Oh, but we couldn't do that, my boy," cried Uncle Paul. "I gave an +order for dinner to be prepared." + +"Yes, uncle, but I don't feel as if I could eat anything now." + +"Why?" + +"It seemed so horrible watching that vessel trying to escape under +fire." + +"It was evidently not hit, my boy." + +"But it was going right out into the face of this storm, and even you +thought she'd be driven ashore." + +"Yes; perhaps I have been thinking the worst; but the brig's captain is +evidently a clever sailor and knows what he's about. It is rather +jumping at conclusions to consider that he will let his vessel be +wrecked. Yes, it was nervous work watching a vessel like that; but +there, we must hope for the best, and possibly there is no reason to +despond. Whoever the brig belonged to had good reason for getting away, +and they have succeeded in that. There, come along; let's have our +dinner, and think no more about it. But hallo! What's the matter +here?" + +Uncle Paul's remark was caused by a loud angry voice scolding in French +at the waiter who had just led them to the yard door, and it was evident +that the man was in difficulties for absenting himself from his duties +after giving the order that the visitors' dinner should be prepared. + +"But I have been in attendance upon the gentlemen," he protested, with +not much truth in his utterance. "I had to take them down to the side +of the harbour to see the firing at the spy. Is everything ready? +Because the gentlemen are anxious for their dinner." + +Uncle Paul nudged his nephew, glad of the opportunity to change the +bearing of the boy's thoughts, and shortly after the good meal prepared +in the snug, warm room diverted Rodd's mind from the roaring of the +storm, which was still beating round the great hotel; and they had just +finished and were talking about going outside to see what the weather +was like, when a very familiar gruff voice saluted their ears, as the +waiter showed Captain Chubb into the room. + +"Oh, here you are," he grunted. "Come ashore to look after you. 'Fraid +you were lost." + +"We are very glad to see you," said Uncle Paul. "Sit down. We thought +it was not safe to try and get aboard." + +"Well, it aren't very," said the skipper; "but we come in the boat to +make sure you weren't both drowned, and if you'll risk it I think I can +get you round by keeping under the lee of two or three vessels." + +"What do you say, Rodd?" asked Uncle Paul. "Shall we risk it?" + +"Oh, I don't think that there'll be much risk, uncle, if Captain Chubb +considers it safe. I don't mind going with him." + +The skipper gave the boy a nod and looked pleased; then nodding at Uncle +Paul he said quietly-- + +"As we were ashore I told the men to get a few stores down to the boat, +and that I'd meet them here. I dare say Joe Cross will be an hour, and +by that time it will have lulled a bit, or else be a deal worse, and +we'll see." + +It took very little persuasion to make the skipper partake of some of +the hotel fare, and naturally enough the conversation turned upon the +incident that had lately taken place. + +"Yes," said Captain Chubb, "the skipper of that craft has got some stuff +in him, and he knew how to navigate his boat. I could have done it if +I'd been obliged, but I should have wanted a deal of shoving before I +hoisted sail. Storm was bad enough, and no room to tack; but what I +shouldn't have liked was being fired at by two boats' crews and three or +four forts. I know what being fired at is, young squire," continued the +captain, giving Rodd a very peculiar look out of one eye, after closing +the other, "and you may take my word for it it aren't nice." + +"What, have you been out in a man-of-war?" asked Rodd eagerly. + +"Nay, my lad, but several of our fellows have, and if you ask them, they +can tell you what it's like too." + +"Then you never were fired at?" said Rodd questioningly. + +"Who says I warn't? I tell you I was, though it wasn't by forts. It +was a Revenue cutter got trying to hit me." + +"What, smuggling?" cried Rodd. + +"Nay! Smuggling, indeed! It was her skipper--Lieutenant somebody or +another--I forget his name--say Smith. He made a blunder, same as I did +in taking you and the doctor here for slavers." + +"Oh!" cried Rodd, laughing. + +"Ah, it warn't anything to laugh at, my lad, with round shot coming +a-splashing right across your bows. Certainly it was in a fog, and my +craft didn't get hit, but more than once the balls came pretty near, and +I remember thinking whether if the cutter did sink us we should all be +able to swim ashore, and I come to the conclusion that we couldn't in +our boots, for it was about nine miles." + +"I should think not," replied Rodd dryly. "But, Captain Chubb--about +that brig; do you think they'd get right away to sea?" + +"I shouldn't think they'd try to, my lad." + +"They seemed to be trying to." + +"Not they. Her skipper, as soon as he got outside the harbour, would +try to creep under the lee of the high ground somewhere out west. +Whether he'd do it or not is quite another thing. Let's hope he did, +for I don't care about hearing that good men and true have been drowned +in a storm, even if they are French. I am not like your uncle here." + +"Come, I say, Captain Chubb," cried the doctor indignantly, "how dare +you say that! Surely a thinking man can have a feeling of antipathy +against Napoleon Bonaparte and all his works without being accused of +liking to see brave Frenchmen drowned." + +"Beg pardon, sir. I suppose you are right," granted the skipper; "but I +should like to hear that that there smart brig got safe away." + +"Well, I hope so too," said Uncle Paul shortly, and with a look in his +countenance that made Rodd think about some words a friend had once said +about a red rag to a bull. "But I suppose you don't believe that vessel +had some emissaries of Napoleon on board, come to set fire to the port +of Havre?" + +"Nay," said the skipper, drawing out the negative very deliberately. +"Don't see any likelihood of their doing such a thing. What for? +Suppose they did get it alight, that wouldn't bring Bony back. Nay, his +game's about up now, and there will be quiet again over here for a bit, +though I wouldn't venture to say for how long. Keeping quiet isn't in a +Frenchman's nature." + +"But there was evidently something very special about the vessel, or +else the French Government wouldn't have sent orders for her to be +seized." + +"French Government did?" + +"Yes, I believe so," replied Uncle Paul. "We saw the officer and his +men come riding in with the dispatch." + +"Nay. Order for the Revenue to put men on board." + +"Oh no," replied Uncle Paul. "From what we saw and what we heard, it +was something much more important than that. Why, hang it, captain, +they wouldn't have turned out the garrison and manned all the forts to +stop the progress of a smuggler, would they?" + +"We wouldn't at Plymouth, sir; but there's no knowing what Frenchmen +will do. But there, I give in. It must have been something stronger +than that, and I am beginning to think that squire here's right, and +that yon vessel, the--the--the--" + +"_Jeanne d'Arc_" cried Rodd. + +"Right," snorted the skipper. "She was something of a privateer, on +mischief bent, and I shouldn't be a bit surprised if we was to hear +something more about her. I don't know, though; if the storm blows +itself out before morning we shan't lie long here in harbour, but make +away south as fast as I can make the schooner bowl along." + +"Then you think the weather will hold up soon?" said Rodd. + +"Nay, I am not going to think, squire; I'll wait until I can be sure. +Anyhow, I won't fill my pipe till we get aboard." + +"Then you mean to try soon?" cried Rodd eagerly. + +"Why not?" replied the skipper gruffly. "Look yonder; what do you say +to that?" + +"That" was the presence of Joe Cross, who was being ushered into the +dining-saloon by the waiter, to announce that the wind had sunk a bit +and only came in squalls, between two of which he thought he could +easily run the boat alongside of the schooner. + +And he did--while the next morning broke almost absolutely calm. + + + +CHAPTER SEVENTEEN. + +A QUESTION OF FEAR. + +It was as if all the bad weather had been left behind, for after a +little snatch or two, as Joe Cross called them, the cruise down south +had been glorious. + +The bluff, good-humoured sailor explained to Rodd what he meant by a +snatch, something after this fashion. + +"You see, sir, after we started from Havre the weather seemed to be a +bit sorry for itself for being so dirty, and you know how we bowled +along down south till the wind got into a tantrum again--got out of bed +the wrong way, as you may say, and then everything was wrong. We were +getting into the Bay, you see, where it comes quite natural to lay all +that day. In the Bay of Biscay O! Then Nature got all out of sorts +again. It seemed as if she was waxy to let us have it so comfortable, +and made a snatch to drag us back again. But the old man was one too +many for her, and kept on for them two bad days, when we sailed out of +her reach and everything was fine." + +"Yes, Joe, it was fine. All that coast of Spain and Portugal was +lovely." + +"Yes, sir, and you got grumbling 'cause your uncle wouldn't give orders +for us to let go the anchor for you to go fishing." + +"Well, see how grand it was, and how calm the sea used to get of an +evening before we put in to Gibraltar." + +"And then you weren't half satisfied, sir. You'll excuse me, Mr Rodd, +sir, but you do make me laugh;" and to the boy's great annoyance the man +half turned from him, leaned over the taffrail, laughed till his sides +shook, and then pulling himself up suddenly wiped his eyes. "I am very +sorry, sir," he said. + +"Doesn't seem like it," cried Rodd warmly, as he made as if to go away. + +It was one evening when the calm sea as it heaved seemed in places to +glint forth all the glorious colours of a beautiful pearl shell, and the +east wind was of a different complexion to that familiar to an English +lad, for it was soft, balmy and sweet, suggestive of its having been +blowing gently for miles and miles over beds of flowers. + +"Oh, don't go away in a tiff, Mr Rodd, sir. It was only me, and you +know what I am. I didn't mean no offence." + +"Well, it was offensive," said Rodd. "How would you like to be laughed +at?" + +"Me, sir?" cried the man merrily. "Me who has been knocking about the +sea nearly all my life, first in a west-country fishing-boat, and then +in a King's ship, and been in action! Like being laughed at! Why, +bless your heart, sir, it suits me down to the deck. I like it. Deal +better than having the old man dropping on to me about something being +wrong aloft." + +"Well, I don't see that there was anything to laugh at," cried Rodd, +softening down a little, for somehow the liking he had felt for the +sturdy-looking sailor ever since he had come on board had gone on +increasing, and Rodd affected Joe's society more than that of any one in +the ship. At least he said so to Uncle Paul, who shook his head and +with a grim smile joined issue. + +"No, Pickle," he cried, "I won't have that. You seem to make better +friends with the cook than with anybody." + +"Oh, uncle," replied the boy, "you always do tease me about my +appetite." + +"Never mind, Pickle," said Uncle Paul good-humouredly. "Go on eating, +and grow." + +But to return to the conversation by the taffrail. + +"No, sir," said Joe Cross, "of course you don't, sir. It'd be contrairy +to nature if you did. We chaps can't see ourselves. There's the old +Bun. He's been offended over and over again because people told him he +was so fat. He can't see it, sir." + +"Oh, he must," cried Rodd, laughing. + +"There aren't no must in it, sir. He can't. He might find it out +perhaps if he tried to get into a pair of boy's trousers--yours, for +instance; but then that aren't likely, because you won't give him the +chance, and what's more, he wouldn't want to. You try him some day +about being too fat, and you see if he don't stare at you." + +"He will, Joe, when I'm so rude to him. But come now, you are +shuffling. Why is it that you laugh at me?" + +"Well, sir, because I like you, for one thing, and another is because +you are such an unreasonable chap." + +"I? Unreasonable?" cried Rodd hotly. "That I'm sure I'm not!" + +"Why, sir, wasn't you put out because your uncle and the old man +wouldn't sail right into the Mediterranean Sea?" + +"Well, there was nothing unreasonable in that. I am sure it would have +been very interesting." + +"Not it, sir. I've been there over and over again, and it always seemed +to me just like any other sea, only a bit rougher sometimes, and it +aren't got hardly any tide. You wait till we get a little further on, +and you'll find plenty to make you open you eyes wider than ever you +opened them before. I don't know a finer place for seeing wonders of +the deep than along where we are going, as you say we are to, right +along the West Coast of Afriky. Why, you might begin fishing and +dredging directly after we had put in at Mogador, where the fish are +wonderful, and you can't drop in a line without hauling something out." + +"That's good," cried Rodd eagerly; "but I am afraid uncle won't let us +have much time for ordinary fishing. He will be more on the look-out +for curiosities." + +"Ah, well, there's plenty of them too, sir--all sorts, and the farther +you gets into warmer water the more there are." + +"What sort?" asked Rodd. + +"All sorts, and the nearer you are to land the more you get. Then I +suppose some time we shall come upon that there Sargassey Sea." + +"Where's that?" asked Rodd. + +"Right away down south, sir. Let's see, if I remember right we falls in +with that soon after you pass the islands." + +"What islands?" + +"Let's see; I ought to know, sir. The fust that comes near Europe is +the Azores; then farther south there's that there island where all the +sick people goes, Madeiry; then there's the Canaries, where the birds +come from; only they aren't all yaller like people keeps in their cages. +Most I seed there was green, and put me in mind of them little chaps as +we have at home with the yaller heads--you know, sir; them as cries, `A +little bit of bread and no cheese.' And you see them up country, +a-twittering among the hedges." + +"Yes, I know," said Rodd sharply; "but what about the Sargassey Sea?" + +"Ah! I'm thinking it was after that we come to that sea, only I aren't +quite sure, sir. But if I recollect right, they say it shifts about +according to what sort of weather we have." + +"Well, so does every sea," cried Rodd, "when the waves are running +high." + +"Ah, but they don't run high here, sir. You see, the Sargassey Sea +aren't like other seas, and I suppose it's only part of the Atlantic +after all. It's all smooth like because as far as you can see it's all +like one great bed of floating seaweed, so thick that you can hardly +sail through it at times, and if you go out into it in a boat it's as +much as you can do to dip your oars." + +"Have you been out amongst it then?" asked Rodd. + +"Yes, sir, more'n once. It was when I was in the _Prince George_ off +the West Coast of Africa, and we had got a surgeon on board there, and +him and our second lieutenant had both got it badly." + +"What, West African fever?" cried Rodd. + +"No, no, sir; same as your uncle's got--looking after strange things as +lives in the sea. I was one of the crew of the second cutter then, and +in the beautiful calm weather we used to take the doctor and the second +luff out in this Sargassey Sea, which used to look sometimes as if we +were floating about in green fields." + +"Oh, you mean the Sargasso Sea!" cried Rodd. "Nay, I don't, sir; I +means the Sargassey Sea." + +"Well, that's the same thing, only you spell it differently," cried +Rodd. + +"Oh no, sir; that I don't. That's a thing as I never pretended to do. +I can take my spell at the pump or at any other job; but what you call +spelling was never in my way." + +"But you mean the same thing," cried Rodd. "It isn't Sar-gass-ey; it's +Sar-gass-o." + +"Ho! Sar-gass-ho, is it, sir?" + +"Yes, of course." + +"All right, sir; I'm willing. But my one was all alive with little +things, little fish and slugs and snails of all kinds of rum sorts; and +our second luff used to make us haul in great lengths of the seaweed as +was floating about, and then help him to pick 'em out into bottles till +they were quite full, and looking just as if they was pickles same as +you see in the grocers' shops in Plymouth town." + +"Well, the same as you saw uncle and me do that day during the calm?" + +"Yes, sir, just like that, only yours as you did were small shop and +ours was like big warehouse, though I don't think our doctor did much +good with them, because so many of them used to go bad, and our cook and +his mate used to have to throw no end away and wash the bottles." + +"Ah, ours won't go bad," said Rodd confidently. "My uncle will preserve +them differently to that." + +"Oh, yes, I suppose so, sir. You see, we've all come out this time +ready for the job; our officers on the _Prince George_ only did their +bit just for a day or two's holiday like, and our job was to look after +the mounseers' cruisers, not to catch tittlebats and winkles, and it +wasn't so very long after that we was at it hammer and tongs with a big +French frigate, making work for the doctor of a precious different kind, +and for our ship's carpenters too. Different sort of nat'ral history +that was, sir, I can tell you, for we lost nineteen of our men and had a +lot wounded; but we took the frigate, and carried her safe into +Portsmouth Harbour." + +"Ah!" cried Rodd softly, as his eyes flashed at the thoughts of the +deeds of naval daring carried out by our men-of-war. "I wish I'd been +there!" + +"You do, sir?" said Joe. "Mean it?" + +"Mean it? Of course! There, don't look at me like that. I wasn't +thinking of being a man, but a reefer--one of those middies that we used +to see at Plymouth." + +"Ah, it's all very fine, sir," said Joe, shaking his head, "and it +sounds very nice about firing broadsides and then getting orders to +board when the two big men-of-war get the grappling-irons on board and +you have to follow your officers, scrambling with your cutlass in your +hand out of the chains from your ship into the enemy's; and all the time +there's the roaring of the guns and the popping away of the marines up +in the tops, and the men cheering as your officers lead them on. It's a +very different thing, sir, to what you think, and so I can tell you." + +"Why, Joe," cried Rodd, almost maliciously, "you talk as if you felt +afraid!" + +"Afraid, sir?" said the man, quietly and thoughtfully. "No, sir. No, +sir; I never felt afraid, and I never knowed one of my messmates as said +he was." + +"Oh no, of course they wouldn't say so," cried Rodd, laughing. + +"No, sir, that's right. But I aren't bragging, sir. I've been in +several engagements like that, and my messmates always seemed to feel +just as I did. You see, they'd got it to do, sir, and we always felt +that it was only mounseers that we'd got to beat and captur' their ship; +and then as soon as we had begun, whether we was crews of guns, stripped +and firing away, or answering the orders to board, why, then we never +had time to feel afraid." + +"What, not when you saw your messmates shot down beside you?" cried +Rodd. + +"My word, no, sir!" cried Joe, laughing. "We none of us felt afraid +then; it only made us feel wild and want to sarve the other side out. +No, sir," continued the bluff fallow, in a quiet matter-of-fact way, and +his voice utterly free of vaunt, "whether it's a sea-fight or things are +going wrong in a storm, we sailor fellows are always too busy to feel +afraid. You see, I think, sir, it has something to do with the drill +and discipline, as they calls it, training the lads all to work +together. You see, it makes them feel so strong." + +"I can't say I do see," said Rodd. + +"No, sir, because you haven't been drilled; but it's like this 'ere. +One man's one man, and a hundred men's a hundred men--no, stop; that +aren't quite what I mean. It aren't in my way, Mr Rodd, sir; I never +was a beggar to argue. The fat Bun can easily beat me at that. This +'ere's what I mean. One man's one man, and a hundred men's a hundred +one men. That's if they aren't drilled and trained like sailors or +soldiers; but if they are trained, you see each one man feels as if he +has got a hundred men with him all working together, and con-se-quently, +sir, every chap aboard feels as if he's as strong as a hundred men. Now +don't you see, sir?" + +"Well, yes," said Rodd quietly; "I think I begin to see what you mean." + +"Why, of course you do, sir. Say it's heaving a boat aboard, and it +takes twenty men to do it. Why, if they go and try one at a time, where +are you? But if you all go and take hold together, and your officer +says to you, `Now, my lads, with a will, all together! Heave ho!' why +then, up she comes. Well now, I do call that rum! Look at that, sir. +If here aren't the old man, just as if he had heard what we was talking +about, passing the word for gun drill, or else a bit of knicketty knock +with the cutlasses and pikes!" + + + +CHAPTER EIGHTEEN. + +A STRANGE VISITOR. + +Upon hearing Joe Cross's announcement Rodd eagerly turned, to find his +uncle just coming on deck to take his evening walk after a busy day with +his specimens that he had dragged and trawled from the calm sea. + +The captain had just given orders to the mate to summon all hands on +deck, and one of the first proceedings was to call the men to attention, +the next to send them to the small-arms chest, from which each returned +with cutlass buckled on and carrying a boarding pike, which were placed +in a rack round the mainmast. + +Rodd took his position just opposite as the men fell into line; Uncle +Paul seated himself as far off as he could get, in a deck-chair, where +he sat and frowned; and then Captain Chubb diligently put his men +through all the evolutions of cutlass drill over and over again, till he +was satisfied, when he bade them fall out for a few minutes to rid +themselves of their cutlasses. + +In the interval Rodd went up to where his uncle was seated. + +"I say, uncle," he said, "how the men have improved!" Uncle Paul +grunted, and just then Captain Chubb strolled up. + +"Well, sir," he said, "we shall soon have a crew now as smart as a +man-of-war's." + +"So I see," grumbled Uncle Paul; "and when you have got them perfect +what are you going to do with them?" + +"Ah, that remains to be seen, sir. There's nothing like being +prepared." + +"Better let the men rest after all they have done to-day. What with +their deck cleaning and the work they have done for me, they don't want +setting to play at soldiers." + +"Playing at soldiers, eh, sir? I call it playing at sailors. No use to +lock the stable-door after the steed's stolen. My lads may never be +called upon to fight, but if by bad luck we are, I should like them to +be able to use their fighting tools like men." + +"Oh, it isn't likely," said Uncle Paul, "in a peaceful voyage like +ours." + +"Most unlikely things are those that happen first," growled the captain. + +"But you worry the men with too much work, and I want them to be fresh +and ready for me to-morrow morning. I don't want the poor fellows to be +discontented." + +"Discontented, sir!" cried the skipper hotly. "I should like to see +them look discontented! But not they! They like it. Puts them in mind +of their old fighting days. Now you shall see them go through their +drill with the boarding pikes, and see how smart I have made them. I +say they like it, sir; and I know." + +"Then I suppose," said Uncle Paul, "you will set them to work lumbering +about that great gun, pretending to load and fire it. Why, who in the +world do you expect we are going to encounter out here on the high seas? +We are not at war with the French." + +"Captain Chubb thinks we may meet with the privateer," said Rodd +merrily. + +"Don't you make rude remarks, Rodney!" cried Uncle Paul angrily. "Well, +there, captain, I suppose you will have your own way, but it seems to me +great waste of time." + +"Oh no, sir," said the skipper good-humouredly. "I suppose you mean to +run in and up some of those rivers we shall pass by and by?" + +"Most certainly," cried the doctor. + +"Well, and what then, sir? You are going right out of civilisation +there, and among black tribes and warlike people who are ready for +anything, from attacking another tribe and bringing the prisoners down +the river to sell for slaves, up to taking a fancy to any smart craft +they can master, and then stripping her and burning her to the water's +edge." + +"And what becomes of the crews?" cried Rodd sharply. + +"Well, Mr Rodd, that's rather a hard question to answer. If ever you +go to Liverpool or Bristol and you get asking questions amongst the +merchants there, you will find they have got some queer tales to tell. +Sorry you don't like my plans, Dr Robson, but even if we never get into +trouble we shall be none the worse for being prepared." + +"Oh, I am not going to complain, Captain Chubb. Drill away as much as +you like. You say the men like it, and it satisfies you. Then my boy +Rodd, here, nothing will please him better than letting him have a +canister of gunpowder to play with and pop off that gun. So I am in a +minority, and I will give in. There, you'd better take Rodd and drill +him too." + +"I'll take you at your word, sir," said Captain Chubb, laughing, and +making Rodd start with eagerness. "Fall in, my lads. Pikes." + +The drilling went on till it was beginning to grow dusk, and then pikes +were laid aside and orders given for the gun crew to take their places, +Rodd closing up quickly in anticipation of something coming off. + +"Rather warm weather, Mr Rodd, sir," whispered Joe Cross, as, aided by +another of the crew, he proceeded to cast loose the lashings and strip +the tarpaulin off the long gun. "If it warn't for the showers this 'ere +pocket pistol might very well do without her greatcoat. I say, sir, +didn't I hear your uncle tell the old man that you were to have a +canister of powder just to fire her off once or twice?" + +"Yes, Joe, but I think it was only to tease me." + +"You ask the skipper to let you have one. It's all very well to go on +ramming and sponging and making believe to load, but it is like having +your grog served out in an empty glass. And if the old man grunts and +shakes his head and grumbles about waste of ammunition, you just ask him +if he'd mind you bringing one of your canisters of powder as you and +your uncle's got for your double guns. He might let you then, if your +old man don't mind. We could divide it into about four goes as wouldn't +make much noise, and there'd be some sense in it. There would be +something to ram down; and the lads would like it." + +"But the captain wouldn't let you fire away any cannon balls, Joe." + +"Well, no, sir, I suppose not, unless we got the cook up with a +pudding-bag to hold it over the muzzle and catch them again." + +"Wouldn't a straw hat be better, Joe?" said Rodd dryly. + +"Well, now you talk of it, sir," replied the man, grinning, "I never +thought of that. Perhaps it would if one of us held it lightly in his +hand and eased off a good deal when we fired. If you didn't do that of +course the ball might go right through." + +"Well, I'll ask the captain, Joe." + +"Yes, sir; do, sir. As I said afore, it would please the lads, and do +good too, for it would clean the gun's teeth, sweep away all the scales +and rust." + +"Scales and rust!" cried Rodd. "Why, it isn't an iron gun; it's brass." + +"Why, so it is, Master Rodd, sir. Why, only fancy me not thinking of +that! But here he comes. Try it on, sir." + +"Shall I, Joe?" + +"Yes, do, sir; as I said, it would please the lads. They're just like a +lot of school-boys when they gets a chance of a change." + +"And Joe Cross doesn't care a bit," said Rodd. + +The man gave the speaker a comical look as he replied-- + +"Well, sir, you see, I was a boy once, and I was born with a lot of +human natur' in me, and I never got rid of it, and I am afraid I never +shall. There, go on, sir," whispered Joe. "Pitch it into him at once." + +Rodd moved towards the skipper as he came up, and as the latter looked +at him inquiringly he began-- + +"You heard what my uncle said, captain?" + +"What about, my lad?" + +"Letting me have some powder to play with." + +"Ay, ay! But you don't want that?" + +"Oh, I don't know. I wish you would have a canister and let the men +load the gun properly." + +"Eh?" + +"It would be like practice." + +"Well, that's true. But it would be only waste of powder; and I'm not +going to waste any of the cannon balls." + +"No, I don't want you to do that." + +"Besides, I don't want to use either of the powder-bags, and they're +made for a regular charge." + +"Beg pardon, sir," cried Cross. "Might make small charges up with a +snuff of powder wrapped up in paper; and then I could prick and prime." + +"Um-m-m!" the captain growled, and frowned, while the gun crew stood +with parted lips, looking as eager as so many boys on the Fifth of +November. Then the captain grunted. + +"There, Mr Rodd," he said, "it will be a bit of practice for the lads, +and it won't please you, of course. You don't want to see the gun +really fired?" + +"Oh, I have seen salutes fired, at Plymouth." + +"Ah, so you have, of course, my lad. But those are bangs, and this +would be a bit of a whiff." + +"That doesn't matter," said Rodd. "It will be real, and not pretending +to fire." + +"Very well," said the captain, smiling grimly. "Maybe you'd like to +fire?" + +"Yes, I should," cried Rodd. "No; let Joe Cross and the other men do +that. I'll stand aside." + +There was a little more discussion, quite in opposition to ordinary +drill, while the skipper went below and then returned with a pound +gunpowder canister painted red. + +"I say, look here, Chubb," cried the doctor. "Shall I have to move?" + +"Oh no, sir; we shan't shoot you," replied the skipper grimly. "You'll +be safe enough, unless the long gun bursts. But she's too new and +strong for that. Here you are, Cross. Make that into four charges." + +The speaker was in the act of passing the canister to the man, when the +look-out man from forward suddenly shouted-- + +"Sail ho!" + +"Where away?" cried the captain. "About five points off the starboard +bow, sir. Leastwise, sir, it aren't a sail. It's a big boat, bottom +upwards and just awash." + +"Stop a minute," cried Rodd. "I'll fetch our glass." + +"Bring mine too, my lad," cried the captain, and Rodd raised his hand in +token of his having heard the order, as he dashed to the cabin hatch, to +return directly after and find that his uncle was forward along with the +skipper scanning the object about a quarter of a mile away. + +"Catch hold, uncle," cried Rodd, and he held out the telescope with one +hand, and the captain's big mahogany tubed spy-glass, decorated with +coloured flags, with the other. + +"No, focus it and use it yourself, boy. I'll have a look afterwards." + +Rodd raised the glass at once to his eye, but by this time the skipper +had caught the object, and began to growl remarks. + +"Capsized long-boat," he muttered. "No, it's a fish--sick whale, I +think. But I don't know. It's moving pretty well through the water. +What do you make of it, my lad?" + +"It's very big and long," cried Rodd excitedly, "and it may be part of a +whale's back just showing above the water. I don't know, though. I +never saw a whale swimming before. Here, I know! I think it's five or +six porpoises swimming one after the other and close together." + +"Nay!" growled the captain. "It's something--" + +"It's gone!" shouted Rodd. "Oh, uncle, I wish you'd seen it. It seemed +to sink down out of sight all at once." + +"'Cause it didn't like to be looked at, sir," whispered Joe Cross. "But +look out, sir," he cried eagerly. "There it is again, a little farther +off." + +"Have a look, doctor," said the skipper, passing the glass to Uncle +Paul. + +"Is it a whale?" asked the doctor. + +"Nay, that's no whale, sir," replied the captain. "A whale don't go +under water like that when she sounds. Down goes her head, and she +throws her flukes up in the air." + +"Then what is it?" cried Uncle Paul, with the glass now glued to his +eye. "It's something very big. Yes, I can see plainly now-- +blackish-grey, and shiny as if slimy. It seems to undulate, for one +minute the back seems to be only a few feet long, then three or four +parts are above the surface at once, as if the creature were twenty or +thirty feet long." + +"Yes, sir; I can see that with the naked eye.--Nay, nay, sir; you keep +the glass. It's more in your way than mine. Seems to me as if we have +hit a curiosity for you, only it's rather too big to tackle." + +"I think it's a great snake," cried Rodd excitedly. "I mean, a very +large eel, swimming on the top, and he keeps throwing his head about as +if he were feeding in the middle of a shoal of fish." + +"Yes, it is something like that, Rodd," said the doctor; "but no conger +eel could be as large as that, and really I don't know." + +"Sea-sarpint, sir," whispered Joe Cross to Rodd, and looking longingly +at the glass the while. + +"Nonsense!" cried Rodd. "Here, you have a look, Joe," and he passed the +glass to the sailor. "Now then," he said, "what do you make of it?" + +"I say sea-sarpint, sir." The captain growled more deeply than ever. + +"Sea-sarpint!" he said, in a tone of disgust. "There, hold your tongue, +my lad. You're a naturalist, doctor; you haven't got no sea-sarpints in +your books, have you?" + +"No," replied the doctor, handing the glass to one of the men, as he +caught his longing eye. "But this must be a very curious fish, and it +is evidently feeding. I wish it were coming this way, so that we could +have a better view." + +Joe Cross lowered the boy's glass and looked questioningly at Rodd, +giving at the same time a wag of his head in the direction of the +nearest man. + +"Yes, let him have a look," said Rodd hoarsely, and as the glass was +passed the boy caught the sailor by the sleeve, and whispered, making +Joe start and gaze at him inquiringly, before stooping down and giving +his thigh a slap with his right hand. + +"Ay, ay, sir!" he whispered. "Ask the skipper." + +"Ask the _captain_ what?" said the skipper sharply. + +"I have been thinking, Captain Chubb," panted Rodd. "Have the long gun +loaded with a ball, and let the men try and hit that thing. 'Tisn't +above a quarter of a mile away." + +"Eh? Have a shot at it, my lad?" said the captain, staring, and then +shading his eyes to watch the object that was gliding along, making the +water ripple strangely, while all around it was in violent ebullition, +betokening that a large shoal of fish was feeding there. "Well, I don't +know. What do you say, doctor?" continued the speaker. "I don't say +that the lads could hit it, but they might." + +"Certainly," said the doctor eagerly. "Try." + +There was no occasion to give orders for a ball to be fetched up. Joe +Cross and Rodd had darted off together, plunged down the hatchway, and +were back again in an incredibly short space of time, the sailor +carrying the ball, while Rodd had snatched up three or four big sheets +of paper from off one of the laboratory lockers, and then as rapidly as +possible a good charge of powder was emptied into one of the sheets, the +gun's crew fell into place and rammed the charge home in the most +business-like manner, the ball followed, Joe Cross thrust the pricker +down into the touch-hole and primed, while another of the men ran with a +piece of slow match to the cook's galley, where the water was being +boiled for tea. + +Everything was done skilfully and with speed, while all on deck were in +a state of profound excitement and dread lest the great creature should +disappear from sight and rob the spectators of their looked-for sport. + +"Oh, do be quick!" cried Rodd. + +"Yah-h-h!" came in a groan, for as the words left the boy's lips there +was a violent ebullition where the great serpent or whatever it was had +been playing, the beautiful ripple of the shoal of fish died out, and in +the fast-fading light of the evening the sea all around lay gleaming and +grey, as it gently heaved, with no other movement now. + +"Oh, what a pity we were so long," said Rodd dismally. "I believe we +should have hit it. I am disappointed!" + +"Well, so am I, if you come to that, Rodd, my boy," said the doctor, +"though I don't think the men could have made a successful shot. You +see, it requires a great deal of practice to hit an object like that +with a big gun." + +"Whatever it was," growled the captain, "it was feeding on that shoal of +fish, and when it made that dash it scared the lot away. There it is +again! You, Joe Cross, take a good long careful sight. Don't hurry. +Slow and sure. My word, you ought to hit that, my lad! It's a big 'un +and no mistake. Silence there! Every man in his place. Slew the +muzzle round a little more. Ready, Cross?" + +"No, sir; want to lower a little;" and as he spoke the sailor thrust in +one of the wedges a trifle. "That's about got it, sir." + +"Looks as if he'd come to stay, doctor," said the captain excitedly, as +he bent down to glance along over the gun's two sights, for the shoal of +fish had risen once more, turning the beautiful smooth sea into a +diaper-like pattern, while the strange object seemed as far as they +could make out to be making a snatching dart here and another there, +seeming to be like some whale-like creature with a long neck. + +"Now she's steady, sir," whispered Joe Cross huskily, after taking the +captain's place for another sight. "It's as near as I can get, sir. If +you'll give me the word." + +As he spoke the sailor drew back slightly, the captain cried "Fire!" and +with a heavy, sharp crack a puff of white smoke darted from the muzzle +and began to expand forward like a grey balloon, obscuring everything +from the sight of the lookers-on for about a minute, before it rose +clear, and then the darkening sea was all grey once more. + + + +CHAPTER NINETEEN. + +CHUBB RE SEA-SERPENTS. + +"Hah! Very disappointing--very," said the doctor. + +"Yes, it's gone, I suppose, sir. One couldn't see where the shot hit +for smoke, but I expect it turned up the water and scared the thing +away. Well, it's best as it is. A great thing like that might have +grown very dangerous if it had been hit." + +"Oh, we don't know that," cried the doctor. "Well, I suppose we can do +nothing more," he continued, as, following his nephew's example, he +strained his eyes over the darkening plain. + +"No," said the captain. "Cover up that gun, my lads, and break off. +You, Cross, take charge of the gun, and well sponge her out. You +others, pikes; fall in. Now then, right face. March!" + +"I'm disappointed," said the doctor, as the men were marched off. "I +should have liked to have had a closer examination of that creature. +Well, captain, what next?" + +"Tea," said the skipper bluntly. + +The tropics were very near, and the night began to come on rapidly, so +that the tea meal was partaken of by the light of the swinging lamp. +But before it was over the moon rose above the sea very bright and +silvery, and getting rapidly near the full, while later on as it rose +higher it was nearly as light as day. + +Rodd was anxious to get on deck again, to see if by any possibility the +weird-looking object that they had seen that evening might rise to the +surface; but anxious as he was to join the sailors and question them as +to whether they had seen anything more, the conversation between his +uncle and the skipper kept him below, where he listened to their +different expressed opinions. + +At last, though, he went on deck, and found all the men grouped together +forward, and whispering to themselves about the visitor they had seen. + +One man said it was a sign, and another grunted, while a third turned to +Joe Cross to ask his opinion. + +It was the stout heavy member of the crew who went by the name of the +Bun, and seeming the most impressed of the whole crew he asked Joe Cross +as above. + +"Yes," said Cross slowly, "you are quite right, Ikey Gregg. It's a +sign." + +"What's a sign?" asked Rodd, coming up. + +"The--the--Bun--Ikey Gregg says it is a sign, sir, that we see that big +squirming wormy thing, and I says he's quite right, sir. It is a sign." + +"Why, what can it be a sign of, Joe?" + +"Sea's calm, sir, and that brings all the shoals of young fish up to the +top to feed, and that there thing that feeds on them come up to the top +to get a regular tuck out." + +"Oh, that won't do," said Gregg the fat. "Things like that only come up +to the top at particular times, and you mark my words, it means a +storm." + +As the man finished, he turned his eyes to right and left, scanning the +beautiful silvery water before him, and then uttering a loud yell, he +dashed by his companions, made for the forecastle hatch, and without +troubling himself about the steps, leaped right down. + +"What's the matter with Ikey?" said one of the men. "Showing us how he +can jump?" + +"Nonsense!" said Rodd. "It was as if he had been scared by something. +He looked quite wild." + +The boy walked close up to the rail and looked over, to see that the +whole of the water right away from the bows was apparently ablaze with +fire; but for a time he could make out nothing else, in spite of its +crystal clearness and the way in which in addition it was laced and +latticed as it were by the rays of the moon. + +Seeing nothing for the moment likely to have alarmed the sailor, he was +about to turn off, but only to start the next minute, and stand clinging +with both hands to the rail, for some fifteen or twenty yards away the +erst calm, heaving sea began to be violently agitated, running as it +were with the swiftness of a mill-stream; and then something dull and +glistening and shining like a halo appeared just beneath the surface, +rising till it was quite clear of the water, and passing the schooner in +one broad pale streak. + +He was too much astonished to be startled, and for a few moments the +only idea that he could form was that a good-sized vessel had careened +over on to its side and was swiftly gliding along almost level with the +water. + +Then all at once something of the same moonlit glistening tint, but long +and sinuous, slowly rose up eight or ten feet above the sea; then higher +and higher till it was double that altitude, and in his excitement and +agitation he realised that it was ended or begun by a snake-like head +something after the fashion of that of a huge conger, the eyes being +many inches across and dull and heavy after the fashion seen in a +deep-sea fish. + +One moment he thought it eel-like, the next that it was some serpent, +while to his utter astonishment what he took to be its neck rose higher +in a graceful swan-like shape, beautiful in curve as it was horrible in +its gleaming, pallid, slimy aspect. One of the great eyes seemed turned +to him with a peculiar glare, while as he fixed his own upon it as if +unable to resist the attraction, he made out that from behind the curve +the elongated body of the creature rose just above the surface, carrying +out the semblance on a great scale to some swan-like half-fishy +creature, and then with a quick rush as if the water were being hurled +from it by enormously powerful fin-like paddles, the strange fish, +reptile, or whatever it was, had passed on into the hazy moonlit night +and was gone. + +"Hullo here! Anything the matter, Rodd?" cried the familiar voice of +Dr Robson, as he came quickly forward, followed by the skipper. "Where +is it?" + +"Where is it, uncle?" faltered the boy. + +"Yes; that man Cross came running down to us in the cabin to say that +they had seen the sea-serpent again." + +Rodd slowly raised one hand from the rail to which he had been holding, +and pointed outward over the sea. + +"Well," said Uncle Paul, "what are you pointing out? Plenty of +moonlight, and glorious phosphorescence, but where's the sea-serpent? +Where did it show again? Why, what's the matter, boy?" he continued, +catching his nephew by the arm and taking his hand. "Don't stand +staring like that. Your hand's all wet, and like ice! Have you been +frightened?" + +"I--don't know, uncle, I suppose so," said the boy slowly and dreamily. +"I never saw anything like it before, and--and--it came so close to the +schooner. I think I thought it was going to make a snatch at me and +take me under water. But don't ask me now, please. I don't feel quite +right. I suppose I am cowardly; but it made Gregg run away." + +"Then why didn't you," said the doctor jocularly, "if it was so horrible +as that?" + +"I couldn't, uncle," cried the boy passionately. "I turned cold all +over and couldn't stir." + +"Well, come down below for a bit," continued the doctor. "Why, Chubb, +the boy's had a regular scare." + +"Ah! and no wonder," said the skipper gruffly. "It scared the men too. +They saw it." + +"What, the same thing that you fired at?" + +"Ah, that I don't know. That was a great long eely thing; but Joe Cross +here says this was more like a great turtle, with flippers and a long +neck, and a head like a snake." + +No more was said till they were in the cabin, where soon after he had +found himself in safety, shut in and with the swinging lamp burning +above his head, Rodd heaved a deep sigh and then uttered a forced laugh. + +"I couldn't help it, uncle," he said, "and I didn't think I could have +been such a coward; but I am all right now. The other men did see it +too, didn't they?" + +"Yes, my lad; they saw it too," replied the skipper; "and next time we +goes ashore, if we are stupid enough to talk about it every one will +laugh and say we are making up tales for the marines. I've known +skipper after skipper who has seen something of the kind in the warm +seas and has told yarns about them. But men don't often do so now, no +matter what they see, for one don't like to be laughed at. Well, sir, I +suppose you believe there's more queer things in the sea than most +people know of?" + +"Well, yes," said Uncle Paul, "I am beginning to believe more and more +that we who follow out natural history have a great deal to learn." + +"Take my word for it, sir, you have. But I dare say you will be +disposed to laugh at me and think that I am making up a bit of gammon, +when I ask you if you remember what a frigate looks like when she has +got all her ports open and her lanterns lit." + +"I don't see why I should," said Uncle Paul quietly. "But of course I +have seen a man-of-war like that by night; and a very beautiful object +she is." + +"Very, sir. But what should you say if I was to ask you if you had seen +a fish looking like a little frigate with her ports all open and her +lights shining in a couple of rows along her sides--lights that don't +burn, sir, but shine brightly as if they did?" + +"Well, I am not a man to laugh at anything new in science, Chubb," said +the doctor quietly, "but between ourselves, your description is a bit +too flowery." + +"Not a bit, sir." + +"I have seen," continued the doctor, "phosphorescent fish and insects, +and even now, swimming round us, the sea is full of light-giving +creatures, but nothing approaching your frigates with the ports open, or +anything near them." + +"Well, sir, I could take you right away to the eastward into the Indian +seas--and I am not romancing, mind, but talking honest truth--I could +take you and squire here, where you could drag up fishermen sort of +fish, big-mouthed fellows ready to swallow what they catches, fish that +guide themselves down in the dark deeps of the sea amongst the seaweed +at the bottom, and there they hang out from the tops of their heads long +barbels that look like worms, and fish with them for other fishes, to +catch them to eat." + +"Oh yes, that's right enough, captain," replied the doctor. "You know, +Rodd, that great frog fish, the Father Lasher, as the fishermen call +him. Why, captain, we have got them at home off the Devon coast." + +"I know," said the skipper. "I have seen them; but those are not what I +mean. He didn't give me time to finish, squire," continued the skipper, +facing round to Rodd. "My ones out yonder in the Eastern seas always +live down below where it's deep and dark, and where the fishes couldn't +see their baits. So what do you think they do?" + +"Swim up to where it's lighter," said Rodd. "Not they, sir. They grows +a little bait as might be a little bit of meat at the end of their +barbel-like fishing-lines, and wave it about in the water for the fish +they want to catch to see." + +"You said it was all black darkness deep down there," cried Rodd. + +"So it is, my lad, and so that the fish may see it those little baits of +theirs all glow with light, and shine out in the dark black water. Now, +doctor, what do you think of that for a bit of nature?" + +"Extraordinary!" cried the doctor. "But who told you that?" + +"Nobody, sir. I have seen them with my own eyes." + +"Yes, but what about the men-of-war with their ports lit up?" + +"Of course I didn't mean men-of-war, sir. I thought I made you +understand I meant fish. Fish about two foot long, with a row of lights +down each side like lamps to see their way in the darkness. There, +gentlemen, that's no story to tell to the marines, but a fact that I +have seen with my own eyes; and if there's things like that deep down in +the seas, I don't see anything wonderful in there being what some people +calls sea-sarpints that might be as big as a great sparmacetti whale; +and if you put some of them beside a cable a hundred foot long there +isn't much rope to spare. I knew of a ninety-footer once, though they +don't often get so long as that." + + + +CHAPTER TWENTY. + +A WARM BLUSH. + +Uncle Paul sat very quietly thinking for some time, while the other +occupants of the cabin were waiting for him to deliver himself of what +seemed to be gathering in his brain. "You see, Captain Chubb," he said +at last, "human nature has always been prone to exaggerate. If a boy +like my nephew here hooks a fish and loses it, he goes home and tells +everybody that it was about five times as big as it really was." + +"Oh, uncle!" cried Rodd indignantly. "I am sure I never did!" + +"Well, well, perhaps not," said Uncle Paul shortly. "Don't say `perhaps +not,' uncle. That isn't fair. You know I always try to tell the +truth." + +"Well, well; yes, yes, yes, yes," said Uncle Paul testily. "I am not +accusing you, Rodney. I am only alluding to what people who tell +stories do." + +"Why, of course, uncle, they say what isn't true if they tell stories." + +"Will you oblige me, Rodney, by letting me continue what I was about to +say?" + +"I beg pardon, uncle." + +"Yes, Captain Chubb," continued Uncle Paul, "there is that natural +disposition born with us, one which requires a great deal of education +to eliminate; that disposition to exaggerate in talking about things we +have seen and others have not." + +"Yes, sir, I know," grunted the skipper. "People will stretch." + +"Exactly," said Uncle Paul--"magnify wonders that they have seen." + +"Quite right, sir. I did just now about that sparm whale. I don't +believe after all that they get to a hundred foot." + +"Still," said the doctor, "we know what a spermaceti whale is; but this +supposed creature which has been reported of over and over again under +the name of the sea-serpent still lives only in the land of doubt--" + +"Oh, uncle!" cried Rodd. + +"Well, sir, I didn't see much doubt about that thing." + +"H'm! no," replied the doctor thoughtfully; "but still you must grant +that we did not have a fair examination, and that neither of us, even if +we were clever with our pencils, could sketch an exact representation of +the natural phenomenon." + +"Nat'ral, sir?" said the skipper gruffly. "Well, to my mind it is a +very unnatural sort of thing." + +"I think I could sketch it, uncle, if I were clever with my pencil, +which I am not, for I can seem to see it quite plainly now, as it raised +its neck out of the water when it swam by." + +"You think you could, my boy; but a great deal of it must have been +under water, and your representation would be open to doubt." + +"Humph! What was it like, youngster?" said the skipper gruffly. + +"Just the same shape as a swan," said Rodd, with something like a +shudder, "only enormously, big; but instead of having wings and feet it +was just as if it had four great paddles." + +"That's right," grunted the skipper; "just like what I see about ten +years ago in the Indian seas. I didn't see enough of this one to be +able to tell." + +"Well," said the doctor gravely, "I for a long time have been of opinion +that the reports that reach us from time to time about the sea-serpent +must have some truth in them, though they have doubtless been greatly +exaggerated." + +"Don't hear of many reports now, sir," said Captain Chubb. "We +sea-going people have been laughed at too much." + +"Yes, I know," said the doctor, "and I have thought over these matters a +great deal, and fully believe that we have a great many things to +discover, both at sea and on land, quite as wonderful as the so-called +sea-serpent. There's plenty of room, and I see no reason to doubt that +there are great fish--" + +"This warn't a fish," growled the skipper. + +"Reptiles, then," grunted Uncle Paul, "which as a rule dwell far down in +the depths of ocean, and which only occasionally seek, or are forced up +to, the surface." + +"Forced up, uncle? What could force up a great thing like that?" + +"You ask that, Rodd? Why, what forces a fish up sometimes, to float +upside down on the surface?" + +"Oh yes, I know," replied Rodd; "something wrong with its swimming +bladder." + +"Exactly; and I should say such a creature as you saw would in its +natural state be always living deep down in the ocean." + +"'Cept when he comes up to feed," growled Captain Chubb. "This 'ere one +was hard at work in that shoal of fish." + +"I don't see that that interferes with my argument, Captain Chubb," said +the doctor; "but what I was going on to say was this. There was a time +in the history of this earth, when just such creatures as my nephew here +described used to be plentiful." + +"How long ago?" asked the skipper. + +"Ah, that's more than any one of us can say; but I have seen their +remains turned to stone, laid bare in a stone quarry--that is to say, +their skeletons, which show pretty well what must have been their shape; +and if they existed once there is no reason why some of their +descendants, though very rarely seen, may not still survive, though I am +half afraid that my nephew here must have some half-forgotten lingering +memories of one of these creatures that he has seen in some geological +work, and upon seeing that fish or reptile let his imagination run riot +and finished it off by memory." + +Rodd shook his head. + +"I saw it plainly enough, uncle." + +And the skipper gave his head a sapient nod, while the doctor shook his. + +"What were you going to say, Captain Chubb?" + +"Only this 'ere, sir. I have 'eard more argufying and quarrelling about +sea-sarpints than about almost anything else. I say sarpints, but I +mean these things, and I say this. It will never be settled properly +till one of 'em is caught--which aren't likely--or one of them is cast +ashore so as everybody can see fair and square. I believe in 'em, and +I've good reason to." + +"So do I, uncle," cried Rodd. + +"Well," said Uncle Paul, "I have for a long time had my doubts, and now +I am no longer a sceptic." + +He looked very hard at the skipper as he spoke, and feeling that he was +called upon to answer, the sturdy captain shook his head and brought his +big hand down heavily upon the cabin table. + +"That you are not, sir," he said; "your head's too full of science and +knowledge and larning to be what you say. I don't quite exactly know +what it means, but I'll answer for it you are not that; and now if you +don't mind I should like for us to go up on deck again and have a good +look round. It's 'most as light as day, and if a thing like that is +playing around we are just as likely as not to sight it again. What do +you say, sir, to taking your glass and being on the look-out?" + +"By all means," said the doctor. "Get the glass, Rodd. Hullo! What's +the matter with you?" + +"Oh, nothing, uncle," said the boy, hastily rising. + +"Why, you took hold of the table as if you felt dizzy." + +"No, no, uncle. I am all right." + +"Not afraid, are you?" + +"I--I was for a moment, uncle." + +"Good lad and true! Naught to be ashamed on, and spoke out like a man," +grunted the skipper. + +"But I tell you I am all right now," cried Rodd angrily, and he darted a +fierce look at the speaker. + +"Of course you are, youngster; but you felt a bit skeart again, and +'nough to make you." + +"Yes," said Rodd sharply, "I did feel startled for a moment, but it's +all gone now. Come on, uncle; I have got the glass;" and the boy made a +dash for the cabin stairs. + +"I say," whispered the skipper, "that's better than brag, doctor." + +"Yes," said Uncle Paul, drawing a deep breath; "a great deal." + +They both then hastened up the stairs, to find Rodd half-way along the +deck, hurrying with the glass under his arm to join the men, who were +all gathered together at the bows, save their solitary messmate at the +wheel. + +"Well, my lads, did you make it out again?" shouted the skipper. + +"No, sir," replied Joe Cross, who took upon himself the part of +spokesman. "Aren't seen a sign of it. We have been casting it up among +us that it got more than it liked in the shape of that bullet, and after +going down, it turned waxy-like and come up again to have something to +say to us, but turned worse and went down." + +"Humph!" grunted the skipper. "Then you think we hit it?" + +"Yes, sir; and some of the lads have been saying that if they was you +they'd load the big gun well with a lot of grape-shot, and if the beggar +come up again be on the look-out and let him have it." + +"Some on us, Joe Cross; not all." + +"Nay, but you meant it, Ikey Gregg," said Joe. + +"Not me, messmate. I says it's dangerous to be safe to get meddling +with things like that." + +"Ay, ay!" came from two or three of the other men, but only in a +half-hearted way. + +But it was encouragement enough for slow, quiet, fat Isaac Gregg to +continue-- + +"You see, gentlemen, it's like this. That there long-necked sarpint +thing has only got to make a rush and chuck itself out of the water +aboard us here, and break the schooner's back, and where should us be +then?" + +"I don't know," said the skipper shortly. "But what do you say, +doctor?" + +"Well, for my part, speaking for the advancement of natural history, +Captain Chubb, I should like to see that creature lying dead upon the +surface, and left floating long enough for you and your men to take +measurements, while my nephew and I did the best we could with pen and +pencil to describe what might very well be called one of the wonders of +the world." + +"And what do you say, squire?" asked the skipper, speaking eagerly. + +"I say you'd better load the gun again, Captain Chubb," replied Rodd, +speaking very hurriedly. "We might hit it if it came up, and then we +could try and do what my uncle says." + +"Right," growled the skipper. "Man the gun again, and you, Cross, come +below with me and fetch a canister of grape-shot and a full business +charge to load the piece. You lads who are not wanted for the gun, each +of you take a musket and an axe. It aren't likely that we shall come to +close quarters, but if we do--well, you know what." + +Every man on board joined in a hearty cheer, and in a very short time +the preparations were made, even the cook playing his part of keeping +the galley fire ready, while directly afterwards he edged up to where +Joe Cross was in conversation with Rodd. + +"Thought I would come the old-fashioned dodge as well, sir," he said. + +"Old-fashioned? What do you mean?" + +"For firing the gun, sir. I've left the poker in between the bars to +get red-hot. Put that to your touch-hole. Beats slow match hollow; +don't it, Joe?" + +"Ay, that it do, mate, if you have got the fire, and the poker's hot; +but you have to come back to the slow match if neither one nor t'other's +ready. Well, Mr Rodd, sir, it don't look as if any of us is going to +have the watch below to-night." + +"No, Joe, it doesn't. Do you think the monster will come up again?" + +"Can't say, sir, I'm sure, and to speak honest, there are times when I +hope it will and there are times when I hope it won't. Sea-sarpints +aren't much in my line. I have had a turn in a whaler, and though a +right whale is a nasty kind of a bird to tackle when she is in her +flurry, you know what you are about. There's the harpoon in her, and +you have got her at the end of your line, and you're waiting for her +with your lances ready to put her out of her misery. But even if you +have got a few shot in her, a sea-sarpint's different sort of cattle +altogether, and I didn't like the looks of this 'ere one at all. She +came up quite vicious-like to look after us. You see her eye, Mr Rodd, +sir? I did, sir, for a moment. There was a sort of leery look about +it, and it seemed to me as if she had just picked you out and meant to +have you. All the lads here know I'm one as never brags, but if there's +a bit of fighting on I am always ready to stick to my mates, just as I +would now." + +"Ay, ay, Joe! That's a true word," came in chorus. + +"Thank you, messmates," said Joe modestly. "Well, then, I'll speak out. +Between you and me and the post, my lads, I hope this 'ere annymile +won't come up to give us a shot." + +There was a low murmur at this which sounded very much like assent. + +"It's narvous sort of work, you see. If the schooner had been fitted +out as a sea-sarpinter with the right and proper sort of tackle, why, +that's another thing. But then you see, she aren't been. We haven't +got the proper sort of tools, and we aren't been drilled to use them +even if we had." + +"That's a true word, messmate," came in chorus. + +"And that's why I says I hope she won't look us up to-night; but if she +is following us up and keeping one of them great sarcer eyes upon our +keel somewheres far away down below, I hope she'll leave it till +morning. After sunrise we shall be able to see better, and have had +time to get rid of a nasty unked sort of feeling which rather bothers me +just now, though I don't know how it is with you. There, Mr Rodd, sir, +you faced the thing splendid. I see you, sir. You didn't turn round +and run away like Ikey Gregg. You stood fast there with your hands +resting on the rail, staring the thing straight in the face. How you +managed to do it I don't know. But do it you did, and I admired you, +sir." + +It was moonlight, and the change in Rodd's face passed unobserved, but +it was scarlet, and felt so hot that the boy involuntarily raised his +hand to his cheek, while a feeling of annoyance pervaded him as he +looked at Joe Cross suspiciously, in the belief that the man must be +bantering him; but as far as the boy could make out, Joe Cross's frank +countenance was quite innocent of guile and he was speaking exactly as +he felt. + +But Rodd was not at rest, and in the calm still watch that followed, +with every one on the look-out and ready to imagine that each +phosphorescent flash in the sea meant the moving upwards of the uncanny +enemy, Rodd waited till all was still and restful and they seemed likely +to be undisturbed, to make his way to Joe Cross's side and get him +alone. + + + +CHAPTER TWENTY ONE. + +QUERY--A COWARD? + +Joe had stationed himself on the larboard bow with his elbows resting +upon the bulwark and his chin in his hands, gazing straight away to sea, +his eyes fixed a little to the left of the dazzling path of light that +extended from the moon to the schooner. + +So intent was he upon something he fancied he saw, that he did not hear +Rodd's approach, and started violently upon being touched. + +"All right, sir; not asleep," he cried. "Oh, it's you, Mr Rodd! I +fancied that it was the skipper, who thought he had caught me napping. +Just you look yonder, sir. You are coming fresh to it. I have been +staring till the little flashes of light make my eyes swim. Now then, +just you look about half a cable's length left of that line of light, +and see if you can't see something breaking water there." + +Rodd gazed intently in the direction indicated for some little time +without speaking. + +"See anything, sir?" said Joe at last. "No." + +"That'll do then, sir. It was my fancy. Well, we are having a quiet +night of it, sir. No more signs of that old sea bogy, and like enough +we shan't get a squint at it again." + +"I don't suppose we shall now, Joe." + +"Sleepy, sir?" + +"Not a bit, Joe. Here, I want to speak to you about that thing." + +"I am listening, sir. Talk away. Rather queer, warn't it, to come upon +a thing like that just when you didn't expect it?" + +"Yes, Joe; and you said something about my not being frightened." + +"Yes, sir. You quite capped me." + +"Stop a minute, Joe. I want to say something to you." + +"All right, sir," cried the sailor, looking wonderingly at the lad, who +was speaking to him in a husky impressive tone. + +But Rodd remained speechless, and it was the sailor who broke the +silence. + +"I'm a-listening, sir. Heave ahead." + +"Yes," cried Rodd desperately. "Look here, Joe; were you making fun of +me?" + +"Fun of you? No, sir. It was only my way, just to make things a bit +more cheery, for every one on deck seems to be in the doldrums, all on +account of that great squirmy thing." + +"No, no, I don't mean that," cried Rodd. "I mean, making fun of me when +you told the men I wasn't frightened." + +"Fun on you? No, sir. Why, it was as I said. You quite capped me, to +see you standing facing that thing without shrinking a bit. I should +have expected to see you frightened to death." + +"Then it was because you didn't look well, Joe," said Rodd, in a low +hoarse voice, as he made a brave effort to set himself right with the +man. "I was frightened--so horribly frightened that I couldn't stir." + +"Well, and no wonder, sir. Enough to make you. Why, it would have +frightened a brass monkey, let alone a man. Look at Ikey Gregg. I +believe if you'd ha' 'eard him you would have found he was calling +`Mother!' Poor old chap. There aren't no way of proving it, as one +don't know how heavy he was afore, but I believe he melted away a bit. +Why, we was all like it, sir. It was a regular startler and no +mistake." + +"Do you mean honestly that all the men were very much frightened?" + +"Why, of course, sir. I telled you I was as bad as bad could be, and my +hair stood right up on end--leastwise, it felt as if it did; and I can +tell you this: I didn't feel like that when we were going into action, +and that's saying a good deal, when a fellow didn't know whether the +first sixty-four pounder that was fired wouldn't send its shot right +into his chest. And so you felt regular skeart, did you, sir?" + +"Yes, Joe; and it made me ashamed to hear you talking about me to the +men as you did." + +"Oh, well, I don't know as it matters, sir. I said just what I thought, +and I rather like to hear what you say, because it seems to brighten me +up a bit." + +"Why? How?" + +"Oh, because it makes me feel that I wasn't quite such a cur as I +thought I was. There, it's all right, sir, and I suppose it's quite +nat'ral for any one to feel afraid when there's something really worth +feeling afraid on. I dare say we should both be just as bad again if +that thing was to shove its head out of the water again close by here." + +"Then you don't think I was such a coward, Joe?" + +"You! You a coward! Tchah! Let me hear any fellow say you are, and +I'll hit him in the eye. But there, it's just as if that thing knowed +we were all ready and waiting for it, and so it won't show. I'm +beginning to wish that the skipper would send everybody but the watch +for their spell below; but I don't suppose he will, and so we must make +the best of it. But if I was you, sir, and didn't belong to the crew, I +should just slip off below and turn into my bunk till breakfast-time in +the morning. What do you say?" + +"No," said Rodd shortly; and he stopped on deck and watched with the men +till the sun was well on high. + +Then the suggestion of breakfast seemed so full of promise that after +partaking thereof he went back on deck, to stand scanning the beautiful +sunlit plain with the glass; but no further glimpse was seen of the +strange monster that day, nor yet during the next six weeks, during +which time they glided into port for fresh provisions twice, the second +time in that of the sunny Canary Islands. There a week was spent in +inspecting the beauties and the wonders of the old volcanic caverns, +before they were well at sea again with the sun daily growing hotter and +sea and sky more beautiful. + +Days upon days were spent in exploring the attractions of the Sargasso +Sea, till the doctor cried "Hold! Enough!" For the bottles in the +laboratory were being filled up too fast, and there was too much to do +yet in the farther south, towards which they sailed slowly and steadily +on, till one day a holiday was announced, for the men had been hard at +work rowing here and rowing there, hauling in drag and dredge, sounding +and hoisting, harpooning fish, and busying themselves with the spoil +they dragged on board, while Captain Chubb stumped up and down with his +hands very deep in his pockets, scowling at his sullied deck, and +wearing clouds upon his sun-tanned brow, till Dr Robson bade the men +throw all the rest overboard, this order, for which the skipper had been +impatiently waiting, being immediately supplemented by another, brief +and prompt. + +"Buckets! Swabs!" + +And then as the slime of mollusc, fish and seaweed was washed away, and +the deck of the schooner rapidly grew white again, the skipper smiled +and entered into a pleasant chat with the tired naturalist and his +nephew. + +The men's holiday was spent after the fashion of such holidays, over the +buffoonery enjoyed by the crew, especially in olden days, in crossing +the line; and then it was onward again amidst glorious sunrises and +sunsets, amidst calms and fervent seas that seemed to blaze back the +heat of the sun. + +It was all new to Rodd, and all glorious. He was never tired of seeing +the flying-fish skim out of the water to seek safety, scattered by the +pursuit of some bonito or dolphin, watching them till they dipped down +into the smooth surface, as if to gather new strength, and then skim out +again. + +The dolphins and bonito were caught, the boy growing skilful in darting +down the harpoon-like "grains," the modern form of Neptune fish-spear. + +There were times too when the boy expressed his wonder that in spite of +all the time they had been sailing south, it had been such a rare thing +to meet or overtake another vessel. + +"A pretty good proof," the doctor would say, "of the vastness of the +ocean." + +"And of how there is plenty of room, uncle, for any number of wonderful +creatures such as we have never seen yet. But are you always going +sailing on like this?" + +"Why, aren't you satisfied?" said Uncle Paul. + +"Satisfied, uncle? Oh yes, with what we are doing. But I haven't had +nearly enough. I should like to go oil sailing like this for--" + +"Ever?" said the doctor dryly. + +"Oh no, uncle; I mean for long enough yet. But I say, isn't the world +beautiful?" + +"More beautiful, boy, than words can express," replied the doctor +gravely. "But no. Now we are getting into the Southern Tropics I am +thinking of going more to the east and into the great bay, so as to get +within range of the African shores. Perhaps we shall make for the +mouths of one or two of the rivers, and get within soundings where we +can do more dredging. I anticipate some strange discoveries in those +portions of the ocean; but at present we will keep on skimming the +surface and finding what we can." + +And so during the next two or three days they went sailing on, and found +something that they had least expected, to Rodd Harding's great wonder +and delight. + + + +CHAPTER TWENTY TWO. + +THE KING'S SHIP. + +It was the afternoon of a blazing hot day, when the pitch was oozing out +in drops in every exposed place, and Rodd had found it exceedingly +unpleasant to touch any piece of the brass rail, bolt, the bell, or +either of the guns, for the schooner was gliding on southward with every +scrap of her white sails spread, and the wind that wafted her onward +sent a feeling of lassitude through all on board. + +Some days before, Captain Chubb had set his men to work to rig up a +small awning aft, and the doctor having declared that it was too hot for +work, he and Rodd had spent most of their time beneath this shelter, +till the latter had struck against it, declaring it was all nonsense, +for the sun came hotter through the canvas than it did where there was +no shade at all, or else it seemed to, for there was no breeze in the +shelter, and though what wind there was seemed as if it had come past +the mouth of a furnace, still it was wind, and the lad declared that it +was far preferable to stewing under the awning. + +It was a lazy time, and the men, who had dressed as lightly as they +could contrive, went very slowly about their several tasks, and at last +when Rodd strolled towards the man at the wheel, he had to listen to a +petition. + +It was fat Isaac Gregg who was taking his trick, as he called it, and he +began at Rodd at once. + +"I've got something to ask you, sir," he said. + +"Oh, bother!" cried Rodd, taking off his straw hat to turn it into a +fan. "It's too hot to listen. Don't ask me anything, because if you +do, I shall be too stupid to tell you." + +"Oh, it aren't hard, sir," said the man innocently, as he let a couple +of spokes pass through his hands and then ran them back again. "It's +only as the lads asked me--" + +"Well, well, go on," said Rodd, for the man stopped. "Phew! It's just +as if the tops of the waves where they curl over were white hot." + +"Yes, sir, it is a bit warm," said the man; "but I've felt it warmer." + +"Couldn't," said Rodd abruptly. + +"Oh yes, sir; much hotter than this." + +"What! You've felt it hotter than this?" + +"Oh yes, sir." + +"Then why didn't you melt away? I should have thought you would run +like a candle all into a lump." + +"Ah, that's your fun, sir. Some of the lads has been telling you that I +am fat. That's a joke they have got up among them, just because I'm a +little thicker than some of the others. But as I was a-saying, sir, +they ast me to ast you--" + +"Now it's coming then," sighed Rodd. "Phew! Wish all my hair had been +cut off. It gets so wet, and sticks to my forehead." + +"Yes, sir, it's best short," said the man. "Just you look at mine. You +should have it done like this." + +As he spoke the sailor took off his hat and exhibited a head which had +been trimmed down till all the scalp resembled a dingy brush, for it was +cut with the most perfect regularity, for the hair to stand up in +bristly fashion for about a quarter of an inch from the skin. + +"Why, who cut that?" cried Rodd, with something approaching to energy, +this being the first thing that had taken his attention that day. + +"Joe Cross, sir. He's a first-rate hand with a comb and a pair of +scissors. You let him do your head, sir and you won't know yourself +afterwards." + +"Oh yes, I should," said the boy sleepily, gazing down at the quivering +compass and its many points. + +"I mean you would feel so comfortable, sir." + +"Oh, well, then, I will. Anything," cried Rodd--"anything not to be so +hot!" + +"That's right, sir. Ast me to ast you, sir." + +"Well, you've been asking for the last half-hour. What is it?" cried +Rodd peevishly. + +"To ast the doctor, sir--" + +"For some physic to make them cool?" snapped out Rodd. "Tell them to go +and ask him themselves, and he'll say what I do--that they are not to +eat so much nor drink so much, and not to work in the sun. There, +that's all uncle would say." + +"Yes, sir, but that aren't it," cried Gregg, making one of the spokes of +the wheel swing from hand to hand. + +"Then what do they want?" + +"Why, sir, it seems rum, but Joe Cross and the other lads know better +what's good for them than I do. You see, sir, they want to get to work +again at your fishing and hauling, or rowing about, for they says they +can keep much cooler when they are moving about and got to think what +they are doing than when there's no work on hand and nothing to think +about at all." + +"Oh, very well," said Rodd grumpily, "I'll go and ask him, for I am +about sick of this. I think there must be some volcanoes here, or +something of that kind, for I never felt it so hot before." + +"You aren't used to it, sir; but I thought you would, sir, and the lads +said they thought you would too. Thank you, sir." + +Rodd yawned, turned slowly on his heels, and strolled away to where +Uncle Paul was sitting back in an Indian cane chair, resting the +carefully-focussed spy-glass upon a half-opened book standing upon its +front edges propped upon four more in the middle of a little table. + +"Ah, Pickle, my lad! You had better stop in the shade. I don't want +you to be getting any head trouble in this torrid sun." + +"Oh, I am all right, uncle; but the men want to begin fishing or doing +something again, keeping cool." + +"Too hot till towards evening, my boy," replied the doctor. "But look +here; you were saying only the other day how strange it was that we saw +so few vessels. Well, here's one at all events--a three-master." + +"Oh, whereabouts, uncle?" cried the boy eagerly. + +"Away to the west yonder, hull down. There, take the glass." + +As Rodd was arranging it to his own satisfaction the doctor went on +quietly-- + +"Out here I am not going to give an opinion, but if we were in the +garden at home in the look-out I should say that was a man-of-war coming +into Plymouth port." + +"Yes, that she is, uncle," cried Rodd, who had forgotten the heat in +this new excitement. + +"A man-of-war--that she is!" said Uncle Paul quietly. "That sounds +ridiculous, Pickle. But one has to give way to custom." + +"Yes," said Rodd--"a frigate. I can tell by her white sails." + +"Not big enough for a frigate, my boy. A sloop of war, I should think. +Now, what can she be doing down here?" + +"I know, uncle," cried the boy excitedly--"looking after the slave +ships." + +"Ah, very likely," cried Uncle Paul. "I shouldn't be surprised. We are +pretty near to that neighbourhood; and if she is it's quite likely that +she'll overhaul us. Ah, here's Captain Chubb coming up. Look here, +skipper!" + +The captain, who looked very hot, and whose face proclaimed very plainly +that he had been having an after-dinner nap, came slowly up, stooped +within the awning, and in silence took hold of the spy-glass, whose +glistening black sides were quite hot, and which Rodd thrust into his +hands. + +He wanted no telling what for, but raised and adjusted the glass to his +own sight, took a quick shot at the distant object upon the horizon, and +then lowered it directly. "British man-of-war," he grunted. "That's +bad." + +"Why?" cried Rodd sharply. + +The skipper turned upon him, looked at him fiercely, and then almost +barked out-- + +"You don't know, youngster?" + +"No. What do you mean?" + +"Means that I've got as smart a picked crew as a man need wish to have." + +"To be sure," said Rodd; "of course you have. I do know that." + +"Well," said the skipper gruffly, "I don't want to lose them; that's +all." + +Rodd and his uncle exchanged glances, while the skipper went and stood +at the side and began scanning the sky, to come back shaking his head. + +"No more wind, and not likely to be." + +"Well, we don't want any more, do we?" said Uncle Pad. + +"Ay; if a good breeze would spring up I'd show them a clean pair of +heels." + +"Oh, I see," cried Rodd excitedly. "You think that they would press +some of our men and take them aboard. Oh, Captain Chubb, you mustn't +let them do that!" + +"I don't mean to, my lad, if I can help it. I hadn't reckoned on seeing +one of them down here." + +"Uncle thinks they're after the slavers." + +"Nay, my lad, I don't think that. More likely after one of the palm-oil +craft to see if they can pick up a few men out of them." + +"Oh, that's a false alarm, captain," said Uncle Paul. "My papers and +the work we're upon with a grant from Government would clear us." + +"Ought to, sir," said the skipper gruffly, "but I wouldn't trust them. +If a King's ship wants men, good smart sailors such as ours, men who +have served, her captain wouldn't be above shutting his eyes and making +a mistake. Anyhow I'm going to crack on as hard as I can till she +brings us up with a gun, and then I suppose I shall have to heave to or +risk the consequences." + +"Hadn't you better risk the consequences, Captain Chubb?" said Rodd, in +a half-whisper. + +"Here you, Rodney, mind what you are saying, sir! It's the duty of +every Englishman to respect the law, and I feel perfectly certain, +Captain Chubb, that there is nothing to fear in that direction, so go +quietly on as you are, unless you are obliged to heave to. Seeing how +little wind there is, and how distant that sloop, I think it's very +probable that she'll not overhaul us before it grows dark." + +"Oh, uncle," cried Rodd, "she'll have plenty of time. The sun won't go +down for an hour or so." + +"Well, how long will it be before it's dark afterwards?" cried Uncle +Paul. "You forget that we are in the tropics, and how short a time it +is between sunset and darkness." + +"Yes, sir; you are quite right there," said the skipper, "and that's +what I'm hoping for. If we can only get the bit of time over 'twixt +this and the dark, I shan't care, for she won't see us in the morning." + +By this time one of the sailors forward had noticed the skipper using +the glass, seen what took his attention, and communicated it to his +messmates, with the result that all who had been below gathered forward +and stood anxiously watching the beautiful vessel, whose sails glistened +in the sunshine as if their warp was of silver and their woof of gold. + +Rodd noticed at once what a change had taken place amongst the men. All +listlessness had gone, and they were watching the King's ship, for such +Captain Chubb had declared her to be at once, and were talking in +excited whispers together, their manner showing that whatever the +captain's opinion might be, theirs was, as sailors, that they would not +trust a King's ship that was in want of men. + +After a time Rodd was attracted towards them, and he strolled up, Joe +Cross turning to him at once, to begin questioning him in a low tone. + +"What does the skipper say, sir?" + +"He said it was a sloop of war, Joe." + +"Oh yes, sir, we know that," said the man irritably; "but we've been +'specting him here ever so long. So's our bo'sun. There, look; he's +got his pipe in his hand. Didn't he say nothing about no orders?" + +"No, Joe." + +"Didn't he say nothing about hysting another stunsail or two?" + +"No, Joe." + +"Oh-h-h!" came in a groan from the men; and Rodd felt for them, for of +late they had become more and more attached to their position, and +seemed as happy as a pack of school-boys on board the beautiful little +schooner. + +"But he has been saying something, lads," continued Rodd, in a low tone. + +"Ay, ay, of course," cried Joe. "Our old man don't want to lose us, and +he knows best what he ought to do. Go on, Mr Rodd, sir; tell us what +he means." + +"I think he means to keep on quietly, in the hope of the schooner not +being signalled to heave to." + +"Go on, sir, please, quick!" panted one of the men. "You don't know +what it means to us." + +"Before it becomes dark," continued Rodd. + +"Ay, ay, my lad! That's right, sir. Why, of course," cried Joe +exultingly. "Trust our old man, boys;" and whistling loudly a few bars +of the Sailor's Hornpipe, he snatched off his straw hat, dashed it down +upon the deck, and began to cut and shuffle and heave and turn, going +through all the steps as if it were cool as an early spring, while his +messmates formed in a ring about him, half stooped with bended knees, +joined in the whistle, and beat time upon their knees and clapped hands, +till the figure was gone through, and Joe Cross brought his +terpsichorean bit of frantic mania to an end, by bringing his right foot +down upon the deck with a tremendous stamp which was followed by a +hearty cheer. + +"That's your sort, Mr Rodd, sir! It's all right," cried Joe, panting, +and wiping his streaming face. "If anybody had told me that I could do +that ten minutes ago, when I felt as if I had hardly stuff enough in me +to lift a leg, I should have told him he was going off his head. Didn't +think you could put sperrits into us like that, sir, with just a word, +now did you?" + +"I am very glad, Joe," said Rodd. + +"Glad, sir? So's we--every man Jack on us. You see, it means a lot. +When you have got a comfortable mess, and a skipper as makes you haul +together in a brotherly sort of fashion, it aren't nice for a King's +ship to come down and take its pick of the men. We as is able seamen +don't want to shirk, and if we are obliged to go in time of war, why, we +are ready to go and do our duty like men; but it do nip a bit at first, +sir, 'specially at a time like this." + +"Ay, ay, Joe!" came in chorus. + +"You see, sir, mostlings life on board a ship is so much hard work, and +you has a lot of weather of some sort or another to fight agen; but with +the 'ception of that bit of rough time getting into the French port, +this 'ere's been a regular holiday, and--Oh my! There she goes, lads!" +groaned the poor fellow, for the hull of the sloop had been gradually +rising more and more into sight, rapidly at last from the refraction as +she had glided into a hotter stratum of air while nearing the schooner, +and all at once a white puff of smoke had darted out of her bows, to be +followed by a dull heavy thud, when the men turned as with one accord to +gaze at their captain, as if hoping against hope that he would still +hold on instead of giving an order to fat Gregg, the steersman, to throw +the schooner up in the wind. + + + +CHAPTER TWENTY THREE. + +SUSPICIOUS VISITORS. + +There was a dead silence among the men as the soft white ball of smoke +rose slowly and steadily, expanding the while and changing its shape +till it became utterly diffused. The occupants of the schooner's deck +were statuesque in their rigidity, the crew to a man gazing hard at the +captain as they strained their hearing to catch his next command; the +captain fixed his eyes from one side upon Uncle Paul, while Rodd stood +upon the other with his lips apart, gazing questioningly in his uncle's +half-closed lids, as the doctor leaned back in his deck-chair with a +thoughtful frown upon his brow. + +Then he started slightly, for the captain spoke. + +"Well, sir," he said, "what's it to be?" + +"What's it to be, Captain Chubb? I do not quite understand you." + +"It's plain enough, sir. If I throw the schooner up in the wind we +shall have a man-of-war's boat aboard us and some young officer in +command in less than half-an-hour. First thing will be he'll ask for +our papers, and then fall in the lads, run his eye along them, take his +pick, and order the poor fellows down into the boat; and that means +sending us back to port to fill up the best way we can, and perhaps not +do it. On the other hand, I can make believe a bit and still keep +forging on a little till the darkness comes, and then--" + +The captain stopped. + +"Yes," said the doctor; "and then--" + +"Well, sir, it would go very hard if that sloop of war wasn't out of +sight at daybreak to-morrow morning, and even if she wasn't I don't +think she'd overtake us again." + +"I feel sure you are wrong, Captain Chubb," said the doctor. "I repeat; +my papers and the grant I have had from his Majesty's Government will, I +feel sure, be sufficient to protect my schooner and crew from any action +in the way of pressing from one of his Majesty's ships. You will have +the goodness to obey the signal, and wait and see what follows." + +"You mean to risk it, then, sir?" + +"I mean to do my duty as a subject of his Majesty the King," said Uncle +Paul gravely. + +"Very well, sir. I am captain of this schooner, but I am your servant, +and it is my duty to obey your orders," said the captain, in his +gruffest tones; and he walked heavily to the man at the wheel. + +The time had been short, but too long for the patience of the +man-of-war, for before the skipper had opened his mouth to give his +order to the steersman, another puff of white smoke darted from the +sloop's bows, there was a heavy thud, and a cannon ball came skipping +over the heaving sea like a flat stone thrown by a clever boy across the +waters of a pond--dick, duck and drake fashion--while a thrill ran +through all on board as they watched the shot pass right in front of the +schooner's bows and give its final splash as it disappeared far away. + +Then the captain spoke, the stem of the schooner gradually bore round, +with the sails beginning to shiver as she faced more and more to the +wind, and finally flapping to and fro; but almost at once as the spokes +turned rapidly through Isaac Gregg's hands, a deep low murmur ran +through the crew, while a pang-like spasm seemed to shoot upward to +cause a choky sensation in Rodd Harding's throat. + +"Silence there, my lads," said the skipper sternly, and Rodd noticed the +gloomy look upon his countenance as he turned his back to the doctor and +walked to the side to stand gazing at the distant ship. + +Many minutes had not elapsed before Rodd, who had turned his back to the +men so as not to see their faces, and to hide his own, saw through the +telescope he was busily using, something moving at the side of the +sloop--a something which glided down her side and which was soon +afterwards succeeded by a faint glitter as of the movement of rays. + +Then there was a splash, followed by the regular dipping of oars which +seemed to throw up so much golden spray on either side, and the boy +could plainly make out the sloop's boat being rowed out clear of the +man-of-war, and gradually increasing its distance. + +Rodd watched them for some time, and what was but a speck to his naked +eye plainly showed in the field of the glass the regular movements of +the men, and now and then a flash suggestive of the rowers wearing +something brightly polished. + +There were more flashes too caused by the sun's nearly horizontal rays, +and these came from right astern, where the golden orange sunshine +seemed to be intensified, looking wonderfully red; but ere long the +watcher had grasped the fact that he was looking at the bright scarlet +coats of so many marines, and then he was able to note the figures of +two of the boat's occupants seated together. + +"The officers in command," he said to himself. + +It was a long row from vessel to vessel, and the sun had begun to dip, +and sank quite out of sight as the sloop's cutter came alongside, the +men tossed up their oars, and a smart-looking officer of about thirty +sprang up the side, followed by a lad of Rodd's own age, who took his +attention from the first. + +The officer was received at the side by the doctor and captain, Rodd +standing slightly behind looking hard at the midshipman, who stared +harder, frowning and putting on an air of the most consequential kind, +while, presumably involuntarily, his left hand played with the ivory and +gilt hilt of a curved dirk, suggestive of a strong desire to draw it out +of its sheath and flourish it before the schooner's crew. + +The officer nodded importantly at the doctor, and then turned frowningly +upon the skipper with the angry question-- + +"What's the reason you didn't heave to?" + +"Didn't give me time," growled the captain surlily. + +"No insolence, sir! You ought to have obeyed the first gun. You are an +Englishman, and by the look of you have been long enough at sea to know +the rules when you encounter a man-of-war. Now then, what ship's this?" + +"_Maid of Salcombe_, Plymouth." + +"Owner?" + +"I am," said the doctor quietly. + +"Oh! What are you trading in?" + +"I am not trading," said the doctor quietly. "This schooner is upon a +scientific expedition, under the auspices of the English Government." + +"Oh," said the officer suspiciously; and he looked from the doctor to +the skipper, and from thence ran his eye over the crew gathered forward, +while the midshipman altered the pitch of his hat, turned towards Rodd, +whom for the last few moments he had been ignoring, and looked him up +and down in a supercilious manner which made the blood mount to the +boy's forehead, and set him staring down at the middy's bright shoes, +from whence he slowly raised his eyes as far as the belt which supported +the dirk, and from there higher up to his hat, where he fixed his eyes +upon the officer's cockade and kept them obstinately there, till the +lad's nostrils began to expand, he grew as red in the face as Rodd, and +his menacing eyes seemed to say, You insolent young civilian, how dare +you! + +"Rather a strong crew, skipper," said the lieutenant sharply. + +"Yes, sir; picked men," replied Captain Chubb. + +"And there's a look about them of the able seaman, R.N." + +"Perhaps so, sir," replied the skipper, who gazed bluntly back at the +intruder. + +"Well-found schooner, skipper, and carries a press of sail." + +"Yes, sir. Very smart craft," replied the skipper. + +"Long gun amidships and a couple of small brass guns forward," continued +the lieutenant, who seemed to miss nothing. "Very roomy hold below, I +should say." + +"Yes, sir. Built for a Mediterranean orange boat." + +"And no cargo, I think you said." + +"No, sir; only scientific traps, as Dr Robson here calls them." + +"Yes," said the doctor, interposing. + +"I am not talking to you, sir," said the lieutenant haughtily. "Your +turn will come." + +Rodd's uncle bowed, and turned away, frowning. + +"Stop, sir!" cried the officer sharply. + +"What insolence, uncle!" said Rodd aloud; and he turned away from the +midshipman, to cross to his uncle's side. + +"What's that?" shouted the lieutenant, and the middy clapped his hand to +the hilt of his dirk. + +"I said what insolence, sir. My uncle is a gentleman." + +"And it seems that his nephew is not. Be silent, boy, and recollect in +whose presence you stand. I am a King's officer.--Now, Mr--what is +your name? Robson? Have the goodness to tell me how it is that, with a +light, fast-sailing schooner, well-armed, and with a crew evidently +fighting men, you are found here in the neighbourhood of one of the +notorious slave-supplying rivers? You may just as well speak the truth, +for in all probability your schooner will be a prize to his Majesty's +sloop of war _Diadem_." + +"I beg your pardon," said the doctor quietly. "Suspicious appearances +can always be found by those who seek for them. If you will have the +goodness to step below with the captain you can examine the papers and +the scientific fittings of portions of the hold which were prepared +under my instructions when I started upon the voyage. I don't think, +sir, you will find any accommodation has been made for the reception of +a black living cargo of those poor unfortunate objects of humanity in +whom a certain vile nefarious traffic is carried on. Captain Chubb, +pray take this gentleman below and show him everything he desires." + +"Oh," said the lieutenant sharply, "if this is so, Mr Rodson--" + +"Dr Robson, at your service," said the owner of the name, glancing +sharply at his nephew, with a faint smile upon his lips, for at the +utterance by the lieutenant of the syllable _Rod_ the boy had started +violently. + +As the doctor spoke he took out his pocket-book, drew forth a card, and +held it between two fingers in doctor's fashion towards the officer. + +"Humph! MD, Plymouth. Oh, well, Dr Robson, I hope to find that I have +been labouring under a mistake;" and he raised his hand to his cocked +hat. "But I have my duty to do." + +"Don't apologise, sir," said the doctor, who had changed as in a moment +from the sturdy naturalist into the urbane medical man. "I quite see +your necessity for guarding against imposture. Pray proceed." + +The lieutenant nodded sharply, and leaving his guard of a couple of +marines at the gangway, and the boat's crew ready to spring up the side +at the slightest alarm, he followed the skipper to the cabin hatch, the +doctor hesitating as if in doubt for a moment or two, and then following +deliberately down the cabin stairs. + + + +CHAPTER TWENTY FOUR. + +THE KING'S MIDDY. + +Rodd, full of excitement, was burning to follow too and see what he +looked upon as the officer's discomfiture; but there was that middy, who +seemed to be left in command of the marines, and he felt a peculiar +sensation which completely mastered him, filling him as it did with a +desire to have what he afterwards called a good fall out with that +fellow, who seemed to make him metaphorically set up his feathers all +round his neck and go at him as a strange young cockerel of a different +breed who had suddenly appeared in the poultry-yard where he dwelt. + +So Rodd stayed on deck, thrust his hands into his pockets, ignored the +presence of the middy, and with something of a strut marched up to the +two marines in the gangway, whistling softly the while, gave each a +friendly nod, examined their grounded arms and their stiff uniform with +its abundant pipe-clay, and ended by spreading his legs a little, +swinging himself slowly toe and heel, and saying patronisingly-- + +"Rather hot toggery that, my lads, for weather like this." + +"Well, of all the impudence!" cried the young officer hotly; and he took +a step towards where Rodd was standing. + +Rodd faced slowly round, looked at the boy superciliously, then said as +coolly as could be-- + +"Hullo, midshipmite! Not gone below?" + +"No, puppy, I have not gone below," and as he spoke the lad pressed the +hilt of his dirk involuntarily and sharply downward. + +"Ha, ha!" laughed Rodd. "Why, that looks like wagging your tail like a +moorhen. I say, why didn't you draw that skewer just now? My word, you +did look fierce!" + +One of the marines tittered, and the other spread his mouth into a broad +grin, while, convulsed with rage, the young officer turned upon both +furiously, making them draw themselves up as stiff as their muskets. + +"How dare you!" cried the middy, turning back to Rodd, and now becoming +fully conscious of the fact that the schooner's crew gathered forward +were gazing at the scene with intense enjoyment. + +"What's the matter, reefer?" said Rodd, whose face was scarlet, but +whose words sounded as cool and indifferent as if he were calm in the +extreme. + +"Matter, you insolent blackguard!" cried the midshipman. "If I were not +on duty, and too much of a gentleman to soil my hands with a schooner's +loblolly boy, I would give you a sound thrashing with my belt." + +"Would you?" said Rodd coolly. "That's the worst of you reefers. You +are nearly all of you like that when you come ashore at Plymouth. It's +your uniform and the wearing of a skewer that makes you all so cocky. +Now, do you know you have said what a fellow just your age once said to +me at Saltash--but he didn't. He had an accident, and then we shook +hands, and I took him home to my uncle's and helped him to bathe his +face. It was such a hot day that his nose bled a good deal. But we +stopped it. Nice fellow he was too, afterwards. So I dare say you'd be +if I had taken you in tow a bit." + +"I understand you, sir," panted the middy; "and look here, I shall not +forget this." + +"Pooh! Yes you will," said Rodd, with a mocking laugh. "I wish you +were going to stop on board. We have got a spare cot here. Get your +old man to give you leave when your lieutenant has done smelling in all +the lockers below. You come while the two vessels are in company, and +I'll teach you how to use the gloves." + +"Oh, if I wasn't on duty!" panted the middy furiously. "I haven't got a +card with me, but give me yours. We may meet again." + +"Hope we shall, I'm sure," said Rodd. "I say, reefer, don't be so jolly +disappointed because you won't have the price of half a nigger for +prize-money." + +"Pah!" ejaculated the middy furiously; and turning his back upon Rodd he +stepped to the side and looked over into the boat, to run his eye +furiously over her crew, who were all sitting upon the alert, ready for +any order that might be given. + +But as he turned away and faced inboard, to his annoyance he found Rodd +close up, smiling carelessly in his face. + +"I say, reefer," he said, "you do look hot." + +"Sir!" snapped out the middy, trying to look the boy down. + +"I say, don't be so waxy because you are disappointed." + +"I beg, sir, that you will not address your remarks to me; and please +recollect that you and yours are not out of the wood yet." + +"All right; only look here; your lads have had a long row, and you have +got another one back. Let's give the poor fellows a bucket of water, +and I'll pour a bottle of our lime-juice in and some syrup. It makes a +splendid drink. Look there; those two red herrings of yours have begun +licking their dry lips at the very thought of it." + +The midshipman seemed to give himself a snatch, but he glanced at the +two marines, and then turned and looked over into the boat, for he was +horribly thirsty himself. + +"Dry, my lads?" he said. "Like some water?" + +"Thankye, sir!" came in chorus, and Rodd called out at once-- + +"Joe Cross! Bucket of fresh water--two pannikins! And is the steward +there?" + +"Ay, ay, sir!" + +"Two bottles of lime-juice and some syrup for the boat's crew and +marines." + +Just then Uncle Paul's head appeared above the cabin hatch, and he +stepped on deck, coming forward to where the two lads were, Rodd smiling +and good-humoured, the middy wearing the aspect of the celebrated dog +which had been pelted with big marrow-bones, upon each of which reposed +a thick juicy bit of beef. + +"Lieutenant Branscombe says will you step down and join us for a few +minutes, Mr Lindon." + +"Does he want me, sir?" + +"Only to partake of a little refreshment this thirsty night." + +"That's right," cried. Rodd. "You go on down with uncle. I'll see +that your lads have plenty." + +"Er--er--no grog, please," said the middy hastily. + +"Not a drop, honour bright," said Rodd, laughing. "You shan't be +mastheaded for that;" and he clapped the young officer merrily on the +back. + +The stay would have been longer, but the darkness was coming on fast; +still it had been long enough for all to become the best of friends, and +when the two officers came on deck it was to find the two crews engaged +in a hearty game of repartee, the schooner's men casting jokes down into +the boat, and the man-of-war's men hurling them back. + +"Yes, a very smart crew, Captain Chubb," said the lieutenant, "but if it +hadn't been for the doctor's papers here, we should have been obliged to +lighten you of about half-a-dozen, for you know you have no business to +have such men as this whilst his Majesty runs short." + +Just then the two lads were talking together hard. + +"Oh, don't you take any notice of that, Harding. Cocky, you called it. +You should drop that; it's too schoolboy-like. You know a fellow may be +only a midshipman, still the ship's roll does call him a man, and when a +fellow's an officer in command of a lot of sailors, he's obliged to put +it on a bit, else he'd never be able to keep them in their places." + +"Yes, I see," said Rodd. + +"That's right; and before I go I just want to say it was very thoughtful +of you to promise that the lads shouldn't have any drink. I got into +several rows when I was young and green, and went ashore with boats' +crews. They used to try on all sorts of dodges to get away to the +public-house. I say, get that uncle of yours to stop about here fishing +for a bit. I want to get you aboard the _Di_ and spend an evening with +us at the mess. Do. I shall get to like you." + +"All right; I will try," said Rodd. "It wouldn't be the first time I've +been aboard a man-of-war." + +"Eh? Where?" + +"Plymouth harbour." + +"Oh yes, I forgot. That's where you live when you are at home. Why +don't you join altogether? You are just cut out for a middy." + +"Couldn't leave uncle. Going to be a naturalist." + +"A what?" + +"Scientific gentleman." + +"But serve the King!" + +"What, and be sent down here hunting after the blackbirding +blackguards?" + +"Pshaw! That's not really what we are here for; only if we see a +suspicious-looking craft we board her." + +"Then what are you here for?" + +"King's business. Mum. Mustn't say." + +"Now, Mr Lindon! Good-evening, Captain Chubb; and good-evening, +doctor. Glad to have met you, sir, and I hope you won't put me down in +your black books as _homo durissimus_, or some other scientific name. +Give way, my lads. Mr Lindon! Do you want to be left behind?" + +"All right, sir," cried the middy, springing into the boat and coming +down into the arms of a couple of the men. "Good-night, Harding! We +shall expect you on board the _Di_." + +Down dropped the oars on either side, and then splash, splash, in +regular movement the blades tossed up the beautiful pale lambent water, +while here and there they broke up the reflection of the stars that were +gradually appearing in the soft violet sky, while the boat glided on +farther and farther from the schooner, making its way towards the lights +of the sloop, from which all of a sudden there was a sharp flash, +followed at a perceptible interval by the report of a musket. + +This was answered a few seconds later by a flash and smart crack from +the sloop's cutter, whose course Rodd leaned over the side to watch till +it was invisible, when he turned from the side, to find Joe Cross +waiting and evidently watching him. + +"Rather close shave, sir," he said. "I began to feel as if some of us +was going to have our 'oliday come to an end. Wouldn't have been so +bad, though, for there are some very jolly fellows there, and it aren't +half a dusty life aboard a man-of-war when you have got over the first +few days, and being what they calls homesick. Aren't no fear of their +coming back for us, is there?" + +"Not the least, Joe. You are all safe enough." + +"We are a-going to give the doctor, sir, such a cheer when he comes on +deck again--three times three, and one in for you. My word, sir, the +lads did laugh to see you take the starch out of that there young +reefer! It was fine!" + +"Oh, never mind about that, Joe. But I say, you have been aboard a +man-of-war. What would a sloop like that be doing down here?" + +"Why, you know, sir; looking after the blackbird catchers--the slavers." + +"Oh no; they are not on this station for that." + +"Must be, sir." + +"No, Joe." + +"Well, but, sir, you heard what the lufftenant said to our old man. +That's what they were after, sir, and a bit disappointed too, until you +and the doctor made them so friendly. They thought they'd got hold of +this fine craft, nice little prize, for she'd sell well just as she +stands after being condemned. Handy little bit of pocket-money for them +in these days when the war is over. Rather a puzzler to them at first. +The second luff--that's what he was--had never tackled a natural history +craft before, and he wouldn't believe it. That's what they are here +for, sir, trying to put a stop to the slave trade. We come upon one in +the _Naaera_ once--the nearer and dearer we used to call her, sir. Just +about such a sloop as that is. It wasn't our business, but we boarded +her, the slave ship, I mean, in a calm, and the blackguards aboard of +her showed fight and beat our boat off in trying to get away with their +sweeps. They were making for one of these swampy rivers out eastward, +rowing as hard as they could, and bringing up a lot of the poor niggers +from below to help pull at the sweeps. Sweeps, indeed! Nice sweeps +they were! And if they once got into the river we should have lost +them." + +"Well?" said Rodd. "And they beat you back?" + +"That they did, sir. Took us quite by surprise. We never thought they +would have the cheek to resist; and we lay off, rubbing our sore ears +and growling and spitting like angry cats, not knowing what to do, +feeling that we should get worse off if we pursued, and ashamed to go +back to face our old man; and just as we were feeling at our worst we +knew that our skipper had been watching us all the time with his glass, +and there was our launch coming full swing, chock-full of men showing +their teeth. That set us all up again, and we were like new men. Round +went our boat's head, and we were off in full pursuit of the slaver, the +lads pulling so hard that we got alongside before the launch could +overtake us, swarmed over her low gunwale, and went at the slaver's crew +tooth and nail, so savage that every man of us showed them the cutlass +practice in fine style, driving them back step by step till if we had +had strength enough we should have driven them overboard or down below; +but they were too strong for us. Put half-a-pound weight in a scale, +sir, if there's a pound in t'other it is too much for it, and so it was +here, sir. We boarded her from the starn, and had driven them right up +into the bows, but being a bit india-rubbery, when they could get no +farther they bounced back on us and we were being driven step by step +along the deck, farther and farther aft, till they gathered theirselves +together with a rush, yelling like demons, and the next thing would have +been that such of us as could stand would have been driven over into our +boat again. But there was a regular hearty British cheer when we least +expected it, for we had forgotten all about our other boat, and there +were the launchers swarming over her bows and taking them in the rear. +That made our lads take heart again. We cheered back, and charged, and +there were the slavers, blacks, half-breeds and Portuguese, took, as you +might say, between the jaws of a big rat-trap, every one of whose teeth +was a British sailor; and to save being chopped in two, down they all +tumbled into the slaver's hold, trapped themselves like the poor +wretches the hold was packed with. My word, Mr Rodd, sir, there are +some things as a fellow never can forget, and that was one of them. It +was just awful, sir!" + +"What, did you kill them all?" cried Rodd, horror-stricken. + +"Nay, sir, not one. We might have killed some of them if they had kept +on showing fight; and I don't say, mind you, as some of them hadn't got +some very awkward cuts, for when a British tar's fighting in a good +cause, and been knocked about till his monkey's well up, his habit is to +hit hard; but there, as soon as we had driven that lot below they +chucked their knives and axes and pikes away and began to howl for +mercy. What I meant was so awful was that place down below--that there +hold with the slaver's crew trampling about and trying to hide +themselves amongst the chained-up cargo. Awful aren't the word for it, +sir! The lads couldn't stand it: let alone the sick and dying, there +were some there that must have been dead for days, and that in a close +hold in a sea like this! But I believe it was much hotter. Even the +slaver's crew themselves begged to be let out--and there, I won't say +any more about it. It was quite time even then that our old country +began to put a stop to the slave trade, and I am sorry to say they +aren't done it yet. That's what made us chaps to-night so free-and-easy +with that there boat's crew. You see, you can't help liking fellows who +are trying to put a stop to things like that." + +"No, Joe, of course not. But that's not what they are down here for." + +"Who says so, sir?" + +"Why, that midshipman, Mr Lindon, told me so." + +"Well, he ought to know, sir. What did he say they were here for, +then?" + +"He didn't say, only that it was private and he couldn't speak." + +"Well, I don't know, then, only a man-of-war wouldn't be down here for +nothing; that's pretty sure. Maybe we shall run into company with them +again some day, and then I dare say we shall know. They gave us lads a +fright, but I aren't sorry we met them, sir, for it was a bit of a +change. Yes, Mr Rodd, sir, they are down here on some business +pertickler secret and sealed orders; but you wait a bit, sir, and I dare +say one of these days you'll find out." + + + +CHAPTER TWENTY FIVE. + +OH, MURTHER! + +Rodd was early on deck next morning for his bath, which consisted of so +many buckets of water fresh fished up and dashed upon him by the men as +a makeshift, consequent upon Captain Chubb telling him that he could not +have any swims on account of the sharks. "Can't spare you, my lad," he +had said. "But I haven't seen a shark," grumbled Rodd. "No, my lad, +but they would very soon see you. You never know where those gentlemen +are." + +So Rodd went on deck when sea and sky looked dim and a faint mist lay +low upon the surface of the ocean, making everything indistinct. "She's +gone, sir; she's gone!" + +"Who's she, and where has she gone?" said Rodd, rather sleepily. + +"The _Diadem_, sir." + +"What, the sloop of war? Not she! You will see her come peeping out of +the fog yonder before long." + +"Nay, sir; she's gone right off, and it's all right. My word, I wish we +had got a fiddle here!" + +"A fiddle! What for?" + +"Hornpipe, sir. The boys are all bubbling over and don't know how to +bear themselves. Nothing like a few kicks up and down the deck to a +well-played old tune, to get rid of it all." + +"Why, what are you talking about?" cried Rodd. + +"Talking about, sir? Ah, you never knowed what it was to be a sailor, +and when you are free never knowing for a moment how soon you may be +pressed. Why, I don't believe there was a man Jack on us as slept a +wink last night with thinking about this morning." + +"What, for fear you would be pressed, after what uncle said?" + +"Ay, ay, sir. Your uncle meant right enough, and he believed what he +said, and that there lieutenant was civil enough; but a second +lieutenant aren't a first lieutenant, sir, and a first lieutenant aren't +a post-captain. We all talked a bit last night, and put that and that +together, and Isaac Gregg, who aren't a very wise chap--you see, sir, +he's got too much fat about him to leave room for anything else--but he +said something smart last night. `Yes,' he says, `my lads, that all +sounds right enough, but suppose when that boat got back the captain +says, Yes, he says, it's all very well, and I dare say that there gent +got leave from Government to man his schooner and come down here +bottling sea-leeches and other insects of that kind; but I am short of +men for the King's ship, and that's more consequence than what he's +doing of. So you just start back at daybreak in the boat with my +compliments to Dr Robson, saying I'm very sorry, but he must please +hand over six of the best lads he's got.'" + +"Oh, nonsense, Joe! The captain would be too much of a gentleman." + +"Being a gentleman, sir, is being a gentleman, but duty's duty, and +officers and sailors have to give up everything to that. Last night, +whether we was on the watch, or turned in to our hot bunks, every man +Jack of us felt that the Bun was right, and a bit envious of him, +because, poor chap, he would have been safe. They wouldn't have took +him; but we all of us fully expected to see that boat coming back for us +this morning. But not only aren't there no boat, but the sloop's +slipped away in the night and gone." + +"Where's she gone, then?" + +"Well, that's what we don't know, sir, and we don't care." + +"But are you sure, Joe? She may be lying off yonder in the mist." + +"Oh no, she aren't, sir. Two on us have been up right aloft till we +could lay our hands on the main truck; and when you are up there you are +looking right over the fog. It's wonderful how close it lies to the +water. It's all right, sir, and I believe we are safe. Aren't you +glad?" + +"Of course I am, Joe." + +"I know you are, sir. But just you think what we must be, just about +five hundred times as glad as you are, and we are all ready for anything +you like. What's it to be to-day?" + +"Well, I don't think we shall do much. Uncle will consider it too hot." + +"Hot, sir? Not it! Just right. We shan't mind. Fishing, netting, +rowing. You tell him not to think about us. It will just warm us up, +for most on us had the shivers all night." + +The low mist began to lift soon after Rodd had had his bath, for the +level rays of the sun began to pierce the grey haze as the great orange +orb slowly rolled up from the depths of ocean, investing it with the +loveliest of pearly tints and iridescent hues, while not a speck of sail +or the clearly marked lines of topmasts could be seen upon the horizon +line. + +"Well," said the doctor, at breakfast, as Rodd told him what the men had +said, "the heat will be very great, but I shouldn't spare myself. If I +gave up my researches to-day it would be for the sake of the men." + +"You needn't consider them that way, sir," said Captain Chubb. "They +would rather you didn't. But couldn't you do something that would spare +my deck a little?" + +"Well, I am afraid that's impossible, Captain Chubb," said the doctor. + +"Ah, well, sir," said the captain, with a sigh, "I suppose you must go +on; but it seems a pity when everything's so white and clean." + +So the captain's decks suffered all day, and were swabbed clean again, +while that evening before the mists began to gather there was a fresh +surprise. + +Rodd took it into his head to go up to the main cross-trees with the +glass. He had said nothing, but he had some idea as to the possibility +of the sloop coming into sight again, and he had made up his mind if he +could see her in the distance to give Captain Chubb a broad hint, and +urge him to press on full sail right through the night. + +It was very glorious, Rodd thought, as he perched himself up aloft on +the cross-trees, after finding the heavy glass very much in his way as +he climbed. + +"It's beautiful up here; but--" + +He did not finish his remark to himself, but got his left arm well round +the mast, adjusted the glass, and began slowly to sweep the horizon. + +He felt in a state of doubt and suspicion, fully expecting that at any +moment the tapering masts of the sloop might slowly creep into the field +ready to damp his hopes, for his feelings were completely on the side of +the men. But as slowly and carefully he ran the glass along what seemed +to be the very edge of the world, his spirits rose. + +"Nothing--nothing," he kept on muttering to himself. "Oh, how big the +world is, after all! Here we are, just like a speck on the ocean, quite +alone, and though there must be thousands of ships and boats sailing +about, not one in sight, and in about another ten minutes all will be +bright starlight again--and let's see, I began here, and I've swept the +sea right round, and just in time, for before I could go round again or +half-way it will be quite dark--and--What's that?" he cried excitedly. + +He started violently, and his hands trembled so that he had great +difficulty in steadying the glass to fix it upon that which had suddenly +caught his eye. + +"Nothing!" he muttered impatiently. "It was my fancy. I made as sure +as possible, just as I was going to lower the glass, that I could see +the three masts of the sloop standing right out yonder towards the west. +All rubbish and imagination," he muttered. "I pictured that because it +was what I was afraid of seeing when--Oh-h-h! It wasn't fancy! There +she is! Oh, there she is, after all!" + +He looked sharply down at the deck, which was occupied only by four of +the men, the skipper and Uncle Paul being in the cabin. But one of +these men was Joe Cross, and Rodd chirruped faintly to attract's the +sailor's attention. + +"Make out anything, sir?" + +"Come up here, Joe," replied Rodd, in a low tone, and the man sprang to +the ratlines and began rapidly to ascend till he was nearly on a level +with the occupant of the cross-trees. + +"See a whale spouting, sir? I should have thought it was getting too +dark." + +"No, Joe; but I have just made out the sloop with the glass." + +"Nay, sir! Don't say that!" cried the man, in a startled tone. + +"Take the glass, Joe. I am afraid it's true." + +"Oh, murther! as Pat says," groaned the sailor, as he hurriedly adjusted +the glass and began to sweep the horizon in the direction Rodd pointed +out, a few points on the starboard bow. "Can't see nothing, sir. Were +you sure?" + +"Yes, Joe; quite." + +"But it's getting dark too fast, sir. I can make nothing out. If you +are right, though, she mayn't have seen us and may be out of sight again +by morning.--Ah, I've got her!" + +"There, I knew I was right, Joe." + +"Not quite, sir. Yes, I've got her quite plain now, but she's dying out +fast. It aren't a man-of-war. It's a two-master of some kind. A big +schooner or a brig. It's all right, sir. There's life in a mussel, +after all. My word, though, didn't it bring my heart up into my mouth!" + +"Are you sure it's not a three-master, Joe?" cried Rodd joyously. + +"Sartin sure, sir. Why, you talk as frightened like as we poor lads +were." + +"What vessel was it, then?" + +"Oh, I don't know what she was, sir. I only know what she warn't. +That's enough for us, eh, sir? I say, sir; what weather! Rather +different to what we had in the French port. Looks settled too. Nice +and cool the air feels. There, it's only fancy, but it's just as if I +could sniff the land." + +"How far are we away, Joe?" asked Rodd. + +"Long way, sir. But I say, Mr Rodd, sir, I wouldn't say anything down +below. It'd only skeer the lads and set them thinking all night." + +"But wouldn't you say anything about having seen that ship?" + +"Oh, if you like, sir. The skipper ought to know. But I can swear she +warn't a man-of-war, and that's enough for us. Oh, there is the +skipper. My word, though, you can hardly see him! Curus, isn't it, how +the mist begins to gather? Pretty good sign we are not so very far off +the shore. Will you hail him, sir, or shall I?" + +"You, Joe." + +A brief conversation ensued, question and answer ending by Joe's +declaration that he believed it was a brig; and then they descended to +the deck. + + + +CHAPTER TWENTY SIX. + +DREAMY. + +Very curious incidents are sometimes invented, but the most extravagant +can be matched by others that have really occurred. + +One of the last things that had been talked about that evening had been +the vessel of which Rodd had caught a glimpse in the short tropic +twilight just as it was being swallowed up by the darkness and mist of +night. Joe Cross had incidentally said that he believed it was a brig, +and that night as Rodd lay half asleep, half wakeful, in his cot, kept +from finding the customary repose of a tired lad by the heat of the +narrow cabin below, the word brig brought to mind the vessel that had so +nearly run upon them in Havre-de-Grace, and in a drowsy stupid way he +had pictured her tall tapering spars, the flapping of her stay-sail, and +the rush of the storm. + +Then all was blank, till all at once it seemed as if time had elapsed +and he was picturing the French brig once more, knowing that it was the +_Jeanne d'Arc_, though all was darkness and he only caught sight of the +vessel now and then, by the flashing of the fort guns, while the roar of +their reports echoed loudly above the rush of the wind as the brave +vessel tacked from side to side of the harbour, striving to reach the +mouth and escape out to sea. + +It was all very vivid as in a dream. + +Flash went the fort gun, there was the roar of the report, and all was +darkness, again and again, while somehow--he could not tell how it was-- +the heat was intense, and Rodd threw up one hand, which came in contact +with the top of his cot with a sharp rap. + +"Bah! It hurts," muttered the boy; and then dream and reality merged in +one, for there was another flash and the roar as if of half-a-dozen +guns. + +But the boy was awake now to the fact that he was not dreaming of the +escape of the French brig, but far south of the Equator, lying half +stifled in his cot, listening to the roar of a tropic storm, while every +now and then the cabin which he shared with his uncle was lit up by the +vivid flashes, which were succeeded by fresh roars. + +"What a storm," thought Rodd, "and how hot!" + +He slipped out of his cot to go and thrust open the cabin window. + +"Hear the thunder, uncle?" he said. + +But it had ceased for the moment, the last peal dying softly away, and +for answer to his question he had only the deep regular breathing of a +sound sleeper. + +"He must have been tired," thought the boy, and creeping closer to the +cabin window he thrust out his hand to let in more air, but found the +window wide open as it could be. + +"He must have found out how hot it was and done that himself," thought +Rodd, as he knelt softly upon the bulkhead to try and breathe the fresh +air; but it was hot and half suffocating, while the blackness was +intense. One moment there was a faint quivering somewhere above, and +just enough to show him the murkiness of the sea which spread out from +beneath him far away like so much blackened oil touched for a few brief +instants with streaks of gold. + +"Why, there isn't a breath of air," thought Rodd, and then he started +back, dazzled by the brilliant glare of the lightning, which made him +involuntarily close his eyes and keep them shut till the terrific crash +of thunder, which seemed to burst exactly over his head, had gone +rolling away as if its echoes were composed of gigantic cannon balls +passing slowly down metallic tunnels right away into space. + +"That was a startler," said the boy to himself. "How awful, but how +grand! It's rather hard to think that the danger's in the lightning, +and that there is nothing in the thunder to hurt." + +Then once more all was black silence above and below, and all beyond the +cabin window seemed to be solid. + +"I never saw a storm like this at home," thought the boy. "Uncle can +sleep!" + +There was another brilliant flash, but this time Rodd felt prepared and +did not shrink. He only knelt, gazing out of the stern window, +impressed by the grandeur of that which he had seen. + +Behind him he felt that everything in the cabin had been as light as +day, but away from him all around he had looked upon a vivid picture, a +gloriously wondrous cloudscape stretching far above and reflected far +beneath in the smooth, oily, gently heaving sea--a grand vision of +mountains of blue and gold and purple, which quivered before his eyes +for a few moments in such vivid intensity that his eyeballs ached; then +all was black again for a few moments, and then came the deep-toned roar +as of hundreds of distant mighty cannons; not a sudden, sharp, metallic +crash as in the last instance, but a deep murmurous intonation which +made the woodwork of the schooner tremble. + +Rodd felt no fear--nothing but a sense of awe at the grandeur of the +storm, and it was with a feeling of eagerness that he waited for the +next flash. But a minute passed before there was a faint quivering +which slightly lit up the sea, to give place to blackness, silence and +darkness. Then there was another faint quivering light that seemed to +come from somewhere behind where he stood, and again he waited for one +of those vivid flashes that should show up the configuration of the +clouds shaped in mountain and valley and distant cave. + +And many minutes must have passed, during which time Rodd listened in +the appalling silence for the distant soft and increasing rushing sound +of the coming rain, even as he had listened before in far-off Devon to +the coming of some summer storm. + +"There will be wind too," he thought. "I wonder whether all is made +fast aloft; for a storm like this," he continued, in his ignorance, +"can't come without a tremendous wind and a rush of rain." + +His next thought was that he would go on deck and see what the watch +were about; but he hesitated to stir, for the thought of the gorgeous +cloudscape he had seen fascinated him and held him to his place. + +"I needn't worry about that," he thought. "Captain Chubb's sure to be +on deck. He wouldn't sleep like we do. If I go and open the cabin door +it will wake uncle up. Hah! It's quivering again. The storm can't be +over like this. Now there's another big flash coming." + +He had hardly formed the thought when from quite up in the zenith down +into the depths of the sea the arch of heaven seemed to open out in a +sharp jagged line of vivid blue light, shutting again instantaneously, +and the boy knelt gazing before him in wonder, for there, about a mile +away, with every spar and yard and rope standing out black against the +blue light, was the picture--the model, it seemed to him to be--of a +tall-masted brig sitting motionless upon the water; and then it was +gone. + +"Why, that must have been the one we saw," thought Rodd, and he strained +his eyes again as he listened for the roar of the thunder that should +have succeeded the vivid zigzag flash of electricity; but it did not +come, and he waited and waited in the darkness in vain, trying to grasp +how it could be that a storm should come to an end in so strange and +unsatisfactory a way according to his lights, and why there should be +neither rain nor wind. + +He waited, trying hard now to pierce the black darkness, but trying in +vain. + +There was nothing to see, nothing to hear, and in spite of the wonder +and awe that had pervaded him, Rodd Harding now behaved like a very +ordinary human being, for he yawned, felt sleepy and that he was not so +hot as he was before, and thinking that it was no use to stop there any +longer, and that he might as well dress, he crept softly back to his cot +and stood thinking again. + +"Can't be anything like morning," he said to himself, "and I shall be +able to see that brig then. Why, I remember now; I was dreaming about +the storm at Havre, and that vessel--what was it? The _Jeanne d'Arc_-- +escaping, and the forts firing at her; and I saw the flashes from the +guns. Of course; how absurd! That was the thunder and lightning, +and--" + +Rodd slipped slowly on to his pillow, yawned again, muttered something +about how sleepy he felt, and the next moment he was off as soundly as +his uncle; but only, it seemed to him, to begin dreaming directly after +about the escaping of the brig, and the storm, mingled with the noise +and the shouting of people ashore, and a heavy bump from somewhere close +at hand; and then the boy was wide awake again, springing up so suddenly +in his cot that it was not his hand but his head that struck with a rap +against the woodwork, as a voice that he hardly recognised in the +confusion shouted-- + +"Rodd, boy! Quick--on deck! The schooner's going down!" + + + +CHAPTER TWENTY SEVEN. + +STRANGE PROCEEDINGS. + +"Is it a wreck, uncle?" panted Rodd. + +"I thought so, boy," cried Uncle Paul; "but don't talk. Slip on two or +three things." + +He was still speaking, when there was a rush down the cabin stairs, and +the captain shouted-- + +"Quick, doctor! Your pistols and a gun! We are attacked!" + +The words thrilled through Rodd, and the next minute he had seized a +double gun and was ready to follow his uncle and the skipper on deck, +where in the faint light of morning he found nearly the whole of the +crew gathered across the after part of the deck, armed with capstan bars +for the moment, while the mate and Joe Cross were rapidly handing round +cutlasses and pikes. The forward part of the schooner was in the hands +of strangers, all well-armed; others were climbing over the bows from a +boat which was made fast alongside, while hurried orders were being +given to them in French by a tall, dark, grey-haired man, sword in one +hand, pistol in the other. + +"What's the meaning of this?" panted Uncle Paul to the skipper, while +Rodd felt as if he were not yet awake, and suddenly recalled the fact +that he had armed himself with a perfectly useless weapon, for in his +excitement he had forgotten powder flask and bullets, having instead of +the latter brought a belt containing small shot. + +"Pirates or privateers, sir," replied the skipper hotly, "but just give +us time. Be smart, my lads. Pikes and cutlasses, and then all together +with a will!" + +"For heaven's sake let's have no bloodshed, Captain Chubb!" cried Uncle +Paul, catching the skipper by the arm. + +"Not my wish, sir," said the captain shortly; "but this is my schooner +while I command her, and I'm going to clear this deck." + +"Ay, ay, sir!" came in a low, eager murmur from the men. + +"There, sir," said the skipper; "you and the lad stand back. Ready, my +lads?" + +"No, no!" cried Uncle Paul, who saw that the strangers forward, all as +well-armed as the schooner's crew, were eagerly waiting for the order to +advance from their leader, each party being ready to be let slip for +what might prove to be a desperate encounter. + +Rodd grasped this, and then felt puzzled as he saw a youth of about his +own age suddenly elbow his way to the front to stand beside the leader. + +Suddenly awakened as he had been from sleep, Rodd felt more confused +than ever, for the sight of the youth, who from his dress seemed to be +the second officer, added to his confusion, though for the moment he +could hardly tell why. + +And this just as Uncle Paul was grasping the skipper's arm and saying-- + +"Don't be hasty. These cannot be pirates. There must be some mistake." + +"Maybe, sir, but these fellows who have boarded us have made it. Now, +sir, once more, stand back and let us clear the deck. They can talk +when they are back in their boats." + +There was a few moments' silence, each side seeming unwilling to begin, +and taking advantage of an apparent hesitancy on the part of the strange +leader, Uncle Paul instead of stepping back raised his hand and +advanced, Rodd springing to his side, while their movement was exactly +followed by the chief intruder and the youth who stepped to his side. + +"Now, sir," cried Uncle Paul firmly, in French. + +"I understand English," was the reply. + +"I am very glad," said Uncle Paul. "Now, sir, you see that we are +well-armed and prepared. What is the meaning of this attack?" + +"Ah, I am glad, sir," said the stranger courteously. "Pray keep your +men back, and I will mine." + +"Tell them to clear off the deck, then, doctor. There must be no talk +here." + +"Be silent, Captain Chubb!" cried Uncle Paul sternly. "We must have no +bloodshed." + +"No, sir," cried his opponent quickly, and in very excellent English. +"We are no pirates. I am the captain of that brig, and in urgent need +of help." + +"And this is a very strange way of asking for it, sir." + +"Yes, yes, I know, my friend," cried the other hotly, "but it was forced +upon me by circumstances. I have need of your vessel, and I must have +it at all costs--peacefully if you will, and I am ready to recompense +you, the owner, for any loss of cargo at your destination which you may +incur; but I must have the use of this little ship." + +"Indeed, sir!" said Uncle Paul, with a peculiar smile. "And if I say +you cannot have it; what then?" + +"Then, sir," said the stranger haughtily, "you see we are prepared. I +shall be compelled to take it from you by force." + +"Ah-h-h!" came like a low growl of satisfaction from the schooner's +crew, and Rodd was conscious of a rather ominous movement on the part of +the men, who began moistening their hands and taking a firmer grip of +their weapons. + +Rodd was drinking in this colloquy, which filled him with wild +excitement; but all the time he kept glancing from the young officer who +stood sword in hand to the brig he had seen over-night and again thrown +up by the storm, still lying about the same distance away from the +schooner, and then with his head suddenly seeming to become clearer he +cried out aloud-- + +"Uncle, those are the officers we saw at Havre, and that's the brig that +escaped." + +"You--you were at Havre!" cried the elder officer excitedly; and he +stepped closer to Rodd, his young companion, watchful and on the alert, +following his example and keeping close as if to defend him from any +attempted seizure. + +"Yes, yes, of course," cried Rodd, without looking at the speaker, his +eyes being fixed upon the young man. + +"Then this is a French vessel?" cried the officer. + +"No, sir," replied Uncle Paul. "It is my schooner, and I am not in +pursuit of your brig." + +"Why, it is!" cried Rodd suddenly, as he dropped the butt of his +unloaded gun with a thud upon the deck. "I thought I knew you again!-- +Uncle, this is the young French prisoner I helped to escape from +Dartmoor." + +Before he could say another word the sword the young Frenchman held +dropped from his hand to the extent of its gold-laced knot, and to +Rodd's confusion a pair of thin arms were flung about his neck and he +was held tightly to the young stranger's breast. + +"Oh, _mon ami_! _mon ami_! My dear friend!" he cried. "Do we meet once +more like this? _Mon pere, c'est le jeune Anglais qui nous a sauves +dans cet affreux temps_." + +"Moray!" cried the officer, looking stunned. "Is this true?" + +"True? Oh yes! Oh yes!" cried the lad, speaking now in English. "You, +young angler, fisherman, this is my dear father." + +To Rodd's false shame and confusion, he had to submit to another +embrace, for before he could realise what was about to happen the +officer had followed his son's example and not only embraced him, but +kissed him on both cheeks. + +"Well, this is a queer set out," said Uncle Paul. "Then you are the two +fellows who broke into my bedroom and helped yourselves to my purse?" + +"Ha, ha! Yes, my friend," cried the officer, laughing; "but you and +your brave son will forgive. We were poor exiles and prisoners fighting +for our liberty, and you will let us make amends." + +"Oh, well, you did," said Uncle Paul bluffly; "but that is no excuse for +turning pirates and trying to rob me of my ship at the point of the +sword." + +"No, no," cried the officer hastily, "but you are a brave Englishman, +and you and your son--" + +"No, sir, my nephew." + +"--will forgive. One moment; let me think!" cried the officer, as he +dragged his hand from out of his sword-knot and thrust the blade into +its sheath. "Yes, yes, let me think. I have it, Morny," and turning to +his followers he uttered a short sharp command which resulted in his men +swinging themselves over the side and entering the two boats in which +they had effected the surprise of the schooner. + +At their first movement in retreat the skipper's crew burst into a loud +jeering laugh, and made as if to rush forward; but at a word from +Captain Chubb they were silenced and held back. + +"I thank you, sir," said the French officer, raising his hat to the +skipper. "It was well done. Now let me speak; let me explain," and he +looked from Rodd to his uncle and back, and then gave a glance at the +skipper, while the two lads stood hand in hand. + +"It was like this," he said; "you saw us at Havre that stormy day, and +of course my brig nearly crushed into your vessel. Then we lay at +anchor close together till that order came down from a vile insensate +Government to seize upon my vessel and my crew. It was the work of +enemies, and I had to set sail at once, or once more my son and I would +have had to pass years in the inside of a prison, not as culprits, +monsieur, but as honourable gentlemen, French nobles, whose only crime +was fidelity to one,"--and as he spoke he stopped short, uttering the +word _one_ with grave reverence, as he took off his hat--an example +followed by his son. "Well, gentlemen, I cannot explain to you. There +is not time. Only this--you saw that I made what you English call a +dash for it--for freedom. It was like madness, but we said we would +rather trust the storm than the French Government. They sent boats full +of soldiers to seize us, but we kept on. They opened fire upon us from +the forts, but we did not shrink." + +"Yes, yes, we saw all," cried Uncle Paul, "and a very brave dash you +made." + +Captain Chubb, who had listened, frowning heavily the while, uttered a +low grunt. + +"And a very fine bit of seamanship, sir," he said, and the officer +turned to him and raised his hat. + +"It was desperate, sir," he said gravely, "and I knew that I was risking +the lives of my dear son and all on board; but no man there shrank. +Well, sir, my story is long, but I must excuse myself for my conduct +here. It is enough. We battled with the storm, as you saw, and +escaped." + +"I always said you had gone down," grunted Captain Chubb. + +"No, sir. We escaped with but one wound, and that was to my poor +vessel; and since the night when we left Havre-de-Grace upon my mission +it has been one long struggle, as you would say, for life." + +"Indeed, sir?" + +"Yes," said the officer sadly, and he pointed over the side towards +where the beautiful duck-like brig with its taper spars sat the smooth +sea, but with a steady stream of water trickling down her side. "My +chief officer and my men have worked in every way they knew long days +and weeks; but it is of no use. I would not give up the great object +upon which I have come, but it is forced upon us at last that before +many days have gone over our heads that vessel will lie far down in the +depths of the ocean. Do you not see how low she is in the water?" + +"Eh?" cried the skipper eagerly. "Eh? I thought she was low down with +cargo. You've sprung a leak?" + +"A cannon ball crashed through her, sir, and we have never been able to +master that leak." + +"Then why in the name of thunder didn't you put into port?" cried the +skipper contemptuously. + +The officer smiled. + +"I cannot explain," he said. "There was not time. I had work to do--a +task that I had promised to fulfil, and we held on till it was forced +upon me that I must get another vessel or stand with my men upon the +deck and let our brave _Roi Dagobert_ sink beneath our feet." + +"That wasn't her name at Havre," said the downright skipper. + +"No, sir," said the officer, smiling; "but were we not pursued? Would +not news of our escape be sent far and wide? We were obliged to assume +another disguise. The _Jeanne d'Arc_, we said, sank at Havre. That is +the _Roi Dagobert_ floating still; but for how long?" + +"I don't quite see that," said the skipper bluntly. + +"No?" said the officer. "Monsieur has never passed long years as a +prisoner of war." + +"Well, no," grunted the skipper. "Maybe that might have made me a bit +shifty." + +"There, sir," said the officer, turning now to Uncle Paul; "that is my +excuse for this desperate venture--this attempt to seize your vessel. +My business is urgent. I am a nobleman, a count of the French Empire, +and I offer you any recompense you like to name if you will give up to +me your vessel, leaving me full command for a week--a month--such time +as I may need." + +"And if I say, sir, that I cannot accede to what you must own are wild +demands," said Uncle Paul, "what then?" + +"What then?" said the officer slowly. + +"You mean that you will attack us, and the strongest wins?" + +The officer was silent, and he turned his eyes upon his son, who left +Rodd and took his extended hands, both standing silent for a few +moments. + +"No, sir," he said at last, slowly and gravely. "Neither my son nor I +can raise our hands against those who gave us liberty, almost life. +Morny, my boy, we will do our duty to the last, and try to keep the poor +_Roi Dagobert_ afloat. She may live long enough, even as she has kept +afloat so long. If she sinks with us--well, my boy, we shall have done +our duty to him we serve, and our names may not be forgotten in our +country's rolls." + +There was silence for a few moments, which was broken at last by Rodd. + +"But I say, uncle," he cried eagerly, "you always said you had plenty of +time, and--" + +The young officer turned quickly upon the speaker with an eager +questioning look, but before Uncle Paul could speak, Captain Chubb took +off his cap and stood scratching his head in the now bright morning +sunshine. + +"Look here, Mr Count," he said; "I am only a rough Englishman, and a +lot of what you have been saying about mission and that sort of thing is +just so much Greek to me. But do you mean to tell me that you got a +ball through the bottom of your smart brig that night in Havre, and have +never been able to stop the leak?" + +"Yes, yes; that is so, my friend. My chief officer has tried everything +that he could do, but we could not get at the place. And look yonder! +The pump has been kept going ever since." + +"Well, sir," continued Captain Chubb, "I don't know your first mate, and +I don't want to say hard things of a man who could take that there smart +craft out of the French harbour as he did that night. He is a very fine +sailor, sir. But if I aren't got a carpenter on board this schooner as +would give him ninety out of a hundred and then beat him, without +bringing to work the little bit I knows myself, why, I'm a Dutchman, and +that I aren't." + +"Ah!" cried the Count excitedly. "You think--" + +"No, sir; I don't say I think anything without having a look. But as +there don't seem to be any fighting going on, and you and the doctor +here turns out to be old friends, why, before you talk of throwing up +your job and taking to your boats--which would be a much more sensible +thing to do than going down with colours flying when there warn't no +need, and setting aside getting some fresh water and provisions into +your boats and making for a place on the West Afric coast--I should just +like to come on board your craft with my man and see what mightn't be +done by stopping that there leak." + +"My friend!" cried the Count excitedly, and he caught the skipper by the +hands. + +"Well, sir," said the skipper, with a grim smile, "if you are Mr Rodd's +and the doctor's friend and wants to be friends with me, why, Tom Chubb +aren't the man to say no and want to keep enemies. So there's my fin. +But look 'ere, you know," he continued, as he gave the Count's thin +white hand a tremendous grip, "yours was a very queer way of coming upon +us, and might have meant some nasty marks on my white decks. You can't +help being a Frenchman, but do you know what an Englishman would have +done? He'd have just come here civil like and said, `Look here, +strangers, we have sprung a leak, and we are going down. Come and lend +us a hand at the pumps.'" + +"Ah, yes, of course," said the Count warmly. "It is what I should have +done." + +"And you would like me to come aboard and see if there's anything we can +do?" + +"Yes, yes!" cried the Count eagerly. + +"All right, then, sir," said the skipper coolly; "I am sailing under the +doctor's orders, and if he's willing, I'm your man." + + + +CHAPTER TWENTY EIGHT. + +A SHIP SURGEON. + +"Well, Mr Rodd, sir," said Captain Chubb, as he and the lad stood +watching the regular dip of oars in the brig's two boats as they glided +back over the tranquil sea to where their vessel lay motionless in the +calm. "Well, Mr Rodd, sir, don't you wish you'd been born a +Frenchman?" + +"No," cried the boy sharply. "I am thankful I was born English." + +"And so you ought to be, my lad. Of all the crackbrained, sentimental, +outrageous chaps I ever met there's none of them comes up to a +Frenchman." + +"Oh, you are too bad, Captain Chubb." + +"Too bad, eh? Why, aren't they always kicking up a dust and making +revolutions, cutting off their kings' and queens' heads, and then going +to war with all the world, with their Napoleons and Bonapartes and all +the rest of them? Call themselves men!" + +"Why, you are as bad as uncle," cried Rodd merrily. "You and he ought +to be always the best of friends. But, if you speak fairly you must own +that they are very gallant men." + +"Gallant men!" cried the skipper scornfully. "I don't call them men. I +call them monkeys! Men! Butchers, as cut off the head of their +beautiful Queen Mary What-you-may-call-it, and then after shedding blood +like that, sending no end of poor women who never did them a bit of harm +to that guillotine. I'd be ashamed of myself, Mr Rodd, to take their +part." + +"Oh, nonsense!" cried Rodd warmly. "I say that the Count and his son +have proved themselves to be very brave fellows. Why, you owned as much +yourself about the way in which they escaped with the brig." + +"Oh, that was right enough," grumbled the skipper. + +"I am not going to deny," continued Rodd, "that there are plenty of +horrible wretches amongst the French. And that Revolution was awful; +but haven't we plenty of bad men amongst the English?" + +The skipper chuckled. + +"Well, yes, we have had some pretty tidy ones, if you come to read your +histories. But I don't know so much about those chaps being brave. It +was a very clever bit of seamanship, mind you, that taking the brig out +in the teeth of the storm with hardly room to tack. I am not a bad +pilot in my way when I like to try, but I will be honest over it; I +daren't have tried that job. It was a very clean thing. But look here, +my lad. It's no use for you to try and crack that up, because him who +did it must have been as mad as a hatter, and between ourselves, that's +what I think that Count is." + +"Oh, fudge, captain!" cried Rodd. "No more mad than you or I." + +"Well, I can answer for myself, my lad," said the skipper, with a +chuckle, "but that's more than I'd do for you, for you do some precious +outrageous things sometimes." + +"I?" cried Rodd. + +"Yes, you, my lad." + +"What a shame!" cried Rodd indignantly. "I defy you to prove that I +have done anything that you could call mad. Now tell me something. +What have you ever known me do that wasn't sensible?" + +"Oh, that's soon done," cried the skipper. "Didn't you go and gammon +the soldiers when they were after the escaped French prisoners? Don't +you call that a mad act? Fighting against the laws of your country like +that!" + +"Ah, well, I suppose I oughtn't to have helped them, captain; but I +couldn't help it." + +"No, sir, and that's what the Frenchmen would say. Now, what in the +world is that chap after, with his mission, as he calls it? What does +he mean by coming rampaging out south with a hole in the bottom of his +brig and the pumps going straight on to keep the water down? Would any +one but a lunatic go risking his crew and his vessel like that?" + +"Well, it does seem rather wild," replied Rodd thoughtfully. + +"Wild? Well, that's only your way of saying he's stick, stark, staring +mad. And here he's been out weeks and weeks, knowing as he says that +his brig was sinking, when he could have put in at Gib, or the Azores, +or Las Palmas, or brought up in one of the West Coast rivers, where he +could run up on the tidal mud, careened his vessel, and set his ship's +carpenter to work to clap patches upon her bottom outside and in. Don't +you call that mad?" + +"No. He might have had reasons for not doing so." + +"Ah, that's right, sir; argufy. You young scholarly chaps who have been +to big schools and got your heads chock-full of Latin and Greek, you are +beggars to argufy--chopping logic, I suppose you calls it--and I give +in. You could easily beat me at that; just as easily as I could turn +you round my little finger at navigation. But I'll have one more go at +you; I says that there French Count is mad." + +"And I say he is not," said Rodd, "only a brave, eccentric nobleman who +may have a good many more reasons for what he does than we know." + +"All right, youngster. I give you my side. Now that's yours. Now, +just answer me this. Warn't it the crack-brainedest bit of +ask-you-to-go-and-borrow-a-new-strait-waistcoat-to-put-me-in sort of +a job for him to bring his two boat-loads of men, like a +black-flag-and-cross-boned Paul Jones sort of a pirate, aboard our +schooner in the dark, thinking he's going to take possession of it to +use instead of his own brig, when if he'd had any gumption he might have +managed to patch her up, and--Here, I say, I can't go on talking like +this before breakfast, my lad. I must have my bowl of coffee and a bit +of salt pork and biscuit before I say another word." + +"Oh, very well," cried Rodd merrily. "I see we shan't agree; and we +don't want to quarrel, do we, captain?" + +"Quarrel? Not us, my lad! It takes two to do that, and we knows one +another too well." + +"Then look here," cried Rodd, "you are taking it very coolly and talking +about breakfast; aren't you going to order the boat out and go aboard +the brig at once?" + +"I aren't a-going to do anything till I have had my breakfast," said the +captain. "They've spoilt my morning snooze, but I aren't going to let +them spoil my morning meal, nor my lads' neither." + +"But it's urgent," cried Rodd. "Suppose while you are thinking of +eating and drinking the brig goes down?" + +"Yah! She won't go down. If she's floated for weeks like that she'll +keep her nose above water while I swallow two bowls of coffee. I can't +work without something to keep me going. Let them pump for another +half-hour, and then we'll go." + +"We!" said Rodd sharply. "That means me too?" + +"Oh, ah, if you like to come; only we shall have to keep a sharp +look-out." + +"What, for fear it should sink under us?" + +"Nay, I didn't mean that, my lad. I mean, you see, we are dealing with +a lunatic." + +"Captain!" cried Rodd indignantly. + +"Ay, but we are, and there's no knowing what sort of games fellows like +that will be up to. I mean to give the mate strict orders to load all +three guns, and if he sees the Count coming off again with his two boats +full of men to take possession while he's got us tight, to sink them +without mercy. Ah, here's the stooard, welcome, as you might say, as +the flowers in spring. Come along, my lad, and let's lay in stores." + +In spite of his words and deliberate way of proceeding, Captain Chubb +had made his arrangements so that within half-an-hour of going down to +breakfast he had the schooner's boat lowered down with Joe Cross, five +men, and the carpenter, who had already handed into the boat what he +called his bag of tricks, the said tricks being composed of an adze, +saws, chisels, augers, and nails, and very shortly afterwards the oars +were dipping, and with Uncle Paul and Rodd in the stern-sheets they were +gliding over the glittering sea and rapidly shortening the distance +between them and the beautiful brig, which won a string of encomiums +from the skipper as they drew near. + +"Yes, she is a beauty," he said. "It would be a pity to let her go +down. Look at her lines, and the way she's rigged. If I wanted to sail +a brig I wouldn't wish for a better; but then, you see, I don't. She's +a bit low in the water, though, and no mistake. Well, we shall see; we +shall see." + +The Count and his son were eagerly awaiting their coming, and welcomed +them warmly as they mounted the side, while, casting off his show of +indifference, the skipper cast an admiring glance round the deck of the +brig, and then gruffly exclaimed-- + +"Now then, sir, I want your bo'sun. But look here, can he parley +English?" + +"No," said the Count, "but my son and I will interpret everything you +wish to hear." + +"I don't know as I want to hear anything, sir," growled the skipper. "I +want to see for myself, and after that mebbe I shall want to give a few +orders, which I will ask you to have carried out." + +"Yes; everything you wish shall be done directly." + +"Umph!" grunted the skipper, looking round. "Pump rigged, and two men +trying to keep the water under. Ought to be four." + +"Yes, of course," cried the Count, and he turned to give an order; but +Captain Chubb clapped his hand upon his arm. + +"Hold hard," he said. "They'll do for a bit. Now then, I want to go +below and sound the well." + +The Count and his son led the way below, the French crew standing aloof +and displaying the discipline of a man-of-war, no man leaving his place +while the skipper made all the investigations he required, and then came +up on deck with his mahogany face more deeply lined with wrinkles than +before. + +"Well, captain," said Uncle Paul, while Rodd, who had kept close to his +young friend of the Dartmoor stream, eagerly listened for what their +expert had to say. + +"Well, sir," he said, at last, as he took out a little seal-skin bag and +deliberately helped himself to a little ready-cut scrap of pigtail +tobacco, "your craft's in a bad way, and if something isn't done pretty +smart she'll be down at the bottom before long." + +"Yes, yes," cried the Count impatiently, "but we have tried everything, +and it is impossible to get at the leak." + +"Hah! Tried everything, have you, sir?" + +"Yes, yes," cried the Count. "Some of my brave fellows have been +half-drowned in diving, trying to plug from inside, using yards to force +bags of oakum into the holes." + +"Yes," said the skipper. "The ball went right through, I suppose?" + +"Yes, yes," cried the Count, and Rodd noted that he was having hard work +to master his impatience and annoyance at the skipper's annoyingly +deliberate treatment of their urgent needs. + +"So I suppose," said the skipper coolly, "but mebbe you haven't done +quite all; leastwise I should like to try my little plan, and if it +don't answer, why, you won't be any worse off than you are now; and when +I give it up as a bad job, why, you will have to take to your boats and +we shall have to find room for you aboard the schooner. Now then, +please, you will just order two more men at that pump, and four more +ready to take their places so as to keep on pumping hard." + +"Yes, yes," cried the Count eagerly. "What next?" + +"Order up what spare sails you've got from the store-room, and a few +coils of new line." + +The Count gave his orders quickly, and his men went off to carry them +out. + +"Good," said the skipper coolly. "That's smart." + +"What next?" cried the Count. + +"Well, sir, as quickly as I can, I want to do something to lighten the +ship." + +"No; I must protest!" cried the Count excitedly. "You are going to +throw the guns overboard?" + +"Humph!" grunted the captain. "Who said so? I didn't. Nay, that'd be +a pity. I wouldn't do that till the very last." + +"Ah!" sighed the Count, as if deeply relieved. + +"Well, the next thing is, sir, just you leave me and my men alone and +let yours look on till I want their help." + +The Count was silent, and all looked on whilst in obedience to the +skipper's orders the English sailors, led by the carpenter, set busily +to work, seized upon the new spare sails that were brought up on deck, +and cast loose the coils of fresh hemp line that were placed ready. +Then with the skipper putting in a word here and there, resulting in the +lines being attached to the corners of the largest square-sail, these +latter were seized by a couple of the men, who dragged the sail forward +as the brig glided very gently along, for it was nearly calm, and then +passing the new sail deftly beneath the bowsprit, two of the men +climbing out and seeming to cling with their feet to the bobstay until +little by little they had got the edge right beneath the stay. Then +while their mates at the corners helped at the lines, they passed down +the sail right into the sea till they had lowered it to its full extent +and they could do no more, save once or twice when they hung down from +the stay and gave the canvas, which was slowly growing saturated, a +thrust or two with the foot where it seemed disposed to hitch against +the brig's keel. + +And now the skipper took his post upon the bowsprit and gave his orders +by word or sign to the men who governed the movement of the great square +of canvas by means of the lines attached to the corners, the two at the +fore corners of the sail getting outside the bulwarks, barefooted, to +walk along the streak, and hauling just as much as was necessary to drag +the sail right beneath the keel, their two messmates preparing to +follow, and under the captain's guidance keeping all square and exact in +the effort to get the keel to act as the dividing line to mark the +oblong into two exact portions. + +It was very slow work, for the canvas was stiff and moved unwillingly +downward beneath the keel; but after a time it began to yield to the +steady drag of the ropes upon the two fore corners, and, once started, +progress began to be faster. For, so to speak, the brig began to help, +sailing as it were gently more and more over the canvas, till at the end +of about half-an-hour it was in the position at which the skipper had +aimed, having while below in the hold pretty well marked down the +position of the two holes made by the shot from the fort. These were +about amidships, some few feet, as far as he could make out, on either +side of the keel, one naturally being much higher than the other in the +diagonal course taken by the heavy ball. + +At last he called to his men to halt, and took off his cap, to stand +thinking, the position now being that the sail was drawn right under the +brig, and the sailors at the four corners were holding on tight to +prevent the vessel from sailing clear. + +So far not a word had been uttered by the Frenchmen, all of whom had +stood clear or mounted the rigging or deck-house, so as to give the +Englishmen ample room; but now in the silence Rodd advanced to the +skipper eagerly, to say-- + +"Are you sure you have got the canvas well over the holes?" + +Captain Chubb made no reply, but stood with his cap in his left hand +gazing aft, and then he moved his right arm two or three times, as if +forming an imaginary line through the brig's hull. + +"Did you hear me, captain?" said Rodd eagerly. "Are you sure you have +got the sail over the holes?" + +"No," granted the skipper. "Are you?" + +"No; but I thought--" + +"Yes, my lad; so did I. You thought we ought to get the sail in the +right place." + +"Yes," said Rodd. + +"Well, then, now, my lad, I should be much obliged to you if you'd tell +me which is exactly the right place." + +Rodd looked at him in despair. + +"Thank you, my lad," said the skipper dryly. "I am much obliged. But +all right, Mr Rodd; you can't tell, and I can't tell. We know that the +ball that came from the fort must have gone downwards a bit, so that it +went out from lower than where it went in; but there's no knowing +whether she was hit from starboard or from larboard, and that's where +I'm bothered. But never say die. I think we will make this bit of +canvas fast now, for I'm pretty sure of one thing; it will be a plaister +for one hole if it isn't for the other." + +"But look here, captain," cried Rodd. + +"What now?" + +"Won't the water run under the canvas just the same as it did before?" + +"No, my lad, it won't; and I'll tell you the reason why when we have +done. Of course you know I am not going to stop all the water from +coming in below, but if I can get it checked a bit so that they can keep +it down easy with one man at the pump instead of two, she won't go to +the bottom just yet, and they will have time enough to get into port to +set the carpenter at work." + +"Then you won't let our carpenter try to stop the holes?" + +"No, my lad. You see, he never learned to be a fish, so that he could +work under water; and though he's a bit of a crab in his way, I don't +think he could manage it for all that. Now I'm ready to go on. Come, +my lads, put your backs into it and haul them sheets tight. Here, +master, let two of your men go to each corner and help my lads. All +together as hard as they can!" shouted the skipper, and the Count +quickly translated his order. + +"That's right! Haul away, my lads!" shouted the skipper. "That new +canvas won't give. Harder! Harder! Now then, one more--all you +know!--Make fast!" + +"Excellent! Superb!" cried the Count, as the men ceased from making +fast the ropes, which were brought over the bulwarks and passed round +the belaying pins. "Do you think that will stop the leak?" + +"Maybe yes, sir; maybe no. If it don't do it we will put another +plaister on, and another, and another. You have got plenty of spare +sails and rope, and when we have used all yours I dare say we can find +some more in the schooner. Now then, set your men going at that pump, +and rig up another as quick as you can." + +One pump began to clank heavily at once, and a short time after another +was at work, and the clear bright water began to sparkle out of the +scuppers, while, moved as it were by the same spirit, the French crew +burst into a shrill involuntary cheer. + +"How can I ever thank you, captain?" cried the Count, while his son +snatched at Rodd's hand. + +"Ah, I haven't done yet, sir," said the skipper coolly. "This is only a +try." + +"Oh, it's grand," cried the French lad, clinging to Rodd's arm. "You +have saved our ship." + +"Don't you holloa till you are out of the wood, young fellow," said the +skipper, as he heard the words. "Now, Mr Rodd, sir, what was it you +wanted to know?" + +"Why the water will not still rim in underneath the canvas." + +"Only because of this, my lad. Aren't they pumping the water out now as +fast as ever they can?" + +"Yes," cried Rodd; "but more will run in." + +"Yes, my lad, and as it runs in won't the weight of the water outside +push the canvas closer and closer in round the leak?" + +"Yes, of course," cried Rodd. "I didn't think of that. And as there +gets less inside it will seem to suck the canvas closer to." + +"Quite right, my lad. That's about the way it works; and now we have +got to wait for about an hour before we can know whether we have got +both holes covered, or only one." + +"Wait for an hour?" cried Rodd. + +"Well, perhaps, before we are sure; but I dare say I shall be going down +and sounding the well a time or two before that." + +But long before the hour had elapsed the skipper found that though the +water in the brig had subsided to a certain extent, one of the holes +must be still uncovered, and he began at once to repeat his proceedings, +coming to the conclusion that one of the bullet-holes was beyond the +reach of the canvas. This time, after all was drawn tight, +half-an-hour's pumping proved that his surmises were correct, and the +skipper smiled with satisfaction as the Count and his men cheered them +in delight on finding after a good deal of pumping that there was a very +perceptible diminution of the water in the hold. + +"It is superb, and so simple," cried the Count to Uncle Paul; "but I +feel humbled, sir. Why could not our French sailors have been able to +do this?" + +"Well," said Uncle Paul good-humouredly, "the only reason I can give is +that they were not English." + +"That's it, sir," said the skipper. "You have hit the right nail on the +head. But look here, Mr Count--I don't know your name." + +"Des Saix," said the Count, smiling. + +"Look here, sir; this is nothing to make a fuss about. It will keep you +afloat while the weather's fine, but just come a rough time, those sails +will be ripped off as easily as pocket-handkerchiefs. Besides, they +will hinder your sailing no end." + +"Ah, that is bad," said the Count, changing countenance. + +"Oh no, not it. There's worse disasters than that at sea." + +"But will it not be possible for the carpenters to stop the leaks?" + +"No, sir; not unless you do what I say." + +"Ah! What is that?" + +"Run your craft up one of the rivers to where you can careen on the mad, +and then a few hours between tides will be enough to put everything +straight." + +"Is there no other way?" asked the Count. + +"Only downwards, sir," cried the skipper; and the French lad glanced +questioningly at Rodd, who shook his head. + +"No," said the boy, almost in a whisper. "I don't think there is any +other way. He is quite right." + +After another hour's pumping, the skipper gave out his intention of +going back to the schooner; but the Count would not hear of it. He +begged and implored Uncle Paul to give him their company at the +breakfast he was having prepared, and after a little hesitation the +doctor gave way, and suggested to the skipper that they should leave +their departure till late in the afternoon, when a far better opinion +could be given of the state of the brig. + +"What do you say, squire?" said the skipper, looking at Rodd. + +"Oh yes, let's stay!" And his impulsive young French friend grasped him +by the wrist. + +"Very well, gentlemen, I have only one thing to say, for I don't suppose +the schooner will sail away and leave us behind. Let them call it +dinner, and I'll stop. I aren't been in the habit of eating my +breakfast at two o'clock in the day." + + + +CHAPTER TWENTY NINE. + +THE COUNT CAN'T FIND WORDS. + +That afternoon, after what had proved to be a very friendly, pleasant +breakfast, through which nothing could have been more courteous and +hospitable than the conduct of the Count and his son towards those with +whom they had become so strangely intimate, the skipper hurried the end +of the meal by suggesting that he should once more sound the well. + +They went on deck at once, to find both pumps were being kept +energetically going, the half-dozen men from the schooner taking their +turns in the heartiest way, a general fraternisation having taken place, +while on seeing the result of the skipper's examination, the delight of +the Count and his son seemed unbounded. + +"There you are, then, sir," said the skipper, in answer to a look from +the doctor, "and now we will leave you to it." + +"And I suppose," said Uncle Paul, "that you will have no hesitation, +sir, in following Captain Chubb's advice?" + +"And making for the mouth of some river," said the Count, glancing at +his son, "to get the brig ashore, so as to repair her?" + +"Exactly," said Uncle Paul. "You must see that there is nothing else +that you can do." + +"Nothing else that I can do," said the Count slowly, and Rodd gave him a +wondering glance, for the skipper's remarks about the brig's owner being +out of his mind came to his memory. "You intend to cruise about here, +then, Dr Robson?" + +"Here or anywhere," was the reply. "Probably here until I seem to have +exhausted the natural history specimens that I can collect." + +"Yes," said the Count, gazing fixedly at his son, "until you have +exhausted the natural history specimens that you can collect." + +He spoke in a curious dreamy way as if he were thinking hard, while Rodd +coloured a little as he saw that the young Frenchman was gazing at him +fixedly, for once more he could not help thinking of the skipper's +words. + +"Do you know of a place that would be likely, doctor?" said the Count. +"I mean a river that we could sail up into shallow water, if we were so +fortunate as to reach one without sinking first." + +"Not I," said the doctor, "but my captain here has cruised along this +coast in by-gone days, and he tells me that it would be easy enough to +find inlet after inlet, and deltas with streams, running up through the +muddy mangrove swamps." + +"But then we might never reach the shore," said the Count slowly--"not +with the brig--in spite of your kindly, I may say brotherly aid." + +Rodd felt that the Count's son was still gazing at him searchingly, but +he did not turn his head, for the doctor began speaking at once. + +"Really, my dear sir," he said almost curtly, "national dislike seems to +exist to a great extent amongst your countrymen. Do you really think we +English should be such barbarians as to sail away and leave a crippled +ship to its fate?" + +"No, no, no, doctor!" cried the Count warmly. "But how could I be so +grasping as to ask you, full of your scientific pursuits as you are, to +stand by us till we can reach the shore in safety?" + +"You would not ask it, sir," said the doctor warmly. "There would be no +need. Of course my schooner will stand by you, ready to give you help +until your brig is once more fit for sea." + +"Forgive me, doctor!" cried the Count eagerly. + +"There is nothing to forgive, sir," replied the doctor, "only I think I +may say that saving in times of war there is no such thing as +nationality amongst those who go to sea. My experience is that they are +always brethren in times of distress." + +The Count held out his hand, which was warmly grasped, while the young +French ex-prisoner looked at Rodd with eyes that seemed to speak +volumes. + +At this moment the skipper gave a grunt of satisfaction and broke in. + +"There's plenty of choice, gentlemen," he said. "I'd venture to say I +could find you the mouths of a dozen sluggish rivers up which you could +go with the tide as far as you liked, and then moor our vessels to the +forest trees, easily finding places close in shore where the tide as it +went out would leave the brig here softly in the mud ready for careening +over in a cradle where she wouldn't strain or open a single seam; and +the doctor here being willing, I'll promise to take the job in hand and +make the brig's bottom as sound as ever it was, even if we have to strip +off a little copper from along the top streak, where it isn't so much +wanted, so as to put new plates where the damaged ones have been." + +"I shall be only too glad, Count," said the doctor; "and now I think we +will get back to the schooner, and Captain Chubb here will shape his +course somewhere to the south-east, till within the next few days we +near the coast, when he will select a suitable place for his purpose." + +"I cannot find words," said the Count, in a husky voice. + +"Don't try," said the doctor. + +"No, but--er,"--continued the Count, in rather a hesitating tone, "you +do mean to keep cruising about here--and farther south or west?" + +"Don't you give that another thought," said the doctor frankly. "The +schooner is my own, and almost any portion of the ocean or the shore +offers attractions to me and my nephew. We can find interest anywhere. +I only hope that you will not find our society dull." + +The Count made a gesture, and then, after a word or two to the skipper, +the latter gave his men orders, and they took their places in the boat. + +It was then that the Count's son, who had been very silent for some +time, looking at Rodd as if longing to speak, suddenly turned and +whispered something to his father, who replied with a comprehensive +gesture, and the lad immediately approached the doctor. + +"It will be hours yet, sir, before it is dark, and I have so much I +should like to say to your nephew. Can he not stay till evening, and +then our boat shall bring him to your vessel? You will not," he +continued playfully, turning to Rodd, "be afraid of going down?" + +"My nephew is at liberty to do as he pleases," replied the doctor +frankly. "What do you say, Rodd?" + +"Oh, I want to stay, uncle. I should like to hear all about the +escape." + +A few minutes later the two lads were leaning together over the rail +watching the departing boat, and chatting together as if they were old +schoolfellows who had met again after a long separation, Rodd delighted +with his companion, and disposed to feel disappointed in himself lest +the refined, polished young officer--one, evidently, of the _haute +noblesse_--should look down upon him as a rough, rather boorish young +Englishman. + +Somehow that evening, with its rapid change from glowing sunset light to +purple violet darkness, seemed wonderfully quick in coming, and as the +brig's well-manned boat grazed against the schooner's stern and Rodd +turned in climbing up the side to hang by his left hand and extend his +right, the feeling of inferiority melted away in the young Frenchman's +warm grasp, as the latter said-- + +"I suppose we shall be sailing very slowly till we reach the shore, and +I want to see more of you. I shall come and fetch you first thing in +the morning. Don't say anything; you must come. _Au revoir_!" + +The brig's boat pushed off as soon as Rodd had swung himself on deck, +and as it glided away into the soft darkness with the regularly handled +oars dipping up from the surface of the sea what seemed to be like so +much lambent liquid gold, suggesting to Rodd as he gazed after his new +friend that the stars might have been melting all day in the torrid sun, +and that this was their pale golden light floating upon the sea, a hand +was laid upon his shoulder. + + + +CHAPTER THIRTY. + +THE DOCTOR PAINTS PICTURES. + +"Back again, then, Rodd!" + +"Oh yes, uncle. Did you think me long?" + +"So long, my boy, that I was thinking of sending the boat to fetch you, +for fear you should be converted into a Frenchman. Hang them all! How +I do hate them and their nasty, smooth, polished ways!" + +"Oh, uncle, you don't!" cried the boy indignantly. "I do, sir. How +dare you contradict me! And I won't have you getting too fond of that +French boy. He and his father set me thinking about old Bony, and as +soon as I begin thinking about Bony I have a nasty taste in my mouth.-- +Well, how did you get on?" + +"I had a most delightful afternoon, uncle. Young Morny--let's see, he's +Viscount Morny--" + +"Viscount grandmother!" snapped out the doctor. "Anybody can be a +viscount in France if he's got an income of a few hundred francs--francs +in France of common silver. They rank with golden guineas in your grand +old home." + +"Oh, well, I don't know, uncle I only know that he's the nicest fellow I +ever met." + +"Gush!" cried the doctor. "I won't have it, Rodd. I won't have you +making too much of these French people. I don't like them." + +"But you don't know them, uncle. Both the Count and his son are the +most gentlemanly men I ever met." + +"The most gentlemanly men you ever met!" cried Uncle Paul mockingly. +"Nice puppy you are to set yourself up for a judge! Very gentlemanly, +to come in the dark with two boat-loads of savage-looking buccaneers to +seize our schooner! And they would, too, if it hadn't been for Captain +Chubb's courage." + +"Oh, uncle, don't be unreasonable. The poor fellows were desperate. +Suppose you had been in such a position as they were." + +"I am not going to suppose anything of the sort, sir," cried the doctor +indignantly; "and look here, Rodney, I will not have you setting up your +feathers like the miserable young cockerel you are, and beginning to +crow at me, just as if you were full grown. It's growing unbearable, +Rodney, and I won't have it, sir. I am very much displeased with you, +and you had better be off to your bunk at once before we come to an open +quarrel. It is too much, sir, and if your poor mother were alive and +could hear you talking like this she'd--she'd--she'd--there, I don't +know what she wouldn't say." + +"I do," said the boy. + +"What would she say, sir?" snapped out the doctor. + +Rodd stood silent in the darkness for a few moments as he stole his hand +under the irate doctor's arm. + +"She'd say that dear Uncle Paul had been thinking about old Bony, and +that it had made him very cross with me about nothing at all." + +Uncle Paul made a sound like the beginning of a speech that would not +come, and the silence seemed deeper than ever, nothing being heard but +the soft lapping of the water under the vessel's counter, as she glided +slowly through the sea. + +But Rodd felt the warm arm under which his hand nestled press it closer +and closer to the old man's side, and that he was urged along the deck +to keep pace with his elder slowly up and down, up and down, from stem +to stern, for some minutes before that speech came--one which was quite +different from that which Rodd fully expected to hear, for it was in +Uncle Paul's natural tones once more, as he said very thoughtfully and +in quite a confidential manner-- + +"Yes, very gentlemanly, Pickle, my boy; quite the nobleman, I might say, +and I am not at all surprised that you helped that poor lad to escape. +A little effeminate, but certainly a very nice lad. But I have been +thinking about them ever since I came on board this afternoon, and I +can't quite make out that Count. What's he doing here, my boy? On some +mission, and connected with some jealousy and a stop being put to his +cruise. I am not quite sure, Pickle." + +"Rodney, uncle," said the boy mischievously. + +"Pickle, you dog! Be quiet. I am talking sense. But I think I have +worked it out. He betrayed himself. He's a naturalist, boy. He +betrayed it in his looks and words as soon as he learned what I was +about. Didn't you notice how eager he was to know about our pursuits?" + +"Yes, uncle; I noticed that directly." + +"Ah, I thought so. A naturalist--a born naturalist, Pickle, and in +spite of his being a Frenchman I shall begin to feel a brotherly respect +for a follower of the only pursuit worthy of a gentleman. Well, we had +a very short sleep last night, so we have got a long one due to our +credit to-night, and on the strength of that Captain Chubb has arranged +to have supper quite early. This has been a queer day, Pickle, a very +queer day, and I am not at all displeased, for I am beginning to think +that we have got a very good time before us." + +"What time, uncle?" + +"Ashore, my boy. What do you say to having a couple of the sailors with +guns to keep us company while the rest are new-bottoming that brig? +Walks in the primeval forest, Rodd, wonderful botanical rambles, +shooting birds of glorious plumage, most likely coming across the great +man-ape, the chimpanzee. What do you say to that, my boy? Won't that +be a grand change from fishing and dredging and bottling specimens?" + +"Uncle Paul, don't!" cried the boy. + +"Don't? What do you mean, sir?" + +"You were talking just now of our having a good long sleep to-night to +make up for all we lost since we went to bed last." + +"Well, sir, what of that?" + +"How's a fellow to sleep, uncle, with such things as that to think of? +Why, I shan't get a wink for thinking of the big chimpanzees; and as for +eating any supper now, why, my appetite has completely gone." + +"Stuff!" cried Uncle Paul, pressing the lad's arm to his side. "Rodd, +my boy, we must cork a bottle or two and throw them overboard to-morrow, +and then have a little practice with bullets in our guns. We may come +across dangerous beasts there, leopards and the like, while that there +are great man-apes in those forests of the West Coast there is not a +doubt." + +"Well, I think I could shoot at one of those great spotted cats, uncle, +all tooth and claw; but wouldn't it be rather queer to shoot one of +those big monkeys which look so much like human beings? I mean those +big ones with ears like ours, and no tails." + +"Humph! Ha! Well, I--Yes, all right, captain! We are coming down." + + + +CHAPTER THIRTY ONE. + +GREAT FRIENDS. + +The days that followed the attempt to salve the brig after so strange an +introduction to her commander and his son, fell calm all through the hot +sunny time, and only that a pleasant cool breeze ushered in the evening +and continued till the sun rose again, very little progress would have +been made by the schooner and its consort, sailing east and south. + +But nobody seemed troubled. When the French and English sailors were +together they were the best of friends; while long conversations and +arguments often took place between the doctor and his new friend, the +skipper generally letting them have the cabin to themselves. + +Sometimes they drifted into political questions and came very near to +losing their tempers; but each mastered and kept down his opinions, for +a genuine feeling of liking had arisen between them, and the Count +seemed never weary of listening to Uncle Paul's disquisitions upon the +marvels of natural history, nor of studying with him the wonders of +creation which he had collected and had to show. Then day by day the +brig, which was freed every day from as much water as she had gained +during the night, sailed steadily on in the schooner's wake in full +charge of her stern fierce-looking French mate--one of the most silent +of men. + +And while the Count was mostly with the doctor, literally taking lessons +in pelagic lore, the two lads had become inseparable. + +"Look here," said Rodd, almost hotly, one day, "if ever you say a word +again about my helping you to escape at Dartmoor, you and I are going to +leave off being friends." + +Morny laughed, a pleasant, almost girlish smile lighting up his well-cut +Gallic features. + +"Why, Rodd," he cried, "isn't that rather hard? I used to think that +was the most horrible time in my life, but I feel now that one part of +it was the most delightful." + +"There you go again," cried Rodd. "You are beginning." + +"No, no, I wasn't. But I can't forget being a prisoner in England, and +about all that I went through there with my father when he was bad so +long with his wound." + +"Bad so long with his wound?" said Rodd eagerly. "Ah! You may talk +about that. Yes, I should like to hear. Tell me all about your being +taken prisoners, and how it happened." + +"For you never to be friends with me any more?" said the French lad +maliciously. + +"No, no, no. But I hate for you to be what you call grateful. You are +quite a good sort of chap, and you speak our language so well that I +forget you are not English sometimes, till you begin to be grateful to +me for saving you, and then I feel that you are French. There, now you +may tell me all about it--I mean about before you met me fishing." + +The two lads were under the awning upon this particular day just +amidships. It was a hot and breathless time, but both were pretty well +inured to the weather, and were so interested in the subjects supplied +to them by Nature in the way of floating wonders that they never +troubled themselves about the heat. + +Upon this occasion they were lying together upon the deck, suffering to +a certain extent from lassitude consequent upon the heat. There was a +man at the wheel, and Joe Cross was seated upon the main cross-trees +with a spy-glass across his legs, ready to raise it from time to time +and direct it eastward to try and pierce the faint silvery haze that lay +low upon the horizon. The boys had grown very silent and thoughtful, +Moray trying to recall memories of the past so that he might respond to +his English friend's demand upon him that he should relate something of +his old experiences in connection with the war and his being brought +over to England, and so deep in thought that he paid no heed to his +companion. Meantime, Rodd, without any desire to play the eavesdropper, +lay listening to the scraps of conversation which came up through the +cabin skylight, growing a little louder than usual, for, as was +occasionally the case, an argument was afloat respecting the late war, +the doctor according to his wont growing wroth upon an allusion being +made by his guest to the ex-Emperor Napoleon; and there were evidently +threatenings of a storm, which was, however, suppressed by the grave +dignity of the Count and a feeling of annoyance which attacked Uncle +Paul upon realising that he had ventured upon dangerous ground. + +"Oh, Uncle Paul," said Rodd to himself, and he lay and laughed softly, +making Morny start. + +"Was I talking aloud?" said the French lad, flushing. + +"You? No! Didn't you hear? It was Uncle Paul. Your father was +talking about Napoleon, and directly his name is mentioned uncle begins +to boil over." + +"Ah, yes, so you have told me, and I gathered something of the kind. My +father should not have spoken about the Emperor, though he venerates his +name." + +"Do you?" said Rodd. + +"I?" replied Morny proudly. "Of course. He is the greatest man who +ever lived." + +"I say; I'm not Uncle Paul." + +"Of course not. But why do you say that?" + +"Because it seems as if you were trying to lead me on, like your father +did with uncle." + +"Ah, no, no, don't think that. Better to let such things rest." + +"Yes," said Rodd. "I didn't hear much of what they were saying, only +they talked loudly sometimes about the way the French and English hate +one another. It seems so stupid. Why should they? I don't hate you; +and I suppose you don't hate me." + +"Of course not! You have given me plenty of cause." + +"Whoa!" shouted Rodd. "You are getting on dangerous ground again. Now, +look here; why should the French hate the English?" + +"Because the English never did us anything but harm." + +"Nonsense!" said Rodd coolly. "Now, look here, suppose you and I had a +good fight, and I got the best of it--gave you an unlucky crack on the +bridge of your nose, and made both your eyes swell up so that you +couldn't see." + +"Well, it would be very brutal," said Morny. "Gentlemen should fight +with the small sword." + +"Oh, I like that!" said Rodd merrily. "And then one of them sticks it +in the other's corpus and makes him bleed, if he does nothing worse. +Why, people have been killed." + +"Yes, in the cause of honour," said Morny, slowly and thoughtfully. + +"But that wouldn't have happened if they had been fighting with their +fists." + +"It's of no use to argue a matter like this with an Englishman," said +Morny. "He cannot see such things with the eyes of a Frenchman." + +"And a jolly good job too," said Rodd. "But we are running away from +what we have been talking about. I was saying, suppose you and I were +fighting and I hit you on the bridge of the nose and made your eyes +swell up so that you couldn't see; that would be no reason why you +should always hate me afterwards. Wouldn't it be much better if the one +who was beaten owned it and shook hands so as to be good friends again?" + +"Hah!" said Morny, giving vent to a long deep sigh. + +"Uncle Paul always says that there is so much good to do in the world +that there is no room for animosity or hatred, especially as life is so +very short. Here, I don't see that we English have done anything worse +to you French than conquering you now and then." + +"What!" cried Morny. "What have you to say to the way in which you +treated your prisoners? You were never taken captive with your father-- +I mean your uncle, and shut up in a great cheerless building right out +upon a cold, bleak, dreary moor." + +"No," said Rodd gravely. + +"My father and I were, after a sea-fight in which one of your great +bullying ships battered our little sloop of war almost to pieces and +took us into Plymouth, not conquered, for our brave fellows fought till +nearly all were killed or wounded." + +"I say," cried Rodd earnestly, "I didn't know about this! Were you +wounded?" + +For answer Morny with flashing eyes literally snatched up his +shirt-sleeve, baring his thin white left arm and displaying in the +fleshy part a curious puckering and discoloration, evidently the scar of +a bad wound. + +"Poor old chap!" said Rodd softly. "I say, how was that done?" + +"Grape-shot," replied Morny, drawing himself up proudly and deliberately +beginning to draw down and button his sleeve. + +"Did it hurt much?" + +"Yes," said Morny rather contemptuously. "My father was wounded too, so +that he had to be carried below, or else we should never have struck, +but he would have gone down as a brave captain should with colours +flying, fighting for the Emperor to the very last." + +"Then I am precious glad that the Count was taken below," said Rodd. + +"Why?" snapped out the French lad fiercely. + +"Because of course you would have sunk with him, for you couldn't have +swum for your life with a wounded arm." + +"No; but shouldn't I have had my name written in history?" + +"Perhaps. But you and I would never have met and become such good +friends; for you know we are precious good friends when we can agree." + +Morny laughed. + +"Yes," he said pleasantly, "when we can agree. But do you think it was +good treatment to keep us shut up there as prisoners on that dreary +moor?" + +"Let's see," said Rodd; "Dartmoor--all amongst the streams and tors, as +they call them?" + +"Yes; a great granite desert." + +"Oh, but it was very jolly there," said Rodd. + +"I don't know what you mean by jolly," said Morny contemptuously. + +"Why, they didn't keep you shut up. They let you roam about as you +liked, didn't they, as long as you didn't try to escape?" + +"Well--yes; but it was a long time before I went out at all," replied +Morny sadly. "For months I never left my father's side, and for a long +time I never expected that he'd recover; and as I used to sit there by +his bedside, watching, I began to get to hate the English more and more, +and long to get away so as to begin righting for my country again. But +of course I couldn't leave my wounded father's side." + +"No," said Rodd slowly and in a low voice, as if repeating the words to +himself. "Of course you couldn't leave your father's side." + +"No," repeated Morny softly, "I couldn't leave my father's side. But +after a time he made me go. He said my wound would never heal--for the +surgeon had told him so--if he kept me shut up day after day, and that I +must go out with the other prisoners and roam about on the moor; but I +said I wouldn't leave him, and I didn't till he told me one day that I +was growing white and thin and weak, and that he could see how I was +suffering from the pain in my wound." + +"Ah, yes," said Rodd, in a low tone full of earnestness. "It must have +given you terrible pain." + +"And at last he said," continued Morny, "that if he saw me getting well +it would be the best cure for his injuries, but that if I were obstinate +and refused to obey him now that he was lying there weak and helpless, +it would surely send him to his grave." + +"And then of course you went?" replied Rodd excitedly. + +"Yes, I went then," replied Morny, "for at last I had begun to see that +he was right. And then every morning after we had been all mustered, as +you call it, and were free to go outside the gates, I went out with a +lot more right on to the wild desert. But I wanted to be alone, and as +soon as I could I wandered away up amongst the great stones, and sat +down to think and rage against myself for feeling so happy when I wanted +to be miserable and in despair about our fate. For it was as if +something within me was mocking at my sufferings and trying to make me +laugh and feel bright and joyous, for--Oh, how well I can remember it +all up there! The sun was shining brightly, and the great block of +stone upon which I sat down felt hot and so different to the cold +cheerless prison inside. Every here and there amongst the stones there +was the beautiful soft green grass, and little low shrubs were in full +blossom, some a of rich purple, and some of the brightest gold, while in +two or three places far up in the blue sky the _alouettes_ were singing +like they do in France; and every puff of soft warm wind that floated by +was scented with the sweet fragrance of that little herb--I forget its +name--that which the bees buzz about." + +"Wild thyme?" said Rodd quickly. + +"Ah, yes; wild thyme. And there for a long time I sat nursing my left +arm, fighting against what seemed to be a feeling of happiness, and +trying to think of all the evil that the English had done us, and what I +would do as soon as I got free. But it was too much for me. I couldn't +do it, and what I had looked upon from the prison windows from between +the bars would not seem to be the same wild stony desert, but beautiful +and full of hope and joy." + +"Ah!" cried Rodd. "That's because you were getting better. I know what +you felt. I was like that once after a bad fever, and when I was taken +out one fine morning for the first time, though I was weak as a rat I +felt as if I must run and jump and shout all about nothing; but it was +because everything looked so beautiful, and I knew that I must be +getting well." + +The boys' eyes met for a few moments, and then Morny bowed his head +slowly and went on. + +"Yes," he said quietly, "I suppose it was a beautiful healthy place, and +it began to make me feel like that; and as I looked round--for I had +climbed very high--I could see right down into parts of a valley that +was all full of sunshine and flashing light, for there was a little +dancing stream running swiftly along, and as I looked down into it and +saw how it widened here and narrowed there as it flashed amongst the +great rocks of granite, it set me thinking about home, and instead of +going on planning how I would revenge myself upon the English, I began +to wonder whether there would be trout there too, and soon afterwards I +began to creep slowly down so as to see. And then I remember that I +burst out laughing at myself, for it seemed so droll. My legs would +keep on bending under me, and I had to sit down and rest every now and +then." + +"You were so weak," said Rodd earnestly. + +"Yes, that was it," cried Morny; "but I didn't understand at first, and +somehow I didn't seem to mind a bit, but sat down and rested time after +time, till at last I got right down to the edge of the little river, all +shallow and dotted with blocks of stone; and there at first were the +little trout darting about to hide themselves, scared away by my shadow +upon the water. But as I sat down to watch they soon came out again, +and began leaping at the little gnats that were flitting about the +surface. Then do you know how that made me feel?" + +"Well," said Rodd, "I know how it would make an English boy feel-- +myself, for instance." + +"How?" + +"As if he'd like to have my namesake with only one _d_ in his hand, and +begin whipping the stream." + +"Yes, that's how I felt," said Morny softly. + +"I know about those trout on Dartmoor," cried Rodd, "right up on the +moor. I know somebody who used to go and fish there, and he told me +that he could go and catch dozens and dozens and dozens of them whenever +he liked. But they were so very small." + +"Yes," said Morny, speaking dreamily now, with his eyes so lit up, that +as Rodd watched his thin delicate face, he thought how handsome and +well-bred he looked. + +"Too good-looking for a boy, but more fitted for a girl," he mused. + +"And did you go and fish?" he cried, as he suddenly caught Morny's eyes +gazing at him questioningly. + +"Oh yes. I went back to the prison and spoke to one of our guards--a +frowning, fierce-looking fellow--and I told him how ill my father was, +and that he never seemed as if he could eat the prison rations, as they +called them, and that I wanted to try and catch some of the little fish +on the moor and cook them, and try if I could tempt him with them." + +"And what did he say?" cried Rodd, for Morny had stopped. + +"He made my heart feel on fire at first, for he growled out `Bah! +Rubbish! There, go on in.' `Savage!' I said to myself. `Just like an +Englishman!'" + +"What a brute!" cried Rodd. "But I say, old chap, our fellows are not +all like that." + +"No," said Morny. "But I hadn't done. Next minute he shouted after me, +`Halt!' and when I stopped and looked round he called out, `Ahoy! Jim!' +and another of the guards with his piece over his shoulder marched up to +where we stood, and the man I had first spoken to turned to me and said, +`Here, you tell him what you said to me.'" + +"And did you?" cried Rodd. + +"I felt as if the words would choke me at first, but just then I seemed +to see the trout hot and brown upon a dish and my father, sick and pale, +looking at them longingly, and that made me speak to the other guard, +who was scowling at me. And as I spoke a grim smile came over his face, +and his eyes twinkled, and he showed his teeth. `All right, youngster,' +he said. `Got a rod?' I shook my head. `No line? No flies?' I shook +my head again and again. `All right, young 'un,' he said. `You come to +me two hours before sundown; I shall be on duty then. I'll set you up +with a bit of tackle. But I say, you Frenchies don't know how to throw +a fly!' `I used to,' I replied, `at home, in France.' `Lor', did you?' +he said. `Hear that, Billy? I never knew as a Frenchman knew how to +fish. But that's all right, youngster--only my ignorance. A +fisherman's a fisherman the wide world round.'" + +"Well?" said Rodd, for his companion had stopped. + +"Well?" said Morny. + +"Go on." + +"What about?" + +"Well, you are a chap! Don't you know I was always very fond of +fishing?" + +"I know you like fishing, for I saw you enjoying it that day when--" + +"Steady!" cried Rodd. + +"I've done," said Morny. + +"But I don't want you to have done." + +"Why, you forbade me to touch upon what you call dangerous ground." + +"Bah! That's another thing. I don't want you to be grateful. But of +course I like to hear about you going fishing. I could almost wish that +you and I could go and have a few hours together on Dartmoor now." + +"And we cannot," said Morny quietly. + +"No; but we might try for bonito or dolphins. But go on. I want you to +tell me about how you got on. Did you go to that prison guard two hours +before sundown?" + +"Oh yes. He was as friendly as ever he could be, just because he found +that I was fond of fishing, and lent me his rod and line and flies that +he made himself, and told me the best places to go to, and he was as +pleased as I was when I came back to the prison with a dozen and a half +of little trout. Oh, I remember so well almost every word he said." + +"Well, what did he say?" cried Rodd eagerly. + +"Oh, he was a good-humoured droll fellow, though he looked so gruff, for +when I showed him my fish he slapped me on the shoulder and said, `Well +done, young 'un! You are one of the right sort after all.' And then he +told me to take the fish into his quarters, and his missus, as he called +her, would cook them for me so that I could take them to my sick father; +and when I thanked him he said it was all right, and that he and his +`missus' had been talking together about how bad the French captain +looked, and that I had better get him a nice little dish like that as +often as I could." + +Morny stopped again, and Rodd gazed at him impatiently. + +"Here, I say," he cried, "what a tantalising sort of chap you are! Why, +I could tell a story better than you." + +"Why, I have told you the story," said Morny. + +"No, you haven't. You keep stopping short when you come to what +interests me most." + +"Nonsense! You don't want me to go on telling you about catching more +fish and getting them fried day after day, and about taking them up to +my father." + +"What do you know about it?" cried Rodd. "It's just what I do want you +to tell me. Did he like them and eat them, and did they do him good? +Those are the best bits." + +"You are a droll of boy," said Morny, laughing. + +"I'm a what?" cried Rodd. + +"Droll of boy--_drole de garcon. C'est juste, n'est-ce pas_?" + +"Oh, if you like," cried Rodd merrily; "but if you don't think those are +the best parts of the story, which are?" + +"Ah!" said Morny thoughtfully. "The part that I remember most is +feeling that somehow things are not always so black as they look, that +Dartmoor was not such a dreary desert, and that the fierce frowning +guards were not so hard and unpleasant as they seemed. There were times +after that when I was very happy there, for my father's wound began to +get better, and I found myself strong and well again. But after a time +there was a new governor there, who behaved very harshly to the +prisoners, and as we got well the great longing for freedom used to grow +within us, and some of the men tried to escape. This made the governor +more harsh and stern. We were kept more shut up--" + +"And I suppose that made you long all the more to get free?" + +"Of course," replied Morny; "and at last there came a time when we heard +a little news from across the sea--news which seemed to make my father +the Count half wild with longing, and one day he told me that he had had +a lot of napoleons sent to him to help him to escape, and that the first +fine day we were allowed out for exercise upon the moor we would make a +dash for liberty." + +"You should have done it when you were out fishing," said Rodd. + +"Oh no. The fishing had been stopped for a long time--ever since the +first attempts had been made to escape." + +"Oh, I see," said Rodd. + +"And at last the day came," continued Morny, "and we made our attempt, +but only to find that we were very closely guarded, and that soldiers +were on the look-out in all directions; and in the attempt my father and +I became separated, and I should have been taken if it had not been +that--" + +"Look here," cried Rodd, springing up, "there's Joe Cross signalling to +me from the maintop. He can see something. I say, that happened +luckily for you, young fellow, for you were just getting on to dangerous +ground." + + + +CHAPTER THIRTY TWO. + +LAND HO! + +"What is it, Joe?" cried Rodd. + +"Easy, sir!" said the man softly. "Not too loud," he continued, from +where he was seated upon the cross-trees. "I don't want to give the +skipper a false alarm, else he won't believe me next time." + +"What about?" + +"Easy, my lad! Just in a whisper like. I aren't sure, but to you I +says, Land ho!" + +"Whereabouts, Joe?" cried Rodd excitedly. + +"Ah!" cried Morny, springing up. "Land!" And he faced round to gaze +towards the brig that was sailing very slowly after them some three +hundred yards away--sailing, but doing little more than forge her way +through the water. + +"Nay, not that way, sir," said Joe softly, "but doo east. You can't see +anything from down there, Mr Rodd, sir. I can't even make certain with +the glass." + +"Hold hard, Joe! I am coming up," cried Rodd. "All right, sir; but you +will be disappointed when you do." + +"I won't be long, Morny," said Rodd eagerly. + +"No; be quick," whispered Morny excitedly. "I want for my father to +know. He is so anxious about the brig." + +Rodd gave him a quick jerk of the head as he went on climbing the +ratlines as quickly as he could, forgetting all about the heat and the +silvery glare of the piercing sunshine. + +He was not long mounting to the sailor's side, seating himself on the +opposite side of the mast. + +"Now then," he cried, as he shuffled into his place; "let me look." + +"All right, sir. Ketch hold," replied the sailor stolidly. "You'll do +it; your eyes are so much younger and sharper than mine." + +"None of your gammon, Joe!" cried the boy sharply, as he focussed the +glass to suit his eyes, while with one arm embracing the butt of the +main-topgallant-mast he held the tube steadily to his eye, asking for +guidance the while. + +"Now then," he said; "whereabouts?" + +"Right straight ahead, sir. You can't miss it if it's there, for it +stretches away as far as you like to left and right!" + +"Why, there's no land, Joe." + +"Not looking down low enough, sir, perhaps. It aren't right up in the +sky." + +"Well, who's looking up in the sky?" cried Rodd irritably.--"I am +looking right down to the horizon line." + +"Well, that's right, sir. Take a good long look. Now then, can't you +see it?" + +There was silence for a few moments, and Morny, who was gazing upwards, +seemed to be all eyes and ears. + +"Can't you see it, Master Rodd?" repeated Joe. + +"No." + +"Perhaps 'tarn't land, then, sir." + +"No. It was all your fancy. There's nothing to be seen." + +"Where are you looking, sir?" + +"At a little low bank of pale misty cloud. That's all, Joe. Your eyes +want a good rub." + +"Dessay they do, sir. They aren't much account," said the man; "but +that caps what I saw," and putting his hands to the sides of his mouth +he yelled out in stentorian tones, "Land ho!"--a signal that was +followed by the hurried shuffling sound of feet ascending to the deck. + +"Here, what are you doing?" cried Rodd angrily. "Spreading a false +alarm like that!" + +"Oh, it's right enough, sir." + +"But there's nothing but a cloud there, Joe." + +"Looks like it, sir, but land it is all the same." + +"Where away?" came in the skipper's hoarse voice. + +"Dead ahead, sir," replied the sailor, and Rodd steadied the glass +again, bringing it to bear upon what looked more than ever like the +faintest of faint hazes upon the surface of the distant sea. + +"Can you make it out, Rodd?" cried Uncle Paul, who had hurried on deck +with the Count. + +"Well, I can just see something, uncle, and I suppose it's land." + +"Oh, that's right enough, my lad," cried the captain. "Can't be +anything else." + +"Not clouds?" + +"Ah, I don't say that," cried the skipper. "You may see a bit of haze +too, but there's solid land beneath. There, sir," continued the +skipper, "that's what we are looking for. Now the next thing we want to +see is water." + +"Well, we can see that plainly enough, Joe," said Rodd, speaking with +his eyes still to the glass. + +"Ay, but he means dirty water, sir." + +"What do you want to see dirty water for?" + +"Muddy, then, sir, showing as there's a river coming out there. I say, +sir, wouldn't t'other young gent like to come up and have a squint?" + +"Oh, of course. I forgot. Below there! Morny! Come on up and have a +look." + +The lad sprang to the main shrouds and began to hurry up, while Joe +Cross, who had finished the task to achieve which he had been sent, +began to lower himself down, leaving space for the young Frenchman, to +whom the glass was handed in turn, ready for him to declare that he +could make out the distant land. + +"Ah," he panted, as he handed back the glass, "how I have longed to see +that! Now, Rodd, we shall soon get the brig careened over and the leaks +repaired, and then--" + +"Well," said Rodd, "what then?" + +"Be off to sea again," cried Morny excitedly. + +"Well, you seem in a precious hurry," grumbled Rodd. + +"Wouldn't you be if your schooner was like our brig?" + +"No. Uncle and I are reckoning upon making a lot of discoveries ashore. +If you are on a scientific expedition, wouldn't that do as well for +you?" + +"No," replied the French lad shortly. "We must follow out our +researches by sea." + +"Then what is it you are looking for? I thought you were going to tell +me the other day." + +"Yes, my father," cried Morny, answering a hail from below. "I am +coming down." + +When the two lads descended it was to find that the Count had been +speaking to the skipper, who had given orders for the schooner's boat to +be lowered so that the two visitors could return at once to the brig, +with the understanding that both vessels were to send up studding sails +and use every possible speed now to get within touch of the shore, +before making south and keeping a bright look-out for some estuary or +river mouth. + +"You will follow me, sir," said the skipper; "but do you know what this +coast line will be like?" + +"I cannot say I do," replied the Count. "Cliff and hill, with mountains +farther in?" + +"Nay, sir; all muddy shore, covered with dark green mangrove forest. I +don't suppose we shall be long before I send you up a signal; and then +we can sail right in. There will be nothing to mind in the way of +rocks, for where I lead it will be all mud." + +Very shortly afterwards the lads parted, and as Rodd stood looking after +the boat that was bearing their two visitors to the brig, Uncle Paul +came up close behind him. + +"Pity those two were born Frenchmen, Rodd, my boy," said the doctor, +"for there is something very gentlemanly about the Count, and I like +that lad Morny too. There is something about him, Rodney, that you +might very well copy." + +"Is there, uncle?" + +"Yes, sir, there is. Certainly. I am not your father, but I am your +uncle, and it gratifies me very much to see the polished, almost +reverent way in which that lad behaves towards the Count. It's polite, +and it's respectful, and it's--er--it's--er--" + +"Why, you wouldn't like it, uncle, if I were to behave to you just as he +does to the Count." + +"Well, not exactly, Rodney, but there's something very nice about it. +Great pity, though, that they are French, and so corroded, so crusted +over, as I may call it, with a sort of hero-worship for that tyrannical +usurper. There, I won't mention his name." + +"That's right, uncle; don't, please." + +"Why, sir?" + +"Because it always makes you so cross, uncle." + +"Now, Rodney, that's what I don't like. If I have an antipathy to a +scoundrel, and speak out firmly as an Englishman should, it is not for a +boy like you to say I am cross; and I am quite sure that young Morny +would have had too much common-sense to speak out like that to his +father. It is a great pity, though, that they are both, as I say, so +eaten up with that hero-worship, and I am very much afraid that I spoke +a little too plainly to the Count to-day. It was rather unfortunate +too. It was just when we had been having a very interesting +conversation upon the medusae, especially those of a phosphorescent +nature. By the way, has Morny said much to you about the object of +their research?" + +"No, uncle. He always seems disinclined to speak." + +"Humph! Yes, he does seem very reticent. His father as good as said, +as I think I told you, that this was a voyage of discovery, a search for +something he wanted to take back, and which was to make his country very +great. But he has never said what, and it would be so very +ungentlemanly to seem curious." + +"But you do feel curious to know, don't you, uncle?" + +"Well, I must confess, my boy, that I do--a little jealous, perhaps, of +another man's success, for I did learn as much as this, that he felt +pretty sure of being successful if he could get the brig sound again. +Well, I suppose we shall know some day." + +"I don't like to say any more to Morny, uncle. It would seem so small; +and besides, he never questions me anything about what we are doing-- +only seems very much interested." + +"You are quite right, Rodd. It would be mean and petty. Leave it to +them, and if they like to take us into their confidence, well and good. +If they do not, well, it is no business of ours." + +"Why, uncle," cried Rodd suddenly, and then he stopped. "It isn't +because--" + +Rodd stopped short again, looking straight away over the sea, as if in +deep thought. + +"Well, my boy? It isn't because what?" + +"Oh, I don't like to say, uncle. You would laugh at me." + +"How do you know that? Wait and see," cried Uncle Paul. "Now then, +what were you thinking?" + +"I was wondering whether they could be trying to discover that which we +found quite by accident." + +"That which we found quite by accident, Pickle?" + +"Yes, uncle, and that may be the reason why they don't like to talk +about it. You see, all ships' captains and people have been so laughed +at, and told that they are inventing fables, that they are very quiet +and like to keep things to themselves, just the same as Captain Chubb +was when we saw that thing. You see, uncle--" + +"Go on, Pickle! Go on!" cried Uncle Paul. + +"Oh, I haven't much more to say, uncle, only this--if ordinary captains +are so particular about speaking, and so afraid of ridicule, wouldn't a +big scientific man like the Count, who has fitted out an expedition for +the discovery, be very careful too, lest the object of his voyage should +get about? But oh, nonsense! It's ridiculous. It can't be that. +Don't laugh at me, uncle. It's only what I thought." + +"I was not going to laugh at you, Rodney, my boy," said the doctor +quietly, "for the simple reason that I do not see anything to laugh at. +It's a very clever, good idea, and quite possible. Yes, my boy, it's +more than possible. I don't say that you are right, but very likely to +be. The Count and his son are French, and, like their countrymen, very +touchy and sensitive and afraid of ridicule. I shouldn't be at all +surprised, my boy, if that really is the reason for their being so +secretive in their ways." + +"I am glad you think so, uncle," cried the boy. + +"No, no, no; don't take it like that. It may be after all only a fancy +of yours." + +"Yes, uncle, but if that's what they are searching for, to prove that +there are such--such--er--what-you-may-call-'ems in the sea--" + +"Phenomena, boy--phenomena," said the doctor shortly. + +"Yes, uncle; phenomena--wouldn't it be an act of kindness to tell them +that we have already made the discovery, and try to show them the part +of the ocean where such creatures are to be found?" + +"Hum! No, my boy. No. We should be making matters worse. Not only +should we be showing the Count and his son that we have found out what +they want to keep secret, but we should be robbing them of the honour of +their discovery as well. No; let them take us into their confidence if +they like, and if they do, so much the better. If they do not--well, +the loss is theirs." + + + +CHAPTER THIRTY THREE. + +COAST LAND. + +"Our skipper's as right as can be, Morny," said Rodd the next evening, +as the lad was once more on board the schooner, and they were sailing +gently along about a mile from shore, the brig following pretty close +behind with the water streaming down from her scuppers as the work at +one of the pumps was still kept up. + +For there was the coast, much as he had described, an undulating line of +the singular dark green mangrove forest that looked low and dwarfed, +and, now that the tide was low, showed to full advantage, the singular +ramification of its roots giving the bushy forest the appearance of +standing up upon a wilderness of jagged and tangled scaffolding through +which the sea washed over the muddy shore. + +"Not pleasant-looking, gentlemen," said the skipper, coming up to them. +"Not the sort of place where you would like to settle down and build a +country house." + +"Why, it's horrible," cried Rodd. "But why should it be so muddy here, +instead of being all nice clean sand?" + +"Because it's the edge of a low swampy country, my lad, where great +rivers come from inland and bring down the soil of thousands of miles." + +"But I always thought Africa was a sandy desert place where lions were +roving about, and where Mungo Park went travelling to Timbuctoo and +places like that." + +"Yes, my lad," said the skipper; "but that's the Africa of the old +books, and there's plenty of it like that on the east side and up in the +north and where old Mungo Park went to, no doubt; but all along this +coast it isn't a dry and thirsty land, but as soon as you get through +the mangroves, full of great forests and big rivers. Why, look at the +sea here. Right away out it was all as clear as crystal; now here +there's mud enough for anything." + +"But we shan't want to stop long in a muddy river with banks like this, +captain," said Morny. + +"Don't you be in too great a hurry to judge, sir," said the skipper. "I +have sailed up one or two of these rivers in my time, and when you get +higher up you will find it very different: big forests with grand trees, +rivers with fine water, and places beautiful enough for anything, such +as will satisfy travellers who don't want ports and towns. You and the +doctor, Mr Rodd, will be able to get some fine shooting up there, if +you like, and fine fishing too. Do you want to get any birds of all the +colours of the rainbow?" + +"Why, of course!" cried Rodd eagerly. + +"Well, there you'll find them, sir--singing birds too, green and gold +and scarlet and grey, and some with long tails, and some with short. +Only," continued the skipper dryly, and with a grim smile at the two +lads, "they don't sing like our birds at home, but in a foreign lingo, +all squeak and scream and squawk, through their having crooked hook +beaks. They are what people at home call parrots and parakeets." + +"Oh, that's what you mean!" cried Rodd, laughing. + +"Of course, sir--them as you teaches to talk. Wicked 'uns, some of +them, ready enough to learn anything the sailors teach them, but sulky +as slugs when you want them to learn anything good." + +"But there are plenty of them, captain?" said Rodd. + +"Thicker than crows at home, sir. Then what do you say to monkeys?" + +"That I should like to see them alive in the forest." + +"Well, there you have them, sir; and you could come across plenty, if +you went far enough, big as boys." + +"Ah, now you are telling travellers' tales, captain," said Rodd. + +"Nay, my lad, not I. I have seen them as big as boys, only not so tall, +because their legs have all gone into arms. Little, short, crooked +legs, they have got, as makes them squatty. But when they stand up +their arms are so long that they nearly touch the ground. Big as boys? +Why, they are bigger! I never saw boys with such big heads. And they +all look as if they had been born old; wrinkled faces and long shaggy +black hair." + +"Now, look here, captain, I don't mind you joking me, but don't play +tricks with the Viscount here." + +"Not I, my lad. I am just telling you the honest truth, and you may +believe me." + +"But where's the river where these things are?" + +"We shall come across one of them before long, sir," said the skipper. +"I expected to have found one that suited my book hours ago. I was very +nearly going up that one just about dinner-time." + +"Oh, but that was only a little inlet," said Rodd. + +"Looked so to you, sir, but all along here the shore's full of inlets, +as you call them; but they are deep water and go winding in and out, and +perhaps open out into big sheets of water like lagoons, as they call +them. But I am of opinion that if we don't turn into one to-night we +shall do so some time to-morrow, and perhaps find just the sort of spot +we want. It we don't we will go a bit farther south." + +"But take us up beyond all this horrible mangrove swamp," said Rodd. + +"You leave that to me, sir," said the skipper. "We have got a good bit +of work to do with that brig, and I want to bring my lads out again, and +the Count's too, well and hearty, not half of them eaten up with fever +and t'other half sucked into dry skins by the mosquitoes. No, we shall +have to sail right up to where it gets to be a forest and park-like +country." + +"There'll be no towns?" said Rodd. + +"No, sir, but we might come across a blacks' village, and if we do we +can anchor somewhere on the other shore." + +Another afternoon had come before the mangrove forest seemed to turn +inland and run right up the country, just as if they had come to the end +of that portion of the land; but miles away the skipper pointed out that +the forest began again and also swept inland, while by using the glass +the lads were able to trace the configuration of the coast, and saw that +the two lines of coast north and south came together away east. + +"There," said the skipper, "what do you say to this for the mouth of a +big river?" + +"River?" said the doctor, coming up. + +"Yes, sir--or estuary, which you like. This is the sort of one that +will suit us, though as far as I can make out it is not down in my +chart. So all the more likely to suit our book." + +"But do you think it's a river, and not a bend of the coast?" asked the +doctor. + +"If it was a bend of the coast, sir, the tide wouldn't be flowing in +like that. It's a good-sized tidal river, sir, and we are going to sail +in as far as we can get before dark, and if all turns out as I expect, +we shall be carried in past the mangroves and be able to moor to-night +perhaps to forest trees." + +"And if we don't?" said Rodd. + +"Why, then we shall anchor, and find plenty of good holding ground." + +The tide carried them in rapidly, and a nice soft breeze filled the +sails, bearing them onward till the mangrove swamp on either hand began +to close in rapidly, while towards evening they were gliding where the +banks were about a mile apart, and just at sunset muddy patches began to +make their appearance, upon which Rodd noticed three times over, +portions of the rugged trunks of trees that had been denuded of every +branch as they floated down with the stream. + +All at once, just where the mud glistened ruddily in the rays of the +setting sun, Rodd started, for a thick stumpy tree trunk suddenly began +to move gently, then glided a few feet over the mud, and finally went +into the river with a tremendous splash. + +"Why, what's that?" cried Rodd excitedly. + +"Croc," grunted the skipper gruffly. "Thousands of them along here." + + + +CHAPTER THIRTY FOUR. + +HOW TO GET BACK? + +"Almost as bad as you tacking out of the harbour, Morny," said Rodd that +evening, as the two vessels glided up the rapidly narrowing and greatly +winding river. + +"Oh no," replied the French lad. "There is no tremendous storm of wind +blowing, threatening to tear the sails to ribbons, no soldiers in boats +using their muskets, no big guns sending heavy balls from the forts." + +"No," said the skipper, who had overheard the remarks; "not a bit like +it, Mr Rodd. It is rather awkward work, though, and we have to be +always on the dodge, else the next thing would be we should go ramming +our noses right in the muddy banks and getting stuck fast; and that +wouldn't do." + +"Oh, you would get off again next tide," said Rodd carelessly. + +"Mebbe," said the skipper. "As the old country chaps at home say, we +mought and we moughtn't." + +"Look, Morny," cried Rodd. "There's another of those great crocs. What +a thick one! Why, that one must be five-and-twenty feet long." + +"Fourteen," grunted the skipper. + +"No, no; it must have been twenty," cried Rodd. + +"Fourteen, outside," growled the skipper. "How can you tell when you +only catch sight of them on the move?" + +"Well, it was a tremendous thickness," said Rodd. + +"Ay, it was thick enough, and heavy enough; and they are stronger than +horses. And just you look here, youngster, while we are up this river, +where I dare say they swarm, you had better keep your eyes open, for +those chaps will pull a deer or a bullock into the water before the poor +brute knows where it is, and as to human natur', they lie waiting close +to the banks for the poor niggers, men, women or children, who come down +to get water, and they nip them off in a moment." + +"Ugh! Horrible!" cried Rodd. + +"Yes, and what made me speak to you was that we are going to settle down +for a bit up here in the forest where the sun will be very hot, and +where there'll be no end of great shady trees hanging over the river +side and seeming to ask folks to jump in and have a nice cooling swim." + +"I say, captain!" + +"Oh, I'm not laughing at you, my lads," said the skipper sharply. "When +we are lying moored or at anchor up here it's just the sort of thing +that you might make up your minds to do without saying a word to +anybody. I know I should have done so when I was your age. But I just +say to you now solemn like--don't you do it. For if there's anything +one of these great reptiles likes it's a nice clean French or English +boy." + +"Oh, come now," cried Rodd merrily, "you don't call that talking solemn +like, captain?" + +A grim smile dawned upon the old sailor's countenance. + +"Well, no," he said; "but I mean it solemn like. I don't suppose one of +they crocs would study about what colour it was, but they go for +anything that's alive and moving, hold on with those great teeth of +theirs, and whatever it is they catch, it's soon drowned when it's +pulled below, and never heard of again.--Starboard, my lads! +Starboard!" he shouted, with both hands to his mouth, and the schooner +curved round and went off on another tack in obedience to the +helm.--"It's rather an awkward job, my lads," continued the skipper. +"You see, we have to sail to all points of the compass, and one minute +you have got the wind blowing gently fair and free from right ahead or +dead astarn, and the next you are going into shelter and got no wind at +all." + +"But we keep on going steadily up the river, captain," said Rodd. + +"Yes, my lad; we have got this strong tide in our favour. I am +reckoning that if we drop anchor soon we shall be able to get as far as +we want next tide." + +"But how far do you mean to go?" asked Morny anxiously. + +"Oh, a good way up yet," replied the skipper. + +"But why not keep on now?" asked Rodd. + +"Because I want to pick a good berth before the dark comes down and +catches and leaves us nohow. Got any more questions to ask?" + +"Hundreds," cried Rodd merrily. + +"Humph! Then I think I ought to have my pay raised. I joined the _Maid +of Salcombe_ to sail her, not to give you lessons in jography, +etymology, syntax, and prosody, as it used to say in my lesson book when +I was a little 'un." + +"Ah, well, I won't bother you any more to-day, captain," said Rodd; +"only one always wants to know what things are when they are quite +fresh." + +Captain Chubb did not answer for the moment, for he had to shout another +order to the steersman and make two or three signals with his hand to +those on board the brig, which was following in the schooner's track, +keeping as close as it could to be safe. + +At the end of five minutes, though, he had returned to his old position, +and grunted out with a look as if he wanted to be questioned more-- + +"Well, I suppose such youngsters as you like to know." + +Then all at once he shouted out a fresh order, which was followed by the +rattling out of the cable through the hawse-hole as the anchor splashed +and went down to a pretty good depth before the rope was stopped, one +order having acted for both vessels, and just before dark they swung +round head to stream, with the water lapping loudly against their bows. + +"That's enough for one day," grunted the captain. "Safe and snug a +harbour as any one could wish to be in, and there's the trees, you see, +on both sides, good, sound, solid forest trees such as would cut up into +fine timber, and all the mangroves left far enough behind." + +In a remarkably short time, as the two lads stood watching the shores, +the forest on either side grew intensely black, and though the steward +announced that the evening meal was ready, no one seemed disposed to go +below, for, succeeding to the solemn evening silence, they seemed to be +surrounded by strange sounds from the depths of the forest as well as +from the river, whose current began to grow sluggish, suggesting that +before long the tide would be at its height, and ready to turn with the +rushing of the water outward to the sea. + +"Why, it's awful," said Morny, in a subdued tone, as he stood with Rodd +gazing at the nearest shore. + +"Yes, not very nice," replied Rodd. "You and your father had better +stop on board here to-night." + +"Oh no. Our boat is hanging astern. We shall go back." + +Rodd thought that he should not like to attempt to row from vessel to +vessel in the darkness of such a night, for something seemed to suggest +to him the possibility of being swept out to sea; but he did not say so, +for fear of making his companion nervous, and they stood listening and +whispering together, trying to give names to some of the uncouth noises +which floated to their ears. + +Many were sharp quick splashes as if some great fish had sprung out of +the water in pursuit of prey, or in a desperate effort to escape a +pursuer. Then every now and then there would be a resounding slap, as +if one of the great reptiles that haunted the river had struck the +surface a tremendous blow with its tail. + +"What's that?" asked Rodd, directly after, as a low, deep, mournful +sound came from amongst the trees upon the shore, sounding like a +piteous cry for help from some woman in distress. + +This was succeeded by a painful silence, and then Rodd raised his +voice-- + +"Captain! Captain Chubb! Do you hear that? Are you there?" + +"Oh yes, here I am, my lad," came from out of the darkness. "And I +should be precious deaf if I hadn't heard it." + +"Well, ought we to take the boat and try and save her?" cried the boy +passionately. + +"How do you know it's a _her_, my lad? I should say it was a _him_. +It's the cock birds and not the hens that shout like that." + +"Bird!" cried Morny. "It was a human being." + +"Ah, it do sound something like it, my lad, but that aren't a human. +It's one of them great long-legged storky chaps with the big bills, +calling to his wife to say he's found frogs, or something of that kind. +You wait a minute, and if she don't come you will hear him call +`Quanko!'--There, what did I say?" said the skipper, with a chuckle, as +in trumpet tones came the cry of the great long-legged creature in a +sonorous _Quang, quang, quang, quang_! + +"Why, the captain seems to know everything," said Morny admiringly. "I +say, how did you know that, sir?" + +"Oh," said the skipper modestly, "one just picks up these sort of things +a little bit at a time. Now then, do you hear that?" + +The two lads did hear it--a peculiar musical (?) wailing cry which was +repeated again and again and then died out, half-smothered by a chorus +of croaking from the swampy river banks. + +"Oh yes, we can hear," cried Rodd. "We can do nothing else but listen. +But what was it made that cry?" + +"Ah! That's one of the things I don't know," said the skipper, +chuckling. "What should you think it was?" + +"Oh, I don't want to be laughed at again," cried Rodd, "for making +another mistake. Perhaps it's some other kind of stork." + +"Nay, you don't think it is," said the skipper. "You think different to +that. Come, have a guess." + +"Well," said Rodd, "I should say it was some kind of great cat." + +"Right, my lad; not much doubt about that. I don't know what sort it +is, but it's one of them spotted gentlemen. I should say there'd be +plenty of them here. Well, I have had about enough of it for to-day. I +am just going to see about the watch, and to say a few words below to +your father about having a good look-out kept, and then it won't be very +long before I turn in to my cot, for I am tired. This has been a rather +anxious day." + +"You are going to speak to my father about having a good look-out kept?" + +"Well, yes, my lad, and with our men well-armed. I don't say as it's +likely, and we are too near the sea for any villages of blacks; but it +wouldn't be very nice to have two or three big canoes come and make fast +to us in the night, and find the decks swarming with niggers who might +think that we were made on purpose for them to kill." + +"Why, you don't think that's likely, do you?" cried Rodd. + +"Not at all, my lad. But safe bind, safe find. What I have always +found is this--that when you keep a very strict look-out nothing +happens, and when you don't something does. Are you lads coming down?" + +"Not yet," said Rodd. + +"I suppose you will be going soon, won't you, Mr Morny?" said the +skipper, who somehow always forgot their visitor's title. + +"I am expecting my father will be coming up soon to say it is time." + +"Yes; I shouldn't leave it much longer," said the skipper. "I'll tell +him.--Joe Cross, there!" + +"Ay, ay, sir!" + +"You and four men stand by with the gig to take the Count aboard his +vessel. You will just drop down head to stream ready to pull hard if +the tide seems a bit too heavy; and you, my lad, be ready forward with +the end of the line made fast to the thwart and the grapnel clear, ready +to drop overboard to get hold of the mud if you find the current too +strong." + +"Ay, ay, sir!" cried the man; and the skipper went below. + +"I am glad of that, Joe," said Rodd eagerly. "I was thinking whether +there was any risk of the boat being swept away." + +"So was I, sir; but it's always the same. Whenever I think of something +that ought to be done I always find that our old man has thought of it +before. Did you see that we have swung round to our anchor?" + +"No," said Rodd. + +"We have, sir, and the tide's running out like five hundred million +mill-streams. You come for'ard here and feel how the cable's all of a +jigger, just as if the river had made up its mind to pull it right out +of the mud." + +The two lads followed, and it was exactly as the man had said, for the +great Manilla rope literally thrilled as if with life, while the river +glided by the schooner's cutwater with a loud hiss. + +"Why, Joe," cried Rodd, as he gazed in the sailor's dimly-seen face, +"how are you going to manage to row back?" + +"Well, sir, that's one of the things I have been asking myself." + +"Well, you had better speak to the skipper." + +"Not me, sir. I'm not going to try to teach him. If I was to say a +word he'd jump down my throat bang. Oh, he knows what he's about, or he +wouldn't have told me to stand by with that there grapnel." + +"Yes, of course he'd know," said Rodd quietly. "I should like to know +how you'd got on." + +The two lads stood listening to the weird sounds from the shore, every +now and then being puzzled by something that was entirely fresh, while +the swiftly running water gleamed dimly with the faintly seen reflection +of the stars, showing that a mist was gathering overhead, while Joe +Cross and the men lowered down the boat and hauled her up to the +gangway, ready to convey the visitors to the brig. + +They had hardly finished preparations before the voices that had come +before in murmurs from the cabin were heard ascending to the deck, and +the Count cried out of the darkness-- + +"Are you ready there, Morny, my son?" + +"Yes, my father," replied the lad, and Rodd walked with him to the side. + +The men were in their places, with their oars ready to hand to lower at +once, Joe Cross holding on in front with his boat-hook through a +ring-bolt. A few more words passed between the Count and Uncle Paul, +and then the former bade his son descend into his place, following +slowly directly after. + +"Good-night," he said. + +"Good-night, Rodd!" cried Morny. "We shan't be long getting to the +brig." + +"No," cried Rodd. "Good-night! Here, one moment; I'll slip down and +come back with the gig." + +Before any one else could speak he had dropped into the boat, his feet +touching the nearest thwart as the skipper cried "Let go!" and almost +the next moment the men were pulling hard, while Joe Cross dropped upon +his knees to feel for the grapnel so as to make sure it was at hand, +while to Rodd it seemed that the boat was motionless in the rapid river +and that the schooner had been suddenly snatched away. + + + +CHAPTER THIRTY FIVE. + +UP A TREE. + +"Put your backs into it, my lads," cried Joe Cross, almost fiercely. +"Steady! Steady all, and look out that you don't have a smash. Pull! +Hard! Here, I shall be tugged out of the boat!" + +For it seemed almost directly after that the dimly-seen hull of the brig +rose up out of the darkness close at hand, while from where he knelt-- +fortunately for himself--the coxswain felt his arms being jerked out of +their sockets as he caught with the boat-hook at the brig's main chains. +"Stand by there!" he roared, as he held on. "Lend a hand here to help +the gentlemen on board! Somebody say it in French! Up with you!" + +There was no need for the use of another tongue, for a lantern shed its +light down upon them, willing hands were ready, and the Count and Morny +scrambled aboard. + +The next moment the Count was giving orders for a rope to be passed down +to the boat. + +"Make fast, and come on board!" he shouted. "You'll never get back +to-night." + +The order came too late, for as he spoke another order was given out by +Joe Cross, who had loosed the precarious hold he had with the boat-hook, +as he shouted while giving the boat a thrust away-- + +"Now for it, my lads! Pull for all you know!" + +Almost the next moment Rodd dimly saw that they were clear, and as the +men tugged at their oars with all their might he dropped upon his knees +in front of stroke, clapped his hands against the oar, and swinging with +the man, thrust with all his force. + +Five minutes of desperate tugging at the oars in the midst of darkness +which seemed to rapidly increase. The men had rowed with all their +force--not to get back to the schooner, but to reach the brig and one of +her ropes that they knew would be thrown to their help; but to Rodd, as +he strained his eyes from where he knelt striving to give force to the +stroke oar, it was like catching so many glimpses, first of the brig's +side, then of its stern, and then once more it was as if they were +standing still in the water and the brig was rushing away. + +"Steady, my lads! Don't break your hearts!" cried Joe Cross firmly, his +voice ringing clearer out of the black silence. "It aren't to be done. +Mid-stream's our game. If we try to get ashore we shall be among the +branches, capsized in a moment, and--" + +The sailor did not finish his speech then, but Rodd did to himself, and +hot though he was with his exertions, a cold shiver seemed to run +through him, as he mentally said-- + +"The crocodiles!" + +"That's better, my lads. Just a steady pull, and I'll keep as I am with +the boat-hook. We mustn't have a capsize." + +"What are you going to do, Joe?" cried Rodd. + +"Don't know, sir," said the man gruffly. "Perhaps you can tell me." + +"I? No," cried Rodd. + +"Ah! That's awkward," said the man. "I don't know what the skipper was +about to set us on this job. That's the worst of being a sailor. They +trains us up to 'bey orders directly they're guv, and we does them, but +one never knows how to be right. I oughter ha' told the old man as this +was more'n men could do; 'cause I half thought it were. But then I says +to myself, the skipper knows best; and here we are in a nice hole." + +"A nice hole!" cried Rodd angrily. "Why, we shall be swept out to sea." + +"Looks like it, sir--I mean seems." + +"But why not make for the shore, where we could catch hold of some of +the overhanging branches?" + +"I telled you, sir. 'Cause we should be capsized before we had time to +wink. Steady, my lads--steady! It's no use to pull, Mr Rodd; four +times as many of us couldn't stem a stream like this." + +"Will they come down after us? Yes, my uncle is sure to." + +"Not he, sir. It would be just about mad to try it, and our old man +will be so wild at being caught like this that he won't let him stir. +'Sides that, sir, what are you talking about? How are they to know we +have been swept away?" + +"Because we don't come back, of course," cried Rodd angrily. + +"That won't do, sir. Skipper knows, of course, after the way we went +off, that it's just impossible." + +"But the Count will tell him." + +"Too far off for shouting, sir. You take my word for it that the +skipper will make up his mind that we are stopping on board the brig +till the tide runs slack again. If anything's done it will be by the +Frenchies, and I don't believe they'll try." + +"Oh, but the Count would. His son would make him." + +"No, sir. The Count's a fine naval officer who has seen service, and he +knows too well what he's about to send a boat's crew swirling down this +river to go nobody knows where. The only folks as can help us is--" + +"Yes--who?" cried Rodd, for the man broke off in his speech. + +"Ourselves, sir; and we shall find it precious hard." + +"That's right, Joe," said one of the other sailors. "Better speak out, +mate, and say the worst on it." + +"Say it yourselves," cried Joe Cross roughly. + +"Yes, speak out," cried Rodd. "What do you think?" + +"We can do nothing, sir, but keep her head straight and go down with the +tide, doing all we can to keep from being sucked into the shore among +the trees." + +"But look here, Joe, aren't we very close in now?" cried Rodd, who had +just noticed in the darkness that the sailor he addressed was leaning +over the bows and straining his eyes in one particular direction. + +For answer the man yelled to his messmates to pull with all their might. + +The oars dipped, but at the second stroke there was a crashing rustling +sound of twigs, followed by a sharp crackling and snapping, as they were +swept in amongst the pendant branches of some huge forest tree, one +bough striking Rodd across the shoulders and holding him as it were +fast, so that the boat was being dragged from beneath him. + +Then there was more grinding of the gunwale of the boat amongst the +boughs, the water came swishing in over the side, and directly after the +frail vessel partly turned over, with her keel lying sideways to the +rushing tide. + +Then more crackling and rustling amongst the boughs, mingled with +shouting from the boat's crew, and from out of the confusion, and +somewhere above him in the pitchy darkness and low-lying night mist, +came the voice of Joe Cross-- + +"Now then, all of you! Where away?" + +"Here!" + +"Here!" + +"All right, mate!" + +"Lend a hand, some one!" + +"Are you all here?" cried Joe Cross again. + +"Ay, ay, ay, ay!" came in chorus. + +"But I don't hear the young guvnor." + +There was silence. + +"Where's Mr Rodd?" + +A moment's pause, and then-- + +"Mr Rodd! Ahoy!" + +"Here, Joe, here!" came in half-suffocated tones. + +"Wheer, my lad?" cried the man excitedly. + +"Here! Here! Help!" + +"But where's yer _here_, lad? I can't see you.--Can any of you? Oh, +look alive, some on you! Get hold of the boy anywhere--arms or legs or +anything--and hold on like grim death." + +There was a sharp rustling of leaves and twigs which pretty well drowned +Rodd's answer-- + +"I'm down here." + +"Where's _down here_, my lad? Are you under the boat?" + +"No, no. Hanging to a bough, with the water up to my chest, and +something's tugging at me to drag me away." + +"Oh, a-mussy me!" groaned the sailor. "Why aren't it to-morrow morning +and sun up? Can't any of you see him?" + +"No, no, no, no!" came back, almost as dismally as groans. + +"Well, can't you feel him, then?" + +"No." + +"I am here, Joe--here!" panted the lad. "Higher up the river than you +are. A big branch swept me out of the boat." + +"Ah, yes, we went under it," groaned Joe. "Well, lads, he must be the +other side of the tree. Here, where's that there boat? Can any of you +see it?" + +"No; we are all on us in the tree?" + +"Well, I don't suppose you are swimming," roared Cross savagely. "Do +something, some on you! Thinking of nothing but saving your own blessed +lives! Are you going to let the poor lad drown?" + +"Here, coxswain, why don't you tell us what to do?" snarled one of the +men. + +"How can I," yelled Joe, "when I don't know what to do mysen? Oh, don't +I wish that I had got the skipper here! I'd let him have it warm!" + +"Joe! Joe!" came out of the darkness. "I can't hold on! I can't hold +on!" + +"Yah, you young idgit!" roared the sailor. "You must!" + +"I can't, Joe--I can't!" cried Rodd faintly, and there was a gurgling +sputtering sound as if the water had washed over him. + +"Oh-h!" groaned Joe. "Don't I tell you you must! Hold on by your arms +and legs--your eyelids. Stick your teeth into the branch. We are +a-coming, my lad.--Oh my! what a lie!" he muttered. Then aloud, and in +a despairing tone, "Can any one of you get up again' the stream to where +he is?" + +"No!" came in a deep murmur. "If we go down we shall be washed away." + +"Same here," groaned Joe. "I'm a-holding on with the water right up to +the middle, and just about ready to be washed off. I can't stir. Oh, +do one of you try and save the poor dear lad! I wish I was dead, I do!" + +"Joe!" came faintly. + +"Ay, ay, my lad!" + +"Tell Uncle Paul--" + +The words ended in a half-suffocated wailing cry, and almost the next +moment there was a tremendous splashing of water, and the snapping of a +good-sized branch, followed by sounds as of a struggle going on upon the +surface of the rushing stream as it lapped and hissed amongst the +tangled boughs and twigs. + +"Hold hard!" yelled Joe. "Anywhere.--Got him, boys--_urrrrr_!--" + +It was as if some savage beast had suddenly seized its prey. Then there +was a loud panting and more crackling as of branches giving way, and +directly after, in answer to a volley of inquiries, Joe Cross panted +out-- + +"Yes, I've got him, my lads, and he's got his teeth into me; but I don't +know how long we can hold on." + +"You must hold on, Joe!" shouted a voice. + +"Stick to him, messmate! I'm a-trying to get to you." + +There was more crackling in the darkness, and a peculiar subdued sound +as of men panting after running hard; but it was only the hard breathing +of excitement. + +"Have you got him still, Joe?" came in gasps. + +"Yes, my lad, but he's awful still and I don't know that he aren't +drowned.--No, he aren't, for he's got his teeth into my shoulder, and +he's gripping hard. But the water keeps washing right up into my ear." + +"Hoist him up a little higher," panted the other speaker. + +"How can I? I've got my arm round him, but if I stir it means let go. +What are you doing, mate?" + +"Trying to get down to you, but as soon as I stir the bough begins to +crack." + +"Steady, mate, steady! I can't see you, but I can hear, and if you come +down on us we are gone. Here, I say, it will be hours before it's +morning, won't it?" + +There was a groan in reply--a big groan formed by several voices in +unison. + +"But how long will it be before, the tide goes down and leaves us?" + +There was no reply, and a dead silence fell upon the occupants clinging +to different portions of the tree, all of whom had managed with the +strength and activity of sailors to drag themselves up beyond the reach +of the water and at varying distances from where Joe Cross clung with +one messmate hanging just above his head. + +"Well, look here, messmates," said Joe at last, "it's no use to make the +worst on it. I've got the young skipper all right, and he's growing +more lively, for he just give a kick. Now who's this 'ere? It's you, +Harry Briggs, aren't it?" + +"Ay, ay, mate; me and water, for I swallowed a lot before I got out of +it." + +"Now, look here; how are you holding on?" + +"Hanging down'ards, my lad, with my hind legs tied in a knot round a big +bough; and I keep on trying to get hold of you by the scruff, but I +can't quite reach." + +"Why, that's a-hinging like the bees used to do outside my old mother's +skep. Well, you mustn't let go, my lad, else down you come." + +"Well, I know that, mate," growled the man. "But I say, can't you reach +up to my hands?" + +"Yah! No!" growled Joe. "I've only got two. Can't you reach down a +little further and get hold of my ears, or something?" + +"My arms aren't spy-glasses, and they won't reach within a foot of you. +Can any of you swarm out above us here?" + +"No--no--no!" came in voice after voice, from points that were evidently +fairly distant. + +"Oh!" groaned the sailor addressed as Harry. "Fust time in my blessed +life I ever wished I was a 'Merican monkey." + +"What for, mate?" panted Joe. + +"So as to make fast round this 'ere branch with my tail." + +"Joe! Joe!" came in a low hoarse tone. "Where am I!" + +"Well, you are here, my lad; but don't let go with your teeth. Take +another good fast hold, but more outside like. Keep to the wool of the +jumper--if you can." + +"Hah! I recollect now. We are in the water, and I have got hold of +you." + +"That's right, my lad, and I'd say take a good fast holt of my hair, +only Ikey Gregg scissored it off so short when it turned so hot that +there's nothing to hold. But can you hyste yourself up a bit higher?" + +"I'll try, Joe; but the water drags at me so. But, Joe, what are you +holding on to?" + +"What they'd call a arm of the tree, sir." + +"But if I try to climb up you shan't I drag you loose?" + +"Oh, I'm no consequence, my lad. If I'm washed off I shall get hold +again somewheres. Never you mind me. There's Harry Briggs up aloft +a-reaching down a couple of his hands. If you feel you've got stuff +enough in you.--Take your time over it, my lad--you see if you can't +swarm a bit up me and then stretch up and think you are at home trying +to pick apples, till Harry gets a big grip of your wristies; and then +you ought to be able to swarm up him. Now then, do you think you can +try?" + +"Yes, Joe; I think so," panted the boy. "That's right, my lad. I'd +give you a lift, only I can't, for I'm in rotten anchorage, and we +mustn't get adrift." + +About a minute passed, in which little was heard but the whishing of the +water through the leaves and twigs, and the sound of hard breathing. +Then Joe spoke again-- + +"I don't want to hurry you, my lad, but if you think you can manage it +I'd say, begin." + +"I'm ready now, Joe," said the boy faintly. "But do you think you can +hold on?" + +"Aren't got time to think, my lad. You go on and do it. That's your +job, and don't you think as it's a hard 'un. Just you fancy the +doctor's yonder getting anxious about you, and then--up you goes." + +"Yes, Joe," panted Rodd. + +"And once you get hold of Harry Briggs' hands he'll draw you up a bit. +He's a-hinging down like one of them there baboons, tail up'ards. Then, +once he hystes you a bit, you get a good grip of him with your teeth +anywhere that comes first. He won't mind. That'll set your hands free, +and then up you goes bit by bit till you gets right into the tree." + +"Yes, Joe; and then?" + +"Well, my lad, then I'd set down striddling and have a rest." + +"Below there! Ready!" cried Briggs. "I can't reach no further, +youngster, but I think if you can climb up and grip we might manage it." + +"Yes! Coming!" cried Rodd. + +And then no one saw, and afterwards Rodd could hardly tell how he +managed it, but with the water pressing him closer as he clung face to +face with the partially submerged coxswain, he managed to scramble +higher, clinging with arms and legs, till he occupied a hazardous +position astride of the sailor's shoulder, holding on with his left hand +and reaching up with his right, snatching for a few moments at nothing. + +"Where are you, my lad?" came from above. + +"Here! Here!" panted Rodd, and then, "Ah, it's of no use!" + +As he spoke he felt himself going over, but at that moment his fingers +touched the sleeve of a soft clinging jersey, a set of fingers gripped +hard at his arm, and in a supreme effort he loosened his other hand, +made a snatch, and then began swinging gently to and fro till another +hand from above closed upon his jacket and lightened the strain. + +"Got you, my lad!" came from overhead. "Now look here; I'm not going to +hyste you up, 'cause I can't, but I am going to swing you back'ards and +for'ards like a pendulo till you can touch this 'ere bough where I am +hanging, and then go on till you can get your legs round it and hold +fast. Understand?" + +"Yes," panted Rodd. + +"Now then. Belay, and when you get hold you shout." + +It was the work of an acrobat, such as he would have achieved in doubt +and despair. + +The sailor began swinging the boy to and fro, to and fro, with more and +more force, till Rodd felt his legs go crashing in amongst the thick +twigs of the great bough that was drawn down by the weight of the two +upon it a good deal below the horizontal. + +"Harder!" he cried, as he swung back, and then as his legs went well in +again he felt that a thick portion was passing between his knees, and +thrusting forward his feet with all his might he forced them upwards and +directly afterwards passed them one across the other in a desperate grip +which left him dragging on the sailor's hands. + +"Fast, my lad?" + +"Yes." + +"Can you hold on?" + +"Yes." + +"Then good luck to you!" cried the sailor, as, relieved of the boy's +weight, he too swung head downwards for a moment or two, then with a +quick effort wrenched himself upwards, got hold of the branch with both +hands, and after hanging like a sloth for a few moments, succeeded in +dragging himself upon the bough, which all the while was swaying heavily +up and down and threatening to shake Rodd from where he hung, but at the +same time inciting him so to fresh desperate action, that with all a +boy's activity he too had succeeded in perching himself astride of the +branch. + +"All right, my lad?" cried Briggs. + +"Ye-es!" came gaspingly. + +"Then you wait a bit and get your wind, my lad.--Joe Cross! Ahoy!" he +yelled, as if his messmate were half-a-mile away. + +"Right ho!" came from below. "Where's the boy?" + +"Here, Joe--here!" shouted Rodd, the sound of the man's voice seeming to +send energy through him. + +"Hah-h-h!" came from the sailor, and directly after from different parts +of the tree there was a cheer. + +"Now then, what about you, matey?" shouted Briggs. + +"Well, I dunno yet, my lad; I'm just going to try and shape it round. I +want to know where some of the others are, and whether if I let go I +couldn't manage to make a scramble and swim so as to join a mate." + +"No, no, no!" came in chorus. "Don't try it, lad. Aren't you safe +where you are?" + +"Well, I don't know about being safe," replied the sailor. "Mebbe I +could hold on, but here's the water up to my chesty; and don't make a +row, or you'll be letting some of those crocs know where I am. Look +here, Mr Rodd, sir; are you all right?" + +"Yes, Joe; I can sit here as long as I like.--That is," he added to +himself, "if the branch doesn't break." + +"Well, that's a comfort, sir. And what about you, Harry Briggs?" + +"Well, I'm all right, mate; only a bit wet." + +"Wet! You should feel me!" cried Cross, quite jocularly. "How about +the rest on you?" + +"Oh, we are up aloft here in the dark, mate," said one of the men. "I +dunno as we should hurt so long as we didn't fall asleep." + +"Oh, I wouldn't do that, mates," said Cross. "You might catch cold. +You hang yourselves out as wide as you can, so as to get dry." + +"But look here, Joe Cross," shouted Rodd, who was rapidly recovering his +spirits, "you mustn't sit there in the water. Can't you manage to climb +up?" + +"Oh yes, sir, I can climb up easy enough, only it don't seem to me as +there's anything to climb." + +"But doesn't the branch you are sitting on go right up to the tree?" + +"No, sir; it goes right down into it, and I'm sitting in a sort of fork, +like a dicky bird as has been picking out a handy place for its nest." + +"Then what are you going to try to do?" + +"Nothing, sir, but think." + +"Think?" + +"Yes, sir--about what I'm going to say to the skipper if ever we gets +back." + +"Why, what can you say?" + +"That's what I want to know, sir. I know what he'll say to me. He'll +say, Look here, my lad, you were coxswain; I want to know what you have +done with my gig." + +"Ah, the boat!" said Rodd. "Do any of you know what's become of the +boat?" + +"I don't," said Briggs. + +"Oh, she's half-way to South Ameriky by this time, sir," said Joe, "and +I shall get all the credit of having lost her." + +"Never mind about the boat, Joe." + +"Well, sir, if you talk like that, I don't. But it's the skipper who +will mind." + +"It's nothing to do with him, Joe. It's uncle's boat; and it wasn't +your fault." + +"Thank you, sir. That's a bit comforting like, and warms one up a bit; +but if it's all the same to you I'd raither not talk quite so much, for +I don't know as crocs can hear, but if they can it mightn't be pleasant. +Well, my lads, just another word; we have got to make the best of it +and wait for daylight, and I suppose by that time the tide will have +gone right down, and some on you will be getting dry." + +There was silence then, and the men sat holding on to their precarious +perches, listening to an occasional sound from the river or the shore, +loud splashings right away out in the direction of what they supposed to +be the main current, and an occasional trumpeting wail or shriek from +the forest--sounds that chilled and produced blood-curdling sensations +at the first, but to which the men became more and more accustomed as +the hours slowly glided on. + +"Look here," said Joe Cross, at last, "because I said I didn't want to +talk, that wasn't meant for you who are all right up above the water. +It's bad enough to be keeping a watch like this on a dark night, but +that is no reason why you chaps shouldn't tell stories and talk and say +something to cheer Mr Rodd up a bit. He had about the worst of it, +swep' out of the boat as he was. So let go, some on you. You've got to +do something, as you can't go to sleep. But I tell you one thing; you +chaps are all much better off than I am. I shan't fall out of my bunk +on the top of any of you. But look here, Harry Briggs, you always want +a lot of stirring up before one can get you to move. Now then; you have +got a bit of pipe of your own. Sing us a song. Good cheery one, with a +chorus--one that Mr Rodd can pick up and chime in. Now then, let go." + +"Who's a-going to sing with the water dripping down out of his toes?" + +"Why, you, mate," cried Joe. "There, get on with you. You chaps as +knows the best songs always wants the most stirring up, pretending to be +bashful, when you want to begin all the time!" + +"I tell you I don't, mate. I'm too cold." + +"Then heave ahead, and that'll warm you up. You tell him he is to sing, +Mr Rodd, sir. You're skipper now, and he must obey orders. It'll do +us all good." + +"Well," said Rodd, "it doesn't seem a very cheerful time to ask people +to sing in the dark; but perhaps it will brighten us all up." + +"Ay, ay, sir!" came from the rest. + +"Am I to, Mr Rodd?" said the man appealingly; and after a little more +pressing he struck up in a good musical tenor the old-fashioned sea song +of "The Mermaid," with its refrain of-- + + "We jolly sailor boys were up, up aloft, + And the land lubbers lying down below, below, below, + And the land lubbers lying down below!" + +right on through the several verses, telling of the sailors' +superstition regarding its being unlucky to see a mermaid with a comb +and a glass in her hand, when starting upon a voyage, right on to the +piteous cry of the sailor boy about his mother in Portsmouth town, and +how that night she would weep for him, till the song ended with the +account of how the ship went down and was sunk in the bottom of the sea. + +It was a wild sad air, sung there in the branches of that tree amidst +the darkness and night mist, and in spite of a certain beauty in the +melody the singer's voice assumed a more and more saddened tone, till he +finished with the water seeming to hiss more loudly through the lower +branches and the inundated trunks around, and then there was a sharp +slapping noise on the surface of the stream that might very well have +been taken for plaudits. + +Then there was a strange braying sound like a weirdly discordant fit of +laughter; and then perfect silence, with the darkness more profound than +ever. + +"I'm blessed!" came at last from Joe. "Hark at him, Mr Rodd. He calls +hisself a messmate! Ast him, I did, to sing us a song to cheer us up. +Why, it was bad enough to play for a monkey's funeral march. It's all +very well for you others to join in your chorus about jolly sailor boys +sitting up aloft, but what about poor me sitting all the time in a cold +hipsy bath, as they calls it in hospitals, expecting every moment to +feel the young crocs a-tackling my toes? Why, it's enough to make a +fellow call out for a clean pocket-handkerchy. Here, some on you, set +to and spin us a yarn to take the taste of that out of our mouths." + + + +CHAPTER THIRTY SIX. + +THE DOCTOR PRESCRIBES. + +And so that awful night wore on, one story bringing forth another, and +the spinning of one yarn being followed by the spinning of one perhaps +longer. + +It was anything to relieve the terrible tedium and beguile their +thoughts from the peril in which they were placed. The lapse of time +was discussed, and the possibility of the slackening of the furious flow +of the falling river so that a boat might come down in search of the +unfortunates, but to a man all came to the conclusion that nothing could +be expected until daylight, and that they must bear their fate as best +they might. + +The most cheerful thing that fell to their lot during the weary hours +was the announcement made from time to time by Joe Cross, that the water +was sinking a little lower and a little lower, so that he had room to +hope that after a while he too would be able to, as he put it, drip +himself dry. + +But the monotony was terrible, and the morning seemed as if it would +never come. For it was far different from being in the temperate region +of the world, where in the summer months the darkness was slow to come +and was succeeded by a very early dawn. There in that tropical southern +land they were where the twenty-four-hours day was pretty equally +divided into light and darkness, with scarcely any twilight to soften +down the division. + +But still as everything comes to those who wait, so it was there, and +Joe Cross announced at last that he was sitting quite clear of the +water, and therefore, as he judged it, they had not very much longer to +wait before it would be day. + +But he was wrong. What seemed to be an interminable time elapsed before +the watchers could see for certain that a faint light seemed to be +piercing the dense grey mist that covered the river. But this did at +last become a certainty. + +Before long, on one side, grey and grim-looking beneath a heavy mist, +the great river could be seen gliding steadily along, while away to +their right rose the primeval forest, rising as it were out of a sea of +shadow. + +The change came quickly then through a rapid twilight to the bright rays +of the sunshine, which seemed to attack the river mist, piercing it +through and through, routing it, and sending it in clouds rolling along +the stream, while, now glistening and muddy, the banks showed out beyond +the trees amidst which the huge monarch in which they had taken refuge +stood towering almost alone. + +"Why, we must have come inshore for some distance last night," cried +Rodd, in wonder. + +"Ay, my lad. Banks flooded. High tide perhaps," said Joe bluffly. +"Well, the sooner we gets down into this mud and stretches our legs the +better; and if they don't come down in the boats, how we are going to +get back is more than I know." + +"Look! Look yonder!" cried Rodd, as, sweeping the park-like stretch +around him, he suddenly caught sight of an object that filled his breast +with joy. + +"Three cheers, my lads," shouted Joe, waving his hand, "and--Oh, hold +hard! Avast there! Gig's safe to have a hole through her bottom." + +For there, about a hundred yards away, between the trees, lay something +gleaming amongst the mud. + +He could only see a portion, but that was enough, and one by one, stiff +and cold, the unfortunate party lowered themselves down from their +perches to drop into a thin surface of soft mud, the swift rush of the +tide preventing it from accumulating to any depth. + +Their fortune was better than they anticipated, for on reaching the +boat's side it was to find that, though bottom upward, she had escaped +any serious injury, the yielding boughs into which she had been swept +having checked the force of the concussion and left her to glide from +tangle of boughs to tangle, until she had been wedged into a huge fork +and had from there slowly settled down. + +But there was neither oar nor boat-hook, and the line fastened to her +foremost thwart had been snapped in two. + +"All her tackle gone," said Joe grimly. "Well, we must try and find and +hack off some big bamboo canes with our jack-knives, and then try if we +can't punt her up against the tide, which ought to be pretty slack by +now--that is, if they don't come to find us." + +"But look here, Joe," cried Rodd, as he stood shading his eyes from the +horizontal sunbeams; "there's the river, and the mist's rolling along +with the tide. Here, I'm puzzled. Which way did we come?" + +"Why, that's plain enough, Mr Rodd, sir. Down with the stream yon +way." + +"But that must be down-stream." + +"Nay, not it, my lad. The river winds, and so did my head. Here, I'm +all of a maze still. No, I aren't. Here, I'm blest! Why, you are +right, sir. That is up-stream, and--Hooray, my lads! One pole will do, +to steer. We are going to be carried back again, for the tide's turned +and running up steady." + +A very little search resulted in their coming upon a bed of canes, out +of which four were cut and trimmed, supplying them with good stout poles +twelve or fourteen feet long, and laying these along the thwarts the +men, glad now of the exercise to drive out the chill, insisted upon Rodd +getting into the boat while they waded through the mud by her side, half +lifting, half thrusting, and succeeded at last in getting her to where a +sloping portion of the bank ran down to the river. + +"Now all together, my lads," cried Joe. "Keep step, and hold her well +in hand, for she'll soon begin to slide; and as soon as she reaches the +water, jump in. Make ready. I'll give the word." + +"Stop!" shouted Rodd. "What about the crocodiles?" + +"Oh, murder!" cried Joe. "I forgot all about them. Well, never mind. +This aren't no time to be nice. It's got to be done, so here goes." + +Rodd seized one of the poles, and going right to the bows knelt down in +the bottom, and holding the pole lance fashion, prepared to try and use +it. + +"That won't be no good, my lad," cried Joe. "Now, my lads--one, two, +three! Off she goes!" + +They ran the gig quickly down the muddy slope, and as they touched the +water and the foremost part began to float they took another step or +two, gave her a final thrust, and sprang in, just as Rodd realised the +truth of the sailor's words, for as they glided out with tremendous +force, before they were a dozen yards from the water's edge the gig's +stem collided just behind two muddy-looking prominences that appeared +above the surface of the water, and as the shock sent the boy backwards +over the next thwart the boat, which was bounding up and down with the +result of the men springing in, received another shock from something +dark which rose out of the water, and then they glided on past a +tremendous ebullition and were carried onward by the rising tide. + +"Here, let me come, Mr Rodd," cried Joe Cross, as he scrambled forward. +"Here, catch hold, sir, and help me drag my jersey over my head. The +brute's stove us in, and if I don't look sharp--Pull, sir, pull--right +over my head! That's got it," he cried, and he set to work thrusting +the woollen knitted shirt bit by bit along between the edges of two of +the planks, through which the water was rapidly gurgling in. "There," +he said; "that'll keep some on it out; but don't all on you stand +looking at me as if I was playing a conjuring trick. Get a couple of +those poles over the sides. Nay, nay, it's no use to try to punt. +Dessay the water's fathoms deep. Just keep her head straight, and let +the tide carry us on. Look out, my lads! There's another of them up +yonder. See, Mr Rodd, sir--them two nubbles? Them's his eyes. He +just keeps his beautiful muddy carcase all hid under water and squints +along the top with them pretty peepers of hisn to look out for his +breakfast. Keep back, sir; I believe he's coming on at us, big as the +boat is. Oh, this is a pretty place, upon my word! He means me, +because he can see my white skin." + +Instead of answering, Rodd picked up the bamboo pole, which had been +jerked from his hands when they encountered the other reptile. + +Three of the men followed his example of holding them ready to strike at +what they could see of the crocodile, and as they were carried closer by +the tide and Rodd could just make out below the muddy surface that the +water was being stirred by the undulation of the tail of the monster, +which was apparently fourteen or fifteen feet long, three poles were +sharply thrust together, two of them coming in contact with the +creature's head just behind its eyes. + +The blows were heavy, having behind them the weight and impetus of the +loaded boat, and once more there was a tremendous swirl in the water, as +the crocodile raised its head right out, turned completely over, +displaying its pallid buff under portion, and then curved itself over, +and in the act of diving down threw up its tail and struck the surface +of the water with a blow that deluged the occupants of the cutter with +spray. + +"Well," cried Joe, as the boat glided on, "I don't know what you chaps +think of it, but I am getting warm again, and I call this 'ere sport. +But I say, Mr Rodd, I am beginning to wish you was aboard the _Maid of +Salcombe_, and you'd took me with you." + +"Same 'ere, sir," cried the men, in chorus. + +"See any more, Mr Rodd?" + +"No, not yet, Joe." + +"Well, there's no hurry, sir. Let's get our breath. But do you call +this 'ere fishing or shooting?" + +"There's another," cried Rodd excitedly; "but it's going the other way." + +"Got to know perhaps, sir, how we upset t'other. But we can spare him, +for I'll be bound to say there's plenty more of them. Now I wonder what +they are all for--pretty creatures!" + +"What they are for, Joe?" cried Rodd, without taking his eyes from the +surface of the muddy stream which was carrying them onward. + +"Yes, sir; I don't see as they are much good. I say, there's another +one! No, he's ducked his head down. Ah, he's coming up again. Look +out, my lads!" cried the man. "I wish there was another pole. There's +nothing left for me but my knife, and they are as hard as shoehorns, I +know. I don't want to break my whittle against his skin. No, he's +going to let us go by. Ah! Look out!" + +For as they drew nearer the sun flashed off the reptile's muddy skin, +and they could see it glide round rapidly and strike two tremendous +blows on the surface with its serrated tail--blows that had been +probably directed at the boat, but which fell short, while in its blind +stupidity it kept on thrashing the water several times after the vessel +had passed. + +"Ahoy! Ahoy!" came from somewhere, seeming to echo from the trees that +covered the bank. + +"Ahoy! Ahoy!" shouted Joe Cross back. "Why, that means help, sir. The +brig must be lying there, just round that bend beyond the trees." + +"Oh no," cried Rodd excitedly. "We must have gone down miles with the +tide." + +"Ahoy! Ahoy!" came again. "Boat ahoy!" from somewhere out of sight; +and glancing back Rodd made out that they were passing along what seemed +to be a rapid bend. + +"Ahoy!" was shouted back, and then all at once, to the astonishment of +the sufferers, a couple of boats came into sight from right astern, +their occupants sending the spray flying as they bent to their oars and +seemed to be racing to overtake the gig. + +For the moment the boats, quite a quarter of a mile behind, took up all +their attention, and Rodd stood up in the bows waving his hand wildly. + +"There's Uncle Paul, and the skipper, in one!" he cried. + +"Ay, ay, my lad; that's our old man," shouted Joe. + +"And there's the Count, and eight men rowing hard, in the other, but-- +but--oh, I say, Morny isn't there!" + +"Oh, he's being skipper and taking care of the brig, sir," cried Joe +sharply, as he noted the boy's disappointed tone of voice. + +"No, he isn't," shouted Rodd, signalling with his pole, as he saw one of +the rowers rise up in the brig's boat and begin waving an oar; "he's +pulling with the men!" And his voice sounded hoarse and choking, while, +realising this fact, the boy coughed loudly and forcibly, as if to clear +his throat. + +"Here, you've ketched a cold, Mr Rodd, sir," cried Joe. "But never +mind them behind in the boats. They'll ketch us up soon. There's +another of them beauties coming at us. The beggars do seem hungry this +morning. We hardly seed any of them when we were coming up yesterday. +Why, of course, this is their breakfast-time, and the sight of us has +made them peckish. Now then, all together, lads! Let him have it." + +Four poles were thrust together, with somewhat similar effects to those +on the last occasion, for the onset of the great reptile was diverted, +the boat's head turned aside, and the blows aimed at them by the +creature's tail fell short, though to the men's dismay their efforts had +driven them towards another of the monsters, which was gliding towards +them from their left. + +But here again they successfully turned the creature aside, and Rodd +exclaimed-- + +"Suppose we missed!" + +"Oh, the beggars are too big to miss, sir," cried Briggs. "But suppose +we did; what then, sir?" + +"I don't know," cried Rodd excitedly. "What do you say, Joe?" + +"I don't know, sir. I never learned crocodile at school, though there +was one in my spelling-book, and I 'member I couldn't understand why a +four-legged chap like him, as lived in the water, should make a nest and +lay eggs like a bird. Here, Harry, let me handle that pole for a few +minutes. I should like to have a turn. Thank you, lad," he continued. +"Yes, they're rum beasts, Mr Rodd, sir, and I dare say they are very +slippery; but I don't suppose I shall miss the next one--Ah! Would +yer!" he shouted as one of the reptiles rose suddenly, open-mouthed, +close to the boat's head. + +As the man spoke he made a heavy thrust with his pole, his companions +having no time to take aim, and the next moment the hideous jaws snapped +to, there was a fresh swirl, the bamboo pole was jerked out of Joe's +hand, and he would have overbalanced himself and gone overboard had not +those nearest to him seized him and snatched him back. + +"Well, now," he cried, "just look at that!" For about half of the +bamboo remained visible and went sailing up the stream. + +Just then there was the sharp report of a gun from behind, followed by +another, while before there was time for re-loading there was the loud +_crack, crack_ of a double fowling-piece. + +"Hurrah! That's uncle!" cried Rodd. "They are firing at the +crocodiles, and it will be with bullets." + +"And sarve them jolly well right, Mr Rodd, say I," cried Joe, "for I +call it taking a mean advantage of a man to sneak off like that with his +pole. Why, look at him, sir. He's having a regular lark with it-- +picking his teeth, or something. Look how he's waggling the top of it +about. What do you say to try and steer after him and get it back?" + +"Ugh! No!" cried Rodd. "It would be madness." + +"Well, not quite so bad as that, sir. Say about half-cracked; and +that's about what I'm beginning to think. I say, they are getting all +the fun behind there." + +"Look out; here comes another!" cried Rodd, for there was a pair of eyes +in front gliding rapidly towards them just above the water, but +apparently not satisfied with the appearance of the boat, or perhaps +less ravenous, the two prominences softly disappeared before they were +close up, and Joe Cross, evidently divining what might happen, suddenly +caught Rodd round the waist and forced him down into the bottom of the +boat. + +"Look out, my lads!" he yelled. + +As he spoke the hinder part of the boat began slowly to rise, showing +that they were gliding right over a reptile's back. Then it was turned +to starboard, the water coming almost to the edge; but as it glided on +it began to sink to the level again, just as it received a heavy shock +from below and was driven forward with a jerk just far enough to escape +a blow from a serrated tail which rose astern and showered the water +over them in so much blinding spray. + +"Here, ahoy there!" shouted Joe. "Look alive, and bring up them guns! +There's more sport up here than we want. I wouldn't care, Mr Rodd, if +we had got our oars and my boat-hook. Nay, I don't know, though. It's +just as well I haven't, for I should be getting it stuck perhaps, and +never see that no more." + +A few minutes after, while the firing was kept up from astern, the two +boats came up on either side, and amidst the heartiest of +congratulations Rodd cried-- + +"Ah, uncle, you have overtaken us at last! I am glad you have come!" + +"Overtaken you, my boy! Why, we have been miles down the river towards +the mouth. We started as soon as the tide was slack enough for us to +leave the vessels. We must have passed you in the fog, and we were +beginning to despair. But we came upon one of the sailors' caps hanging +in a bough, when, thinking that perhaps we had gone too far, and Captain +Chubb feeling sure that you had run ashore somewhere in the darkness, +perhaps been carried right into the flooded forest, we came back and--" + +He ceased speaking, took a quick aim over the side of the boat, and +discharged the contents of his double gun into the head of a reptile +which rose three or four yards away. + +"The brutes!" he went on. "But there don't appear to be so many here. +We seem to have been coming through quite a shoal." + +"There's plenty of them," growled the skipper, "but three boats together +scares them a bit. Here, my lads, lay hold of this line and make fast, +and we will give you a tow back to the schooner. We shan't be long +getting up to it with this tide. Why, hallo here! Not content with +losing the oars and boat-hook, you've been and got the gig stove in! +And the grapnel gone too! Here, you Joe Cross, what's the meaning of +all this?" + +"I'll tell you about that, captain, by and by," said Rodd quickly. +"What's that? You want to come aboard, Morny? No, you had better not. +It's all muddy, and we shall have to begin baling. Pitch us in a couple +of tins." + +"I'll bring them," cried the young Frenchman, rising in the boat.--"Yes, +my father, I wish to go. Hook on, and let me get aboard," he continued +to the French coxswain. + +Half-an-hour later, with the men taking it in turns to bale, and with +the crocodiles seeming to have become more scarce, they ran up alongside +of the two anchored vessels, cheering and being cheered from the moment +they came into sight. + +"Now, my lads," cried the doctor, "every one of you take what I'll mix +up for you directly, and have a good bathe and rub down. I am not going +to have you all down with fever if I can stave it off." + + + +CHAPTER THIRTY SEVEN. + +TALKING LIKE A BOY. + +Perhaps it was nearly all weariness and the result of the excitement, +but it may have been due to Uncle Paul's potion; at any rate Rodd went +off fast asleep, and when he awoke it was to find Morny sitting by his +cot. "Hullo!" he cried. "You here!" + +"Yes, I am here," was the reply. "How are you?" + +"Oh, I am all right. Have I been to sleep?" + +"Well, yes, you have been to sleep," said Morny, smiling at him in a +rather peculiar way. + +"What are you laughing at?" + +"Oh, I was only smiling at you." + +"What, am I scratched and knocked about?" + +"Oh, very slightly." + +"But I say, I am so precious hungry. What time is it?" + +"Just upon six. Some bells or another, as you call it." + +"Get out! Why, it was seven o'clock this morning when I lay down to +sleep after my bath; so how can it be six o'clock? You don't mean to +say that it is six o'clock in the evening?" + +"Indeed, but I do. You had better jump up, or it will soon be dark." + +"What a nuisance! Why, I must have slept twelve hours." + +"Oh, you think so, do you? Yes, a good deal more than that. I was +getting quite alarmed about you, only your uncle said you were quite +right and you were to have your sleep out." + +"I say, look here," cried Rodd; "am I dreaming, or are you playing +tricks? I am getting muddled over this. I lay down this morning, and +as soon as my head was on the pillow I must have gone off fast asleep." + +"Yes, but it was yesterday morning." + +Rodd sat up quickly in his cot and screwed himself round to stare hard +in his companion's face. + +"Look here," he cried, "you are playing tricks!" + +"Indeed I'm not! You've been sleeping for about a day and a half." + +"Well!" cried Rodd, beginning to dress hurriedly. "But never mind. I +will make up for it by not going to sleep for a whole day. Look here, +you know what's been going on. Where are we? Going up farther so as to +get a mooring-place?" + +"We came up yesterday, miles higher up the river, and the brig's moored +close by an open part of the shore. There, make haste and finish +dressing and come and look." + +The lad dressed himself probably more quickly than he had ever achieved +the performance before in his life, and in the process he learned that +his uncle and Captain Chubb were on board the brig with several of the +men, the skipper superintending the moorings and the arranging of cables +from the brig to a couple of great forest trees, with tackle so ordered +that the vessel could be careened over to any extent desired, and that +the next morning she was to be allowed to sink with the tide so as to be +bedded in the mud and laid over until the bottom was so exposed that the +carpenter and his mates could get to work. + +As soon as Rodd had hurried on deck he found all as his companion had +described, while he had just mastered these facts when there was the +sharp report of a gun. + +"What's that?" he cried. + +"Oh, only your uncle having a shot at a crocodile. Both he and my +father have been at it all day, sending bullets into them whenever a +head appeared on the surface of the water." + +"But I say, look here, Morny; why didn't this wake me?" + +"Oh, you were shut up down here and too fast asleep." + +"Then that would be uncle's dose," cried Rodd. "He must have given me +too much. Why, he might have killed me." + +"Oh no. I expect he knew too well what he was about. He seems to have +kept off the fever." + +"Fever, yes! Has anybody else got it?" + +"No. Your men are quite well." + +"But they didn't sleep as long as I have?" cried Rodd anxiously. + +"Not quite; but they all had very long sleeps, and my father says that +they would have been longer if their messmates had not disturbed them. +Now then, you had better go back to your cabin again. The steward told +me that he was keeping some breakfast ready for you to have at any +time." + +"Wait a bit," cried Rodd, and he hailed his uncle and Captain Chubb +before having a good look round at their position, and finding that they +were in a beautiful open reach of the river, with the forest overhanging +the stream on one side, while on that where the brig was seated close in +shore there were only a few scattered trees, and those of large size, +for the main portion of the forest had retired back nearly a quarter of +a mile. + +The next morning, as arrangements had been made to begin work at +daylight, Captain Chubb and certain of the men, including Joe Cross, had +their breakfasts by lamplight, and were on board the brig long before +the sun rose. + +Then came a busy time, with everybody anxiously watching for the success +of Captain Chubb's plans. + +He took his place upon the brig with the schooner's carpenter, the two +lads bargaining that they might stay too, and as the tide sank the brig, +which had been hauled in close to the bank at high water, soon touched +bottom, her keel settling down steadily into the mud, and in due time +began to careen over more and more, her progress being governed by a +couple of capstans that had been arranged upon the shore. This went on +until long before low water she was lying so much over on her side away +from the shore that the sail that had been used as a plaister, as Rodd +called it, was slackened off, and one of the holes made by the cannon +ball fully exposed to view. + +Then followed a busy time, the carpenter and his mates stripping off the +copper and using their saws hour after hour as long as the tide left the +leak bare, while after working as long as was possible, pieces of new +thin plank were temporarily nailed on over the now much-enlarged +opening, which was carefully caulked and all made as secure as possible. + +This done, the capstans were manned again, and with the rising tide the +brig raised to her proper position, and secured for the night, but +hauled in as close to the shore as was possible, with the consequence +that though the water rose through the untouched leak considerably, it +never reached so high within as the point it had occupied with the pumps +hard at work. + +It proved to be a much longer job than had been anticipated, though the +men worked as hard as was possible while the tide was low. + +But the time passed very pleasantly for Rodd and his uncle, for they +took their stations on board the anchored schooner, firing at every +crocodile that showed itself, the presence of the men at work upon the +muddy exposed shore proving an irresistible attraction during the first +part of the time. But so many had been sent writhing and lashing the +water, to float down-stream, that at last they began to grow shy, and +the sportsmen were enabled to direct some of their charges of small shot +at specimens of beautiful birds that came within range, as well as at +the abundant waterfowl--ducks and geese--that gathered morning and +evening to feed, but often to become food for the hideous reptiles that +lurked beneath the trees close in shore. + +This latter sport proved highly welcome to the crews of both vessels, +providing as it did a pleasant change of diet after so much salt +provision, for very few fish were caught, consequent upon the way in +which they were persecuted by the reptiles. + +"I wish you would join in. I am sure you can shoot well," said Rodd; +but Morny shook his head. + +"No," he said; "my father is so anxious to see the brig repaired." + +"Yes, I suppose so," said Rodd, "but that wouldn't make any difference. +You can't help." + +"No, I cannot help," replied the lad, "and I should like to be with you +all the time, but I can't leave his side. It would seem so hard if I +didn't stay with him to share his anxiety." + +"Well, but you might have a few shots at the crocodiles. That's helping +to protect the men who are at work." + +"True," replied Morny, smiling. "But you two are such clever shots. +You can do all that. Don't ask me again, please." + +Rodd was silent. + +But during the long dark evenings in that grand and solitary reach of +the river, which looked as if it had never been visited by human beings +before, there would have been most enjoyable times had not the Count +seemed so preoccupied and thoughtful. Still it had become the custom +that there should be a constant interchange of courtesies between the +occupants of the two vessels, the sailors thoroughly fraternising, while +their superiors alternately dined together upon schooner or brig, and a +thorough rivalry sprang up between the English and French cooks as to +who should provide the best meals for officers and men. + +"I should like for us to make an excursion right up the river as far as +we could go in the boats," said Rodd one evening, to his French +companion. "Uncle wants to go." + +"Then why don't you?" said Morny. "You have plenty of time," he added, +with a sigh, "for the repairs go on very slowly. One of the leaks is +not stopped yet." + +"They are not going on slowly," retorted Rodd. "I talked to Captain +Chubb about it, and he said the work must be thoroughly done, so as to +make the brig as good as ever she was." + +"Yes, they are doing it well," said Morny sadly. + +"He said--" continued Rodd, with a laugh; and then he stopped short. + +"Well, why don't you go on?" + +"Oh, never mind. You wouldn't like it. You are sensitive, and it might +hurt your feelings." + +"I promise you it shall not. Tell me what the captain said." + +"Well, he said he wasn't going to have any Frenchmen throw it in his +teeth that he hadn't done his best because it was a French boat, and +that he was taking more pains over it than he should have done if it had +been ours." + +Morny laughed. + +"Oh yes," he said, "I know he is doing his best, and I wouldn't care, +only my father is so anxious to get to sea again." + +"Well, all in good time," cried Rodd. "They are fitting the copper +sheathing on again, and to-morrow they will begin careening the brig +over so as to get at the other side." + +"Ha! Yes," said the French lad, with a sigh of satisfaction. "Well, +you take your boat to-morrow, and plenty of men and ammunition, and go +on a good long excursion." + +"Shan't," said Rodd gruffly. + +"But why not?" + +"Aren't going without you." + +"What nonsense! I'm busy. You are free." + +"I am not. If we went away leaving you alone with a brig that won't +swim, who knows what would happen? The crocs would send the news all up +and down the river that we were gone away, and come on at you with a +rush." + +"That's absurd! You talk like a boy." + +"Well, I am one. Yes, that is nonsense. But suppose a whole tribe of +niggers came down out of the forest to attack you." + +"They couldn't. You know yourself that the forest is impassable except +to wild beasts." + +"Well, then, perhaps they would come down, or up--yes, up; they wouldn't +come down, and find you helpless, because we should meet them and come +back to help you." + +"We could fight," said Morny coolly, "and sink their canoes with the big +guns." + +"What, when they are fast lashed to one side, and your deck all of a +slope? No, we are not going, so don't bother about it any more. Who +knows but what there may be towns of savages right up inland, or up some +other river farther along the coast? I dare say it's a beautiful +country--and there, I won't hear another word. We are not going away to +leave you in the lurch. Uncle said as much. He likes the Count too +well." + +Morny laughed merrily. + +"Why," he said, "he's always quarrelling with my father and hurting his +feelings by the way in which he speaks about our great Emperor." + +"Stuff!" cried Rodd indignantly. "That's only Uncle Paul's way. He +always talks like that when he gets on to politics. Why, I have a sham +quarrel with him sometimes about Napoleon. I pretend that I admire him +very much." + +"Pretend!" cried Morny eagerly. + +"Well, I tell uncle that he was a very great general and soldier." + +"Yes, yes! Grand!" said the French lad, flushing. + +"And that I shouldn't have wondered at all if he had conquered the whole +world." + +"Yes, yes!" cried Morny excitedly. "That was brave of you! And what +did your uncle say?" + +"Said I was a young scoundrel, and that if I wasn't so big, and that he +disliked corporal punishment, he'd give me a good thrashing to bring me +to my senses." + +"And you--you--" cried Morny, grasping him by the arm, "what did you say +to that?" + +"Nothing at all. Only burst out laughing." + +"Burst out laughing?" + +"Yes, and then Uncle Paul would grunt out `Humbug!' and we were good +friends again." + +The young Frenchman shrugged his shoulders and shook his head. + +"Ah, yes," he said. "Even those who worshipped him mock at the Emperor +now that he is in misfortune--even you, Rodd. But I can forgive you, +because you are English and the natural enemies of our great Emperor. +But those of our countrymen--cowards and slaves--parasites of the new +King. _Laches_! Cowards! But let us talk of something else. You make +me like you, Rodd. You always did, and--" + +"Ah-h-h! Getting on dangerous ground. Now look here; will you come +with us shooting?" + +"No. I have told you why." + +"Well, I am horribly disappointed. But I like you for it all the more, +Morny. You are a regular trump to your father." + +"I!" cried the young man fiercely. "I play the trumpet to my father! +Never! If I praise him it is all the truth, because he is so honest and +brave and good." + +"Why, what's the matter now?" cried Rodd in astonishment. "Oh, I see-- +trump! You don't know all our English expressions yet. Where's your +dictionary?" + +"There was no such word in it that I do not understand," cried the lad. + +"Then it isn't a good one," said Rodd merrily. + +Explanations followed, and the two lads parted that evening, both eager +for the coming of the following day and the attack that was to be made +upon the second leak where the ball from the fort had made its exit on +the other side nearer the keel. + + + +CHAPTER THIRTY EIGHT. + +A PROPOSED ADVENTURE. + +It was a busy and an anxious day. The brig's guns had been carefully +ran to starboard and firmly lashed, and the yards lowered down, her +topmasts struck, and all made ready for laying her right over in the mud +at low water, so that her spars should be upon the shore. + +"It wouldn't do to lay her over like this," said the skipper gruffly, +"if she were full of cargo. It would mean a bad shifting. But I think +we can manage, and I'll risk it. We can easily start her water casks." + +There was no question of shooting that day, Rodd preferring to stay with +his French friend; and the doctor seemed to quite share the Count's +anxiety as they watched the proceedings of the sailors while the tide +went down. + +But everything went on admirably. As the water sank a steady strain was +kept upon the cables, and by slow degrees the brig careened over towards +the land till the newly-repaired side sank lower and lower, and she lay +more and more over, till at last the water that had flooded the hold +began to flow out with the tide till the beautiful vessel lay perfectly +helpless upon her side, with the whole of her keel visible upon the long +stretch of mud. Then Captain Chubb, taking hold of a rope which he had +made fast to the larboard rail, climbed over on to the brig's side, and +steadying himself by the cord, walked right down and stood shaking his +head at the ghastly wound which the vessel had received. + +For after passing right through the hold, the cannon ball had struck +upon and shattered one of what are technically called the ship's knees, +ripping off a great patch of the planking and tearing through the copper +sheathing, which was turned back upon the keel, making a ragged hole +several times the size of the fairly clean-cut orifice by which the shot +had entered. + +"You had better come and have a look here, Count," cried the captain--an +invitation which was accepted by several of those interested, and in a +very short time an anxious group was gathered round the vessel's injury. + +"Well, sir," said the skipper, in his rough, brusque way; "what do you +say to that?" + +"Horrible!" groaned the Count. "My poor vessel!" And he looked at the +captain in despair. + +"Well, sir," said the latter, "if anybody had told me that I could make +a patch with sails over the bottom of your brig so as to keep her afloat +as I have, I should have felt ready to call him a fool. It's a wonder +to me that you kept her afloat as you did, before you came to us for +help." + +"But now, captain," cried the Count, as his son looked anxiously on, "is +it possible, away from a shipyard, to mend this as well as you have done +the other injury?" + +"Well, sir, if we were close to some port I should say, no, certainly +not; but seeing where we are, there's only one thing to be done." + +"Yes? And that--?" cried the Count. + +"Do it, sir. But it will take some time." + +The Count made an impatient gesticulation, and then threw his hands +apart in a deprecating way, as if he accepted the position in despair. + +"Yes," he said; "you brave Englishmen, you never give up. You will do +it, then?" + +"Oh yes, sir; we've got to do it; and what do they say? Time and tide +wait for no man; so I'll thank you all to clear off and let me and my +lads get to work. Only look here, sir; there's going to be no hoisting +and lowering here. We shall have to keep the brig lying on her side +without any temporary patches, and the tide will have to flow in and +out, even if it does some damage to your stores. So while my lads are +stripping off the copper, you will keep your men busy with your hatches +open to make a pretty good clearance inside, so that we can work in +there as well as out here." + +"Yes, yes," said the Count, who seemed to quite resign himself in full +obedience to the skipper's wishes. "But you will use all the speed you +can?" + +"You may trust me for that, sir," said Captain Chubb; for after two or +three attempts in the early parts of the proceedings connected with the +repairs, and saying Monsieur le Count, the blunt Englishman gave it up +in favour of plain straightforward "sir," and stuck to it; while the +titled captain seemed to like the Englishman none the less. + +"Now," said the captain, as he climbed back on to the sloping deck, +following the others, "I didn't know that your brig would be so bad as +this, but I had my suspicions, and when I have not been busy here I have +been casting my eye round for a good crooked bit of timber that would +make a ship's knee if I wanted one." + +"And do you know where there is one?" + +"Yes," said the skipper; "and I think it will make a very good +makeshift, for the wood's as hard as hard. But what wouldn't I give for +a good old crooked piece of Devon oak from out of Dartmoor Forest!" + +Shortly afterwards he had set the carpenter and his mates to strip off +the copper sheathing, while he led off Joe Cross and another man about a +quarter of a mile away from the river bank to where a huge pollard-like +tree was growing at the edge of the forest, all gnarled and twisted in +the most extraordinary way. + +The two lads had followed them, and Rodd looked at the selected tree +aghast. + +"Why, you are never going to set the men to cut down that tree, +captain?" he cried. + +"Why not, my lad? Do you know a better bit?" + +"Better bit!" cried Rodd. "Why, the men can hardly get through that +with those axes. Most likely take them a fortnight--I might say a +month." + +"Ah, well, I don't want it all. I am not going to load up the brig with +a cargo of timber. I only want that big dwarf branch from low down +there where it starts from close to the root; and you will mind and get +that big elbow-like piece as long as you can, Joe Cross." + +"Ay, ay, sir! Just you mark out what you want, and we'll cut accordin'. +Better take all the top off first, hadn't us?" + +"Why, of course, my lad. One of you use the saw while the other works +away with an axe. You quite understand?" + +"Ay, ay, sir; me and my mate has seen a ship's knee afore now;" and +rolling up their sleeves, they soon made the place echo with the blows +of the axe, while the rasping harsh sound of the saw seemed to excite a +flock of beautifully-plumaged parrots, which began to circle round the +head of the tree, before finally settling amongst the branches uttering +their sharp screeching cries, and giving vent to croaking barks, as if +resenting this attack upon their domain. + +The carpenter and his men were meanwhile hard at work at the copper +sheathing, making such progress that they were busy with their saws, +dividing plank and trenail and working their way round the hole by the +time the tide had risen sufficiently to drive them back, and then the +Count and his party grouped themselves as best they could about their +old quarters, looking despondently at what seemed like the beginning of +a very hopeless wreck, a good deal of confidence being needed on their +part to feel that all would come right in the end. + +Fortunately the tide during the next two or three days did not rise so +high, and good progress was made, while, thanks to the way in which the +French crew had worked, the damage done by the water as it flowed in +through the gap that was made was principally confined to its leaving a +thick deposit of mud. + +The doctor tried all he could to persuade the Count to take up his abode +upon the schooner, and offered to accommodate as many men as he liked to +bring with him, but he would not hear of it, and, as Rodd said +laughingly to Morny, insisted upon living all upon one side and climbing +instead of walking about the deck. + +Then all at once there was a surprise. It was on the third day, when +Joe Cross and his mate had called in the aid of a couple more to help +drag the ponderous roughed-out piece of crooked timber to the waterside +ready for the carpenter and his men to work into shape with their adzes, +and while the latter were slaving away at high pressure to get all +possible done before they were stopped by the tide, that, in obedience +to a shout from Captain Chubb, all the men of the schooner's crew +hurried to their boat to get on board, while those of the brig hurried +to their arms ready for any emergency. For coming up with the tide and +round a bend of the river, a large three-masted schooner made its +appearance with what seemed to be quite a large crew of well-armed men +clustering forward, and apparently surprised at seeing that the river +had its occupants already there. + +"What do you make of them, sir?" shouted the skipper through his +speaking trumpet. + +"A foreigner--Spanish, I think," shouted back the Count, after lowering +his spy-glass. "Same here, sir. Slaver, I think." The fact of her +proving to be a slaver did not mean that an attack was looming in the +future, but slaving vessels upon the West Coast of Africa bore a very +bad reputation, and the preparations that were rapidly made did not +promise much of a welcome. + +As the stranger drew near it was evident that busy preparations were +being made there too, but in his brief colloquy with Uncle Paul the +skipper grunted out that he did not think the foreign vessel meant to +attack, but to be ready to take care of herself in case the English +schooner tried to surprise her and make her a prize. + +"We ought to have taken the boat," he said, "and gone up. It seems to +me that there must be a town up there somewhere--savage town, of course, +belonging to some chief, for it aren't likely that there can be three of +us all coming out here into this river on a scientific cruise. Two's +curious enough, English and French, but a Spaniel won't do at all. For +that's what she is, sir, plain enough. Well, if she means fight, sir, +you mean business, I suppose?" + +"Of course," said the doctor sternly; "and I am quite sure that we can +depend upon the Count's help." + +"Ay, ay, sir; but it's a bad job the brig can't manoeuvre at all." + +"But I should say," said the doctor, "that when these men see how firm +we are and well prepared, they will prove peaceable enough." + +As it proved in a short time after colours had been hoisted, those of +the French brig being raised upon a spare spar, the stranger came +steadily on in the most peaceable way till the tide had carried her +within reasonable distance of the schooner's anchorage, when an order +rang out, an anchor was lowered with a splash, and as she swung slowly +round, a light boat was dropped from the davits, and a swarthy-looking +Spaniard, who seemed to be an officer if not the skipper of the +swift-looking raking craft, had himself rowed alongside the schooner. A +brief colloquy took place in which questions and answers freely passed, +Captain Chubb speaking out frankly as to the object of their mission +there, an avowal hardly necessary, for the appearance of the brig with +the newly-cut hole, and her position, told its own story. + +The Spanish skipper, for so he proved to be, was just as free in his +announcements as soon as he found that the brig and schooner were +friendly vessels, and began to explain that he was on a trading +expedition, that there was a king of the country up there, a great black +chief, who had a large town, and that he came from time to time with +stores to barter, which he always did with great advantage, going away +afterwards pretty well laden with palm-oil and sundries, which the +blacks always had waiting for his annual visit, these sundries +including, he said, with a meaning laugh, ostrich feathers, choice dye +woods, ivory, and a little gold. + +He spoke strongly accented but very fair English, and made no scruple +about coming on board the schooner and examining her critically as he +talked. + +"I thought at first, captain, that you had found out my private trading +port and were going to be a rival;" whereupon the doctor began chatting +freely with him and asking questions about the natural products of the +place; and Rodd listened eagerly, drinking in the replies made by the +Spanish captain as soon as he thoroughly realised the object of the +schooner's visit and the bearing of the doctor's questions. + +He soon became eagerly communicative regarding the wild beasts that +haunted the forests, the serpents that were found of great size, the +leopards and other wild cats that might be shot for their skins, the +beauty of the plumage of the birds, and above all the wondrous size of +the apes that haunted the trees. + +"There's gold too to be washed out of the soil," he said, looking hard +at Rodd; "but don't you touch it. Leave that to the blacks." + +"Why?" said Rodd. + +"Because," said the man, shaking a fore-finger at him, upon which was a +thick gold ring, "the white men who turn up the wet earth to wash it out +get fever." + +"But," said the doctor, "we have not come gold-hunting. And so there +are great apes in these forests? Have you seen them?" + +"Oh, yes," said the Spanish captain. "I have been coming here for ten +years, and never saw another vessel up here before--only the big canoes +of the blacks. Why, I could take you into the forest and show you +plenty of beautiful birds and flowers, and all kinds of wonders." + +"But the forest seems to be impassable," put in Rodd. + +"Yes," said the Spaniard, with a laugh--"to those who don't know their +way. Higher up there are small rivers which run into this, where boats +can go up and get to where the trees are not all crowded together, but +more open like this patch here," he continued, waving his hand to where +the forest retired back. "There are sluggish streams where you can +wander for days, and camp ashore, and shoot all kinds of things. I used +to at one time, when it was all new to me; and I collected skins and +sent them to Cadiz and other European cities, where they sold well. But +I have given all that up long enough. The black king--bah!--chief--he's +only a savage. He makes his people collect the palm-oil and other +things for me, and I load up and take them back." + +"Then you would make a good guide," said the doctor. + +"I, captain?" said the man eagerly. "Oh yes. A man could not come here +for ten years, and stay a month or two each time, without getting to +know the country well." + +"I suppose not. But this is the captain. I am only a doctor, +travelling to make discoveries." + +"Ah, a doctor!" cried the Spaniard eagerly. "Then you will help me and +one or two of my men! Yes? I will pay you well." + +"Oh," said the doctor quietly, "if I can help you, or any one with you +who needs assistance, I will do so, of course. I want no pay, but I +might ask you to guide me and my nephew here in a little expedition or +two into the forest." + +"Uncle," said Rodd quickly, "we mustn't leave the Count and Morny." + +"Well, well," said the doctor, "we'll see about that." + +"I am glad to know you, Senor Medico," said the Spaniard, patting on the +stiffness of the formal Don and bowing profoundly, "and I will gladly +help you in any way I can. But I am only a poor trader, and glad to do +any business I can when I meet a strange ship that has needs. Do you +want powder? I see you have guns," he said sharply. + +"Oh yes," said the doctor. "One never knows what enemies one may meet +with among savage people; so we are well-armed, and as you see have a +good crew." + +"Yes, yes," said the Spaniard, looking sharply round. + +"But I thank you. We have plenty of powder." + +"So have I," said the Spaniard. "The black chief is always glad to buy +it, and guns too. That is my money--that and rum. Those will always +buy palm-oil. But I have plenty of ship stores; canvas, oakum, and +pitch. You are mending the other ship, I see. Can I sell you some?" + +"I thank you, no," said the doctor. "We are well supplied, I think, +with everything; and in reply, if there is anything you want that we can +supply to you I shall be pleased." + +"Then I should like a few canisters of your good English powder." + +"Thought you said you'd plenty," said Captain Chubb gruffly. + +The Spaniard closed his eyes slowly till they were like two narrow +slits, and he gave the skipper a meaning nod. + +"Yes," he said significantly, "I have plenty. It is good for the black +man's guns. But if you fired it from yours--pff! It makes much smoke, +and the barrel very wet, and the shot do not go too far. But the black +men know no better. I do. Ha, ha! You will let me have a few pounds +for my own pistols?" + +"And that long gun of yours too?" said the skipper. + +"Yes," said the Spaniard. "As your medico says, one never knows what +savage people one may meet. It is good too behind a bullet for our +friends here in the river. You have seen them?" + +He put his wrists together with his palms closed, and then slowly opened +them widely in imitation of a crocodile's jaws, and closed them with a +snap. + +"Oh yes," said Rodd, "we have met them, and found out how horny their +skins are." + +"Ugh! Beasts!" said the Spaniard. "Last time I was here they swept two +of my men out of a boat, and I never saw them more. We caught some fish +as we came up the river, at the mouth. _Adios, senores_; I will send +you some. We shall meet again. I do not hurry for some days, for I am +before my time." + +"How far is it up to the town?" asked Captain Chubb. + +"Three days' journey. This is a great river, and the water is deep +right up into the country till you reach the mountains, far beyond the +town." + +"Well," said the doctor, "let's go ashore, Rodd, and tell the Count. We +didn't bargain for this, eh, captain?" + +"No," said the skipper gruffly, as he watched the departing boat, after +ordering the crew back into their own so as to row the doctor and his +nephew to the brig. + +"Well, Rodd," continued the doctor, "it would be a grand chance for us +to have some expeditions with a good guide. What do you think of the +Spanish captain?" + +"Don't like him at all, uncle. There's a nasty, catty, foxy look about +him." + +"A mixture of the feline and the canine, eh, my boy? Well, he must be a +bad one! Ah! British prejudice is as strong in you as it is in me." + + + +CHAPTER THIRTY NINE. + +SPANISH LIQUORICE. + +There was quite a discussion when the doctor joined those waiting by the +brig, the Count being bitterly annoyed and displaying more excitement +than the others had seen in him before, while Morny kept close to his +side, and whispered to him from time to time, as if trying to calm him +down. + +"Yes, yes, my son," he cried passionately, and speaking to him in +French; "but you are a boy, and do not think. Look here," and he +pointed to the helpless brig, "how do we know but that he may be an +enemy? And we are in this helpless state, quite at his mercy." + +The doctor was listening attentively, and understood every word. + +"I know," he said soothingly, "this must be very painful for you; but +Captain Chubb believes that before many days are over the brig will be +as strong as ever. I answer for him that he is making every effort to +finish what he has undertaken." + +Uncle Paul directed a glance at the skipper, who stood scowling close +by. + +"Thank you, doctor," he granted, as he gave a nod. "And I feel sure +that this Spanish captain, who is evidently an ordinary trader, will +prove perfectly inoffensive; and besides, my dear sir, we are not at war +now, and what enemies can you have to fear?" + +"Ah, yes," said the Count bitterly, as he made a deprecating gesture +with his hands, turning and directing his words at his son; "what +enemies can we have to fear?" + +"Well, I am glad you look upon it in that light," said the doctor. +"Now, if it had been years ago, with your smart little craft, and you +had been followed up here by a small sloop of war, or an English letter +of marque, you might have expected to be made a prize. But this is an +ordinary Spanish schooner, and though I suspected it at first, I don't +think she is tainted by the slave trade, but engaged in traffic with the +natives for the sake of palm-oil." + +"Perhaps you are right, sir," said the Count. + +"I feel sure I am," said the doctor, "and I must confess to having +hailed this man's coming, from the help he will be to me in a little +expedition I propose to make when we have seen the brig restored and all +set right." + +"I thank you," said the Count, "but I am so anxious for the success of +my own scientific search that I have got into the habit of seeing +enemies in every one, even as I did, doctor, in you and your men. And +you see this is an armed vessel with a very strong crew." + +"Well," said the doctor good-humouredly, "we have armed vessels with +very strong crews. Anxiety has made you nervous, Count. Here's your +doctor," he said, turning to Captain Chubb, "and before many days have +passed he will have cured all your trouble, and we can get to sea +again." + +"Ah, yes, that will be better," said the Count, wiping his moist brow. +"You must forgive me, doctor--and you too, Captain Chubb. I am +impatient, I know. But I see now all will be well. One moment, though: +you said we can get to sea again. _We_? You will sail with me?" + +"My dear sir," said the doctor, "you need have no fear. Captain Chubb +will make your brig as sound as ever. You will need to look for no +further assistance from me." + +"I did not mean that," said the Count hastily. "I meant brotherly +help--the help that one devoted to research could give to another." + +"But," said the doctor, laughing, "you have never confided to me what +particular form of research yours is." + +"No, I have not," said the Count hurriedly, "and I ask you to spare me +from explanation. Be satisfied if I say that we are both bound upon +great missions, and that you, a brother scientist, can give me enormous +help by working in company with me for the next few weeks at most. Is +this too much to ask of a learned doctor like you?" + +"Oh no," said Uncle Paul good-humouredly; "I do not see that it is. You +are not going to ask me to help you to escape from an English prison." + +The Count gave an involuntary start. + +"Of course not," said the doctor, "for I am thankful that all that kind +of trouble is at an end, and that France and England are at peace; and +besides, you are free to come and go where you please. Well, as your +son and my nephew have become such inseparable friends, and my time is +my own, I will ask no questions, but sail where you sail, and pick up +what I can to complete my specimens while you continue your research; +and believe me, I wish you every success." + +"Ah," said the Count, with a sigh of satisfaction; and with all a +Frenchman's effusiveness he laid his hands on the doctor's shoulders and +said, with some little show of emotion, "I thank you. You are making me +as great a friend as my son is to your nephew." + +Watch was mounted on both vessels at night as if they were in the +presence of a dangerous enemy; but there in the great solitude of that +forest through which the river ran, there was nothing human to disturb +the night. + +Savage nature was as busy as ever during the dark hours through which +the creatures of land and water fled for their lives or pursued their +prey. Otherwise everything was wondrously still, and those upon +schooner or brig who might have felt doubtful about the Spanish craft +saw or heard nothing save the low murmur of voices in conversation and +the occasional opening or shutting of a dull lantern, whose use was +explained by the sudden glow cast upon the face of some swarthy sailor +as he lit a fresh cigarette, after which a couple of faint points of +glowing light rising and falling might have been seen passing to and fro +upon the Spaniard's deck. + +Then as daylight came again there was the busy sound of the saw, +chipping of the adze, the creak of auger, and the loud echoing rap of +the mallet, as some tree-nail was driven home. + +On the previous evening the conversation that had gone on between the +doctor and the Count had hardly ended before the Spaniard's boat, rowed +by a couple of men, came as near as they could get to the brig, and one +of the bare-legged men, after giving a sharp look round into the shallow +water, as if in search of danger from one of the hideous reptiles on the +look-out for prey, stepped over into the mud, and came up, bearing a +basket of large, freshly-caught fish, which he placed in the hands of a +couple of the sailors, and then stood waiting. + +"Ah!" cried the doctor. "The fish the Spanish captain promised me. Our +thanks to your master, and I will not forget what he wanted." + +The man answered him in Spanish. + +"Ah, now you are taking me out of my depth," said the doctor. "Do you +speak French?" + +The man shook his head. + +"English, then?" + +"_No comprende, senor_," replied the man hurriedly--or what sounded like +it. + +"Never mind, then," said the doctor. "I'll send your skipper some +powder to-morrow." + +The man shook his head and made signs, repeating them persistently, +frowning and shaking his head. + +"I think he means, uncle," cried Rodd, "that he won't go away until you +have paid him in powder for the fish." + +"Hang the fellow!" cried the doctor petulantly. "Why hasn't he been +taught English? I don't carry canisters of gunpowder about in my +pockets. Can any one make him understand that the powder is in the +little magazine on the schooner?" + +"What does he want? Some gunpowder?" said the Count. + +"Yes. I promised him a present of a few pound canisters." + +"We can get at ours," said the Count quietly, and giving an order to the +French sailor who acted as his mate, the latter mounted into the brig, +disappeared down the cabin hatchway, and returned in a few minutes with +half-a-dozen canisters, with which the man smilingly departed, after +distributing a few elaborate Spanish bows. + +The weather was glorious, and all that next day good steady progress was +made with the brig repairs, while Rodd and his uncle spent most of the +time keeping guard over the workmen and sending crocodile after +crocodile floating with the tide, to the great delight of the grinning +crew of the Spaniard, who lined the new-comer's bulwarks as if they were +spectators of some exhibition, and clapped their hands and shouted loud +_vivas_ at every successful shot, while all the time tiny little curls +of smoke rose at intervals into the sunny air as the men kept on making +fresh cigarettes as each stump was thrown with a _ciss_ into the gliding +stream. + +"Quiet and lazy enough set, Pickle," said the doctor. "How they can +bask and sleep in the sunshine! It's an easy-going life, that of +theirs. Ah, there's the skipper! Fierce-looking fellow. He looks like +a man who could use a knife. But you don't half read your Shakespeare, +my boy." + +"What's Shakespeare got to do with that fierce-looking Spaniard using +his knife, uncle?" + +"Only this, my boy," said the doctor, drawing the ramrod out of his +double gun and trying whether the wads were well down upon the bullets, +for a couple of the ugly prominences that arched over a big crocodile's +eyes came slowly gliding down the stream; "I mean that a +Shakespeare-reading boy clever at giving nicknames--and that you can do +when you like--would have called that fellow Bottom the Weaver." + +"I don't see why, uncle. Bottom the Weaver?" said the boy musingly, as +he slowly raised his gun. + +"No, no; stop there, Rodd! That's my shot. I saw the brute first." + +"All right, uncle; only don't miss;" and the boy lowered his gun. "But +who was Bottom the Weaver?" + +"Tut, tut, tut!" ejaculated the doctor. "I say, this is a big one, +Rodd--a monster." + +"Here, I recollect, uncle. He was the man who was going to play lion." + +"Good boy, Pickle; not so ignorant as I thought you were. Well, didn't +he say he'd roar him as gently as any sucking dove, so as not to +frighten the ladies?" + +"Yes, uncle." + +"Well, didn't our knife-armed Spaniard roar to us as gently as--" + +_Bang_. + +"Got him!" cried the doctor. + +"No, no; a miss," cried Rodd. + +_Bang_, again. + +"That wasn't," said the doctor, and as the smoke drifted away there was +a burst of _vivas_ again from the Spaniards as they saw their dangerous +enemy writhing upon the surface with the contortions of an eel, as it +turned and twined, and then lashed the water up into foam, till in a +spasmodic effort it dived out of sight and was seen no more. + +"Poor fellow!" said Joe Cross from the brig, in the most sympathetic of +tones. "Such a fine handsome one too, Mr Rodd, sir! Talk about a +smile, when he put his head out of the water, why, a tiger couldn't +touch it! It must have been three times as long." + +So the work went on, and the tyrants of the river perished slowly, but +did not seem to shrink in numbers. But the carpentering party were able +to do their work in safety, and when, after the interval for dinner had +ended, Uncle Paul and his nephew carried on what Rodd called a reptilian +execution, the Spaniard's crew were lying about in the sunshine asleep +upon their deck. They were too idle to take any interest in the +shooting, while their captain, a rather marked object in the sunshine +from the bright scarlet scarf about his waist, worn to keep up his snowy +white duck trousers, lay upon the top of the big three-masted schooner's +deck-house with his face turned to the glowing sun, and with a cigarette +always in his mouth. + +"I believe he goes on smoking when he's asleep, uncle," said Rodd. + +"Yes, Pickle, and if I were an artist and wanted to paint a +representation of idleness, there's just the model I should select. +They are a lazy lot." + +"Yes, uncle, and twice over to-day I saw them talking together, and I +feel sure that they were laughing at our men because they worked." + +No communication whatever took place between the strangers and the first +occupants of the anchorage till after dark, when, as Rodd was leaning +over the taffrail talking to Joe Cross, who said he was cooling himself +down after a hot day's work, the Spaniard's boat was dimly seen putting +off from the big schooner, and was rowed across, to come close alongside +as Joe hailed her. + +The Spanish skipper looked up, cigarette in mouth, and nodded to Rodd. + +"You tell your ship-master," he said, "that I have been thinking about +the birds and the spotted leopards and the big monkeys. I know a place +where they swarm. Good-night!" And at a word his boat was thrust off +again and rowed back towards the gangway from which they came. + +"Well, let 'em swarm," said Joe Cross, as if talking to himself. "I +don't mind. This 'ere's a savage country, and 'tis their nature to. He +seems a rum sort of a buffer, Mr Rodd, sir. What does he mean by that? +Was it Spanish chaff?" + +"Oh no, Joe. My uncle was asking him about what curiosities there are +in the country. That's why he said he had been thinking about them." + +"Oh, I see. But how rum things is, and how easy a man can make +mistakes! Now, if I had been asked my opinion I should have said that +that there was a chap as couldn't think even in Spanish; sort of a +fellow as could eat, sleep and smoke, and then begin again, day after +day and year after year. This is a rum sort of a world, Mr Rodd, sir, +and there's all sorts of people in it. Now look at that there skipper. +He fancies hisself, he does, pretty creature! White trousers, clean +shirt every morning, and a red scarf round his waist. 'Andsome he calls +hisself, I suppose. He don't know that even a respectable dog as went +to drink in a river and saw hisself, like that there other dog in the +fable, would go and drown hisself on the spot if he found he'd a great +set of brown teeth like his!" + +"Ah, Joe, Spaniards are not like Englishmen." + +"Oh, but I don't call him a Spaniard, sir. I've seen Spaniards--regular +grand Dons, officers and gentlemen, with nothing the matter with them at +all, only what they couldn't help, and that's being Spaniards instead of +Englishmen. These are sort of mongrels. Some of this 'ere crew are +what people call mollottoes. They are supposed to be painted white men, +but payed over with a dirty tar-brush. Talk about a easy-going lot! +Why, I aren't seen one of them do a stroke of work to-day. They are in +the ile trade, aren't they, sir? Palm-oil." + +"Yes, Joe; I suppose so." + +"Ah, that accounts for it, sir. Handling so much ile that it makes them +go so easy." + +The sailor burst into a long soft laugh, "What are you laughing at, +Joe?" + +"That warn't laughing, sir; that was smiling. When I laugh hearty you +can hear me a long way off." + +"Well, what were you smiling at?" + +"I was thinking, sir, about how it would be if our old man had that lot +under him. My word, how he'd wake them up! Poor, simple, sleepy +beggars! It would set them thinking that they hadn't took a skipper +aboard, but a human hurricane. I wonder who owns that there craft, and +whether he gets anything out of the oil trade. _Viva_, indeed! Yes, +our old man would give them something to _viva_ about. Their skipper +too--nice way of coming up a river to get a cargo. Well, I suppose they +get their tobacco pretty cheap; and that's how the world turns round." + +Another day glided by, with steady visible progress in the brig's +repairs; and the Count seemed in better spirits, and said a few +complimentary words to the skipper. + +On board the schooner Captain Chubb appeared to be setting an example to +the Spaniards, for those of his crew who were not helping the carpenters +at the brig were kept busy holystoning, polishing, and coiling down +ropes into accurate concentric rings, till the _Maid of Salcombe_ was as +smart as any yacht. + +Meanwhile the Spaniards lined the bulwarks of their vessel, smoked and +yawned, and watched the reptile shooting, and then stared in sleepy +wonderment at the busy smartening up of the English schooner. + +The evening came, and this time the Spanish captain had himself rowed +across again, to find that it was the doctor who was leaning over the +side with his nephew, and, cigarette in mouth still, the man said +slowly-- + +"He tell you about the birds and the monkeys up the little river?" + +"Yes," said the doctor, "and I've been thinking about it." + +"Ah, yes," said the Spaniard. "I am going to stop a fortnight yet +before it's time to go up with my cargo. I'll make my men row you up to +the mouth of that little river; and I could show you something you'd +like, but you would have to take your guns--you and him too. But maybe +the boy would be afraid." + +"That I shouldn't!" cried Rodd hotly. + +"Oh! Then you could come," said the Spaniard. "But you'd be in the way +if you were afraid. Think about it. Good-night." + +The doctor was ready to enter into conversation, and question him; but +the boat went off back at once, leaving Uncle Paul mentally troubled, +for the idea of an excursion into the depths of the forest wilds was +exciting in the extreme. + +"He needn't have been in such a hurry, Pickle," said the doctor. "I +should have liked to have questioned him a little." + +"Yes, uncle. I should like to hear about such things; but it was like +his impudence to say that I should be afraid!" + +"Yes, my boy; it was rude," replied the doctor thoughtfully, "Ah! It's +such a chance as might never occur again. A guide like that isn't +always to be picked up." + +"No, uncle," replied the boy; "and it must be very wonderful in the +depths of the forest, where you can get through, because you would be +able to row." + +"Yes, my boy; wonderfully interesting," said the doctor eagerly. + +"But we couldn't go, uncle." + +"Why, Pickle? Why?" + +"Because we couldn't go away and leave the brig like that." + +"No; of course not, my boy. It would be too bad, wouldn't it? And of +course we couldn't go and trust ourselves to a pack of strangers, eh?" + +"We shouldn't be afraid, should we, uncle?" + +"Well, no, my boy; no. But I don't think it would be prudent. But +there, there, we mustn't think of it. We can't do everything we like." + + + +CHAPTER FORTY. + +THE DOCTOR'S CHARGE. + +It was very tempting, and, like most lovers of natural history, the +deeper he plunged into his pursuit, with its wonders upon wonders, the +more infatuated Uncle Paul grew. The nephew was quite as bad, though, +boy-like, his was more the natural love of novelty than that of science. + +Who among you is there who has not revelled in the thought of something +new, the eager desire to see something fresh? The country boy to see +vast London with all its greatness and littleness, its splendour and its +squalor, its many cares and too often false joys--the town boy to plunge +into that home of mystery and wonder, the country. And though as a rule +the country boy is disappointed, he of the town, when once he has tasted +the true joys of the country and seen Nature at her best, is never +satiated. But that love of the novel and the fresh is in us all--the +desire for that which in Saint Paul's days the men of Athens longed for: +something new. + +Hence then it was no wonder that Rodd, as he paced the schooner's deck +and looked across to either side of the river where the primeval forest +commenced, felt the strange longing to go and see, to hunt and find the +myriads of fresh things upon which he had never set eyes before--wonders +that might be more than wonderful--dangers which would be exciting, +possibly without danger; in short, all the boy's natural love of +adventure was stirring within him--that intense longing to cast away +culture in every shape and to become, if for ever so short a time, +something of the natural savage once more; and he was ready to urge on +his uncle to go for just one expedition, only there was a sense of duty +to hold him back. + +And as the time went on, and the brig was rapidly approaching +completion, Uncle Paul more than once angrily exclaimed to his nephew-- + +"Pickle, I wish that abominable Spaniard was on the other side of the +world!" + +"So do I, uncle," cried the boy. "We were getting on as nicely as could +be, with plenty to interest us, and fresh adventures, and then he comes +here setting us longing to go off into the wilds." + +"Yes, my boy, and if it wasn't for the Count and the sense of duty we +feel towards him? we would be off to-morrow morning." + +"Well, why not go?" said a voice just behind them. + +Rodd and his uncle started round in astonishment, for they were both so +intent upon their conversation, as they leaned over the rail talking +together, that they had not heard anybody approach, and for a moment +they were utterly speechless as they stood staring at the Count, who had +just come on board, while Morny was climbing up the side to join him. + +"I--I didn't know you were here," said the doctor confusedly. + +"Why, you asked me to come on board and dine and spend the evening with +you," replied the Count good-humouredly. "Had you forgotten?" + +"Well--well," said the doctor, "I--Really, I'm afraid I had. What--what +have you been about?" he continued, turning angrily upon Rodd. "It's a +strange thing, Rodney, that when you know of some engagement that I have +made, and it slips my memory, you never remind me of it." + +"Well, uncle--I--" + +"Well, uncle--you! I remember now well enough. You were there this +morning when I asked the Count and--Ah, Morny, my lad! How are you? +Glad you have come.--But, as I was saying, what were you thinking +about?" + +"Expedition into the forest, uncle," said the boy frankly. + +"Expedition into the forest, sir! Um--ah! Well.--Yes, I'm afraid I was +thinking about it too. I am so sorry, Des Saix. But welcome all the +same, if you will forgive me." + +"Forgive you, yes!" said the Count warmly. "That and a great deal more. +But I am very glad that you have so strangely led up to the subject +upon which I wish to talk to you." + +"What, my forgetfulness?" + +"No, no! That expedition into the forest." + +"No, no; don't talk about it. I have thought about it too much, and it +worries me." + +"Well, I want to put a stop to its worrying you. Morny here has been +telling me how anxious you both are to go." + +"Morny! Why, what did he know about it? He couldn't tell. Here, you, +Rodney, have you been letting your tongue run, sir, exposing all my +weaknesses?" + +"No, sir, that he has not," replied the French lad eagerly; "but I have +gathered from your remarks, and words that Rodd has more than once let +drop, how anxious you both are to have a run up country and see +something of what the wilds are like." + +"Oh, fudge! Stuff! Nonsense!" cried the doctor petulantly. "That's +quite out of the question." + +"Why?" said the Count. + +"Why?" cried the doctor. "Oh, because it's--that is--er--I feel--" + +"Bound by a sense of imaginary duty," said the Count, smiling. "You +think it would be unfriendly to me and my son here to leave us in what +you English people call the lurch; and therefore you are depriving +yourself of what would be a great pleasure as naturalists and hunters in +which you would indulge if we were not here." + +"My dear Des Saix, I do wish you would not talk about it," cried the +doctor. "There, I confess that if we were alone I should probably take +advantage of the Spanish captain's knowledge of the country, and go a +little way up with him; but as matters are, with your brig still +unfinished, and so much to do, I consider it would be an act of +disgraceful selfishness to go away and leave you alone here." + +"Absurd!" said the Count. "You would be going into wilder parts while +we should be quite at home here, in the nearly finished brig, and have +her in the best of trim by the time you came back." + +"Impossible!" snapped out the doctor. "Nothing of the sort." + +"What do you say, Morny?" continued the Count. "You feel that they are +both eager to go?" + +"Yes, father; and I am sure that Rodd is burning with desire." + +"You don't know anything about it," cried Rodd. + +"Well," said the Count, "ever since we met I have given way, and taken +your advice, doctor, in all things; but we have come to a time now when +I think I have a right to assert myself. Captain Chubb thinks that he +will have finished in two days more. He is certain that he will have +all done, caulked, tarred, and the copper replaced, in three days; so I +have come to the conclusion that you people, who have been quite slaves +in the way of sharing my troubles, thoroughly deserve a holiday. So I +set you free--you too, Morny." + +"Me, father!" cried the lad in astonishment. + +"Yes; I am sure you would enjoy a trip with Rodd as much as he would +like you to go with him." + +"Yes, that I should," cried Rodd; "but--" + +"Yes," said Morny gravely; "but--you would not wish me to leave my +father like this. Thank you, my father. I could not go, and I will +stay." + +"No, Morny; you will obey my wishes. You have your young life saddened +enough with disappointments, so that when there is an opportunity to +keep one away I call upon you to accompany young Harding here as his +companion, and I wish you both a very enjoyable trip." + +"That's very nice of you--very nice indeed," cried the doctor; "but I +cannot sanction it. I think we should be doing very wrong if we let +those boys go alone." + +"But they would not go alone. You would have full charge of your +nephew." + +"Now, Des Saix!" snorted the doctor. + +"Let me finish," said the Count good-humouredly; "and as a man in whom I +place full confidence I entrust you with the care of my son. Now, +doctor, please, no more excuses. I will not deprive you of the +pleasures a naturalist would enjoy in such an excursion. Your +preparations could be soon made; so send over for the Spaniard to-night +and tell him you will be ready to start at the turn of the tide +to-morrow, so that it may bear you up into these unknown regions-- +unknown to us--and a pleasant trip to you!" + +"No," said the doctor, "I shall certainly not think of trusting +ourselves to that man and his crew." + +"There I agree with you," said the Count; "with a good crew of your own +trusted men." + +"And if he could be spared," cried Rodd, "I should like for us to have +Joe Cross." + +"Now, look here," cried Uncle Paul, "this is taking a weak man at his +weakest time. Really, Count, we ought not to go. Look at what your +position would be in case anything should happen." + +"Nothing is likely to happen," said the Count, "and if it did, though my +brig is still helpless I should have your vessel, with about half your +crew, and my own. So now not another word." + +"There," said the doctor, "I am afraid I am beaten." + + + +CHAPTER FORTY ONE. + +REPTILIAN. + +It was just about the same time as the Spaniard had chosen for his other +visits, after dark, that his boat was again rowed across to the +schooner's anchorage, the man asking for the doctor. + +"I'm here," said Uncle Paul, going to the side, from where he had been +talking to the Count. "What's the matter?" + +"Matter?" said the Spaniard wonderingly. "Oh, there's nothing the +matter. I thought I'd tell you that those two men of mine you gave the +physic to are quite well again, and don't want any more. That's all. +Go on shooting the crocodiles. Good-night!" + +He gave an order to his men, and the boat's head was turned, but as soon +as they had proceeded a little way back the Spaniard gave another order, +and his men checked the boat and kept on gently dipping their oars to +keep her in the same place. "Doctor there?" shouted the Spaniard. +"Yes." + +"Haven't thought any more about going up the river, have you?" + +There was dead silence for a few moments, and then Uncle Paul said +sharply, as if making an effort-- + +"Yes; I shall start as soon as the tide turns to-morrow morning." + +"Very well," said the man carelessly. "I will come across with my +long-boat and eight of my men. They want a job to keep them awake." + +Then he grumbled out some words in Spanish to those who were with him, +while, as if annoyed at what he had heard, Captain Chubb uttered a low +growl. + +"No, you needn't do that," cried Uncle Paul. "Our men would like to go +up the river. If you will come across to act as guide I will use my own +boat, and take all provisions that are necessary." + +"Very well," said the Spaniard. "Perhaps that will be best. Your +boat's lighter than mine. Take plenty of powder and shot. Like some of +my men to come and help?" + +"Oh no; it will not be necessary," replied the captain. + +"Bring blankets," shouted the Spaniard. "Dew's heavy. Good-night!" +Then the boat was rowed away. + +"You mean to go?" grunted the skipper. + +"Yes; I don't like to lose this opportunity, and our friends here would +like us to go." + +"Well," grunted the skipper, after a few moments' thought, "he's only +one, and you'll be how many?" + +"I was taking eight of the men to row; that is to say, four rowers, and +their relief; Cross for coxswain--nine; and our three selves." + +"Nay, I'm not going till that brig's finished," said the skipper +angrily. + +"I felt assured of that," said the doctor. "The young Count is going to +join us." + +"Ah, that's better," said the skipper. "But look here, gentlemen, I +only look upon myself as a servant." + +"Not as mine," said the Count gravely. "I shall always look upon you, +Captain Chubb, as one of my most valued friends." + +"And I am sure Captain Chubb knows that I do," said the doctor, "and +that I have ever since he set me down as a scoundrelly slaver." + +"Oh, don't bring that up again, sir," grunted the skipper. "That was a +blunder, and every man makes them. Well, that's very nice of you, +gentlemen--very nice indeed; and I was going to speak out a bit +nervously,--as I consider it to be my duty to do as Dr Robson's +servant; but as you both speak of me as you do, I hope you won't be +offended when I say outright that I don't like that Spanish chap at +all." + +"Well, I don't know that I particularly like him," said the doctor; "but +he will be very useful to me, and show me what I want. I shall pay him +for his services, and there'll be an end of it." + +"Yes, gentlemen, that's right enough, but I wouldn't trust him a bit. +The doctor will say that it is British prejudice. Perhaps it is; but +here's my crew; there isn't a man among them as I'd say was perfect, but +same time I'd lie down and go to sleep quite comfortable and feeling +safe, if I knew any one of them was on the watch; and it did me good +when I heerd you say, sir, that you wouldn't have any of the mongrel +crew. If it had been the other way on, and you'd said you were going to +take Mr Rodd and the young French gentleman and trust yourselves up the +country in their boat, I'll tell you outright, sir, I should have struck +against it, and if you'd held out and rode the high horse as master, +why, there'd have been a mutiny. The men would have took my side, and +we wouldn't have let you go." + +"And quite right too, Chubb," said the doctor, clapping him on the +shoulder. "It would have been a good proof that I had done wisely in +making you my friend. What do you say, Count?" + +"Quite right," was the reply. "Well, captain," continued the Count, "I +don't see that the party can come to much harm with nine of your stout +men to act as bodyguard, if this Spanish captain is used as a guide." + +"No, sir, I don't see as they can; and as the doctor's come out on +purpose to collect all kinds of curious things and see some of the +wonders of the world, I suppose it is right that he should make use of a +chance like this. But I wouldn't trust that man, gentlemen, farther +than I could see him, and that's what, with your leave, I am going to +say to my lads. I am just going to tell 'em that they have got to bring +the three gentlemen back safe and sound, even if it means that some of +them is going to lose the number of their mess, and that means this too, +that if Mr Spanish skipper don't play his game fair--well then--" + +The skipper ceased speaking, and screwed up his lips very tightly just +in the light shed by the swinging lantern. + +"Well, captain," put in Rodd, who felt rather amused at what he called +the fuss the skipper was making, "why don't you finish what you were +going to say?" + +"Because I didn't think it was needed, my lad," was the reply. "What I +meant was, that if the doctor here didn't think it was his duty to give +that yellow chap a very strong dose, one of my lads would." + +The doctor was in as high glee the next morning as the two lads, and, it +might be added with justice, the nine sailors who were to form their +crew, for to a man they were bubbling over with excitement and delight. + +The moment they had heard that they were to go they began making their +preparations; all their weapons were already in a perfect state of +cleanliness, and shone as much as hands could make them, but every +pistol and gun-lock was carefully re-oiled, every flint taken out and +tightly replaced, while the blades of their cutlasses, that literally +glittered, had a final touch given to them and the edges passed along +the grindstone, which was sent spinning round in the little armoury as +hard as it could go. + +The skipper himself spent half the night with the steward, packing +provisions, Joe Cross helping, for though he was to be coxswain of the +boat, he said he came in there, for after the cook he held that he knew +more about cooking "wittles" than any fellow in the ship, and this was +acknowledged without dissent, though one of the men did say that Joe +Cross took more than his share, since in addition to other duties he had +the canisters of gunpowder in charge. + +The morning was glorious, the sun and the early breeze soon chasing away +the river mist, and before the tide had turned, everything was ready, +the well-stored boat alongside, and an awning rigged up over the +after-part big enough not merely to act as a screen for the gentlemen, +but to shade those who were not rowing, while they were having their +rest, while by a little addition the boat's sail could be spread over +the little unshipped mast and used as a covering from the night dews +when the boat was moored somewhere to the bank after the day's work was +done. + +"There, gentlemen," said the skipper, "I think that's about as near as +we can get it; but I don't see no sign of your Spanish guide as yet. It +seems to me as if every one yonder is asleep. Here, you, Joe Cross, I +knowed there'd be something. You've forgotten that screwdriver and the +little bottle of oil." + +"That I aren't, sir! They're in the fore-locker in the little bag of +tools." + +"Good," grunted the skipper; "and I suppose you'll help the doctor and +young Mr Rodd skin the birds they shoot?" + +"That's right, sir, and Mr Rodd's been laying down the law to me to +take care and keep that there soapy stuff covered over as he dresses the +inside of the skins with, 'cause he says it's pison." + +The skipper grunted again as he stood at the side and scowled down into +the boat. + +"Spun yarn?" he said sharply. + +"Plenty, sir." + +"But you lads never thought to give your jack-knives a whet, I'll be +bound." + +Joe Cross turned to the crew. + +"Show knives, lads!" he shouted. "The skipper wants to try them all on +his beard." + +"Steady!" growled the skipper. "That's right, then. Well, Mr Rodd," +he continued, "I suppose everything's all right. No; where's that there +extra coil of new signal line?" + +"Starn locker, sir," said Joe. + +"And an extra line with new grapnel?" + +"Fore-locker, sir," said Joe. + +The captain grunted. + +"Here, get the grapnel out of the jolly-boat and lash it under one of +the thwarts. You might lose one again." + +"There it is, sir," said Joe--"lashed just amidships out of the way." + +"Come, come, captain," said the doctor good-humouredly as he took off +his straw hat and wiped his moist brow, for he too had been as busy as +the rest, "you have had your innings; I want to have mine. You, Rodney, +you never thought to see that the quinine bottle in the little leather +medicine chest was re-filled." + +"Rammed it in tight, uncle," said the boy triumphantly, "and saw to all +the other bottles." + +"Then," said the doctor, "we'll say all is ready. Only look here, my +lads; I'll give you half-an-hour before we start, so you had better go +down below and have some more breakfast, for it will be a good many +hours before we have another meal." + +No one stirred. + +"Well," said the doctor impatiently, "did you hear what I said?" + +This time a low murmur ran through the crew, and Joe Cross took a step +forward and touched his hat. + +"Beg pardon, sir," he said; "the lads' respects, and they says they're +all tight, cargo well stowed." + +"Then you don't want the extra half-hour?" said the doctor, looking at +his watch. "So there's nothing to do, then, my dear Count, and you, +Captain Chubb, but for us to shake hands and say good-bye." + +"Where's your guide?" grunted the captain. + +"Ah, where's our guide?" said the doctor, looking in the direction of +the Spanish three-master. "He said at the turn of the tide. I ought to +have asked him to come here to breakfast." + +"Here he comes, uncle," cried Rodd, for at that moment the head of the +Spaniard's boat was rowed out from the other side of the anchored +vessel, which might have been quite deserted, for not a head was to be +seen. + +"Hah!" cried the doctor. "I like that. It tells well for his being a +trustworthy guide. So now good-bye, Count. Your son's mine till we +come back." + +The Count mastered his desire to embrace the doctor, and grasped his +hand in regular English fashion, and by the time the Spaniard's little +gig, rowed by two men, had come alongside, the last farewell had taken +place with the captain, who then looked over the rail and grunted out-- + +"Coming aboard, senor?" + +"No, no; but just one word. I have been talking to my crew, and told +them they are to take their orders from you till I come back. They +won't give you any trouble. Let them smoke and sleep as much as they +like." + +"All right," growled the skipper. "When shall we see you back?" + +"When your senor likes," said the Spaniard, lighting a fresh cigarette +from the one which had threatened to burn his moustache. "I take the +boat as far up into the forest along the little rivers till he tells me +to turn back, and then we will begin to row or sail the other way." + +A few minutes later the French crew of the brig, and the men of the +schooner who were to stay and help the carpenter and his mate, stood +ready to give a farewell cheer. The travellers were on the boat, the +rowers in their places, with their oars held upright ready to drop into +the rowlocks, the little sail rolled round the mast was lying ready for +use if a breeze sprang up, and Joe Cross stood right forward, boat-hook +in hand, looking as smart as the rest of the crew, that is to say, just +as if they had stepped off a man-of-war's deck, and then every one +well-armed, ready for the attack upon any wild creatures they +encountered, or for the defence of their lives against an enemy, waited +for the skipper to give the signal to start, which he did at last by +raising his hand. + +Then, as the boat was pushed off into the now rising tide, a mingled +French and English cheer arose, full of good wishes, while of the +Spaniard's crew not a man was visible save the two in the captain's +boat, who had just reached the three-master's stern and had begun to +make fast. + +The cheer was repeated as the Devon boat, in obedience to the dipping of +the oars, glided farther out into mid-stream, while directly after there +was a heavy swirl just beneath her bows, followed by the sudden +protrusion of the huge grinning head of a fierce crocodile, the monster +bent on mischief, and receiving a most unexpected salute, for Joe Cross +was standing balancing his boat-hook in his hands, ready to lay it down +along the thwart, but, quick almost as lightning, he gave it a twirl as +he rested one foot upon the gunwale and drove it, harpoon fashion, crash +into the reptile's head. + +"He's got it!" cried the man, as he started back; but he did not escape +the shower of water that was sent flying over the boat, the crocodile +vigorously lashing the surface with its serrated tail as it floated +astern. + +"Yes," said the Spanish captain quietly, "but you had better shoot them, +_senores_, and keep a little back from the side. There's plenty of them +up the river, and one of you might get swept out of the boat." + + + +CHAPTER FORTY TWO. + +NIGHT IN THE JUNGLE. + +In spite of the risks run from the ravenous reptiles, whose daring +proved that they had a hard struggle for existence, familiarity soon +bred contempt, and the sailors laughed, as they proceeded up the +beautiful river, at perils which not many days before would have made +them turn pale. + +For they were enjoying an excursion that seemed to present fresh +beauties at every yard. As a rule the forest came down to the flowing +water on both sides in waves of verdure, with grand trees which every +now and then presented the aspect of some gorgeous flower garden, here +red, there blue, at other times in lovely wreaths of white, while it +seemed, Joe Cross said to the lads, as if one of the blossoming trees +took flight every now and then and came skimming over the boat, filling +the sky with flowers, so beautiful were the flocks of parrots and other +birds that, apparently attracted by the strangers, flew screaming and +whistling overhead. + +There was no question about getting a shot at some beautiful green and +orange long-tailed paroquet, or at one of the soft grey scarlet-tailed +parrots which, as they flew across the river, shrieking at those who had +interrupted their solitude, gave place to others of a delicate pink; but +upon seeing Rodd raise his gun, the Spaniard laughed and said-- + +"Never mind them. I could fill my schooner with those things at any +time. You wait till we get up into the little side river. There will +be something better worth shooting then; or perhaps you would like to +kill a few as you are coming back." + +"Yes, Rodd," said the doctor; "that would be wiser, my lad." + +"But suppose we don't see them as we come back," said the lad. + +"Not see them?" said the Spaniard, laughing. "Why, the country's alive +with them!" + +Then as the party sated their eyes upon the various objects they passed, +a light soft breeze arose when they turned into a bend of the river, and +the Spaniard expressed his satisfaction, and suggested that the sail +should be hoisted. + +This was rapidly done, the oars were laid in, and Joe Cross came aft to +preside at the newly-shipped rudder, while all through the rest of the +day, and after the tide had run its course and become adverse, they +tacked from side to side, or glided onward with the wind astern, the men +only having at very rare intervals to take to their oars. + +It was soon after mid-day that the doctor proposed that the boat should +be run ashore and that they should land to dine at a lovely park-like +opening where the dense portion of the forest had receded farther from +the bank; but the Spaniard shook his head. + +"No," he said, "don't do that. It looks very nice, but it isn't safe. +There are the crocodiles basking about the bank, snakes and serpents +nearly everywhere, and the leopards and other great cats hanging about +among the trees. Keep aboard. It's safer here." + +"He means to take care of us, Morny," said Rodd, in French, and directly +after he gave his companion a meaning look, for the Spanish skipper +turned to the doctor and said-- + +"Tell your men to have their guns handy." + +"What for?" said the doctor. "Do you scent danger?" + +"Nothing particular," replied the man, "but up here in these parts you +never know what may happen next. Something may come just when you think +you are safe, and it's best to be always ready." + +So that and the following meal were eaten in the boat, which just before +dark was at the Spaniard's suggestion run up into a calm reach where the +forest had become very distant, while the river seemed to have widened +out to double its former size. + +Here he proposed that they should anchor for the night and wait for the +morning before continuing their journey. + +This was disappointing to the lads, who looked longingly at the shore, +while Rodd suggested that there were several places that looked level, +and where it would be easy to rig up a tent where they might sleep. + +The Spaniard laughed, and with a grim smile said-- + +"You wanted a guide for coming up here, young man. If we did what you +say we shouldn't all be ready to go on again in the morning." + +"What, because of the wild beasts?" said Rodd eagerly. + +The Spaniard nodded. + +"He is quite right, Rodd," said the doctor. "And I suppose we might +catch fever here?" he continued. + +"Bad," said the Spaniard laconically. "Keep to the boat." + +The night came down dark and beautiful; the great purple velvet arch +that spread from side to side of the river was gloriously spangled with +stars, for in the day's ascent the little party seemed to have left the +river mists behind, and as they sat together the doctor and his young +companions revelled in the loveliness of the scene, while they listened +to the strange sounds from forest and river which constantly smote upon +their ears and now seemed wondrously near. + +"It seems very different," whispered Rodd to Morny, for something preyed +upon his spirits and stayed him from speaking aloud. + +"Yes," said Morny, in the same subdued tone; "it is very different from +being aboard the vessels. I shan't go to sleep to-night; shall you?" + +"No. Who could go to sleep? Why, as soon as one lay down I should +expect to see the great slimy snout of a crocodile thrust over the +boat's gunwale, and then--" + +"I say," said Morny, "don't!" + +But nothing worse than sounds troubled the party that night, as not long +after this conversation the two lads obeyed the doctor's suggestion that +they should creep under the awning, whose canvas sides were tightly +belayed to the gunwale; and though both declared that they would never +close their eyes, they and the watches into which the little crew was +divided followed the Spanish skipper's example, and in turn slept +heavily till sunrise, the great orange globe slowly rolling up over the +edge of the forest and shining brilliantly down upon the glittering +river, for as over-night there was not a sign of mist. + +About half the day passed with plenty of favouring gales to help the +boat along, and spare the men's arms, and Rodd commented on this to +their guide. + +"Wait a bit," he said. "A little farther on, and we shall turn into one +of the little rivers where the high trees are close together at the +sides. There won't be much wind there, and the men will have to row." + +Everything was as he said, for as they passed out of the main stream the +banks were but a little way apart, and in place of the full flow of the +great river the stream grew sluggish; but everything being so close at +hand the beauties of the forest became far enhanced. + +"You said rivers," said the doctor suddenly. "Are there more than this +one?" + +"Plenty," replied the man, and he made himself a fresh cigarette as he +sat back in the boat, to go on smoking. "Not so many crocodiles here," +he said, "and they are smaller. More birds too. Look!" And as the men +dipped their oars to row slowly up the winding stream, which often +seemed to turn back upon itself, the Spaniard pointed now to tiny +bee-like sunbirds with their dazzling metallic casques and gorgets--the +brilliant little creatures that take the place of the humming-birds of +the New World. + +At another time, though the two lads, eagerly observant and with the +doctor to back them, needed no showing, their guide pointed to the many +brilliantly-tinted birds of the thrush family, at the barbets and +trogons, not so brilliant as those of the Western world, but each lovely +in itself, while as they went on and on along their meandering river +path, the birds that struck them as being most novel and at the same +time tame in the way in which they came down the overhanging branches of +the great forest trees, as if their curiosity had been excited by the +strangers, were the many-tinted plantain eaters, with their crested +heads, and the lovely green and crimson touracoos, which, while their +violet and crimson relatives wore, as it were, a feather casque, +displayed on their part a vivid green ornamentation that passed from +beak to nape, which when they were excited looked more like a plume. + +They had come thus far without firing a shot, for the doctor had said-- + +"Let us leave the shooting till our return, and be contented with +charging our memories and feasting our eyes, for no dried skins, however +carefully they are preserved, will ever display the beauties of these +birds' nature as we watch them here in life. But we must have a skin or +two of these touracoos, for I want to show you lads the wonders of that +vivid crimson upon their underparts." + +"Oh, I can see it plainly enough, uncle," said Rodd. + +"Yes," said Uncle Paul, "but you don't notice what I mean. Instead of +that crimson being a beautiful dye fixed in the feathers, it is a soft +red pigment which can be washed out into water and--I saw something +moving up that creek," he added, in a low voice. + +"Niggers perhaps," said the Spaniard, without turning his head. + +"Likely to attack?" asked Rodd. + +"Pish!" said the Spaniard contemptuously. "Harmless. Fishing perhaps. +We shall see more, I expect, farther on." + +He did not trouble himself to turn his head, though the rest in the boat +kept a sharp look-out for what had attracted the doctor's attention up a +narrow inlet arched over by the overhanging trees, but it was not until +close upon evening that, as they pursued their winding way, this side +stream opened out more into a reach, and then for the first time a +movement some hundreds of yards behind brought forth a warning from Joe +Cross, who was seated with the tiller in his hand. + +"Just cast your eye back, Mr Rodd, sir," he said; "yonder there where +the stream opened out it seems to me there's a canoe with a couple of +Indians in it. Nay, I mean blacks." + +"Yes; look, captain," said Rodd eagerly; and the Spaniard slowly raised +himself up from where he was leaning back, took his cigarette from his +lips, shaded his eyes, and then after a cursory glance replaced the +cigarette and sank back. + +"Niggers," he said. "Fishing." + +Then they rowed on, leaving the two occupants of the canoe behind, till, +coming to what he considered to be a suitable place, the Spaniard +suggested that they should stay there for their meal upon an open sandy +little beach some fifty yards across, beyond which the forest rose dark +and thick again. + +"We can land and light a fire," he said, "and make coffee and stretch +our legs." + +"It would not be safe," said the doctor, "to rig up a tent here, would +it?" + +"Oh yes," said the captain. "The only thing to trouble us here might be +a leopard or two; but a shot would scare them away." + +This was good news, and heartily welcomed by the whole party, and in a +short time cooking was going on in the glowing embers of a fire, for +which there was abundant fuel close at hand, while a canvas tent, +strengthened by branches thrust deep in the sand, was cleverly contrived +by the sailors. + +"I say, Morny, this is something like!" cried Rodd, as they sat together +watching the men finishing their meal, with their jovial contented faces +lit up by the glowing fire which flashed and cast shadows and sent up +golden clouds dotted with tiny spark-like embers, as it was made up from +time to time, according to the Spanish captain's suggestion that it +would keep away all wild beasts and clear off the snakes. + +"Yes; my legs were beginning to feel cramped. I wonder how my father +is." + +"Oh, he's happy enough," said Rodd, "and enjoying himself with the +thought that Skipper Chubb has had a good day's work getting on a new +outer skin over the hole." + +"Ah, yes, I hope so," cried Morny eagerly, his friend's suggestion +seeming to brighten him up. + +"And I say," cried Rodd, "shan't we sleep to-night! How I shall +stretch! I don't think I should much mind a great spotted cat coming +and sniffing round the tent. Of course it would be very horrid to be +clawed or bitten, but there's something natural about that. The idea of +being grabbed by one of those great slimy reptiles and dragged under +water, and before you have had time to squeak--" + +"Rodd, don't, please!" cried Morny, with a shudder. "It makes my flesh +creep." + +"Yes; I was going to say it's time you lads changed your conversation," +said the doctor quietly, "for none of the forest creatures are likely to +disturb us to-night with a watch-fire kept up like this." + +"But I say, uncle," said Rodd mischievously, later on--when the watch +had been set, with a big pile of dead firewood laid ready to replenish +the fire, and Uncle Paul was about to follow the example of the Spanish +captain and select his patch of dry sand covered with canvas, beneath +the extemporised tent. + +"Well, what, my boy?" said the doctor drowsily. "Don't talk now. I am +sure every one wants to go to sleep." + +"Yes, uncle; I am sure I do," said the boy, who was already fitting the +projecting bones of his back into the yielding sand; "but do you think +it's likely--" + +Rodd stopped to give Morny, who was beside him, a nudge with his elbow. + +"Do I think what's likely, Pickle?" replied the doctor. + +"That those two black fellows we saw in the canoe will sneak ashore to +come and do anything to us with their spears?" + +"Rodney!" cried the doctor indignantly. + +"But they are sure to have spears, uncle, or else they couldn't be +sticking the fish." + +"Go to sleep, sir!" said the doctor angrily. + +Rodd went at once, and did not stir again, till an extra loud crackling +of burning wood made him start up in wonder and alarm. + +But it was only the morning watch, in the persons of Joe Cross and the +appointed cook, making up the fire afresh in view of what Joe called +boiling the billy and to give the cook some good broiling embers, for it +was the break of day once more. + + + +CHAPTER FORTY THREE. + +THE STRANGERS. + +Rodd's toilet did not take him long, for though the water was clear and +tempting as it rippled on the sand, the recollection of what might +possibly be there in the way of ravenous fish, if even there were no +reptiles, kept him from venturing for a swim, while when he suggested to +the Spaniard the possibility of bathing in safety, the man looked at him +in surprise, and his words were tinged with contempt as he said-- + +"Bathe! What for?" + +Rodd did not answer, but turned his back quickly and hurried away to +where Morny was questioning Joe Cross and the cook about whether the men +they had succeeded in the watch had heard anything in the night. + +"Here, catch hold of me, you two," Rodd gasped out, "and help me away +there among the trees." + +"Hah! What's the matter?" cried Morny. "Are you taken bad?" + +"Horrid. Don't talk to me. Get me out of sight. I am going off." + +Morny and Joe each caught him by an arm and hurried him in amongst the +trees. + +"Don't be frightened," gasped out Rodd. "Oh, that Spanish chap! He'll +be the death of me!" + +"Why, you are laughing!" cried Morny angrily. "How dare you frighten us +like this!" + +"I--I--I--I--" gasped out Rodd--"couldn't help it, old fellow. Oh, that +Spaniard!" + +Morny was really angry, but Joe Cross's frank face had expanded into a +grim smile. + +"What game's he been up to, Mr Rodd, sir?" + +"Oh, it was very stupid of me," said Rodd, wiping his eyes; "but I was +afraid of laughing in his face, and the more I tried to look serious the +more it would come; and I didn't want to offend him." + +"Just like 'em, sir," said Joe, as Rodd explained himself more fully. +"'Tis their natur' to; and besides, it's what an old woman I used to +know called being codimical. Yes, sir, I've watched 'em aboard that +there three-masted schooner. Them there mongrel chaps, they must save a +wonderful lot of money every year in soap." + +"There," said Rodd, wiping his eyes again, "I am all right now; but it's +very comic. The more you feel you mustn't laugh, the worse you are. I +suppose laughing must do one good. I always feel so much better after +having a good grin." + +"Do you good, Mr Rodd, sir! I should just think it does! Why, it's +natur'. Does you good to have a long talk sometimes, don't it; eh, Mr +Morny, sir?" + +"Oh yes, I suppose so," replied the lad. + +"And you know it does you a lot of good to get your teeth to work when +you are hungry, Mr Rodd." + +"Yes, Joe," cried the lad eagerly. "What's for breakfast?" + +"Ah, you wait a bit, sir, and you will see. But as I was saying about +laughing, what's your smiling tackle for, and your grinning kit for, if +they aren't to use and set you right when otherwise you would be all in +the dumps? Yes, sir; give me a good laugh. But one don't always get +one's share along with our old man. Still we like him, for he always +means right by us. Ay, there's worse chaps in the world than old Chubb, +and I'm just ready and waiting to drink his health and long life to him +in a pannikin of the finest coffee a coxswain ever brewed; and as for +the frizzled ham that cookie's got thriddled on sticks over them embers +to eat with the dough-cakes he's baking in the ashes--Here, let's get +back, for fear there's an accident." + +"Accident?" said Morny. "Why, what accident could happen?" + +"Out of sight, sir, out of mind; and that aren't a French proverb, but +you might like to turn it into one as your countrymen could use. They +might forget, sir, as we are here." + +Well rested, in high spirits, and with a good breakfast waiting, the +morning meal was eaten with the greatest of gusto, while to every one +the expedition wore more and more the appearance of a delightful +holiday. + +There was an exception, though, and that was in the person of the +Spanish captain, who looked grim and sombre, and ate little, but smoked +a great deal. + +Just as the tent was being struck and a clearance being made of the +remains of the breakfast, Rodd suddenly called out-- + +"There they are again!" And he called attention to the two nearly nude +blacks, who were creeping along the edge of the bank opposite to them in +their canoe. + +"Why, they are watching us," said Uncle Paul. + +"Hungry," said the Spanish skipper laconically. + +"Yes, that's it," cried Rodd, and after a glance at his uncle he tore +down a wild banana leaf, turned it into a natural green dish, heaped +upon it some of the remains of the breakfast, and carried it a short +distance along the bank, where he placed it close to the water's edge, +signed to the blacks, and then joined his companions, who were about to +enter the boat. + +Very soon afterwards they were gliding along the stream again, after the +sailors, by Uncle Paul's orders, had carefully extinguished the remains +of the fire. + +"We don't want to start a conflagration, my boys," he said. + +As the men slowly dipped their oars, for there was not a breath of wind, +the two lads had to make an effort to, as it were, drag their eyes from +the lovely floral scene on either side of the little river, while they +watched the proceedings of the blacks. + +"Well, they are a pair of stupids," said Rodd. "What is it--ignorance +or suspicion?" + +For the two dark objects remained on the farther bank, one seated with a +paddle, the other upright, spear in hand, holding on by an overhanging +bough to keep their boat from drifting on with the current. + +"Suspicion," said Morny quietly. + +"Miserable wretches! Do they think I want to poison them?" + +"No. I'll tell you," said Morny. "Poor creatures, they have been so +ill-used by the white people with black hearts who come to these shores +that they think the food you have put there is the bait of a trap." + +"To catch blackbirds! Why, of course! They think we want to carry them +off for slaves. They're as bad as old Captain Chubb; eh, uncle? He +took us for slavers, Morny, when uncle wanted to engage him. Well, I +forgive them, poor chaps.--Ah, they think it's safe now. They're going +to risk taking the bait." + +For all at once the two negroes began to paddle themselves slowly across +the river to where the bright green banana leaf lay glistening upon the +sand, and the last the two lads saw then of those they had tried to +benefit, as the boat glided on with four oars dipping and making the +water flash like silver, was with the canoe drawn up on to the sands, +the two savage-looking blacks squatting on their heels, eagerly +devouring the remains of the breakfast. "Oh, never mind the sun being +hot, uncle," cried Rodd, as they went on and on. "I don't mind if I'm +half roasted. Look, Morny; did you ever see anything so lovely? Look +at the flowers on that great tree. Why, it seems to blaze with +scarlet." + +"Yes, and look at the birds," was the reply. "I wish my father were +here, with his mind at rest, to enjoy all this as I do, or should if he +were with us. There, quick! What's that--running in there among the +leaves on that tree?" + +"Snake," cried Rodd, who just caught sight of the movement. "No. Who +ever saw a snake with four legs? Why, it's a great lizard of a thing! +Why, uncle, that must be one of those queer chaps that turn all sorts of +colours." + +"Yes," said the doctor, "you are right, Pickle," and he focussed upon it +a little old-fashioned single opera-glass which he carried in his +pocket. "That's a chameleon, sure enough; and a big one too, I should +say, though it's the first one I ever saw alive." + +"What's he after?" said Rodd. + +"Having a game, catching butterflies, I think, sir," suggested Joe +Cross. "So he is, Joe." + +"Why, Master Rodd, it makes us chaps wish we was boys again and ashore +there running after them butterflies with our caps; only one couldn't +run among the trees, and they fly too high. I never see flutterbies, as +we used to call them, with colours like these, though. We used to catch +white 'uns, and yaller ones, and sometimes what we used to call +tortoiseshells. But I call all this 'ere--Look there, sir; there's one +as big as my hand--two--lots on 'em! Yes, I do call this 'ere dead +waste both of the butterflies and the birds." + +"Why, my man?" said the doctor quietly. + +"Why, sir, everything you see flying about in the air is as lovely as +lovely, and no one to look at them. Why, if I had my way I'd have all +these sort of things flying about in old England. Yes, sir, they are +all wasted here." + +"That they aren't, Joe," cried Rodd. "We are looking at them, and +enjoying them; and I say, uncle, isn't it time we began to get some +specimens?" + +"Plenty of time yet, my boy. Why, captain, the country here on either +side is very beautiful." + +"Satisfied, then?" said the Spaniard coolly. + +"Thoroughly," replied the doctor, "and very glad to have met with such a +guide." + +"But I say, captain," cried Rodd, "don't forget the big monkeys and the +leopards." + +"Oh no," said the Spaniard. "Farther on yet; and I can't be sure. +There are plenty in the woods one day, and the next they are gone. But +we shall come across some of them." And he sank back smoking again. + +"Just look at him," said Rodd. "He doesn't seem to take notice of +anything." + +"These things have grown common to him," replied Morny quietly; "but +don't look only at the trees on the banks. Cast your eyes down +sometimes into the clear water." + +"Don't say there are any of those great reptiles here," said Rodd +hurriedly. + +"No, I have not seen one to-day; but look at the fish we disturb. They +go gliding away to right and left like so many flashes of silver and +gold." + +"Now, boys, there's something," said the doctor. "Right across the +river." For there was a rush and a splash as some animal that had +evidently been wading close in under the bank sprang out of the water +with a rush, and disappeared amongst the low growth. + +"What's that, captain?" cried Rodd, making a snatch at his gun. + +"Hog," said the Spaniard quietly. "Did you see it?" asked Rodd. "No; I +know the noise they make. Plenty here." And then it was birds, anon +flowers, and some two or three miles farther on Joe Cross, who sat just +behind the boys, tiller in hand, glanced at the doctor and asked--"Which +way?" + +For the river forked into two of equal size, and at his question the +Spaniard raised his eyelids a little and made a sign with his left hand. + +This branch proved to be if anything more rich in its objects of beauty +than the winding stream they had left, for there was enough to sate even +the most exacting lover of nature, while there always seemed to be +something fresh. One minute a sailor would be pointing out a +brilliantly-scaled thin green serpent gliding along the surface of the +water, eel-like in motion, but with its back quite exposed to the +sunshine, giving it the look of frosted silver, while before long +another man made his discovery, the whole party being eagerly on the +watch for fresh objects of interest, and at this, without waiting for +orders, the rowers ceased dipping their oars, to let the boat drift +slowly by a lovely curtain of fine strands and leaves dotted with +flowers which hung down from some fifty feet up, till the tips of the +twigs touched the water. + +In amongst these vine-like branches a vividly-coloured serpent that +appeared to be some six or eight feet long, and but little thicker than +a man's thumb, was deliberately climbing and twining, its eyes having +first attracted attention by sparkling in the sunshine. + +"Don't seem afraid of tumbling into the water," suggested Joe. + +"Wouldn't matter if it did," said Rodd. "You saw that one a little +while ago, how it could swim." + +"So, I did, sir; so I did," replied the man, who was as much interested +as the naturalists of the party. "But there are such a lot of good +things to see that one seems to shove the other out of your head. Now, +what will that chap be doing there, slithering about over the water? +Out for a walk?" + +"Trying to catch one of those bright little sunbirds, I suppose," said +Rodd. + +"No," said the doctor, who was watching the serpent through his glass. +"I should say that one is after birds' nests." + +"Think of that!" cried Joe. "But he wouldn't blow the eggs, sir, would +he, and make a string?" + +"No, my man," said the doctor, smiling, "but swallow them, I should say, +or the young birds that he might find in the nest. Why, Rodd, my boy, +one wants three or four lives here, and then one wouldn't see half the +wonders of this paradise. Here's world within world of wonder and +beauty." + +"Row away, my lads," said the Spaniard, who seemed to have only one +object in life, and that the re-lighting of cigarettes. + +"Ay, ay, sir!" cried the men, and they dipped their oars again. + +Then on turning a bend of the stream there was a waft of warm wind to +fan their cheeks, when the sailors forward stepped the mast, and hoisted +the yard of the lug-sail, which filled out at once, the rowers laid in +their dripping oars, which seemed to shed diamonds and pearls back into +the stream, and away they glided among the glories of the low flat land, +through which streams seemed to run like veins, forming a perfect maze +of waterways, each if possible more beautiful than the other, while +proving wonderfully similar in width and depth, so much so that at last, +after winding round bend after bend of the last stream they had entered, +the doctor turned suddenly to their guide and said-- + +"Why, captain, how are we going to find the way back again?" + +The captain opened his eyes slightly and smiled, as he took a little +compass from his pocket. + +"With this," he said; "but--pah! I could find my way here with my eyes +shut. Look; there's a good place for a fire, and the boys here can get +plenty of good fish, if you have a line, for the men to cook." + +At this suggestion Joe Cross handed the tiller to Rodd and made his way +forward to the locker, from which he produced a couple of fishing-lines. + +The boat was run ashore at a similar patch of sand to that where they +had made their previous halt, and while some of the men were collecting +dead wood from beneath the trees, there was a sudden rush, and something +yellowish dropped with a thud from the nearest great fork, made four or +five great bounds through the low bushes, and disappeared. + +"Leopard," said the Spanish captain quietly. "Get out your gun, sir. +His mate will not be far away." + +He had hardly spoken before another of the great cats leaped from bough +to bough of the huge forest tree they had approached, and disappeared in +turn, escaping unscathed. + +"You are keeping your word, sir," said Rodd. The Spaniard smiled, and +remained in his place, while Joe Cross and the lads paddled the boat out +again to a spot the Spaniard pointed out, and there dropped the grapnel, +before beginning to fish, using small pieces of fat pork for their bait. + +Long before the fire had burnt up enough for cooking purposes or the +great kettle had boiled in the shade of the huge tree that had been +chosen for kitchen, bites had become frequent, and fine carp-like fish, +whose golden scales glittered in the light, were being hauled into the +boat; but eager though the lads were, and full of enjoyment of their +sport, it was hot out there in the sun, and arms were beginning to ache, +while hunger asserted itself more and more. + +"I say, Morny," cried Rodd, "enough's as good as a feast." + +"Yes, sir," cried Joe, "and we have got enough and the feast to come, +for these look as if they'd be good. Shall we put ashore?" + +Rodd nodded assent, and soon after Joe and a couple of his mates had +been busy with their knives on the sandy river bank, the unwonted sound +made by a frying-pan arose from the fire, with the result that there was +no doubt about the carp-like fish being good, and the _al fresco_ dinner +proving a success. + +The afternoon was wearing on when the preparations for a fresh start +were made, the Spaniard promising the doctor that he would point out +another good resting-place for the night before it was dark. + +"All aboard!" cried Joe just then. "Why, look at that now! Well, +there's plenty of fish left, Mr Rodd, and in this 'ere hot country we +had better have it fresh." + +"Why, I didn't expect to see them again, uncle," cried Rodd, and he +pointed across the river to where the two blacks with their canoe had +suddenly appeared, as if they had been in hiding and watching the +cooking going on till it seemed to them that their time had come, when +they lay there with their boat just as before, apparently waiting till +the strangers had gone on. + +"Do they mean to keep on following us like this, captain?" asked Rodd. + +"_Quien sabe_?" he said. "It is a free country, and you will not mind?" + +"Mind! No," cried Rodd. "But they will have to cook what are left for +themselves. I say, uncle, can we trust them to put the fire out +afterwards?" + +"Oh yes, my lad. I suppose we must." + +"That's right, Mr Rodd, sir. They'll take care not to fry themselves. +But here, cookie, don't you leave them our pan." + +Once more as the boat swept round a bend a glimpse was caught of the two +blacks, who had no hesitation now about paddling across to the deserted +halting-place. + +The Spaniard was as good as his word that evening in guiding them to +another bivouac, and that night, feeling perfectly secure, the lads lay +down to sleep, looking forward to another day of intense enjoyment in +the wondrous labyrinth of Nature's beauties, far from feeling satisfied +with what had gone before. + +Three more days passed, and halt after halt had been made at spots which +always presented just the right facilities required, the Spaniard +proving how great was his knowledge of the geography of the country +through which they rowed or sailed, while the two blacks, who over and +over again seemed to have disappeared, always turned up again ready for +the departure of the travellers, who now took it as a matter of course +to leave plenty of fish or flesh collected by the guns for the poor +savages' support. + +More than once the lads had made advances to these men, to try and get +them to approach, but their shyness and suspicion were most marked, and +they never came near till the departing boat was some distance off. + +"Now," said the doctor, one evening, "I have been mentally marking down +such birds and insects as I wish for us to collect, so to-morrow morning +all this pleasure-seeking must come to an end, and we'll all work hard, +shooting, skinning, and boxing a few butterflies as well." + +"What a pity!" said Rodd. "I should like to go on yet for weeks." + +"So should I, Pickle, but we must get back to the schooner." + +"And the brig," cried Morny eagerly. + +"Yes, my lad," said the doctor, "and I am afraid the Count will think we +have exceeded our time; but we shall be going steadily back from +to-morrow morning, collecting as we go, and I am sure you will agree +that we have had a grand excursion, everything having been most +successful." + +The following morning broke as gloriously fine as ever. The fire was +crackling, and Joe Cross announced that it was not fish that morning, +but fried bacon, and soon after the pleasant aromatic scent of the +coffee was rising in the morning air as they took their seats in the +shade of a great fig-like tree whose boughs seemed to be full of +twittering and whistling love-birds gathered in a huge flock to feed +upon the saccharine embedded seeds of the little fruit. + +"Hullo!" said the doctor suddenly, turning to Rodd. "Where's the Don?" + +"Having another cigarette somewhere, I suppose, uncle," said Rodd, +laughing. "I thought he was along with you." + +"No, my boy," replied Uncle Paul. "I thought he went with you this +morning when you made the men row a little farther along the stream." + +"That was only to take a last look upward and see what it was like +farther on before we turned back; and it is so beautiful up there-- +better than anything we have seen. I say, uncle, let's have another +day." + +"No, no, Rodd," cried Morny, catching him by the arm. "I couldn't bear +it. We must go back now." + +"Quite right, Morny, my boy," said the doctor quietly. "Yes, we have +come to the end of our tether. Let's get back to the Count and Captain +Chubb." + +"Well, all right," said Rodd. "Never mind what I said, Morny, old chap. +I always was a pig when I was getting anything I liked. Let's have +breakfast, and then-- + + "Huzza! We're homeward bound--ound--ound! + Huzza! We're homeward bound!" + +he trolled out merrily; and then, clapping his hands to his lips, +"_Espanol_ ahoy!" he shouted. + +"Ahoy!" came back from the bank of trees across the little river. + +"_Espanol_ ahoy!" shouted the boy again, and there was the answering +echo. + +"Well, I hear you!" cried Rodd merrily. "But how did you get there +without the boat?" + +There was no answer to this. + +"Coffee and fried ham!" roared Rodd. + +"'Am!" came back. + +"Yes, but it's only bacon!" shouted Rodd. + +"'Acon!" + +"Well, why don't you come?" + +"Don't be stupid, Rodney," cried the doctor shortly. "Here, Cross-- +cook--any of you; have you seen the Spanish skipper?" + +"No, sir!" came in chorus. + +"Dear me," said the doctor thoughtfully; "now I come to think of it I +don't remember seeing him this morning." + +"No, uncle; nor I neither. Did you see him, Morny?" + +"No, not this morning. I saw him talking with you last night, sir." + +"Yes; that was when I was saying that we should start back for certain, +and he went and lay down in his usual place, close to the side of the +tent, directly afterwards." + +"Oh yes; he was there when we lay down, wasn't he, Morny?" + +"Yes; I remember that." + +"But we have not seen him since, uncle." + +"Very strange," said the doctor, and turning to the men he questioned +them in turn, with the result that all were sure that they had not seen +the Spaniard since over-night. + +The doctor and the two lads stood gazing at one another for some minutes +in silence. + +"Do you think anything could have happened to him?" said Morny at last. + +"Oh no," cried the doctor sharply. "He's too much at home here in these +wild parts for that." + +"But I was thinking, uncle--" said Rodd, in a hesitating way. + +"Thinking of what, my boy?" + +"That there might be some few crocodiles up here in this narrow part of +the river, after all." + +"Absurd, Rodney! Don't jump at conclusions like that!" cried the +doctor. + +"But they are such horribly fierce creatures, uncle." + +"Don't be absurd, sir! Is it likely that one of those reptiles could +have come up out of the river, crawled into the tent, and dragged him +out again, without some one knowing it? No; he must have got up early +and gone off by himself somewhere, as this is as far as we were to go, +meaning to see if he could find the traces of a chimpanzee, so as to +show us one or more before we start back." + +"Yes, that's possible, uncle," said Rodd. "And perhaps he has found +one." + +"Very likely; and if he has he'll soon be back to take us on the trail." + +"Perhaps so, uncle," said Rodd meaningly. + +"Why do you speak like that, sir?" + +"Because I say he may have found one, uncle." + +"Well--and then?" + +"The chimpanzee won't let him come back." + +"Really, Rodney, you make me very angry sometimes," cried the doctor. +"If ever there happens to be a little hitch of any kind you immediately +clap it under your mental microscope and try to make it as large as you +possibly can. That's it for certain, Morny. He wants to keep perfect +faith with us, and so he has gone to see whether he can find any signs +of these great apes. Well, we won't let the breakfast spoil, and it +would be a sort of madness to go hunting about in the forest for his +tracks; so come along. I dare say he'll be back long before we have +done." + +But the breakfast was eaten without any sign of the Spaniard, and now +the doctor began to be thoroughly uneasy, for the time was there when +they ought to be starting on their backward journey, and minute by +minute he grew more impatient. + +His excitement was shared by the two lads, and the men were questioned +again and again, while all joined in searching round the little +encampment as far as was possible; and that was a very short distance, +for almost directly after the stretch of sand was passed they came upon +dense shrubby growth, and beyond this there were the huge forest trees +matted together by vines and lianas into an impassable wall, while as +far as could be made out there was no trace of any one having tried to +force his way through. + +"Most singular thing," said the doctor. "We can't go away and leave him +alone in these wilds. But have everything ready for an immediate start, +and we must wait." + +"I say, Morny," said Rodd, "what do you make of this? Here, stop a +minute, though. Can you think of any way by which he could go?" + +Morny shook his head. + +"There's no path into the forest," he said, "and it's just as dense on +the other side if any one ventured to swim across the river to go from +there." + +"To go where?" said Rodd sharply. + +"I don't know. I was only thinking of what any one might try to do." + +"And then," said Rodd, "there's only up the river and down the river, +and he had no boat. But it's no use to bother; we have got to wait and +see; and we mustn't forget those two poor niggers. I wonder whether +they will follow us back?" + +"Sure to," said Morny; "right back to the vessels." + +"Hi! Joe Cross!" cried Rodd. "Put what's left of the breakfast in a +wild banana leaf again and leave it on the bank." + +"Got it all ready here, sir," was the reply. + +"Why, Morny," cried Rodd, catching his companion sharply by the arm, +"where are the niggers?" + +"Where are the niggers?" said the young Frenchman, staring. + +"Yes; they have always been ready waiting till we finished our meals. +They were there last night." + +"Yes," said Morny; "they were there last night." + +"Then where are they this morning?" + +Morny looked across the river and back at his companion, while the +doctor, who had been conversing with the men, came hurriedly up and +joined them. + +"What are you two talking about?" he said. + +"About those two blacks, uncle," said Rodd, whose voice sounded rather +husky. + +"What about them, sir?" + +"They have always been hanging about, uncle, till we had done our meals, +and then waited for what was left." + +"Yes. True. I saw them paddle across last night in the dark and fetch +what was put for them, in a curious animal-like way." + +"But you didn't see them go back, uncle?" + +"Yes, I did, sir, and I remember thinking how cat-like they were in +their actions, pouncing upon the food and eating it there and then. I +watched them till they had done, so as to see them steal off again with +their boat, and I meant to write a note about it in my paper regarding +this trip." + +"Well, they are not waiting this morning, uncle," said the boy +meaningly. + +"No," said the doctor, glancing in the direction of the wild banana +leaf. + +"Well, uncle, what do you make of that?" + +"I don't know, my lad. What do you make of it?" + +"I don't quite know, uncle. They are savages." + +"Yes, boy, they are savages." + +"And they've got spears, uncle," said the boy meaningly. + +"There you go again, sir!" cried Uncle Paul, irascibly now. "You know +perfectly well, Rodney, how this sort of thing annoys me. I suppose the +next thing you will be telling me is that one of them came with his +spear and behaved as one of Captain Cook's friends says the Australian +blacks behaved to the girls they wanted to steal for their wives." + +"No, I don't, uncle," cried the boy ill-humouredly. "I don't know what +Captain Cook's friends say. I hardly know who Captain Cook is--Yes, I +do: he's the man who sailed round the world." + +"Well, then, I'll tell you, sir. He said the blacks come in the dark, +twist their spears in the girls' hair, and carry them away. And I +suppose you mean to infer that that's what has become of the Spanish +captain?" + +"I don't, uncle," cried Rodd. + +"But if you do, sir, you are wrong; for the Don, as you two lads +nicknamed him, had hardly a bit of hair on his head. There, there, +there; being cross won't make any better of it. Hope to goodness that +nothing has happened to the poor fellow. Can't have got up in the night +and walked away in his sleep, can he?" + +"Well, but if he had, uncle, he must have woke up by this time, and then +he'd walk back again." + +"Well, we can't go without him, my dear lads. He has been a very +faithful servant to us, and it would be a mean, cowardly, despicable act +for us to leave him in the lurch. Oh, it's impossible. It would be +little better than murder to leave a man here without a boat." + +Rodd looked hard at Morny, as if questioning him with his eyes; and so +the French lad took it to be, for he made a deprecating gesture with his +hands. + +The doctor was watching his nephew keenly, and now clapped him sharply +on the shoulder. + +"What are you thinking about, sir?" he cried. + +"About what you said, uncle," said the lad, rather confusedly. + +"I didn't say anything, sir. I was listening to you." + +"Yes, you did, Uncle Paul," said the boy sternly. "You said that it +would be murder to leave a man here without a boat." + +"Oh, of course. So I did. And so it would be, sir. But now look here, +Rodd. I haven't known you, sir, since you were little more than a baby +without being able to read some of the changes which come over your +face. What were you thinking about that boat?" + +"I was thinking, uncle, suppose he had one." + +"But he hadn't one. Look here, sir; you are thinking something, and +suspecting something." + +"Yes, uncle, I am; but I don't know what." + +"I suppose that's because you were prejudiced against the Spaniard by +what Chubb said." + +"I suppose so, uncle. You know how he said he wouldn't trust that man a +bit?" + +"Yes, yes." + +"Well, I always felt that I couldn't trust him a bit." + +"Prejudice, boy--prejudice." + +"I dare say it was, uncle; and when I found how he showed us everything +we wanted I tried to believe in him; but my head felt as if it wouldn't +go." + +"He hadn't got a boat; he hadn't got a boat," said the doctor, as if to +himself. + +"No, uncle; but suppose he had got a canoe?" + +"That's it," cried Morny excitedly. "You are right, Rodd. You think +those were his two men?" + +"Yes," said Rodd. "Two black fellows out of his schooner." + +"And--and--" panted Morny, as the doctor's jaw fell and he stood staring +at the two lads, utterly speechless--"you believe that he has led us +right out here in this wild maze of a place to lose us, while he goes +back to--to--" + +The poor fellow broke down, and Rodd caught him by the hand; but Morny +in the passion of his emotion snatched his away. + +"Don't--don't say it!" he cried.--"While he has gone back for who knows +what? Oh, father, father, why did I come away?" + +"Stop, boys, stop!" cried Uncle Paul; and to the surprise of both he +plumped himself down upon the sand, drawing up his knees, planting his +elbows upon them, and resting his burning head upon his hands. "Wait a +bit," he said. "I want to think; I want to think; I want to think. +Ah-h-h!" he groaned, at last. "Who could have imagined it? Who could +have thought it? A trick--a ruse!" + +Then springing up he looked sharply round, to see that the boat's crew +were grouped together watching him wonderingly, and that seemed to bring +him to himself at once. He turned sharply upon Rodd and gave him a +grave nod of the head, and said quietly-- + +"I am afraid you are right, my boy. Morny, my lad, I told your father +that in this expedition you should be to me as my son. Let me play the +father to you now, and tell you that it is your duty to act as a man." + +"Act as a man, sir--" began Morny. + +"Yes, my boy; act and not talk. Aboard, every one of you, my lads," he +continued, to the sailors. "I am afraid we have been wiled away here by +a cunning trick, for what reason remains to be proved. But whatever it +means, we are twelve staunch men with our duty before us, and that is, +to get back as quickly as possible to the schooner and the brig. I may +be deceived, but I believe we are the victims of a plot, and if so I am +afraid it will go hard with that Spaniard when we meet. Now, then, I +don't know how long it will take, but we have got to do it, and when we +get back to our schooner, no matter what has happened, there's ten +guineas apiece as a sort of prize-money for the brave lads who have +helped to pull us through." + +A loud excited cheer burst from the crew, and several voices broke in +afterwards with something indistinguishable amidst the noise. + +"What's that? What's that I hear?" cried the doctor sharply to Joe +Cross. + +"The lads say they don't want no ten guineases, sir, but they'd all give +as much as that to get hold of that dirty Spaniel by the neck." + +"Hah!" ejaculated the doctor. "Now then, not ten guineas, but twenty, +for the man among you who can guide us through this wilderness of waters +back to our stout Devon boat. Now then, who's the one among you who can +act as guide?" + +A dead silence fell upon the group, and for the first time since their +start a black storm-cloud began to spread slowly over the sky. + + + +CHAPTER FORTY FOUR. + +WET DUST IN THE EYE. + +It was the precursor of a terrible tropic tempest, with bluish lightning +that was blinding, while the roar of heaven's artillery was incessant. +But not a man blenched as the rowers bent to their oars, gladdened by +the feeling that the current was with them, as they sent the boat +rapidly along for their last halting-place. But a mile had hardly been +covered when, with a wild shriek and roar, down came the rain, not in +showers or in drops, but in sheets so heavy that before a minute had +elapsed every one was drenched, and soon after two of the men had to +begin to bale. + +To proceed was impossible, and braving the risk, the boat was rowed +beneath the overhanging branches of one of the monarchs of the primeval +forest which reached its limbs far out over the stream, and there, +somewhat protected, the boat was moored. For quite a couple of hours +the little party crouched in the bottom, aiding the shelter by spreading +the sail over the awning, the men holding on to keep the canvas from +being swept off by the howling gale, while the rain poured off in +buckets-full, as the men said. + +Then a new danger attacked them. The stream swelled and swelled till +the boat rose feet higher and was forced in among the low-hanging +branches, while the great risk now was that they might be swept out and +along the furious torrent into which the sluggish river had been turned. + +But just as it seemed impossible to hold on any longer, and when the +forest on either side had become river too, the rain ceased as suddenly +as it had begun, the wind dropped, and the clouds began to pass away, +while in less than an hour the sun was shining brightly down, and huge +clouds of steam floated over the flooded land. + +It was impossible to cast off from their mooring, for every man agreed +that to follow the course of the rushing water would mean that they +would be swept away from the river and in all probability be capsized +before they had gone many hundred yards. + +There was nothing for it, then, but to bale hard and free the boat from +water, wring out and try to dry their saturated garments, and do what +they could in the way of drying the sail and awning, in the hope that +the flood would soon pass away. + +Fortunately Cross was soon able to announce that the water was sinking, +and this continued so rapidly that before many hours had passed they +were able to put off once more into the stream, which had pretty well +returned to the limits of its banks; and the drying of their clothes and +of such stores as had suffered followed in rapid course. + +But it was a disheartening commencement of their journey back to the +main river, and darkness fell upon a desolate and terribly depressed +company, who passed the night of solitude and despair wondering what had +happened at the anchorage where the brig had been left careened. + +Rodd had tried to whisper comfort to his comrade, but only to be met +with imploring words, the lad begging to be allowed to sit and think; +and Rodd respected his prayer. + +No better fortune attended him with Uncle Paul, who sternly bade him be +silent. + +"I too must think, my lad," he said--"and pray." + +The silence was shared by the sailors, who only indulged in a whisper +now and then. + +And how the rest of that night passed away Rodd hardly knew. Of one +thing only was he quite certain, and that was that sleep never visited +the occupants of that boat. + +Daylight at last, when such provisions as were absolutely necessary were +partaken of as the boat went steadily down-stream, for there was water +enough in the river still to have completely changed its sluggish +character, while this was hailed by the men with delight, seeing that it +helped their course, while wherever the wind was available the sail was +hoisted and they sped along, every one keeping a sharp look-out for +their last bivouac but one, it having been decided amongst them that +they must have been swept by that one, which was hidden by the swollen +stream. + +But in spite of the keen observation of the sailors and the sharp +look-out by the doctor and the two lads, that day passed without the +familiar sandy embayment among the trees being sighted, and before long +it became a certainty that they were gliding along a different channel +to any they had passed before. + +The flood might have altered the stream to a certain extent, but they +passed banks that were certainly different, and just at dusk when a +brisk breeze was blowing they glided through an opening among the trees +which did not seem familiar, and the question arose, should they turn +back? + +But before it was settled, darkness fell, and another dismal night was +passed. + +The next day broke bright and fine, and encouraged thereby, every man +was keenly on the alert to try and sight one of the Spaniard's +halting-places; but it was long before such an opening was found, and +then when it was hailed with delight as their resting-place at the end +of that day's work, it was forced upon them that they had never been +there before. + +Fortunately, though their stores were diminished in quantity, fish were +plentiful, and every now and then a bird fell to Rodd's or the doctor's +gun, for it was felt to be a necessity, as more and more all realised +that they were involved in a perfect labyrinth or network of watery +ways, and that their stores should be supplemented. For opening after +opening in the great walls of verdure kept presenting itself, nearly +always involving the party in a dispute as to whether they had been +there before, till their mental confusion became greater, their ideas +more sadly confused, and the tract of low-lying water-netted country, +far from seeming the paradise through which they had glided on their way +up, now seemed the dwelling-place of despair. + +"Isn't there one of you who can guide us aright?" cried the doctor +despairingly. "Is it possible that what seemed so easy to that +treacherous Spanish wretch should prove such a horrible problem to us +all?" + +For a time no one spoke, the men hanging their heads, and by way of +showing their earnestness tugging harder at their oars. But at the next +appeal Joe Cross was egged on to make some answer. + +"You see, sir," he said, "there isn't anything we wouldn't do for you. +The lads here are sharp enough, but they wants a handle to work them. +We are only sailors, used to having an officer over us, and without him +we aren't much account." + +"Oh," groaned the doctor to Rodd, "and I cannot direct them! Rodd, boy, +my brain feels as if it were giving way." + +"Don't be down-hearted, sir. Don't chuck up your pluck, young +gentlemen," continued the poor fellow earnestly. "We must get out at +last. It all seemed so easy as we come up; but without that Spanish +chap, and now that it seems to be all turned upside down like, as we are +coming back'ards, it's like looking for a needle in a bottle of hay. +You see, me and my messmates have turned it all over in our heads, and +it always comes to this, that that storm either made us take a wrong +turning, or else that that Spaniard took us into a tangle of +watercourses out of which no one but him and them niggers could find the +way." + +"Yes, yes," said the doctor; "we were thoroughly trapped into what has +proved to be a horrible maze." + +"Ay, ay, sir!" cried Joe. "And amazing it is; but we are not going to +give up, sir. Wish we may all die if we do; for you see, it must all +come right at last. We have a lot of provisions, plenty of powder and +shot; we can't fail for fresh water, which is a great thing for sailors; +there's wood enough to make fires for five hundred years; and as for +good fish to eat, why, you could almost catch them with your hands." + +"No, my men," said the doctor, more firmly, "we are not going to +despair, for if we keep going down-stream we must reach the main river +at last." + +"That's what I keep thinking, uncle," cried Rodd; "but every time we +turn out of one of these rivers we seem to get into another, and I want +to know why it is that we have never yet come upon a sandy patch where +we made a fire." + +Embayments of this kind they found again and again during the next few +days of their, so to speak, imprisonment in this labyrinth, and in which +they were fain to halt for food and sleep; but whether the flood had +obliterated all signs of their occupation, or whether the places were +absolutely fresh, they never knew. + +One thing was determined on, and that to keep on with dogged British +obstinacy till the problem was solved, and after losing count of the +days that they had spent in the forest, and after vain usage of the +compass, which had only seemed to lead them more and more astray, they +had their reward one noon, when the boat was run up on to the sand of a +forest nook which seemed strikingly familiar, and Rodd and Morny both +sprang out, gun in hand, followed by Joe Cross, who excitedly cried-- + +"All right, gentlemen! Here we are at last! I'd just swear to this +tree and that other big one right across the river." + +"Yes," cried the doctor; "this, I am quite certain, is where we set up +our tent the night we missed our guide." + +"The morning, uncle," cried Rodd. "Yes, boy; I should have said the +morning. Look, Morny! You do not speak. Isn't this our last +halting-place on our way up?" + +The French lad gave his hands a despairing wave in the air. + +"Yes," he said; "that's what I feel, sir. Why, we have been all these +weary, weary days trying to get back to the river so that we might row +away to the brig, and this is the spot from which we started!" + +"Well, gentlemen," cried Joe Cross, "I say hooray to that. Yes, this is +the place, aren't it, messmates?" + +"Yes, yes," came in an excited chorus, for the discovery seemed to have +sent a thrill of joy through all the men. + +"That's right, messmates," cried Joe. "Then all we have got to do now, +gentlemen, is to try and take our bearings right, rub the wet dust out +of all our eyes, and make a fresh start." + +"The wet dust, Joe!" cried Rodd, with the nearest approach to a smile +which had appeared upon his face for many days. "Here, uncle, get out +the compass, and let's see what we can do with that." + +"No," said the doctor quietly. "We must make a fresh start, but it must +be calmly and well, and after food and a good night's rest. Collect +wood, my lads, to make a fire. Boys, take your guns and go up-stream a +little higher where we have never been before, and shoot what birds you +can. Two or three of you men do what you can from the shore with the +fishing-lines. To-morrow morning we will start calmly and trustingly to +the river once again. Be of good heart, Morny, my lad, for the end of +our awful struggle must be coming near, and every one of us must do all +he can to help his brother for the one great end." + +A cheer rose at the doctor's words, and the change in the whole party +was wonderful. + +All worked with such energy that long before darkness set in the tent +was rigged up for the night, a good meal had been prepared, and almost +as full of hope as on the night when they had last encamped there for +their rest, a couple of hours were pleasantly passed before the fire was +once more made up and the watch set. Very soon afterwards all were +plunged in a deep and restful sleep, one from which Rodd and Morny were +startled by a terrific clap of thunder. Then the interior of their tent +was lit up by a vivid blue flash of lightning, by which they saw the +watch--Joe Cross and one of the sailors leaning over them, the former +saying-- + +"There's going to be an awful--" + +"Storm," he would have said, but his words were drowned by another crash +which came instantly upon a sheet of lightning, and pretty well stunned +them with its roar. + + + +CHAPTER FORTY FIVE. + +STORM WATERS. + +In the intervals between the almost incessant peals of thunder Joe Cross +informed the lads that the storm had been coming on for the last three +hours, faint and distant at first, the merest mutterings, and gradually +increasing till it was the terrific tempest now raging. + +"They must have had it horrid, sir, somewhere, only I don't suppose +there's no people. What we had before was nothing to it." + +"There," cried the doctor, "something must be done to the boat in the +way of making it thoroughly secure." + +"Can't be no securer, sir. We've got her moored head and stern to a +tree, and two grapnels down as well." + +"Capital," cried the doctor. "Well thought of! But we must have the +sail and some of the canvas that we have got here spread over the boat +to keep the water out." + +"That's done, sir, as far as the stuff would go, and now I want what we +have got up here, before the rain comes." + +"Down with it at once," said the doctor; and in an incredibly short +space of time the tent was struck, what they had ashore was transferred +to the boat, and she was covered in as much as was possible. + +And none too soon, for the party had only just embarked when a few heavy +drops of rain came pattering down upon the tightened canvas, soon +increasing to quite a deluge, but, with the peculiarity of a tropic +storm, just when it was beginning to try the canvas and threatening to +soak the interior of the boat, it ceased almost instantaneously, and +they sat listening to the rushing sound of the rain as it swept over the +forest, rapidly growing more distant till it died away. + +"Gone!" cried Rodd excitedly. "We didn't want any more troubles, and it +would have been dreadful to have been wet through again." + +"Don't be too hopeful, my boy," said Uncle Paul. "That may only be the +advance guard of a far worse storm. It seems too much to think this is +the end." + +"It might be all, sir," said Joe Cross, "for it's been an awful bad 'un, +going on for hours in the distance." + +"Then we shall be having the water rise again," cried Uncle Paul. + +"Yes, sir; that's what I thought," replied the man, "and why I moored +the boat so fast." + +"Quite right," cried the doctor, "for likely enough we shall be having +the water coming down from far away, and we must hold on here at any +cost, or we shall be lost again." + +"What time do you suppose it is, Joe?" asked Rodd. + +"Wants about a couple of hours to daylight, sir." + +"Morning!" cried the lads together. "Ah, then it will be easier to +bear!" + +During the rest of the darkness it was evident that the storm had passed +over them. There were a few distant mutterings of thunder and little +flickerings of lightning which grew fainter and fainter, to die away in +the west. + +The sailors crept out from beneath their awning on to the sand, and were +able to announce that the river had only risen a few inches, and the +rain that had fallen had rapidly soaked in and drained off, while a +pleasant cool air swept briskly over them from the east, heralding a +fresh bright dawn, which came at last with all the promise of a glorious +day. + +With some difficulty a fire was started, but once begun the men soon +contrived to get up sufficient for the hurried breakfast; the canvas was +struck where necessary, and the rest spread to dry in the coming +sunshine; and then all being ready for their next start, the doctor +consulted with the coxswain, who after a little pressing gave his +opinion as to what would be the best course to take. + +"You see, sir," he said, "I have been thinking that I could get us back +to our last camping-place; I mean, before we came here." + +"Well, that's what we all thought before, Joe," cried Rodd pettishly. + +"Wait, Rodney, my boy, and let Cross finish," said the doctor. + +"I've about done, sir," said the man. "What Mr Rodd says is quite +true, but he aren't quite got what I mean. You see, sir, when we come +up here with the Spanish skipper aboard I sat astarn steering, and when +we went away again I had hold of the tiller once more, same as before." + +"Well, we know that," said Rodd shortly. "Be silent, Rodney!" cried the +doctor. "Go on, Cross." + +"Well, sir, when we come I was looking this 'ere way; when we started +back I was looking t'other way. Now it seems to me, now we are going to +start again, if instead of sitting astarn and looking straight forward, +if I was to go and sit right in the bows and left somebody else to steer +while I looked over his head, I should be looking up both sides of the +river just as it was when we were coming, and I should see the landmarks +again as I saw them when we were coming here, and consekently I should +know my way better, and I don't think I should miss the next +landing-place again." + +"Yes, I see what you mean," cried Rodd excitedly. "Why, to be sure, +Joe! Don't you see, uncle?" + +"Yes," cried the doctor. "Quite right, Cross. We will start at once, +going as slowly as we can, and we will, all but the steersman, ride +backwards, keep a sharp look-out, and help.--What's the matter, Morny?" + +For the young Frenchman had suddenly started up in the boat, to stand +peering in the direction that they were about to take, and held up his +hand as if to command silence. + +"What's that?" cried Rodd, leaping up too. + +"What?" asked the doctor. + +"Sounds like distant roaring of some kind of wild beast, sir," said one +of the men. + +"That it aren't, messmate," said Joe, who had also risen to his feet, +and stood with his hand behind his ear. "It's another storm coming. +Nay, it aren't. It's all bright and clear that way. Why, it's water, +gentlemen, coming with a rush from just the way we want to go." + +"Impossible!" cried the doctor. "Why, it would be against the stream." + +"I don't care, sir, begging your pardon. I've been in the Trent and the +Severn and the Wye. It was only when I was a boy, but I recollect right +enough. It's what they used to call a bore, with a great wave of water +coming up the river like a flood and washing all before it." + +"Had we better land?" cried the doctor. + +"And lose our boat, sir? No. Be smart, my lads. It can't be very far +away. All eight of you, oars out, and we must keep our head to it so as +we can ride over the big wave and let it pass under us. I don't suppose +there will be much of it. It's a sort of flood water coming down from +yonder after the storm, and it will soon be over. Don't you worry about +it, gentlemen. It will be nothing to a big wave at sea." + +The men made ready with all the discipline of a trained crew, and heads +were turned in the direction of the increasing sound, while it seemed +hard to believe, in the midst of the brilliant sunshine, with the smooth +river gliding onwards as if to meet the supposed wave, that there could +be anything wrong. + +The expected danger had seemed to be close at hand, but it had been far +more distant than the party had supposed, for the roar went on steadily +increasing, but with no other suggestion of peril save the noise, though +that was enough to make the stoutest-hearted there quail. + +It seemed an age, but was certainly less than an hour, before the dull +heavy roar began to be mingled with a strange crashing and breaking +sound which puzzled all, till the coxswain, who was standing up in the +bows, boat-hook in hand, announced that it was the breaking of trees and +crashing together of their branches as they were being torn up by the +roots. + +"Impossible!" said the doctor impatiently. + +"Nay, sir, it aren't," said the man. "I don't mean the big trees, but +the little 'uns along the banks; and it's getting close here, sir. It's +a big flood, that's what it is, coming down from the mountains, for +there must be some inland. There! Look yonder. Can't you see the +trees beginning to wave? It's just as if a lake had broke loose and was +coming sweeping over the country. You, Harry Briggs, hold fast to that +tiller. You others, look at your work, and pull. Turn your heads, you +lubbers! I'll do all the looking out. And when I say row, every +mother's son of you pull for his life." + +Joe Cross's words were beginning to sound indistinct before he had +finished, half-smothered as they were by the increasing roar, as from +far down the river a dark line of something could be seen rising some +six or eight feet like a huge bank extending right across the river and +apparently into the forest on both sides. + +For as far as eye could reach the trees seemed to be in a strange state +of agitation, the lower branches bending towards the party in the boat, +as if beneath the blast of a tremendous gale. + +"Sit fast, boys, every one!" yelled Joe; but he stood upright himself, +and the next minute with a wild rush a great bank of water was upon +them, seeming to come with a leap and dash, to plunge beneath the boat's +bows as if to toss her on high and roll her over and over in the flood. +But as it struck them the trained men sat for a moment or two, till in +little more than a whisper above the roar of water, Joe Cross's voice +was heard to give the order "Pull," when seven balanced oars dipped +together, and the bows began to sink. + +The men got well hold of the water, and after three or four rapid tugs +the boat sat level once more upon the surface of the flood, obeyed her +helm, and though being carried rapidly along stern on, she shipped very +little water, and in a very few minutes the greater peril was passed. + +The crashing roar and rush of the water was almost deafening, but Joe +retained his upright position and signalled with one hand to the +steersman, while he followed suit to the rowers, who kept up a steady +pull against the furious stream, with the result that now the boat sped +on stern foremost at the same rate as the flood. + +But the frail craft was exposed to endless risks as the water rushed +along between the two great walls of verdure which marked out the +devious winding course of the river. Time after time they were within +an ace of being swept amidst the boughs of some towering tree; at others +they were brushing over the tops of the shrub-like growth; and yet +amidst the many dangers the crew never flinched, but kept on for hour +after hour, head to stream, with the boat always being borne onward +along straight reaches and round winding curves which looped and almost +doubled back, till at last the violence of the flood grew less, leaving +them more and more behind, till the greatest danger was over and the +speed at which they glided was reduced to nearly half that of the first +rush of the flood. + +Another hour passed, and they were still gliding on, and now as they +were swept into a wider reach, it was plain to see how the whole forest +was flooded on either side, apparently to the depth of some six or eight +feet, as near as the coxswain could judge. + +Four times over he had drawn attention to the fact that they were +passing the entrances to similar rivers to that down which they sped, +one of them being remarkable for the fact that a portion of their stream +set right into it, while from the others it glided out in the opposite +way. Soon afterwards, with a little clever scheming, the boat was +guided into an eddy where the water swirled round comparatively slack; +and here her head was turned and she resumed her strange journey onward +in the normal way. + +The men's labour too now had pretty well ceased, only a dip or two of +the oars being required occasionally to keep the boat's head straight +and make her answer her helm. + +And now conversation became more general. The danger being evidently +over, one man hazarded a joke, something about a near shave, while +another said it was a pity because they would have all this 'ere work to +go over again. + +Joe Cross heard the remark, and this started him talking, as he laid +down his boat-hook and wiped his streaming face. + +"Yes, Mr Rodd," he said, "you wanted to come farther up the river, and +here you have had it. Well, I suppose when the flood's spread all over +it will do same as they always does, begin to drain off again and carry +us back. But I am afraid, Dr Robson, sir, that I must give up what I +undertook to do." + +"What?" cried the doctor. + +"Ride back'ards, sir, and find the way out of this wet cat's-cradle of a +place. I am very sorry, sir." + +"Sorry!" cried the doctor cheerily. "My good fellow, what you have done +during the last few hours has earned the lasting gratitude of us all." + +"Has it, sir?" said the man, staring. "Why?" + +"Haven't you saved all our lives," cried the doctor, "by your clever +management of the boat?" + +"Oh, that's what you mean, sir! But you must play fair, sir. You +mustn't blame me for that. Part on it's my being on board a man-of-war; +part on it's due to Captain Chubb. So you must thank him." + +The doctor smiled, and noting this absence of anxiety, Rodd broke out +with-- + +"I say, uncle, Morny's starving. Isn't it time we had something to +eat?" + +"Oh, Rodd!" cried Morny. + +"Yes, of course," replied the doctor. "See what you can do, cook, at +once. But surely, Cross, some of the men might lay in their oars?" + +"Yes, sir, and if it goes on like this I don't see that we need let this +flood keep on carrying us farther away. There's a nice wind, and not so +much washed-out wood afloat. I am thinking I might have the sail +hoisted and begin to sail back. But my word, look here: how we are +widening out, sir! Look ahead yonder. It's getting 'most like a lake. +Perhaps it is one." + +"No," cried Rodd; "it's the river still. Look yonder at the forest +right along the bank." + +"Yes, sir, but I was looking at the forest on both sides here where we +are. Why, we are running into another river. It aren't a lake, but +it's ten times as big as this one that we've been spinning along, and-- +Well! it's a rum 'un! No; it's unpossible." + +"What's impossible?" cried Rodd sharply, and all gazed at the sailor, +who sat looking forward, holding on by one ear and scratching the other. + +"Why, this 'ere, Mr Rodd, sir. Just you look, Dr Robson, and see what +you think on it." + +"Of what, my man?" + +"Why, this 'ere, sir, what I am asking you of. Can't you see, Mr Rodd, +sir?" + +"I can see that we are gliding out of a muddy stream covered with green +twigs and great tufts of jungle grass, into a big river flowing right +across us and all thick with what seems to be a different-coloured mud." + +"That's right, sir; and didn't you see that splash, just as far off as +you could look?" + +"No, Joe." + +"Would you mind lending me that there glass of yourn, sir?" said Joe to +the doctor, who passed the little field-glass to the man, whose hands +trembled as he focussed it to suit his eye, and he once more stood up in +the boat and swept the water as far as he could see. + +"Thank you, sir," he said, handing it back. "Perhaps you would like to +have a look yourself. But it's all right, gentlemen, and my lads. +Them's crocs out yonder, and we have been washed out into the big river +again with no more trouble; and if we don't see our brig and our +schooner again before many hours, why, my name aren't Joe!" + + + +CHAPTER FORTY SIX. + +A KNOT IN THE NETWORK. + +Incredulity was impossible, although at first it was very hard to +believe. But there was the fact. They had been wandering through the +sluggish network of streams of a vast tropic, marshy forest, until a +tremendous storm in the hinterland had flooded the low country and they +had been swept out again far away from the spot where the Spanish +captain had guided them in, and, as they were soon to learn, for reasons +of his own. + +Without question they had descended some miles along the main river, +which ran swiftly, burdened as it was by the waters of the flood, but +not sufficiently to do more than raise it to a rather abnormal height. +Still it was not safe to continue their journey downward by night, and +in spite of the anxiety of all, the boat was moored to a huge tree up +which the water had risen some three or four feet, and all anxiously +watched for the coming of the next day. They slept but little, for +there was so much to discuss, the doctor feeling now sure that when they +missed the Spanish captain it must have been because when all were +asleep he had stolen down to where the two blacks would be waiting for +him with their canoe, and then gone on up the river beyond their camp. + +"But I don't see quite what for, uncle," said Rodd. + +"I do," cried Moray. "He knew the country so well, and our ignorance, +which would make us go wandering helplessly about, while he knew of a +nearer way out into this river again, through which we seem to have been +providentially swept." + +"That's right--quite right, Moray," said the doctor. "You see now, +Rodd?" + +"Yes, uncle, it's quite clear now. I wish I wasn't so dense. Do you +see, Joe?" + +"I didn't afore, sir; but it's all as clear as crystal now, and I should +just like to explain it to the lads. My word, gentlemen! That chap's +been running up a big bill again hisself, and when we get hold of him +he'll have to pay!" + +"What are you thinking of, Moray?" said Rodd, a little while after, +while they were sitting listening in the darkness to the murmur of Joe's +voice forward as he was explaining matters to the men. + +"I was thinking," said Moray gravely, "of how long it would be before it +is day." + +The longest night comes to an end, and the breaking of that next day +showed the river much sunken and pretty well at its normal tidal height; +and with four men rowing steadily the boat glided downward, with the sun +when it rose showing first one and then another landmark which seemed +familiar; but after their one journey upward no one present could recall +how far they were above the careening place. + +Again and again as they passed round some great bend Moray rose from his +seat, and, as Rodd afterwards told him, made them all miserable by +gazing wildly downwards in the expectation of catching sight of the +brig, or of seeing his father in his boat coming upward in search of the +missing ones, who had quite outstepped the time that their stay was to +last. + +It was always the same; the poor fellow sank back into his place +wearily, his countenance drawn and a look of despair in his eyes. At +such times Rodd would watch his opportunity, steal his hand quietly +along, and give Morny's arm a long and friendly grip, with the result +that the dim eyes would brighten a little and dart a grateful glance in +the English lad's direction. + +The journey downwards seemed endless, and proved to be far longer than +any one there anticipated. But just as the longest and darkest watch +nights come to their end, so it was here, when, skimming along under +sail, taking long reaches, for the wind was abeam, all at once Joe +Cross, who was the first to see, sang out a loud and hearty-- + +"Ship ahoy!" + +"Hah!" cried Morny. "Do you see the brig?" + +"No, sir," replied the man, as Morny, the doctor and Rodd shaded their +eyes and gazed down-stream; "I can't make out the brig." + +"Oh, you don't half look," cried Rodd. "There's the Spanish schooner, +and ours, and just beyond them, half hidden by the trees and land, there +are the tops of the masts of the brig. Hurrah, Morny! She's all right, +afloat, and--Here, what are you looking that way for?" + +"Because I can't see her," said the French lad despairingly. "There is +something wrong." + +"Why, my dear old chap," cried Rodd, "you can't see well, because of the +trees, but as we get farther out, there she lies, to the left, with her +two masts as plain as plain." + +"I can see those two masts you mean," said Morny sternly, "but they are +low-down raking masts; the _Dagobert's_ are much higher, and stand up +stiffer than those. Do you forget she's square-rigged? Why, that's a +schooner." + +"So it is," cried Rodd. "I was deceived by the two yards on her +foremast. But look here, it can't be another schooner. Captain Chubb +may have been altering her rig when he got her upright again. Why, of +course! It must be so. There can't be three schooners there. They +must have had some accident to the brig's mainmast when they raised her +again. Broke her topgallant, perhaps, and rigged her fore and aft." + +"Not they, Mr Rodd, sir. Our old man would have cut a spar somewhere +from the forest and rigged her square, if it was only a jury-mast. +'Sides, they'd got spare spars on board, same as we. That's another +schooner. You can see her clearer now--a long low one, with masts that +rake more than the Spanish skipper's vessel. Strikes me as we shall +find that for some reason or another they haven't got the brig afloat." + +"Another schooner, Joe?" cried Morny passionately. "The brig not +finished? For some reason or another! What reason? What does it all +mean?" + +"Be calm, my lad; be calm," cried the doctor. "In a very little while +we shall know the worst, or the best. Mind, we know nothing as yet. It +is all suspicion. For aught we can say to the contrary, that man whom +we have condemned may be innocent, misjudged by us, and now be lying at +the bottom of the river where we missed him in that mysterious way." + +Morny bowed his head and tried to look gratefully at the doctor; but his +agony was too great, and he stood there till their boat had got to the +end of its tack and swung round in the other direction, when with shaded +eyes he gazed before him wildly, trying to get a view beyond where the +three schooners could now be plainly seen, anchored in mid-stream. + +But for some time the curvature of the river put this out of the +question, and to break the painful silence the doctor said quietly-- + +"Another long low schooner, with raking masts. But it may be only +another trader, anchored in company with the rest." + +"Ah," cried Morny to Joe Cross, "you see something more than we do!" +For the man, who was looking out from beyond the sail, suddenly gave a +start and angrily slapped his thigh. + +"Well, I'm very sorry, sir; but yes, I do. The brig's lying careened +right over, just as she was when we started on our trip." + +"But look here, Morny," cried the doctor; "that may mean nothing more +than that she is not finished yet. Remember, to those we left we are +missing, and in their anxiety about our lengthened stay they may have +started up-stream to find us." + +"You are saying this to comfort me," cried Morny passionately. "No, +doctor; we have got to face the worst. It is not so." + +It seemed cruelty to prolong the conversation, and soon after the order +was given to lower the sail and unstep the mast, for the wind had pretty +well dropped as they swept in towards where the vessels were anchored, +and the distance being short, the men took to their oars once more, +while, with no impediment to their view, the doctor took out his glass +and offered it to Morny. But the lad made a quick gesture, and sat back +looking straight before him, while the doctor used the glass himself, +gazing with it first at the brig, about whose hull no one was visible, +while all seemed still on board the three schooners. + +"Take a look, Rodney," said the doctor aloud, as he handed the glass. +"I can see nothing wrong." + +Rodd eagerly took the glass, raised it to his eyes, and said quietly-- + +"Why, I can't see a soul on board the _Sally_, uncle, and the people on +the other schooners must be asleep. They haven't seen us yet--Yes, they +have!" he cried. "The men are hurrying up on our vessel from below, +but--" + +"But what, my boy?" + +"I--I don't quite know, uncle. Something isn't right. Oh, Morny, what +have I said?" + +As the boy spoke he let the glass drop to the full length of his arm, +and in all probability it would have fallen to the bottom of the boat +had not Joe Cross caught it in his hand. + +"May I look, sir?" he said sharply, and without waiting for consent, he +raised it to his eyes and quickly scanned all three of the schooners in +turn. + +"It's no use beating about, gentlemen," he said sharply. "Something is +wrong, for all three decks are swarming now with men like bees--wasps, I +ought to say," he muttered, as he concentrated his gaze upon the _Maid +of Salcombe_. "Our vessel, doctor, is in the hands of pirates, or +slavers, and they are making ready the long gun. Now, my lads, look +alive. Every man buckle on his arms and then load." + +The oars were allowed to swing from the tholes, and the boat was left to +glide slowly downwards, while in their smart orderly way her crew +prepared for action. + +"You will load too, gentlemen--with ball. Now, doctor, will you take +command and lead us?" + +"What to do?" asked the doctor. + +"Why, to take our schooner again, sir. She's in the hands of an enemy." + +"But is it possible that we can do this, Cross?" cried the doctor. + +"I don't know, sir, for she's got a lot of men on board; but we have got +to try." + +"Stop. Let me think," said the doctor. "I am no man of war, and this +is not in my way. If any unfortunate fellow were wounded I could do my +best. But look here, my lads; you are nearly all men-of-war's men, and +you, Morny, you are a naval officer. Seeing the odds before us, what is +our duty here?" + +"To fight," cried the young man passionately, through his clenched +teeth. + +"Ay, ay, sir!" came heartily from the men; and as the doctor turned his +eyes inquiringly upon Rodd, who was fiercely ramming the second bullet +upon the small shot already in the two barrels of his gun, he saw a look +in the lad's face that he had never seen there before, and in spite of +the pain of the situation, he felt a thrill of satisfaction running +through his breast at the thought that, young as his nephew was, he was +English to the core. + +"Yes," said the doctor, "we must fight; but with such odds against us we +must bring cunning to bear." + +"Ay, ay, sir! That's right," cried Cross. "But perhaps, as we've got +right on our side and only a set of mongrels before us, a good bold dash +to board them will make us as strong as they. I say, sir, if you will +let me lead, we will try and take our schooner, give them a broadside of +bullets when we get close up, and then out steel and board her like men. +Once over her side, there won't be many of them left on deck at the end +of five minutes; and as soon as we have got her and the use of her guns, +if we don't sink them other two pirates I have never been to sea." + +"That's right, Joe," came in chorus, as, standing in the bows with one +hand upon his gun, the other upon his right hip, he looked the very +perfection of a British man-of-war's man, ready to lead or be led, +wherever duty called. + +Then, as if inspired by his appearance, the crew burst out into a +ringing cheer, helped by the two lads, while the doctor took off and +waved his straw hat as he joined in. _Bang_--_thud_! + +A great grey puff of smoke started from the schooner's deck and a ball +came skipping in their direction over the smooth stream. + +"Well, I do call that too bad," cried Joe, as the men uttered a +deep-toned "Yah-h-h!" + +"Arter the way in which I cared for you and kept you clean, to go and +behave like that!" + +"Well, poor dumb beast," growled Briggs, "she don't know no better." + +"Do you call that dumb?" cried Joe, merrily enough. "Well, I s'pose she +was obliged; but I don't think much of their gunnery, messmates," +continued the man, as he made use of the glass again. "Oh, they're all +at work, sir, re-loading, and it will soon be our turn. I propose, sir, +that we let them give us another shot, and then dash in before they have +time to re-load. They won't hit us; will they, boys?" + +"Not they!" came in chorus; but the next moment there was another +report, and a smaller ball struck the water so near the boat that the +spray was sent flying over them. + +"They've got the two small guns to bear, sir," said Joe quietly, "and +there's somebody aboard as knows how to aim." + +He had hardly ceased speaking when there was another puff of smoke from +the schooner's deck, accompanied by a whizzing, shrieking sound through +the air just above their heads, while before they had glided with the +stream another dozen yards there was a puff of smoke from the +three-master's deck, followed directly after by a puff from the strange +schooner, and as the reports of the two heavy guns were echoed from the +great walls of verdure upon the river's bank, the air over their heads +seemed full of shrieking missiles. + +"Grape and broken iron," growled Joe Cross. "Take the tiller, Harry +Briggs. Step the mast, my lads, and run up the sail. Don't take no +notice of their shot. It don't do to go mad, even if we do want to +fight. Don't go to sleep over it, boys. We are in the breeze again, +and we must run into shelter and think." + +A low growl came from the men as they rapidly obeyed orders, and not a +man seemed to flinch as the long gun of the English schooner sent forth +its heavy missile again, this time to strike the water some distance +ahead and then rise and go crashing amongst the trees, whose leaves +could be seen to come pattering down. + +Three more shots came skipping over the river before the boat began to +glide swiftly, under the pressure of her sail, and yells of derision +came ringing from the enemy as they saw the effect of their fire and the +effort being made to escape. + +"Ah!" half sighed Rodd. "They've left off." + +"Ay, sir," said the coxswain. "They know they can't hit us now we are +flying through the water; and the worst of it is, they think we are +afraid and that we English dogs are running away as hard as we can, with +our tails between our legs. But they aren't, sir; they're a-standing up +stiff and at right angles, as our old man calls it, to our backs; eh, +messmates?" + +"Ay, ay, Joe!" came from the crew, with a roar of laughter. + +"And as for my teeth--our teeth, I mean--they are about as sharp as +sharp. But we have got the wind with us, gentlemen, and we will just +run up-stream and round the bend yonder, so as to get behind the trees +just somewhere where we can keep watch with that there little spy-glass, +and by and by we will have another try. This go they a'n't played fair, +but next time we'll make 'em." + +"How, Joe?" cried Rodd. + +"Well, sir, my idea is to tackle 'em man to man when they can't use +their guns. I mean when it's too dark for them to aim; and then we can +drop down upon them, or sail up to them fore or aft or either side, and +them not know where to have us. It won't be shooting then, but cold +steel, as we know how to use. Well, think of that now!" cried the man, +as the boat was now literally skimming over the surface. "Call myself a +leader! Why, as true as I am here, I never once thought of firing a +shot. Why, we might have given them one volley, messmates. I don't +suppose we should have hit, with them behind the bulwarks, but we might +have startled the beggars at the guns. Never mind; we have saved our +gunpowder. A man must miss sometimes, and this has been a bad 'un. +Next time, though, my lads, we must make it a hit." + +The sailor ceased speaking, for his eyes had suddenly lighted upon +Morny's face, and, as he afterwards said to Rodd, "Blest, sir, it sent a +regular chill through me, for in all the hooroar of that job I forgot +all about his father and our old man. But never say die, sir. They may +have got away in one of the boats and be coasting along out to sea." + + + +CHAPTER FORTY SEVEN. + +FIREWORKS. + +The boat was well run up out of reach and sight of the enemy, a spot +being selected where by a little manoeuvring beneath the shade of an +overhanging tree a few boughs could be pressed aside and a watch kept +upon the movements of those on board the schooners, in case of their +boats coming in pursuit, or, what was quite probable, one or other of +the vessels heaving anchor and coming up with the tide. + +But the time wore on without any sign being made, and as far as could be +made out through the glass, the Spaniards seemed to be quite content +with beating off the attack, and from their movements they had +apparently come to the conclusion that they had seen the last of the +occupants of the boat. + +But they did not know the temper of those on board, nor that a quiet +little council of war had been going on, till, feeling the necessity for +the men being properly prepared ready for any fresh attempt, the doctor +suggested that a substantial meal should be made; and this was partaken +of with a far better appetite than could have been expected. More than +one plan had been suggested regarding the next proceedings. One was +that they should steal down the river under cover of the darkness and go +in search of their friends; another, that an attempt should be made, +when the tide was flowing most swiftly, to cut the cables, in the hope +that the vessels might drift ashore; but Joe Cross disposed of this +directly as not likely to be of any permanent advantage, and declared +that there was only one thing to be done, and that was, to follow up +with another bold attempt to board. + +"You see, gentlemen," he said, "we never had a chance to get within +touch of the Spanish mongrels. I don't want to brag, but with a fair +start there aren't one of our chaps here as wouldn't take a good grip of +his cutlass and go for any three of them; eh, messmates?" + +"In an or'nary way, Joe," said Harry Briggs. + +"Well, this is an or'nary way, messmate." + +"Nay; I call this a 'stror'nary one." + +"Well, speak out, messmate, and say what you mean." + +"Well, same as you do, Joe, only I put it a little different. Win or +lose, I'd go in for tackling three of them in an or'nary way, but I says +this is a 'stror'nary one, and you may put me down for six, and if I get +the worst of it, well, that'll be a bit of bad luck. But anyhow I'd +try." + +"And so say all of us," came from the rest. + +"Well," said Joe, laughing, "I never knew afore that I was the most +modest chap in our crew." + +"Oh, I have no doubt about your courage, my lads," said the doctor, "nor +that my nephew here, though he is a boy, will fight like a man; but if +we are to do any good we must work with method against such great odds. +So now, Cross, let us hear what you propose to do." + +"Try again, sir--in the dark--and play a bit artful." + +"But how?" cried Rodd eagerly. + +"Well, I'll tell you, Mr Rodd. I proposes that we just show ourselves +once or twice towards evening, and then make a dash right across the +river to hide again among the trees. That'll set 'em all thinking and +asking one another what our game's going to be. Then we will lie up +till it's dark, up with the grapnel, and steal quietly down the river, +keeping pretty close to the trees, till we are about opposite the enemy, +and then we'll make a mistake." + +"Make a mistake?" said Rodd. "I don't understand you." + +"Well, sir, I aren't done yet. What I mean is, have an accident like; +one of us sneeze, or burst out a-coughing, and me break out into a +regular passion, calling him as coughed a stoopid lubber and a fool for +showing the enemy where we are. It will be best for me to be him as +coughs or sneezes, and do it all myself so as not to have any muddle +over it. Then I shouts out, `Pull for your lives, boys--pull!' And we +makes no end of splashing as we goes on down the river, and all the time +as supposing that it's going to be dark enough so as they can't fire at +us. Then it seems to me, Dr Robson, sir, that the enemy will say to +theirselves, `They want to get out to sea, and they are gone,' while as +soon as we have got a bit lower down we'll lie up under the trees and +wait till about an hour before daylight, and all as quiet and snug as so +many rats. They'll think they have got rid of us, and all the while we +shall be waiting our time to steal up again right by 'em and begin to +come down once more from where they don't expect; and then--board." + +"Hah!" cried Rodd. "Capital!" + +"You see, gentlemen, it'll all have to be done as quiet as quiet, for +they're sure to have a watch set. I know what out-and-outers they are +to sleep, but it's too much to expect that they will have both eyes shut +at a time like this. One way or t'other we shall have the tide with us, +but even if we don't I think it might be managed, and anyhow we shall +have no big guns at work upon us, and watch or no watch we'll manage to +lay this 'ere boat alongside of our schooner, and if any one says +anything again' our getting aboard, I should like to know why, and if we +do get aboard I don't think it's in the schooner's new crew to drive us +back again into the boat. There, gentlemen, that's all I know, and if +some one else--the doctor here, or Mr Rodd, or Mr Morny, who is a +French naval officer--can give us a better way, I'll follow anywhere, +and I know the lads will come after me like men." + +There was silence for about a minute, and then the doctor coughed, +drawing all eyes upon him. + +"There is no better way," he said. "It's a splendid plan." + +A murmur of assent arose, and Joe Cross looked quite modest. + +"But it will be some time yet before we can make our attempt," said the +doctor; "and how are we to pass the weary time till then?" + +"Oh," said Joe cheerily, "we can watch these 'ere great smiling efts +till then. They seem to be sailing about and watching us as if they'd +got some sort of an idea that they were to have us to eat by and by, +which I don't mean that they shall. And then there'll be making the +false starts. I think, sir, as we'll make one or two, as if we was half +afraid to make a dash for it, and that'll draw their fire." + +"But suppose they hit us, Joe," cried Rodd. + +"Oh, we must chance that, sir. They can't hit us. They couldn't hit a +hay-stack in a ten-acre field; let alone a boat being pulled hard across +stream. That'll be all right." + +And so it proved when Joe Cross put his tactics into force, making the +men row out into the river, and then ordering them to lie on their oars, +while Rodd watched the schooner's decks and announced that some of the +men were busy about the guns and all crowding to the bulwarks to watch +the proceedings of the boat. + +Then a feint was made in one direction, then in another, and at last Joe +stood up in the stern, to begin gesticulating to the men, as if bullying +them into making a bold dash to row swiftly down as near the farther +shore as they could go. + +A minute later two puffs of smoke from different vessels shot out into +the clear evening air, the balls ricochetting from the water in each +case a few yards away. Then, with the men pulling as hard as ever they +could, the boat's head was swung round, and rowing diagonally across the +stream they made for the shelter of the shore from which they had come, +the sail was hoisted, filled, and away they went till they were right +round the bend and the anchored schooners were out of sight. + +"There, Mr Rodd, sir, what did I tell you?" cried Joe triumphantly. "I +knew they couldn't hit us. Chaps like them ought never to be allowed to +handle a gun." + +"Well, my man," said the doctor, "if the rest of your plan will only +succeed like this we shall achieve a victory." + +"Nay, nay, sir; only a little boat action. There, my lads, now we'll +have a rest. They're sure to think we have gone right up the river." + +"But they may send boats to follow us," suggested Rodd. + +"Certainly, sir, they may; but I don't think they will. They won't come +to close quarters so long as they have got bulwarks to fight from behind +and the guns to tackle us when we show. They think that we can't face +the pieces. Well, I don't say as we are very ready to when there's +another way round, but we haven't got long to wait before we must make +another move, for the sun's down behind the trees, and I shouldn't be +sorry if it was to come on a fog." + +But no fog came, only darkness the blackest of the black, and the few +stars that peered out only looking strangely dim. + +The wind had fallen soon after the sail had been lowered and the mast +laid well out of their way. One of the balls of spun yarn they had in +the locker had been brought into use, cut into lengths, and the oars +secured so that they could not slip away when they were left to swing, +and at last under cover of the night the next part of Joe's programme +was begun. + +It was harder work than had been anticipated, for though the current +close in shore was slack, it was very difficult to keep at a respectable +distance from the bank as they glided down-stream, while every now and +then there was a swirl in the water suggesting that one of the great +reptiles had been disturbed. + +But still the adventurers progressed, and their leader was keenly on the +alert, looking out for the lights of the anchored vessels, ready to +raise his false alarm as soon as he got abreast. + +But he looked in vain; the Spaniards had taken the precaution to cover +their riding lights, and Joe Cross was about to draw his bow at a +venture, when a sharp shock which made the boat thrill suggested that +they had struck upon a floating tree trunk, washed probably out of the +bank during the past flood. + +But the next moment they were aware that the boat's stem had come in +contact with one of the crocodiles, which gave a tremendous plunge and +began to send the water flying in all directions as it beat heavily upon +the surface with its tail. + +"Starn all!" roared Joe Cross involuntarily, and then recollecting +himself, he roared out, "Pull, lads! Pull for your lives!" For a light +suddenly appeared some thirty or forty yards to their left, followed by +another lower down the river. + +There was the buzz of voices upon the anchored vessels' decks, and Joe +kept on yelling wildly to the men to pull, the noise and excitement +being increased by the reports of muskets fired at them in a hurried +ungoverned way, the flashes of light giving them faint instantaneous +glimpses of the vessels and the faces of the men on board. + +"Steady, my lads, steady! Ease off," said Joe, "gently. We have got to +come back again, you know, so we needn't go too far. Two or three +cables' lengths is plenty. How do you think we're getting on, sir?" + +"Is it possible they may come in pursuit?" whispered the doctor. + +"Nay, sir, I don't think it's likely. If it was us aboard those +schooners we should think that we--meaning us--there, sir--you know what +I mean--we should think t'other side was making for the sea. Well, +that's what they think, and now, sir, if they'll only show their lights +for the rest of the night, why, so much the better for we." + +"I don't see why, Joe," said Rodd, after a few minutes' thought. + +"Well, I'll tell you, my lad," whispered Joe.--"Steady there--steady! I +am going to lower down the grapnel, for I dursen't run in among the +trees. They'd crackle too much if we tried to moor to a branch, and we +don't want to capsize. Harry Briggs, look alive, and drop the flukes +overboard; make fast, and let us swing." + +This was all done almost without a sound, and just then a faint gleam of +light as the boat swung round showed them that certainly one of the +anchored vessels was still showing her light, while as it swung round a +little farther there were a couple more gleams higher up, as of distant +stars. + +"That's all right, gentlemen. Now, Mr Rodd, sir, I haven't answered +your question. Here's just enough breeze blowing to make me alter my +plans, so after a bit we'll step the mast again and have the sail ready +for hoisting, for we shall be able, with the lights to guide us, to sail +close up under the farther shore and come down again from just the way +they don't expect, run the boat alongside our schooner, and then one on +us will hold on by the boat-hook, while with the rest it's all aboard, +and the schooner's ours." + +That night seemed to Rodd almost as long, at times longer than the one +he had passed in the tree. But here it certainly was shorter, as he +afterwards declared, for about a couple of hours before daylight Joe +whispered his belief that they had none of them heard the slightest +sound from the direction of the lights, that if any one on board the +schooner's deck would be sleeping it would be then, and that they must +start at once. + +There was no question of all being ready, and at the whispered orders +Harry Briggs hauled softly upon the grapnel line, while very slowly and +silently the yard ran up the little mast, and the boat began to careen +over as the sail filled. + +Then with Joe Cross at the tiller she began to glide up-stream, the +grapnel was lifted on board without a sound, and silently and steadily +they began to cross the river diagonally till they were as near as the +steersman dared lay the little craft to the farther shore. + +Under his skilful management all went well, and so silently that nothing +but the faint pattering lap of the water against the bows could be +heard. + +To the two lads, though, that sounded unusually loud, as they crouched +down involuntarily but quite unnecessarily lower and lower in the boat +lest they should be seen, the light hoisted in each schooner seeming +bound to show the white sail to the watch of each vessel in turn. + +But no alarm was raised; not a sound reached the adventurers, and to +Rodd it seemed as if, after terrible periods of agony, three heavy loads +had been lifted from his breast. He wanted to whisper a few words to +Morny, who all through had been seated by his side, but nothing but the +pressure of hand upon arm passed between them, while they could hardly +hear the doctor breathe. + +At last, though, that period of the terrible suspense was at an end, and +the third light they had passed, that of the _Maid of Salcombe_, was +beginning to grow fainter, and being left behind. + +"Now, what next?" thought Rodd. "How much longer shall we have to wait +before the attack is made?" + +The answer came very shortly after, for Joe Cross bore lightly upon the +tiller, sent the boat gliding round in a wide circle which ended by +bringing the three mooring lights they had left behind all in a line, +and then as they began to glide down-stream he whispered-- + +"It's now or never, sir.--Cutlashes, my lads; in five minutes we shall +be alongside. You, Harry Briggs, shy the grapnel on deck and make fast; +we shall soon be all aboard. Then come and help us all you can." + +There was a low deep breath like a thrill passing through the boat, a +peculiar sound of movement which Rodd knew was the men drawing their +cutlasses, and then as his heart went heavily thump, thump, thump within +his breast, he felt that two hands were seeking for his, and as he +raised it towards the right it was grasped firmly a moment by Uncle +Paul's, and the next moment, as it was released, by that of Morny. + +It was short work, for the boat was gliding steadily down, and directly +after the lad felt Joe Cross bending over him. + +"She's just right, sir," he whispered. "Ketch hold of the tiller, and +keep her as she is. I must go for'ard now to lead." + +The boat swayed a little as the man stepped between his mates to the +front. Then as soon as the distance was considered right a light +rattling sound was heard, and Rodd was conscious of the sail being +lowered, though he could see nothing of it, while almost the next minute +there was a faint shock as the boat glided against the side of the +schooner. + +Then Joe Cross's cry, "All aboard!" rang out, followed by a stentorian +cheer, and amidst the rush and hurry the tiller slipped from the boy's +hand and he was climbing over the thwarts to spring into the +fore-chains. Then he tottered as if about to fall back into the boat, +but a big hand grasped him by the shoulder, steadied him for a moment, +and then he was with the little party dashing side by side into what +seemed to be a chaos of savage yells and shrieks which rose in wild +confusion from the gang of Spaniards who had sprung up from their sleep, +where they lay scattered about the deck. + +English shouts to come on, Spanish yells, wild mongrel cries, a shriek +or two of despair, a heavy plunge followed by another and another, +savage blows, and utterances such as fierce men make in the wild +culmination of their rage; then plunge after plunge in the water +alongside and astern, the splash of swimmers, strange lashings about in +the river, followed by shrieks and gurgling cries, and then, heard over +all, the combined voices of so many stout Englishmen in a fierce-- + +"_Hurrah_!" + +"Now then, all of you," shouted Joe Cross. "There's a lot of them down +below. Close that cabin hatch. Two on you to the fo'c'sle; serve that +the same. If you run against anybody in the dark, tell the beggar he'll +be safer overboard than here." + +But there proved to be no one below in the men's quarters, and after +making quite sure the two men returned to their comrades. Then-- + +"Where's Mr Rodd?" shouted Joe. + +"Here, Joe," came out of the darkness. + +"Mr Morny?" + +"I'm here," came in a breathless voice. + +"And the doctor?" + +"Helpless, Joe. My ankle's sprained." + +"Bad luck to it," cried the man. "Where's Harry Briggs?" + +"All right, mate," came in a gruff surly voice; "but you needn't have +been in such a hurry to get it done." + +"Hurry?" cried Joe. "Why, it's only just in time. Later than we +thought. It's getting light. Now then, who else is hurt?" + +There was a growl or two, and Joe shouted again-- + +"Is any one killed? Bah! Won't say so if he is! What about that boat, +Harry?" + +"She's fast enough, messmate." + +"Hah! That's right. Now then, hold hard a moment. Hear 'em aboard the +other boats?" + +The question was unnecessary, for shouts and yells for help were +evidently rising from men who had swum down-stream to the sides of their +consorts, and ceased as they were dragged on board. But a low buzzing +murmur kept on, as from a couple of wildly-excited crowds. + +Then a sharp shrill voice began giving orders in Spanish, one being +followed up with a pistol shot, which was succeeded by a yell and a +partial cessation of the buzz of excitement that sounded as if coming +from a swarm of human hornets. + +"That was the Spanish captain's voice, I am sure," cried Rodd. + +"Eight, sir," shouted Joe. "I'd swear to it. Well, he's getting part +of his dose. Oh, if it wasn't so dark! Big gun's crew!" he cried. "Is +the tackle with her?" + +"Ay, ay!" came in answer, after a short bustle of movement, in which +trained men took their places. + +"Here, run the rammer down her throat, my lads. She may be loaded." + +There was the sound of the stout ash staff passing down the bore of the +gun, and the answer came-- + +"Right!" + +"Good," replied Joe. "Lower down that light. We must use that--if we +fire. But we want fresh charges, and there will be no more here." + +There was a quick search made, but without result, and Joe Cross stood +silent for a few moments. + +"Well," cried the doctor, "why don't you send below, to the magazine?" + +"Cabin hatch is closed, sir, and some of the slavers are below. This +way, my lads--cutlashes. We must have them out." + +"Of course!" cried Rodd excitedly, and Morny uttered a suppressed hiss, +as he pressed forward, sword in hand. + +"Yes, gentlemen," said Joe; "it's their doing, and they must chance the +crocs, for we must clear the vessel before it's broad day." + +At that moment there was a crashing sound as if the cabin hatch was +being forced open, and as Joe Cross, followed by the rest, dashed aft, +there was a yell, a rush, and some eight or ten of the mongrel enemy +forced their way on deck, to be met at once by the schooner's crew, who +charged at them as men-of-war's men know how to charge. + +There was a short encounter, the clash of steel against steel, and the +fresh-comers who had taken refuge below began to give way, and in a +couple of minutes more the deck was once more cleared, the splashing and +plunging of swimming men making for the rapidly dimming light of the +next schooner being followed by more blood-curdling yells and groans, +mingled with cries for help, while a few minutes later a boat could be +faintly seen and efforts were evidently being made to drag the swimmers +on board. + +"Now then for the gun!" cried Joe. + +"What are you going to do?" asked Rodd, who with Morny kept close to the +coxswain's side. + +"Fight, sir," replied Cross fiercely, "before they begin to fight us. +See to the other guns, my lads. The way's open to the magazine now. +It'll be light directly, and that Spanish skipper won't leave us long +before he begins.--There, what did I say?" + +For all at once the meaning of the Spaniards' orders, enforced by a +pistol shot, was explained by a bright flash, the roar of a heavy gun, +and the whistle of a shot just over the speaker's head. + +A dead silence now fell for a few moments upon the deck of the _Maid of +Salcombe_. There was a little bustle of preparation, and then a period +of waiting, during which Joe Cross carefully sighted the loaded gun, +depressing her muzzle all he could, the two lads the while listening +excitedly to the stir and orders which came from the Spanish +three-master's deck. + +"Oh, fire, Joe--fire!" whispered Rodd. "We shall have another shot from +her directly." + +"Yes, my lad, I know; but I want to make sure of a little more +light.--_Fire_!" he said, directly afterwards. + +A spark was seen to sink at once upon the touch-hole of the long gun, +there was a deep roar as she seemed to leap from the deck, a heavy +instantaneous crash, and then a return shot which went wide of their +schooner. + +"You've hit, Joe," cried Rodd excitedly, as he stood amidst the smoke, +which began to spread about where they gathered. + +"Yes, sir, I hit," said the man, with a half-laugh, as the crew of the +gun busied themselves sponging out and preparing to re-load. "They +pretty well filled her to the muzzle, but they got what they meant for +us. But hallo! what's the meaning of this 'ere? What's the matter with +us now?" + +Only this, that the _Maid of Salcombe_ was adrift and threatening, if +something were not done to bring her up, to drift ashore not far from +where the faint morning light revealed the brig lying right over on her +side as helpless as any hulk. + +Joe Cross, closely followed by the lads, ran forward to the bows, Rodd +one side, Joe and Morny the other. + +"Why, the cable must have broke adrift," cried the coxswain, leaning +over, to see that the great rope was hanging down straight from the +starboard hawse-hole. + +"Cut, Joe, cut," shouted Rodd. "Quick! Look out!" For as he had +leaned over the bulwarks just above the larboard hawse-hole, a great +swarthy mulatto, knife in hand, was climbing up, and as soon as he +caught sight of the lad he made for him at once. + +Rodd stood upon his guard and managed to strike aside the thrust made at +him by the mulatto; but the latter was lithe and active as a monkey. He +struck at the boy again, and as Rodd gave way the fellow threw himself +on to the rail and sprang over, but only to be cut down by Joe Cross, +who had answered the boy's call. + +It was the saving of Rodd's life, but the mulatto was dangerous still, +and recovering himself he made a dash at Morny, who stepped aside, +while, with all the ferociousness of a Malay running amok, the man +sprang aft, avoided two or three cuts made at him by the sailors, and +then plunged over the side, to begin swimming towards the three-master, +which was in the act of sending another shot at the doctor's vessel. + +This one crashed through the bulwarks, sending the splinters flying in +all directions, and making the coxswain shout to his men to stand firm, +as, seeing their perilous position, he hurried to their help, for the +big schooner had slipped her cable, a sail had been run up, and she was +beginning to answer her helm, while the _Maid of Salcombe_ was drifting +helplessly towards the shore. + +It was a choice between hoisting sail and letting go another anchor +while the chance was there, as the two vessels forged slowly ahead +preparing to send in another shot. + +This latter in his excitement Joe Cross essayed to do, striking their +enemy just at the water-line as she passed them, while now the slaver's +sister craft began firing as she too, hoisting sail, was coming +up-stream. + +"Ah!" panted the sailor, as he turned to Uncle Paul. "Here's your +peaceful schooner, sir, as trades in palm-oil! Why, they are pirates +and slavers, sir, and I've done it now. Too late, my lads--too late!" +he cried to the men, who had let go the other anchor. "Nothing can save +us now. We are going ashore." + +"Oh, don't give up, man," cried the doctor angrily. + +"I won't, sir. None of us will; but--There, I said as much. We just +touched bottom then. There she goes again! And in another minute we +shall be fast in the mud, and they'll have nothing to do but powder away +at us till we are a wreck. Slew that there gun round, boys, and let's +give her another shot or two while there's a chance." + +"No, no," cried Rodd. "Not at that! Fire at the other. Can't you see, +Joe? Uncle! Morny! The three-master's going down!" + +It was quite true, for the first shot from the _Maid of Salcombe_, that +sent from the long gun, crammed as Joe had said almost to the muzzle, +had torn into the slaver just below water-line. The second had been +just as effective in its aim, the water had been pouring in ever since, +and now, as she was evidently settling down by the head, her guns were +forsaken, all discipline was at an end, and her crew had made a rush for +the boats, which were soon after overcrowded and being pushed off by +their occupants to make for the third schooner. This last, fairly well +managed, came slowly on, firing from time to time at the English craft, +which, had now swung round upon her heel and lay bowsprit to the shore +in a falling tide. + +As far as was possible her guns were slewed round, and a steady reply to +the enemy's fire was kept up; but her doom seemed to be sealed, the +Spaniard being able to choose her own position, while minute by minute +the English vessel was getting more helpless. + +"Well, gentlemen, what's it to be?" said Joe, as he stood coolly wiping +the blackened perspiration from his forehead. + +"Keep on firing to the last," said the doctor sternly. "Better die like +men than surrender and be murdered, for after what has passed there can +be no mercy here." + +"That's right, sir," said the man, "but there's the young gentlemen, and +we don't any of us want to die if we can help it." + +"Why, you are not beaten, are you, Joe?" cried Rodd fiercely. + +"Not a bit of it, sir, but here's our schooner, and there's Mr Morny's +brig. It's no use to make an ugly face over a nasty dose. We are +beaten, and nothing that we could do could keep that slaver from seeing +that she's won." + +"Go on firing, and sink her," cried Rodd. "Look at the other one," and +he pointed to the three-master, whose decks looked as if they were +awash. + +"Well, sir, that's what we have been trying to do; but she won't sink. +How so be, here goes, my lad, for another try, and--What's the meaning +of that?" + +For all at once through the smoke that rose from the schooner they could +see that something fresh had taken place--what, they could not make out, +but it was something important, and one of the enemy's smaller guns was +fired in the other direction. + +"Why, there must be help coming from down the river," cried the doctor +excitedly. "Yes, hark at that!" + +For in reply to the schooner's gun a desultory series of musket shots +began to ring out, and encouraged by this and the knowledge that help +must be at hand, the little English crew sent forth a cheer, dragged the +long gun more and more round, and sent one of the most successful shots +they had fired crash into the enemy's stern. + +To the astonishment of all, the firing on board the enemy ceased; +another sail was run up, and as it filled the schooner swung round upon +another tack and began to sail steadily down the river, clearing the way +for those on board the English vessel to see a couple of well-manned +boats being rowed steadily up-stream, with men in the stern-sheets +keeping up a musketry fire. + +"Quick!" shouted Moray. "Another shot! Friends! Friends!" + +"Yes, sir," said Joe quietly, "but I don't see how it's to be done. +Yes, we might do it from a little gun;" and he ran with a part of the +crew to try and slew her round. + +"No good, gentlemen," he said. "By the time we can get a shot off we +shall risk hitting those boats, whatever they are, and they are coming +to our help. Here, hasn't anybody got a glass?" + +"No," cried Rodd; "it was left in the boat." + +"Well, there's one in the cabin. Here, one of you run down." + +"No, no," cried Morny excitedly; "they're our boats. Look! That's my +father in one," he cried hysterically. + +"And if that aren't our old man in the other my name aren't Joe Cross!" + + + +CHAPTER FORTY EIGHT. + +THE HELP THAT CAME. + +In those brief few minutes despair and dogged determination were turned +into the mingled emotions of triumph and delight, for the two boats, +after giving two or three volleys at the schooner, whose crew contented +themselves with hoisting a couple more sails to increase their speed, +came on as hard as the men could row, their crews cheering in French and +English with all their might, while in the stern of one the Count stood +up waving his cap; in that of the other Captain Chubb, looking grim and +stern, stood like a statue, his left foot on the thwart before him, his +right resting upon the muzzle of a musket. + +"Here, I don't feel as if I'd got a cheer left in me, lads," cried Joe +Cross to his tired companions on board the stranded schooner; "but we +must give them one, or they'll think we aren't much obliged to them for +coming, and there's no gammon about it, we are, and no mistake." + +"Cheer, yes!" cried Rodd. "With all your might, my lads. Take your +time from me. Now then, as you never cheered before--Hooray!" + +There was no want of heartiness either in that or in those which +followed, to be returned as enthusiastically from the two boats, which +were rapidly nearing, so that in a few minutes Rodd and his uncle were +wringing the hands of the bluff old skipper, while it was observable +that all three kept their backs to the French Count and his son till +they came up together, when the three started round in surprise, going +through a curious kind of pantomime as if they were astonished to see +the Frenchmen there. + +Meanwhile a regular fraternisation had gone on between the crews, and +after a mere glance at the three masts of the schooner, which were +standing out of the water about a couple of hundred yards away, the +skipper's whole attention was directed to their own vessel, whose keel +was now fast in the mud, and which was beginning to heel over slightly. + +"Then I suppose you took her again, doctor?" he said gruffly. + +"Well, hardly," said Uncle Paul. "It was Cross and the lads who did +that." + +"More shame to him, then," growled the skipper. "I should have thought +you were seaman enough, Joe Cross, to have kept her afloat and not run +her aground like this." + +"Well, I do call that ungrateful," cried Rodd. "I say, uncle, oughtn't +he to have saved the schooner from being taken?" + +"That's one for me, doctor," said the skipper, with a grim smile and a +twinkle in his eye. "The boys of this here generation seem to grow up +pretty sharp. But he's quite right. They pretty well caught a weasel +asleep that time." + +"But how was it?" cried Rodd. + +"How was it, my lad? Why, we was hard at work one morning, when up the +river comes another of them nice respectable schooners in the oil trade. +Oil trade, indeed! Rank slavers, that's what they were, carrying on +trade with one of those murderous chiefs up country! Set of black +Satans as attack villages and carry off the poor wretches to sell to +your oil traders for sending off to the plantations. Well, one don't +like killing fellow-creatures, or seeing them pulled down below by the +crocs, but somehow I don't feel so very uncomfortable about them as we +had to fight with and have got the worst of it. What are you smiling +at, young Squire Rodd?" + +"I was only thinking how you always hated the slave trade, captain." + +"Right," said Captain Chubb, with a friendly nod. "Well, the schooner +sends her skipper aboard the three-master. Then he comes to where I was +busy at work with the men, putting the finishing touches to the brig, +and tells me and the Count a long tale about his having come up to join +his friend the Spanish captain, who he hears has gone up the river for a +row. Then he goes back to his schooner, makes her snug, and it seemed +as if him and his men had all gone to sleep, when it was me." + +"You?" cried Rodd wonderingly. + +"Well, what they call metyphorically, my boy, for I was wide awake +enough; but I couldn't see anything beyond the _Dagobert_, nor the Count +neither, for he wanted her afloat. Then the time went on, and all very +quiet, till just in the middle of one of the hottest days when I was in +full feather, thinking that I could tell the Count that night that the +job was done, and we could let her sit the water again next day when the +tide served, all at once we had a surprise. There were only four or +five men aboard the schooner, and I suppose they were keeping their +watch, but just all at once a couple of boats rowed up to them, one from +one schooner, one from the other, and before any of us knew what was up, +our fellows were swimming for the shore, and if it hadn't been for the +Count, who was on the look-out for crocs, and let them have two barrels +twice over, neither of the poor fellows would have joined their mates as +had been working with me." + +The speaker turned to the Count, who nodded his head quickly, and then +looked at his son as much as to say, Yes, this is quite true. + +"Well," continued the skipper, "I felt as if all the wind had been +knocked out of me, and as soon as I could speak and quite understand +that my schooner had been took, I began to bully-rag the poor lads who +had just escaped with their lives, for, not having time to get a gun or +a cutlass, they had been almost as helpless on board as they were in the +water among them reptiles. I couldn't even believe it then, and began +questioning the lads, and you might have knocked me down with a feather, +as people say, and the Count there with another, when they all swore +that our Spanish skipper had led the men from his three-master in one of +the boats. Then we began to see the worst." + +The skipper turned with a questioning look at the Count again, to +receive a second grave nod, while this time the latter laid his hand +upon his son's shoulder, and a long eager glance passed between them. + +"Well, I don't know that I have much more to say," said the skipper, +"only that it was a bad job, being a fresh one we had got to tackle and +meant to do. The Count here fitted me and my lads up with some weepuns, +and we settled that as soon as it was dark we'd man two of the brig's +boats, and board first one and then the other of the two schooners. +Well, we tried, but they were waiting for us, and I don't know how we +escaped, for they met us with such a fire that if we had kept on both +boats must have been sunk, and we never got within touch of either of +the enemy, but drifted down with the tide; and somehow just then I +suppose there must have been a flood somewhere up the river, down came +the water in a way that we couldn't meet, and it was only by pretty good +seamanship on the part of the Frenchmen more than ours, though we helped +all we knew, that we were able to keep afloat; and since then we have +been right down to the sea, and it's been very hard to get enough to +eat. But somehow we managed to keep alive, shooting what we could and +catching a fish or two now and then as we came up the river again. For +of course we were not going to give up without finishing our job; and it +seems to me that we got here just at the right time, and found that +things weren't half so bad as we thought; eh, Count?" + +"My friend," replied the latter, "how can I ever repay you?" + +"Oh, let's talk about that, sir, when I have done something to keep the +_Maid of Salcombe_ upright and finished my other job and the brig's +afloat, which it seems to me we can manage at high water; but I never +bargained for having our schooner to set right too through the lubberly +management of that chap Joe Cross. There," he cried angrily, "I can't +and won't say another word till I have had something to eat, for we are +all half starved." + +"Get on board the schooner, then, every one," cried the doctor, "for I +have got my work here." + +It was a fact, for now the fight was over the men began to stiffen, and +several unexpectedly turned faint, it proving that though not a single +man was seriously wounded, nearly every one of those who had followed +Joe Cross in his gallant achievement of boarding the schooner, and in +beating down the slaver's crew when they forced their way out of the +cabin, was more or less injured and had been doing his best to hide the +knife stabs and contusions he had received. + +It was during the next two or three days that the doctor proved that he +was in his element, and that his knowledge of natural history was not +confined to his ordinary scientific pursuits, for no surgeon could have +been more skilful in his treatment of wounds, no physician more able in +alleviating the fever which supervened. + +It was a busy time for all, for not only was there the grounded schooner +to guard from going over, but strict watch to keep for the return of +enemies, and then, when the high tide served, all hands were at work, +save the poor disappointed fellows whose injuries kept them to their +bunks, in raising the brig to her old proud position. As she floated +out, herself once more, and dropped anchor in the stream, the men +literally yelled themselves hoarse, while on the following day at the +Count's request both vessels were dropping down with the tide, all on +board eager to leave behind the river, which in spite of its many +beauties was too full of painful recollections for its waters to be +recalled without horror and disgust. + + + +CHAPTER FORTY NINE. + +THE COUNT'S APPEAL. + +The south-west coast of Africa was fading away in the distance as the +two consorts with their natural history seekers rode over the dazzling +silver sea. The lads were abaft the schooner's wheel, quite inseparable +now, looking down through the eddying water at the fish, which seemed to +have taken the swift vessel for some mighty companion of their own +nature, in whose wake they could swim along in peace without fear of +lesser enemies. + +About an hour before, the brig's gig had brought the Count and his son +alongside the schooner, and the former was below in the doctor's +museum-like laboratory, listening to his learned friend's remarks upon +some fresh object that, now they had returned to the ways of peace, had +been fished up from just below the surface of the sea. + +Four of the schooner's crew were under an awning, lying upon a couple of +doubled-up spare sails which had been spread upon the deck, and the two +lads had been seated with them chatting for some little time before they +strolled aft. + +"How well your men look," Morny said suddenly--"all except Joe Cross." + +"Yes, he looks rather thin and pale, doesn't he?" said Rodd quickly; +"but he isn't ill. You saw how full of fun he was, and ready to joke +about having been bled too much. Uncle says he'll soon be well again, +for he's in such good spirits. But uncle told me quietly that it was a +wonder to him none of the poor fellows were killed. But oh, I say, +isn't this nice!" + +"Lazy," said Morny. + +"Oh, I don't call it lazy. It's so jolly to be able to hang about in +the sunshine without feeling that there's some great trouble coming on +directly." + +"Ah, yes," replied Morny, with a sigh, "and that perhaps you may not +live to see me next day." + +"Well," said Rodd, "I don't think it's lazy. Uncle says that after you +have been at work very hard it's like unstringing the bow; and so it is. +I want to begin fishing or dredging or sounding again. I don't want +any more shooting. Now, do you know what I should like just now?" + +"No." + +"I'd soon show you then that I wasn't lazy. I should like to see one of +those beautiful ripples two or three hundred yards off which show +that there's a shoal of fish feeding on the transparent +what-you-may-call-'ems--I forget Uncle Paul's name for them." + +"Well, if that would give you any satisfaction," said Morny, laughing, +"I wish that a shoal would rise." + +"Don't you be in such a hurry; I hadn't finished. I was going to say I +should then like to see one of those great sea-serpent-like creatures +rise slowly from below, to begin feeding on the fish--one of those great +scientific wonders that you and your father are trying to discover and +capture; for that's it, I suppose, though you do keep so squat about +it." + +"Ah-h-h!" said Morny, with a sigh; and he glanced sidewise at his young +English companion. + +"It is quite a joke, that it is," continued Rodd. "It's just as if you +were jealous and afraid that uncle and I would get beforehand with you, +and win the credit of the discovery for old England, instead of you +carrying it off for your _la belle France_." + +"Ah!" sighed Morny again, with a sad smile upon his lips. + +"You French chaps are so sentimental. _La belle France_ indeed! Just +as if old England or the British Isles weren't quite as beautiful! Only +we don't go shouting about it everywhere. I say, Morny, you don't half +believe in me." + +"It is false!" cried the young Frenchman angrily. "Why, I believe in +you more than in any one living--except my father." + +"Oh, indeed!" cried Rodd banteringly. "And here since I have known you +I have told you everything till I haven't a secret that I have kept from +you." + +"Why, you have had no secrets," said Morny. + +"Well--no; I suppose you couldn't call them secrets. But you've got +one, and you have never let it out to me." + +"No," said Morny gravely, "because it was not mine to tell. You don't +want me to be dishonourable, Rodd?" + +"Why, of course I don't, old chap. I don't want you to tell me till you +like, only it is rather a joke sometimes that you make such a mystery of +what uncle and I know as well as can be." + +"You know!" cried Morny sharply. + +"Why, of course I do. It's what I say. You want--I mean, your father +does--to carry off the honour of having solved the mystery of the great +fish or reptile that has been talked about for the last hundred years. +I say, though, there's that other great old-world thing that they find +in the rocks. What's his name?" + +Morny shook his head. + +"Here, I've got it--the sea-sawyer! That isn't quite right, but it +sounds something like it. Why, he must have been just like a great +crocodile." + +"Ugh! Don't talk about them," said Morny, with a shudder. + +"Eh, why not? There are none of them here. I wish we could have caught +one to dry or stuff, or keep in spirits. I mean quite a little one, you +know. Ah, those were rather horrid times, though, and I shan't want a +specimen reptile to make me remember them." + +"No," said Morny musingly; "we want nothing to make us recollect them." + +"But I suppose it is nearly all over now, for our voyages will soon come +to an end." + +"Oh no?" cried Morny eagerly. "Why should they, now that your uncle and +my father have become such friends?" + +The lads both started, for those of whom they were speaking just then +strolled up behind them. + +"Well, boys," said the Count gravely, "what are you two talking about?" + +"Rodd was saying that he supposed our friendship would soon come to an +end." + +"Indeed?" cried the Count, raising his eyebrows and turning to give a +meaning glance at Uncle Paul. "Why should it, eh, my lad? I thought +you and Morny had become such fast friends." + +"Yes, so we have, sir," cried Rodd, flushing; "but I didn't quite mean +that, for I hope we shall often meet; but I thought that now we are out +at sea again we should be separating. The brig will be going one way, +and we shall be going another." + +"Do you wish this to be so?" said the Count, after another glance at +Uncle Paul. + +"I? Oh no, sir." + +"And you, Morny, my son?" + +"I, my father? They should not go away if I could stop it." + +"You hear, doctor? Is not this strange after what we have been saying +in the cabin. I tell you again, before long I will be quite open with +you about the object of my voyage. At present I ask you not to press +me." + +"I have told you," said the doctor, smiling, "that I will not. I have +told you also that my object for the short time that I shall stay down +here in the south is to keep close inshore, while you tell me that you +wish to be able to sail right out to sea, and free to carry out your +project, whatever it may be." + +"Yes, yes, and I have told you too that you could be of the greatest +service to me by following close at hand, and that I should always be +most grateful if without injury to your own cruise you would keep in +company with me for the present." + +"Ready to help in case of further emergencies?" + +"No," cried the Count warmly; "my ideas were not so selfish as that. +But tell me this--is it urgent that we should part company now? I mean, +would you suffer loss, or would your own researches be injured by +keeping in company with us for say another month?" + +"No-o," said the doctor carelessly; "I am just as likely to make +discoveries far out to sea as close inshore." + +"Then stay with us for the present. I ask it as a friend, while I +guarantee that you shall not suffer by what you do for me." + +"Well," said the doctor, slowly and thoughtfully, as he looked at the +two lads, who were intently listening for his words, "what do you think, +Rodd? Shall we sail in company with the brig for a little longer?" + +"Am I to be judge, uncle?" said the boy merrily. "Yes, if you like." + +"Well, then," said the lad, with a mischievous twinkle in his eyes, as +he found that Morny with lips parted was gazing at him with a look of +appeal, "you see, uncle, we have been together a good while now, and +though we tried to help the brig we seem to have dragged it into a good +deal of mischief." + +"What are you saying, Rodd?" cried Morny passionately. + +"Oh, I mean that we have helped you a bit, but you have been very +unlucky since we have been together. Still, if Morny doesn't mind +risking it, and doesn't mind putting up with my jokes about _la belle +France_, and yours, uncle, about the Emperor Napoleon--" + +Morny started, and looked sharply at his father. + +"--though by this time," continued Rodd, "I suppose you, sir, have found +out that at heart uncle is very fond of the Emperor, and admires him +very much--" + +"You impudent young scoundrel, how dare you!" growled the doctor. +"Bah!" he muttered to himself, "Temper!" Then turning quickly to the +Count, he said almost apologetically, "Don't take any notice. I have +spoilt him, sir; I have spoilt him. Look here, my dear sir; I shall +very much regret the day when we have to part, for my own sake and for +my nephew's, for since he has had the advantage of your son's +companionship I have been in hopes that he would acquire something of +his refinement and polish, and that it might lead in time to his +achieving to somewhat of the carriage of a gentleman. I regret to say +that so far he is as rough and boorish as ever. Still, in the hope that +every one of his opportunities may not be thrown away, I shall be glad +to prolong the intimacy a little longer. There, sir," he snapped out, +as he turned sharply upon Rodd, "what do you say to that?" + +"It's all right, Morny," said the boy quietly. "Go on polishing. I'll +be more attentive now, uncle." + +Morny gave him a quick nod, and turned then to grasp Uncle Paul's hand, +while the brig and the schooner went sailing on westward ho! + + + +CHAPTER FIFTY. + +THE DOCTOR WILL NOT BELIEVE. + +It was about a fortnight later, during which time, in deliciously calm +weather, the two vessels had been cruising here and there, to the great +satisfaction of the doctor, who was in a high state of delight, for he +had been harvesting, as he termed it--bottling, Joe Cross said-- +numberless specimens of the strange creatures that swarm upon the +surface of the southern Atlantic. And as they had got out so far, the +doctor had been sounding Captain Chubb as to the possibility and +advisability of making for that strange volcanic island known as +Trinidad--not the richly verdant island of the same name that seems as +if it had been once a portion of the north-east shoulder of +leg-of-mutton-like South America, but the solitary island right away +south-east from Bahia, which stands lonely in the ocean, the remains of +the great volcanic eminence swept by the terrific seas and tempests that +come up from the South Polar Ocean--an island that is the habitat of +strange sea-birds, the haunt of fish, and the home and empire of those +most hideous of the crustaceans, the land crabs. + +Captain Chubb grunted and said he would think about it and consult the +chart. As for the brig, Rodd did not banter Morny upon the subject when +he came aboard, as he did pretty well every day when Rodd and his uncle +had not visited the brig; but it was a standing joke between the lad and +Uncle Paul that King Dagobert had not sighted the sea-serpent as yet. + +"And it's my belief, Pickle, that they are going the wrong way to work." + +"Why, what would you do, then, uncle?" + +"Well, I'll tell you, my boy. He's a very shy bird, and if he knows you +are looking for him he won't show. If you and I take up the search I +tell you what we'll do; we won't look for him; we'll let him look for +us." + +"According to that, then, uncle, we are more likely to find him than +they are." + +"Of course, my boy. Why, haven't we proved it?" + +They were down in the laboratory, where Joe Cross had been helping them +over the bottling, but he had gone up on deck, the day's task being +over, and the skipper now came down, looked and snorted at the fresh +regiment of bottles, and made some remark about the doctor seeming out +of spirits. But he did not mean it for a joke. Captain Chubb never did +joke, for he was one of those men who pass their lives looking out for +squalls, and his allusion was to the emptiness of the doctor's set of +kegs. + +"Well, it doesn't matter," said the doctor. "Sit down and let's talk. +I have got quite as many preparations in spirits as will last me for +years. By the way, did you think any more about Trinidad?" + +"Deal," said the skipper shortly, and he gave the fixed table a rap with +a roll of paper which he had brought down tucked under his arm. "Here's +the chart." + +"Well?" said the doctor, wincing, as the skipper unrolled the map on the +dresser-like table, and catching up first one specimen bottle and then +another used them as paper-weights to keep the chart flat, while he +began to operate with his big rough, brown, index finger. + +"Here y'are," he said, "and its character written about it: currents, +shoals, stormy seas, all kinds of dangers. Bad landing-place; very +rocky--place if you go to you ought to stop away." + +"Sounds hopeful; eh, Pickle?" + +"Oh, but curious, uncle. I should like to go." + +"Well, then, you won't," said the skipper gruffly, "because your uncle's +too wise to tell me to risk the schooner in such a sea." + +"Humph!" grunted the doctor. + +"I'll obey your orders, sir, and sail anywhere," continued the skipper, +frowning very heavily, "but it's my duty to tell you when you are going +wrong." + +"Of course," said the doctor, "and as you give the place such a bad +character, captain, we'll disappoint Rodd and stay away." + +"Right," cried the skipper. Then after drawing a deep breath he looked +fiercely at Rodd, and then glared at the doctor, who opened his eyes a +little, wonderingly. + +"Do you know where you are now?" said the skipper. + +"Well, not exactly, only that we have been on ground rich in objects +such as I wish to collect, and--excuse me, captain--that bottle--your +elbow. I wouldn't have an accident to that for the world." + +"Well, then," continued the skipper, very gruffly, as he dabbed his big +finger down in the middle of the chart, "you are here." + +"Saint Helena," said Rodd, after a quick glance at the chart. + +"Right," grunted the skipper. "Now, Dr Robson, am I to speak out, or +will you send young Mr Rodd here up on deck first?" + +The doctor stared. + +"I see no reason for sending my nephew away," he said coldly. "He and I +have the fullest confidence in one another." + +Rodd, who was standing leaning over the map, moved very slightly, but +somehow his left hand stole on to his uncle's shoulder. + +"Right, then," said the skipper harshly. "It is my duty, Dr Robson, to +tell you that you are in a false position." + +"Then, Captain Chubb, as my navigator in whom I have the most perfect +trust, it is my duty to tell you that you ought to be on deck sailing us +out of it as soon as you can." + +"Come down here on purpose," said the skipper shortly, "and here goes. +Now then, doctor, you are such a busy man, and you are so wrapped up in +your fads about natural history and that sort of thing, that anybody +artful could take you in and cheat you as easy as swallowing a +gooseberry." + +"Well, you have a nice opinion of me, Captain Chubb!" + +"I have, sir--a splendid opinion of you," cried the skipper, "and I'd +say it before all the judges in the land--I mean at home--that there was +never a more straightforward gentleman made than you. I'd do anything +for you." + +"Hear, hear! Bravo, Captain Chubb!" cried Rodd. "What about me?" + +"You, youngster? Well, you aren't half a bad 'un as boys go. But look +here, doctor; time's come for me to speak out. You are a bit too +innocent." + +"Am I? Well, captain, that's better than being a bit too guilty; eh, +Rodd?" + +"A deal, uncle. But what's the matter, captain?" + +"Why, this here, my lad. I can't stand still no longer and see your +uncle being made a cat's-paw of." + +"Cat's-paw, eh, captain?" said the doctor. "Let's see, that means to +fetch the roasted chestnuts out of the fire. This must apply to you, +Master Rodd." + +"To me, uncle?" cried the boy, aghast. + +"Yes; I don't know anybody else whom Captain Chubb looks upon as a +monkey." + +"Nay-y-y! I mean that there French Count." + +"Stop!" cried the doctor sternly. "Mind what you are saying, Captain +Chubb. Count Des Saix is my friend--a gentleman, a nobleman." + +"I dessay he may be at home," said the skipper, meeting Rodd's indignant +eyes, "but he aren't a gentleman, or he wouldn't be making such a tool +of you. Now, don't you put yourself in a fury, doctor, or you'll be +saying words you'll be sorry for arter. A gentleman like you as thinks, +and is scientific too, has no business to go in a passion. That's all +very well for a skipper as has got to manage a lot of awkward sailor +chaps; if he didn't use words sometimes there'd be no getting a ship +along. But you have got to take it cool like a Ann Eliza, and hear it +right through, and then set yourself down and judge according." + +"But look here, Captain Chubb," said the doctor angrily, "I cannot be +silent and let you malign my friend." + +"He aren't your friend, sir; he's only a Frenchman, and though I've done +my duty by him right through, I allers felt as if I couldn't trust him." + +"Why not?" said the doctor hotly. + +"Because he being a natural born enemy of an Englishman, it didn't seem +right that he should pretend to be such a friend of yourn." + +"Why not, sir?" cried the doctor warmly. + +"Now, none of that, doctor. I did warn you about not getting put out. +Don't you call me, _sir_, 'cause I don't like it." + +"Look here, Captain Chubb," cried the doctor, "I am sure you mean well." + +"Thankye, sir; I do." + +"Then why have you taken this prejudice against the Count?" + +"That's a straight question, sir. Now let me ask you one. What's he +doing here?" + +"Upon some kind of research." + +"Not him, sir! That's what he's told you, and it aren't honest. He's +carrying on a game of his own behind you; and the boy's as bad as the +old man." + +"How dare you!" flashed out Rodd. + +"Silence, Rodney!" + +"I can't be silent, uncle. I won't stand here and listen to such an +outrageous charge against those two gentlemen. I don't know what has +come to Captain Chubb, but he ought to be made to apologise before he +leaves this place." + +"Well, he aren't going to be made to, young pepper-caster," growled the +captain. "Honest men don't apologise for telling the truth, even if it +don't taste nice." + +"Look here, Chubb," said the doctor, "we are having too many words. +Let's have a clear understanding about what you think." + +"Right, sir. Let's get to the bottom of it at once. You want an +explanation. It's this now. I have been very suspicious from the +first. What about this 'ere Count and his son? First you knowed of 'em +was as they was prisoners at Dartmoor. Well, it sounds bad for a man to +be a prisoner, but as he was took in war that don't count for much, so +we'll let that go. Next thing is, you runs agen 'em at Havre, cutting +their cable and running for it when Government gives orders for them to +stop. Next thing is, they boards our schooner like a set of pirates, +only we seem too many for them; and then they cackles up a cock-and-bull +story about wanting help, when they see they couldn't seize the +schooner." + +"Look here, Captain Chubb--" began the doctor. + +"Give me my chance, sir, and let me finish, and then have your say. +Help they had, and plenty on it, and I will say that a nicer, more +gentlemanly-tongued chap than the Count I never met, nor had to do with +a pleasanter nor nicer young fellow than his son." + +"Thank you," said Rodd sarcastically. + +"Now, don't you sneer, youngster," growled the captain, "for it aren't +clever, nor it aren't nice. Well, now, doctor, we all went through a +deal all along of these Frenchies, for I don't see how it could have +happened if it hadn't been for them." + +"Why, you took us up the river, captain," cried Rodd indignantly. + +"That's true, sir, but it was to do the best for their leaky brig, and I +made her as good a craft as ever she was; so you needn't chuck that in +my teeth." + +"Be silent, Rodney, and let the captain speak." + +Rodd gave himself a snatch and clenched his fists. + +"Well, sir, to make a long story short, the Count gammoned you into +keeping company with him, and brought you here--here, of all places in +the world--here, to Saint Helena," and he thumped the chart just where +the island was marked. + +"Yes," said the doctor thoughtfully--"here, to the neighbourhood of +Saint Helena; upon a scientific research." + +"Scientific research!" growled the skipper scornfully. "Look here, sir, +don't you be so innocent. You make me wild. What's this 'ere Count? A +Frenchman, aren't he?" + +"Well, plenty of clever Frenchmen have followed science," said the +doctor indignantly. + +"Chinese too, sir, though they can't dress like Christians," cried the +skipper. "But just you tell me this 'ere, sir; who lives at Saint +Helena? Don't old Bony? Him as we shut up like the warlike lunatic he +is, to keep him out of mischief?" + +"Well, yes," said the doctor, much more suavely; "there is something in +that." + +"I should think there is, sir! Haven't I heard you carry on dozens of +times about what a bad 'un he's been to the whole world?" + +"Yes, yes, Chubb; I certainly do entertain strong feelings against that +tyrant and usurper." + +"You do, sir. I've heard you say things at times as have sounded +red-hot." + +"And I'm not ashamed of them, Captain Chubb," cried the doctor warmly. + +"'Shamed on 'em! Not you, sir! They're a honour to you as an English +gentleman. Not much of the innocent in you about that." + +"Thank you, Captain Chubb; thank you," said the doctor. + +"Oh, uncle!" cried Rodd, between his teeth. + +"You let your uncle alone, youngster; I aren't done with him yet. Now +then, doctor, your eyes aren't quite open now, but you are beginning to +peep. Now, just have the goodness to tell me what you are a-doing here +at Saint Helena--a place that a gentleman with your sentiments ought to +have kept clear of like pison." + +"Well," cried the doctor, warming up again, "you know I have accompanied +my friend the Count upon his scientific expedition." + +"Your friend the Count, sir! His scientific expedition!" snarled the +skipper. "Do you call old Bony a scientific expedition?" + +"I don't understand you, captain." + +"Then here you have it, sir, plain. Your friend the Count is a Bony +party, and as the French Government knew what game he was on and tried +to stop him from running out of Havre, when he come upon us and found +out what we were doing, `Here's my man,' he says; `I will just creep +under his cloak and carry on my little game to carry off Bony. No one +will suspect me if I am in good company, and on what he calls scientific +research.' Consekens, here's you, sir, off the island of Saint Helena +in co and company with this 'ere Bony party come to carry off and set +free the man of all others you hate most in the world. Now you +understand what you have come to do." + +"I'll be hanged if I have!" cried the doctor, bringing his fist down +with a tremendous thump upon the table, making one of the bottles leap +up, fall over upon its side, and discharge its stopper at Rodd, who +fielded it cleverly, though the contents--gelatinous infusoria and +spirit of wine--were scattered all over the map. + +"That's spoke like you, sir," cried the skipper; "but you needn't have +spoiled my chart." + +"Confound your chart, man! Here, Rodney, you hear all this? Do you +think it's true?" + +"No, uncle, I can't." + +"Neither can I, sir. I cannot. I will not. You, Captain Chubb, you +mean well, I know, but--Oh, it's outrageous! That I, Paul Robson, a man +of my sentiments, should come to do such a disloyal thing as this-- +this--this--this treachery against my country and my King! Here, +Captain Chubb, are you mad, or--" + +"Drunk, sir? Say it out. I don't mind. It does me good to see you +come to your senses like this. Brayvo, sir! That's the way to take +it." + +"Oh, uncle!" panted Rodd. + +"You let him alone, sir. He's all right," cried the skipper. "I've +stuck the harpoon into him. You give him line, and you'll see we shall +have him in his flurry directly." + +"Stop, man! Where are your proofs?" + +"Yes," cried Rodd, stamping excitedly about the cabin; "where are your +proofs?" + +"Proofs?" said the skipper. "I d'know. Yes, I do. You ask the Count +to his face, and his boy with him, whether what I say aren't true." + +"Yes," cried the doctor. "Go on deck, and take that confounded speaking +trumpet of yours. Hail the brig, and ask the Count to come on board." + +"Yes--with his son!" stormed Rodd. "How can I? They went off this +afternoon on some game or another, and haven't been in sight since." + +"Hah!" said the doctor, fanning himself with one hand, wiping his face +with the other, and then shaking his bandanna silk handkerchief up and +down to try and get cool. "There, I am not going to be in a passion, +Rodney. I am not going to say angry words to you, Chubb, for you +believe all this, while I--I--I can't believe it. The Count is too +grand a gentleman to have made a--a--what you said, of me. But I will +have this matter cleared up, and you will have to apologise to me and +the Count." + +"And to Viscount Morny des Saix," cried Rodd. + +"Yes, my boy; exactly," said the doctor; and then to the skipper--"If +you are wrong!" + +Saying this, he literally stamped out of the cabin. + +"Where are you going, uncle?" cried Rodd, following. + +"Up on deck, my boy," cried the doctor, without turning his head. "I +feel like a furnace, and if I speak any more words they'll be like the +skipper said--red-hot." + +"Well," said the captain, as he stood staring towards the cabin stairs, +"I never see'd the doctor with his monkey up like that afore. Anyhow, +he aren't afraid to trust me with his bag of tricks down here, and +bottles of mixture. But he needn't have spoiled my chart!" + + + +CHAPTER FIFTY ONE. + +THAT'S SAINT HELENA. + +Night, and no sign of the brig. Morning, and the doctor and his nephew +both on deck, with a sail in sight upon the distant horizon, while just +beyond it, looming up, was what seemed to be a dark cloud. + +"There she is!" cried the doctor, glass in hand. "We will soon know the +truth now, Rodd." + +"That, sir?" said a voice close behind them. "That's Saint Helena." + +The doctor started round as though he had been stung, to stare fiercely +in the frank face of Joe Cross, who looked rather thin and +hollow-cheeked, but had declared himself well enough to take the morning +watch. + +"It is, sir," said the man, who took the doctor's angry stare for a look +of doubt. "That's right enough, though it don't look like an island. +It's the big rock where they've got Bony shut up." + +"Bah!" snapped the doctor, and he turned on his heel and walked away. + +"Turned out of his bunk wrong side up'ards, sir?" asked the man, with a +smile. + +"Pah!" ejaculated Rodd, and he stamped off in the other direction. + +"Old 'un's been giving it to him, I suppose," said Joe to himself. "Oh, +I know; he'd been upsetting that bottle of fish soup as the skipper +fetched me down to swab up last night--that as went all over the +skipper's chart. Pore young chap! I'll go and smooth him down." + +"What do you want?" cried Rodd angrily. + +"Oh, nothing, sir. I only wanted to say I'm sorry I put your uncle out +about the island. I'm a bit deaf in one ear since I got hurt over that +fight, and I mis-underconstumbled him. He said, `There she is,' and I +thought he was talking about Bony's island, and he meant the brig." + +"Well, suppose he did? There she is." + +"Nay, sir; you take another look. That's a three-master, sir. Don't +you see?" + +"Oh yes, I see now, Joe," said Rodd, who was rather ashamed of his +petulance to the man. "She was end on to us, and I didn't see the +mizzen. Why, she's in full sail!" + +"Yes, sir, a regular crowd of canvas, topgallants and stunsles all up, +and if I haven't forgotten all about a man-of-war, that's what she is, +as we used to say, by the cut of her jib, which is a very sensible +remark, sir, as from here her jib's quite out of sight." + +The doctor kept on deck till breakfast-time, sweeping the horizon with +his glass, while the skipper walked up and down with his long +mahogany-covered glass tucked under his left arm, and his hands very +deep down in his pockets, while his shoulders were hitched up to his +ears. + +Then breakfast, with everything hot except the conduct of the occupants +of the cabin. This was almost icy, and hardly a word was spoken. + +Up on deck again, with the schooner careening over to the pleasant +breeze, but no sign of the brig; but the three-masted vessel was +overhauling them fast, and before long a gun said, Heave to, in the very +emphatic monosyllable so well understood in the Royal Navy. + +The skipper gave a glance at Uncle Paul with one eye, and that morning +it seemed if as he had been suddenly afflicted with a cast, for the +other eye turned outward and looked at Rodd. + +Then he gave the order to the man at the wheel, who with a few turns of +the spokes ran the swift little vessel well up into the wind, her sails +began to flap, and she quietly settled down into a gentle rock upon the +beautifully rippled heaving sea. Then time went on, with the man-of-war +bearing down upon them rapidly, while the doctor stood scowling angrily +at the rock which had so much to do with the fate of nations standing +out more clearly in the sunlit air. + +In due time a boat full of men was swung down from the davits of the +cruiser, the oars dipped, and she came skimming along with a steady +pull, and every stroke pulled clean and with hardly a splash, till she +came alongside, when, to the delight of Rodd, there in the stern-sheets +were the same officer and middy who had overhauled them off the African +coast. + +Rodd was all eagerness, and advanced ready to grasp hands with the +reefer, but to his great surprise everything was coldly stern and +formal. Two marines followed the officers on board, and the skipper, +doctor, and Rodd were ordered down into the boat as prisoners, while a +prize crew under the command of the middy, who looked more important +than he did upon his first visit to the schooner, and stared at Rodd as +if he had never seen him before, was left on board. + +Uncle Paul spoke to the lieutenant, but his words were received almost +in silence, while no explanation being forthcoming, he sat still and +frowned. + +The sloop of war, their old friend, was soon reached, and the prisoners +were marched up to the quarter-deck where the captain stood waiting for +them, scanning them sternly before beginning to question the skipper as +to the name of the schooner and their object in those waters. + +Questions were answered and explanations given in Captain Chubb's most +blunt and straightforward way, before the captain turned his searching +eyes upon Uncle Paul. + +"Then you are Dr Robson, sir?" he said. + +"Yes. May I ask--" + +"You are here carrying out a scientific research?" + +"Yes." + +"In company with your consort, Count Des Saix, of the French brig +_Dagobert_?" + +"That's quite right, sir; but may I ask--" + +"Why you are my prisoners? Certainly. But I will shorten matters by +telling you that your scientific research was a plot to carry off the +prisoner of the British Government, the ex-emperor Napoleon Bonaparte." + +"No, sir, I'll be hanged if it was!" cried the doctor. + +"Which plot has completely failed," added the captain. "As I have said, +sir, you are my prisoner." + +"And what about Captain Chubb, here, and my nephew?" + +"They are prisoners too, of course." + +"But my schooner--my pleasure yacht?" said the doctor. + +The captain slightly shrugged his shoulders, as he smiled-- + +"That will be well taken care of, sir, you may depend." + +------------------------------------------------------------------------ + +"Ah, Rodd, my boy," said the doctor, shortly afterwards, "you are +getting plenty of adventures; but you needn't be uncomfortable. This +will all be cleared up. Well, Chubb, I am afraid you were right; at any +rate the King's officer seems to be quite of your opinion." + +"Yes, sir, but wait a bit," said the captain. "I suppose they'll get us +close in, and I shouldn't be at all surprised if we find, when we get to +the other side of the island, that they've got the brig snug in shelter +there." + +"What, captured too?" cried Rodd excitedly. + +"Yes, sir. This sloop of war is kept here to cruise about the island +and keep strangers off. That's what she's for." + + + +CHAPTER FIFTY TWO. + +I HAVE SINNED--FORGIVE. + +That same afternoon the sloop of war was lying close inshore, with the +brig and schooner near at hand, when a barge put off from the +landing-place bearing the Governor and other officials, who were +received at the gangway of the sloop with the customary salute, and +shortly afterwards a little informal court was held, with the prisoners +present, while the First Lieutenant of the sloop gave evidence to the +effect that just after dark he had observed, from the anchorage where +the sloop lay, a light, evidently intended for a signal, exhibited in a +peculiar way from the masthead of some vessel. + +He had noticed the brig now lying at anchor some distance in the offing +early in the evening, but an adverse wind had prevented the sloop from +going out. This light appeared at intervals during the next two hours, +and on reporting the matter to the captain it was considered +sufficiently suspicious for the brig from which it evidently came to be +overhauled. This was done during the night; the prisoners brought in; +and they were here to give an account of themselves. + +Upon being asked if there was any difficulty in overhauling and seizing +the brig, which appeared to be well manned and armed, the lieutenant +smiled and said no, for the simple ruse of answering the brig's signal +by the exhibition of lights in a similar way brought her close inshore, +and then in the darkness the rest was easy, for it fell perfectly calm, +and the sudden advance in the darkness of three well-armed boats made +resistance vain. + +"They offered no resistance, then?" asked the Governor. + +"Oh yes," was the reply; "a very brave resistance; but they were +overpowered by numbers and brought in." + +As this evidence was given the Count and his son stood together, the +former looking calm and dignified, the latter defiant, and when asked +what defence he had to make for his clandestine approach to a place +where it must have been well-known to him landing could be only allowed +by the special permission of the Governor, and told that it was +perfectly evident his coming could have but one intent, to aid in the +escape of the prisoner who had been so long in the island--the Count +spoke out at once bravely and earnestly in the defence of those who were +there standing as fellow-prisoners. + +He wished, he said, to exonerate the English doctor and the captain of +the schooner from all participation in his attempt. They had met on the +high seas quite by accident, and finding how carefully the prison of his +august master was watched, he had led the doctor into the belief that he +too was engaged upon a scientific expedition. + +Just then the eyes of the two lads met, and as Rodd darted an angry +indignant look at Morny, the latter made a deprecating gesture, while he +seemed to say, Be merciful; you do not know all. + +The Count went on, taking the whole blame of the proceedings upon +himself, and asking for mercy for his son, who had acted entirely under +his orders and had been perfectly obedient, as a son should be. As he +spoke these words he looked hard at Rodd, and then at his uncle, who +stood frowning there. + +"I failed in my enterprise," continued the Count, "for I was growing +desperate at the difficulties which surrounded me. Certain signals +should have answered mine, and the lights which were shown from the +direction of the shore were not exactly those which I anticipated. But, +as I have said, I was growing desperate at my want of success, and in +the hope that after all these signals might mean that my august master +would be brought off in a fishing-boat, I risked all and allowed myself +to be deluded, as it were, into what proved to be a trap. I have no +more to say, gentlemen, save this, that I ask no mercy for myself. +Whatever the English laws award to one who has acted as I have done, I +accept. But my son, as I have said, was entirely under my orders, and +as for my crew, they have only been my faithful servants, and tried to +carry out my will. England must be too brave to wish to punish such as +these. As to the doctor, his nephew, and the crew of the schooner, it +would be absurd for England after my explanation to say more to them +than `Go in peace.'" + +There was perfect silence for a minute or so, and then the Governor, one +of his staff, an officer of foot who was the commander of the military +force stationed in the island, and the captain of the sloop, held a +short consultation together, after which the officers drew back into +their places and left the Governor to speak. + +"Dr Robson," he said, "Captain Ellison, in command of the sloop of war, +has told me of his previous meeting with you at the mouth of one of the +West African rivers, and the way in which your vessel was fitted out, +and of the state of your papers. Everything, in fact, goes to prove the +perfect truth of your story and the fact of your ignorance of the plan +for the escape of the prisoner. I can offer you no apology for your +being made prisoner and brought here, for I think that due consideration +will prove to you that you were somewhat imprudent in your action and +choice of friend. You and yours, sir, are perfectly at liberty to leave +the island at once. As for you, Count Des Saix," he continued, "as the +Governor of this island I have certain duties to perform, and after such +an important and daring attempt as yours, I must tell you that in spite +of peculiar circumstances which I will refer to shortly, this matter +cannot end here. It is an affair of diplomacy in which others are +concerned as well as England. For the present you and your people must +consider yourselves prisoners pending the arrival of the dispatches that +I must send to the British Government. Yours, sir, was a daring and +extremely hazardous plot, designed in extravagance and I may say in +ignorance of the impossibility of its execution. The prisoner was too +closely guarded and watched, and, as you have seen, it was quite +impossible for your vessel to approach this island without being seized. +I gather that you have been a naval officer in the service of the late +Government of France, and I presume that it was from a feeling of +devotion to the Emperor Napoleon--I should say, our prisoner here--that +you and your friends devoted yourselves to this task, which has proved +so signal a failure. Sir, I can only admire your act and the devotion +of the followers of the late Emperor." + +"Sir, to us," cried the Count, "your way of speaking of our august +master is little better than an insult. With us there is no late +Emperor; he is still the ruler of the French Empire, our august master +while he lives." + +"Sir," said the Governor, slowly and gravely, "mine is the painful duty +to announce to you that my words were well chosen and correct, that your +designs were as hopeless as they were vain; the late Emperor Napoleon +died two nights since." + +The Count gave a violent start, gazing wildly in the Governor's eyes, as +if asking whether his words were true. Then turning to his son he took +off his cap and stood in silence with his head bowed down, before saying +in a low broken voice that reached no farther than the ears of Uncle +Paul and Rodd-- + +"Morny, my son, we were faithful to the end, even though we failed. Our +august master is free at last. But our country lives, and in the future +there is always for us _la France_." + +There were several meetings between Uncle Paul, Rodd, and the +prisoners--if prisoners they could be deemed, for their captivity was of +the easiest kind--before the schooner set sail for England and home, and +during one of these, when all seemed once more the best of friends, the +doctor was heard to say-- + +"Yes, of course, I forgive him now, and you know, Des Saix, since that +sort of a trial we had I have never said one word of reproach. I was +not going to trample on a fallen man. But, you know, all that business, +to use a coarse old English expression, sticks in my gizzard. It was +not honourable, nor gentlemanly; I won't add noble. I don't think you +ought to have done it to one who trusted you and helped you as I did. +Now, look here; do you think it was a good example to set your son?" + +"My friend," said the Count humbly--"May I still call you my friend?" + +"As long as you live, sir!" cried the doctor warmly. + +"Then I say to you, No; it was dishonourable, treacherous, and vile. +But my sword was devoted to the service of my dead master, my life was +his, and I was ready to give all to save him from his unhappy fate. Can +I say more than this: I have sinned. Forgive." + +As matters turned out it was many, many months, owing to an accident to +the schooner and the delays in re-fitting at Las Palmas, and long stays +made in the Mediterranean--the entrance to which could not be passed +without a cruise within--before the _Maid of Salcombe_ approached the +English coast, and, oddly enough, once more Captain Chubb was driven to +take refuge for a few hours at Havre-de-Grace, where one of the first +things to be noticed was the familiar brig. + +Inquiries followed at last, and Rodd and his uncle learned that the +vessel had been lying there for some time while her captain, the Count, +and his son were at Paris. + +No: the officer in charge of the brig could give no information about +their residence in Paris, but he had heard that they were not going to +sail in the brig again, as they were about being appointed to a large +ship in the King's Navy. + +"Humph, Rodd!" said the doctor. "This sounds like good news." + +"Yes, uncle, but we must try and see them again." + +"Would you like to?" + +"Of course!" cried Rodd warmly. "For a good long talk about old days." + +"Perhaps," said the doctor, "they may hear of our return, and may try to +see us." + +"And if they do, uncle?" + +"Well," said the doctor, smiling, "they know our address." + +THE END. + + + + + + +End of Project Gutenberg's The Ocean Cat's Paw, by George Manville Fenn + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE OCEAN CAT'S PAW *** + +***** This file should be named 21358.txt or 21358.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + http://www.gutenberg.org/2/1/3/5/21358/ + +Produced by Nick Hodson of London, England + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +http://gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at http://www.pglaf.org. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at +http://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at http://pglaf.org + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit http://pglaf.org + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. +To donate, please visit: http://pglaf.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + http://www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. |